JP7224660B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and a game effect is produced according to the result of the determination. (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, there is a game machine in which a game is played by switching the aim between the first start opening and the second start opening.

JP 2019-033816 A

If the game machine does not allow the game ball to enter the starting hole according to the game state or the like, it may result in a disadvantage for the player and reduce the interest in the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of games.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the start condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and based on the determination, the first display means ( When the fluctuation display of the symbols (performance symbols 70a) executed on the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61) becomes a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is played. In a game machine (1) that can be executed, it has a normal game state as a game state and a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and first winning means (first Based on the first start condition established by winning the game ball to the winning opening 45), or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47) , the second display means (first image display device 70) different from the first display means can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (the effect symbol 70a), and the first starting condition is satisfied in the specific game state. When it is established, a specific variable display (for example, at least one of the effect symbol 70a or the special effect symbol TZ is variably displayed without displaying or operating the pending icon from the start to the end of the variable display) can be executed, In the specific variation display, while it is possible to limit the display of the first reserved memory (for example, a reserved icon) based on the undetermined starting condition, the second state different from the first reserved memory based on the undetermined starting condition 2 reserved memory (for example, reserved numbers) can be displayed, and when the first starting condition is satisfied in the normal game state, the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are displayed without executing the specific variable display. The variable performance that displays the reserved memory and becomes a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the normal game state rather than the variable performance that becomes a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state. However, it is characterized in that the number of pattern change performance patterns for changing the display size of the performance pattern is large .

According to the present invention, the player's interest can be improved.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting opening detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting production|presentation processing in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system production|presentation process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the icon change production|presentation determination process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change scenario determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in a production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table for pending icons; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1 step change pattern determination table for the said icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-stage change pattern determination table for the said icon. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the icon change pattern determination table for power failure. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the occurrence frequency of the pending icon display mode and the change effect generation timing, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect generation timing. (c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the occurrence frequency of the change effect type and the change effect generation timing, and (d) is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). FIG. 10 shows. It is a figure which shows the continuous announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an advance notice scenario determination table; It is a figure which shows the continuation notice production|presentation execution process in an production|presentation control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an alternative notice pattern determination table; FIG. It is a figure which shows the lamp change production|presentation execution process in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the jackpot announcement production|presentation determination processing in an production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a big-hit advance notice determination table. It is a figure which shows the main process in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing in an integrated control part. It is a figure which shows the V blank interrupt processing in an integrated control part. It is a timing chart 1 of the change effect at the time of winning. Fig. 2 is a timing chart 2 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the change production|presentation at the time of winning. 1 is a timing chart 1 of a normal change pattern 01; FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of normal change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of normal change pattern 01; 1 is a timing chart 1 of a character effect change pattern 01; FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of character effect change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the character action change pattern 01; FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 42; It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the pattern action change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 46; It is a timing chart when a variable effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation which a variable production|presentation is started from a customer waiting state. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 49; It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during the variable production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the variable effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation which increases immediately after the number of reservations decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases during specific reach production. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased during the specific reach effect. It is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a diagram showing an effect example in which the number of pending is increased or decreased before and after the end of the specific game state. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 58; It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/driving control part. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing origin return processing in a lamp/drive control unit; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing initial operation processing in a lamp/drive control unit; It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming power supply only to the main control board after stopping; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in which only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted; It is a figure which shows the modification when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the icon change effect and the lamp change effect are restarted after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 84; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 86; It is a figure which shows a specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial process in a lamp/driving control part. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows a specific example in case there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power-on. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no restoration abnormality in various accessories after power restoration; It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 2nd movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists recovery abnormality in a 1st movable member after a power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a specific example when there exists return abnormality in a production|presentation button after power supply restoration. It is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is during the variable display of special symbols and with reserved storage. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 1 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 1 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 2 to 4 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 2 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 2 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 3 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 3 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 4 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 4 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 5 to 7 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 5 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 5 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 6 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 6 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect example in specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 10 to 12 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 10 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 11 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 12 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 15 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 13 to 15 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 13 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of effect in Concrete Example 14 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 15 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 16 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 16 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 18 when a command cannot be received normally; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of effect in specific example 18 when a command cannot be received normally; It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 1 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the test|inspection mode 2 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the test|inspection mode 3 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the test|inspection mode 4 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 5 of a main control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 1 of image change effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect of specific example 1 of an image change effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 2 of image change effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a rendering of a specific example 2 of image change rendering; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 3 of image change effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a rendering of a specific example 3 of image change rendering; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 4 of image change effect; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a rendering of specific example 4 of image change rendering; It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of image change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 1 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation when conditions are not met in a production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 2 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 3 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of specific example 4 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 5 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 6 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 7 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 8 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 9 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 10 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 11 when conditions are not met in the production|presentation control part. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of production; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of production; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the production|presentation by a color effect. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of zone production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of change notification sound production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a pending|holding icon change production. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a ramp change production. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the operation|movement production|presentation of a 1st movable member. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the production example 1; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a light-guide plate display effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the normal game state in the specific example 2 of production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the normal game state of the specific example 2 of production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific game state in the production|presentation example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific game state of the specific example 2 of production|presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of production; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 of production; It is a figure which shows the relationship of fluctuation time. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of preparation operation|movement. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of stop operation|movement. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a fluctuation|variation stop pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a fluctuation start pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 of production; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the mode change production|presentation of the production|presentation design. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the display size change production|presentation of the production|presentation design. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the display size change production|presentation of reach production|presentation. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 5 of effect; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a specific example 5 of production; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a specific example 6 of production; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of information production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of vibration production|presentation. 1 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine according to this embodiment; FIG. It is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a game control device provided in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a rear view which shows the state which assembled|attached each unit to the base frame. FIG. 198 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 197; It is explanatory drawing of various random numbers acquired in the main control board of a pachinko machine. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing in a main control board; 4 is a flowchart showing initial setting processing of the main control board; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by a CPU of a main control board; It is the flowchart which showed an example of the starting opening SW process which CPU of a main control board performs. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of gate detection SW processing executed by the CPU of the control board; It is the flowchart which showed an example of the special design process which CPU of a main-control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the customer waiting setting process which CPU of a main control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the special game determination process which CPU of a main control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the variation pattern selection process which CPU of a main control board performs. It is the figure which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern table. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the process during stop which CPU of a main control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the auxiliary|assistant design process which CPU of a main-control board performs. It is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of the number of rounds/operation pattern; It is the flowchart which showed an example of the game state setting process which CPU of a main control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the 2nd starting opening opening process which CPU of a main control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the timer interrupt processing which CPU of a production|presentation control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the command reception process which CPU of a production|presentation control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the production|presentation selection process which CPU of a production|presentation control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the processing during the end of fluctuation production|presentation which CPU of an production|presentation control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the hit production|presentation selection process which CPU of an production|presentation control board performs. It is the flowchart which showed an example of the ending production|presentation selection process which CPU of a production|presentation control board performs. It is a figure explaining the main board|substrate protection case which concerns on an example of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a main board protection case including a pedestal; It is a side view which shows the aspect at the time of attaching a main board|substrate protection case to a base. It is a figure explaining the main board|substrate protection case which concerns on the other example of this embodiment. 226 is a rear perspective view of the main board protective case of FIG. 225; FIG. It is a figure explaining the state which removed the main board|substrate protection case of FIG. 225 from the base. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification which forms an identification mark in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification which forms an identification mark in a main board|substrate case. It is a figure which shows the modification of a main board|substrate case. It is the figure which looked at the seal|sticker part and main ROM from the rear diagonal upper direction. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a main-control board. It is the figure which showed the structure of the printed circuit board used for a main control board. FIG. 237 is a diagram showing a main board case that accommodates the main control board shown in FIGS. 235 and 236; FIG. 217 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal of the main board case of FIG. 216; FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a procedure for assembling a cutting member, an unsealing seal, and a cap to the sealing base, centering on the protruding piece of the upper case piece. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing a state immediately before the cutting member, the unsealing seal, and the cap are assembled to the sealing base portion 310; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which an unsealing prohibition seal is adhered to the sealing base; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which a cap is attached to the unsealing prohibition seal; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cap is detached and the unsealing prohibition seal is broken; FIG. 4 is a surface view and a partially enlarged view of an example of an unsealable seal. It is a figure which shows the components layout of the payout control board in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of a payout control board protection case. It is an exploded perspective view of a payout control board case. It is an exploded perspective view of a payout control board case. 4 is a diagram for explaining the structure of an image control board; FIG. It is the figure which showed the structure of the printed circuit board used for an image control board. It is the figure which expanded and showed a part of printed wiring board used for an image control board. It is a front view explaining the structure of a production|presentation control board protection case. It is an exploded perspective view of a production control board case. It is an exploded perspective view of a production control board case. It is a figure for demonstrating the other structure of the main control board which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 256 is a diagram showing the main board case of the present embodiment in which the main control board explained in FIG. 255 is housed. FIG. 256 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 255; It is a figure explaining another structure of the main control board which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 259 is a front view of the main board case of the present embodiment in which the main control board described in FIG. 258 is accommodated; FIG. 260 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 259; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when RWM is cleared; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section when the settings are changed when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section when the settings are changed when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when confirming settings in a case where the gaming machine includes the performance display unit that also serves as the setting display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section.

(First embodiment)
A first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a game machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 having a game area 5a in which game balls flow down is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism 6 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. It is Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, and various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. maintenance can be performed.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via a second hinge mechanism 7 at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. there is Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) opening in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or an acrylic plate) is formed so as to cover the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are a sound output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game ball put out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, a lower plate 12 for receiving and storing game balls that have flowed into an overflow ball flow path described later without being able to enter the upper plate 11, and game balls. A firing operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations in the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval therebetween, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become. A plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the light irradiation direction and emission color of each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a payout abnormality (to be described later) occurs.

The upper plate 11 has a bottom surface of a game ball storage portion 11a which is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the shooting operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. . When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various productions described later. They are arranged side by side.

The production button device 16 includes a production button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a decision operation (operation input), a production button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation to the production button 17, and a production button. A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 2) is provided for driving the game machine 17 so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG.

The effect button 17 can perform effect light emission by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. Vertical movement between a standby position (original position) positioned below and a production position positioned above by the driving force of a button drive motor, which is a part of the device 17b, and/or the button drive device 17b It is possible to perform a production action by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode by the driving force of the button vibration motor that is a part of the button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position. be.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can be operated such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a ( 2) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information to the gaming machine 1. FIG.

In addition, a lending/returning operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11 for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing the remaining money. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) installed in the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to lend the game balls. is performed, and when a return button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed for receiving game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. - 特許庁In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the lower tray 12 is full of game balls is provided in the middle of the overflowing ball flow path. is detected, the game ball payout by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The shooting operation device 13 includes a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a shooting handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and a touch sensor for detecting that the player's hand touches the shooting handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 2), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emission for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15, the ball sending solenoid 11b is activated to send game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes the front portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. It is By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined manner.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a shooting device 26 for shooting game balls toward the game area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape having an open front at substantially the center near the upper portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is capable of accommodating the game board 5 from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting portion 25 , and various devices provided on the back side of the game board 5 are connected to the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Come on.

The shooting device 26 includes a hitting member 28 for shooting a game ball, a shooting solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the hitting member 28, and an upward movement from the hitting member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined shooting rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at the shooting position which is the inclined lower end of the shooting rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot toward the game area 5a by the action of the hitting member 28. - 特許庁

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25 so that the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4 . When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame is rotated. 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 positioned outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A shot ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball shot by the shooting device 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. In addition, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a for guiding the game balls that have flowed down to outside the game area (recovery part of the game board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decoration frame 40, which is called a center case, is provided to restrict entry of game balls into the inside, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decoration frame 40. - 特許庁A warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce game balls flowing down the game area 5 a into the decorative frame 40 . A stage portion 42 is provided for rolling a game ball introduced into the interior of the frame 40 and causing it to flow downward.

In the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 in which a game ball can always win a prize (entering a ball) are provided at intervals. 43 is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). It is put out to the upper tray 11 as a ball.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a general pattern gate 44 (normal pattern start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball that has passed through this general pattern gate 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a winning lottery (assisting game determination) of normal symbols is performed. It should be noted that the winning lottery of normal symbols will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a and directly under the stage portion 42, there is provided a first start port 45 (special figure start region) in which the game ball can always win a prize (enter a ball), and this first start port 45 When a winning (entering) game ball is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are discharged from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It is to be paid out on 11th. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) for a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is opened from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that a winning lottery with a normal symbol is won). A variable starting portion 46 is provided which is converted to an open state (special mode) that allows or facilitates winning (entering a ball).

The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting region) in which a game ball can win (entering a ball), and a second A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 that changes (variable) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid for opening and closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2) are provided. And, when the second starting port 47 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is open, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easier.

In addition, when the game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It is designed to be dispensed onto the upper tray 11 . In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

Between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46, there is provided a prize winning port lamp NR (not shown) for causing the periphery of the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform lighting effects by emitting light from a board lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-hand normal pattern gate 44, a closed state in which a game ball cannot win a prize (enter a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a special symbol jackpot lottery) A variable winning portion 49 is provided which is converted from (basic mode) to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can win (enter a ball).

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can win (enter a ball), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (FIG. 2), an opening/closing member 51 that converts (variable) the large winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51 are provided. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the winning of the game ball (ball ) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are released from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. 11 will be paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A game ball detected by the second starting hole detection switch 47a and the big winning hole detection switch 50a, and a game ball that has flowed into the out hole 39 are received and gathered while flowing down. An out ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion of the ball flow path. A game ball flowing down this out ball flow path and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island facility) from a discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1. - 特許庁

Outside the game area 5a, there are a first special symbol display device 60, a second special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a first special symbol reservation display device 63, a second special symbol reservation display device 64, as well as. Ordinary pattern holding display 65, round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) to be described later is executed, and jackpot game (special game) or time saving game state Inside, a right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 2) prompting the shooting of the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a, and a state confirmation display indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. A main information display 59 is provided comprising a device 68 (see FIG. 2).

Also, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). The probability of winning a jackpot (1/285 to 1/300) and set values (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed on the winning probability display sticker. It should be noted that the sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is just an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. FIG.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery with the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is used to display (notify) the result of the second special symbol jackpot lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is a variable display device, and the normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the normal symbol winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball wins (enters) the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot lottery with the first special symbol is obtained by acquiring a random number for judging a big hit (judgment information) when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the obtained random number for judging a big hit and the jackpot. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing with the determination value. When the first special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the first special symbol display device 60 displays the first special symbol in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

The second special symbol jackpot lottery is obtained by acquiring a jackpot judgment random number value (judgment information) when a game ball enters the second start port 47, and acquiring the jackpot judgment random number value and the jackpot. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing with the determination value. It should be noted that when the second special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. will be That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding display devices blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (big win mode, losing mode) indicating the result of each big win lottery.

It should be noted that the "jackpot" in the present embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination), or the second special symbol jackpot lottery (special game determination), the jackpot game (special game) It refers to the state in which the right to execute has been acquired. The "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning port 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before reaching the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9) wins (enters a ball), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous to the player who can easily win prize balls. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to generate any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage for the player, which will be described later in detail.

The winning lottery of the normal pattern is obtained by acquiring a random number value for hitting judgment when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for judgment with the hit judgment value to see if it is a "win". It corresponds to determining whether or not When the winning lottery for the normal symbols is performed, the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the lottery. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the result of the lottery.

Incidentally, the normal symbol display device 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of normal symbols. Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the LED lights up in a mode (hitting mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In the present embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is obtained in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 even before reaching the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win a prize (entering a ball), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. In other words, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition of the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage for the player are provided, which will be described later in detail.

The first special symbol holding display device 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is a jackpot lottery of the first special symbol that is stored when the game ball wins (enters) the first starting port 45 (first special symbol It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Although the maximum number of first reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display device 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the second special symbol jackpot lottery (the second special symbol) is stored when the game ball wins (enters) the second start port 47. It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved memory) for performing variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second reserved memories. Although the maximum number of second reserved memories is four, the number may be less or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display device 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is the right for performing a normal symbol winning lottery (normal symbol fluctuation display) that is stored when a game ball wins (passes) the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (normal pattern reserved memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of normal pattern reserved memory. In addition, although the general pattern reservation memory is designed to be stored up to four at maximum, it may be less than or more than four.

Note that the first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, when a jackpot lottery with a special pattern is won, "7" is stopped and displayed, and when it is lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the variable display of special symbols, the result of stopping the previous variable display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the variable display starts, the LED is turned off. It becomes easy to grasp that it has been started.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off when the jackpot game ends. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has 16 rounds, all the LEDs light up.

The right-handed indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state, the right-handed player urges to shoot the game ball toward the right gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting). It is for displaying a beating display, and the LED lights up during a big win state (special game state) and a time saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. , the LED starts lighting, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the state confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily check whether it is set to

It should be noted that the installation position of the state confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1 .

In the present embodiment, the same display mode (lighting display) is displayed regardless of whether the mode is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. You can For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed. When the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 and any one of the second game information display devices 69 are illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status Only the confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

In the lower right part inside the game area 5a, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 , a sub-normal figure holding display 86, and a sub-right-handed display 87 that prompts to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with an indicator such as the status confirmation indicator 68 described above, which indicates that a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The first sub-variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery with the first special symbol, and the second sub-variation display 82 displays the result of the jackpot lottery with the second special symbol. They are for (notifying), and are each composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special pattern is started, the LED flashes (variable display) at a predetermined interval, and when the corresponding special pattern is stopped and displayed, the result of the jackpot lottery (lights up in the case of a big hit, loses) in the case of ) is displayed as stopped.

In addition, in the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82, it blinks and stops while the special symbols are being varied, so that only whether or not the special symbols are being varied is displayed. It may be turned on or off when displayed.

The first sub-reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories, and the second sub-reservation display 84 is for displaying the number of second reservation memories. It consists of two LEDs. When the number of reserved memories is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved memories is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, and the number of reserved memories is "2". When , the left and right LEDs light up, when the number of reserved memories is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reserved memories is "4", the left and right LEDs blink. .

The sub normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the LED blinks (variable display) at predetermined intervals. Then, when the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lighting up in the case of winning, light-out in the case of losing) is stop-displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display device 85, so that only whether or not the normal pattern is being displayed fluctuating can be grasped, it blinks during the normal pattern fluctuation display, and when it is stopped, it lights up or turns off. may

The sub-normal pattern reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of normal pattern reservation storages, and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, when the number of normal pattern reservation memory is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of normal pattern reservation memory is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, and the normal pattern reservation When the memory number is "2", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the normal figure reservation memory number is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made up of a liquid crystal display is provided in the inner part of the production space 40a, and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) in the lower part of the production space 40a. , a second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) consisting of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is provided. is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the production space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the effect pattern executed during the variable display of the special symbol There is a variable production with a variable display of 70a.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left area, a central area, and a right area. The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed by scrolling the production pattern 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment).

In addition, the effect pattern 70a is composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the variable display of special patterns executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61 is performed. The variable display of the production pattern 70a is performed corresponding to (synchronization with). That is, the variable display of the production design 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special design, the performance design 70a is temporarily stopped (swing display) before the stop of the variable display of the special design, and the special design is changed. In response to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is stopped (still displayed). Incidentally, as the production pattern 70a, in addition to the patterns showing numbers, patterns showing alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided.

Note that the "temporary stop display" means that the performance symbol 70a shakes slightly or deforms slightly to give the player the impression that the performance symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). not).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a stops for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (losing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same production pattern such as "777" or a combination of production patterns with regularity such as "357", and the losing mode is other aspects. be. In addition, the aspect of the variable display of the production pattern 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolled in the horizontal direction, or may be rotated (rotated) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the production pattern 70a, various production images such as a reach production, a background image, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second display according to the result of the big winning lottery. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectation for the execution of the big win (special game) (hereinafter referred to as "big win expectation") is heightened. there is

Here, the "ready-to-win effect" means that a jackpot game is executed for the player such that a part of the combinations of the effect patterns 70a that inform the big win are temporarily stopped and the other effect patterns 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that makes you expect that. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a (jackpot result mode) for notifying a big hit, two performance symbols 70a are set in the left and right regions. 7" is temporarily stopped, and the remaining production pattern 70a is changing in the central area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are five types of ready-to-win effects, ie, "normal ready-to-win effects", "SP ready-to-win effects", "SPSP ready-to-win effects", and "full-rotation ready-to-win effects".

"Normal reach effect" is a state in which the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect pattern 70a is displayed in the central area. It is a ready-to-win production that is executed in a state in which a variable ready-to-win state is formed.

"SP ready-to-win production" is executed after the normal ready-to-win production, and the production pattern 70a in the state of forming the ready-to-win state is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the production effect is higher than the normal ready-to-win production (high expectation of winning big) ) It is a reach effect in which a movie (video, animation, etc.) flows.

“SPSP reach production” is executed after normal reach production or SP reach production, and a movie (movie, animation, etc.) with a higher production effect (higher expectations for a big hit) than normal reach production or SP reach production. It's about performance.

The “all-rotation ready-to-win effect” is a ready-to-win effect that fluctuates at a low speed in a state in which all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for reporting a big win are complete. In the present embodiment, it is a ready-to-win effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot lottery.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the ready-to-win effect is higher in the order of normal ready-to-win effect<SP ready-to-win effect<SPSP ready-to-win effect<all-rotation ready-to-win effect (jackpot confirmed).

In addition, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the number of first special symbol reserved (U1), which is the number of the current first reserved memory, is displayed. 1st pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the number of second pending icons corresponding to the second special symbol pending number (U2) which is the number of the current second pending storage Then, the icon display area 70C is formed for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The display portions 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1). That is, the number of first reserved icons is also increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the first special symbol reserved number (U1).

Specifically, the first display portion 70B1 displays the first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70B2 displays 2 The first reserved icon H12 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is displayed in the third display section 70B3, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the third display. A first reserved icon H13 indicating the first reserved memory is displayed, and a first reserved icon H14 indicating the first reserved memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display portion 70B4. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closer to the icon display area 70C. The second reserved icons corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) are displayed on the display portions 70D1 to 70D4. That is, the number of second reserved icons is increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the second special symbol reserved number (U2).

Specifically, the first display portion 70D1 displays the second pending icon H21 indicating the second pending memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display portion 70D2 displays two The second holding icon H22 indicating the second holding memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third in the third display section 70D3. A second suspended icon H23 indicating a second suspended memory is displayed, and a second suspended icon H24 indicating a second suspended memory in which the fourth display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display portion 70D4. be done. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "first special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as "first reserved number" and the "second special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as "second reserved number".

In the icon display area 70C, the first pending icon or the second When the second pending icon displayed in the first display portion 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and when the variable display of the special symbol (the effect symbol 70a) ends. The icon TH disappears (deletes). In addition, the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first reserved icon", the "second reserved icon", and the "relevant icon" may be collectively referred to as "icons".

The first movable member 73 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. It is vertically moved between a standby position (origin position) located above and a production position located below by the driving force of the first movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform a performance action by moving to , and the fact that it is at the origin position is detected by a first position detection sensor (not shown).

The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. By the driving force of the second movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2), the position is moved between the standby position (origin position) located on the upper right side and the production position located on the lower left side. It is possible to perform a performance action by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the rendering positions of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate simultaneously. By not doing so, they do not conflict with each other.

In addition, if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, after one movable member moves to the rendering position, it returns to a position that does not overlap with the rendering position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the performance position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a game ball payout device 100 for putting out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island facilities, etc. A main control device 110A (not shown) containing a game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores game balls to be supplied and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game. , a payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 for controlling the game ball payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and a performance control command from the main control board 110 A production control device 130A (not shown) incorporating a production control board 130 for controlling production accordingly, and a power supply device 160A (not shown) incorporating a power supply board 160 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices, A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 2) is provided for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside of the gaming machine.

The main control unit 110A includes a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted, a transparent resin board case for housing the main control board 110, and a board case regulating the opening of the board case. A sealing seal 104 and a transparent resin seal cover member 105 attached to the substrate case so as to cover the sealing seal 104 are provided.

On the surface side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a stage of clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or the degree of advantage of the game (game RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, and a signal for shifting to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key. A setting key switch 112a for inputting , an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values, etc., which enables the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having a decimal point DP are arranged side by side. It consists of An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information is configured by .

The substrate case includes a concave lower case member whose portion facing the back side of the main control board 110 is open, and a concave upper case member whose portion facing the front side of the main control board 110 is open. A housing space for housing the main control board 110 is formed by closing the lower case member and the upper case member.

On the upper surface of the upper case member, a model name sticker printed with the model name (model name) of the gaming machine 1 so as not to overlap the information display 113 and a management number printed with the control number of the main control board 110 are printed. Number stickers are attached in a row on the left and right. At a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a, an operation member 108 for pressing (ON) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted. When the operation member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

An insertion portion (not shown) for inserting the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a is formed at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a. The insertion portion has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a cylindrical portion extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. are doing. When the setting key is inserted into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned to the right from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned on so that the setting key cannot be removed from the keyhole. When the setting key switch 112a is returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off so that the setting key can be removed from the keyhole.

The management number sticker has an opener entry part for writing the name of the person opening the main control board 110 and an opening date entry part for writing the opening date of the main control board 110 on the surface of a colorless and transparent base seal. They are arranged side by side on the left and right.

The opener entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction. A transparent window region is provided for visual confirmation (visual confirmation) of mounted electronic components.

The opening date entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and is mounted on the surface of the main control board 110 between the entry areas. A transparent window area is provided for viewing (visual confirmation) of the mounted electronic components.

The first to fourth entry areas of the opening person entry section are adjacent to the first to fourth entry areas of the opening date entry section with a space therebetween, and the surface of the main control board 110 is located between the entry areas. A transparent window region is provided for viewing (visually confirming) the electronic components mounted on the device.

As the information display device 113, a performance display unit formed by unitizing a circuit section composed of four 7-segment displays and substrates may be mounted on the main control substrate. Even in that case, it is desirable to displace them so that they do not overlap in the front and back so that the model name sticker and control number sticker do not restrict (shield) the visibility.

Also, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 is mounted on a dedicated board. It may be mounted and connected to the main control board 110 board-to-board so as to be included in the board case of the main control board 110 .

In addition, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, but is provided on the power board 160 if it is in a position where the player cannot operate it. It may be provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 or on the back side of the glass frame 4 . Even in this case, it is preferable to input the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a to the main controller 110m.

In addition, instead of inputting a signal for clearing the stored content of the main RAM 110c or updating the setting value by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting value is updated separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. A dedicated setting switch for inputting the signal may be provided. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, or the power supply board may be located at a position where the player cannot operate. 160 , on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 , or on the back side of the glass frame 4 .

In addition, instead of displaying both the performance information and the setting values on the information display 113, another display is displayed on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110. The performance information may be displayed on one of the displays, and the setting values may be displayed on the other display.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress of the game (basic actions). The main control board 110 is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program, etc., and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing (corresponding to volatile storage means). It has a main control unit 110m as a main control, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and uses the main RAM 110c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling the controlled devices (such as various solenoids and various displays). device), or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow bidirectional command (data) communication, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. Commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the effect control board 130 .

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing corresponding to the detection signals is performed.

The output ports of the main control board 110 include the second start opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the main information display device 59, and the game information output. A terminal board 90, a payout control board 120, an effect control board 130, and the like are connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various displays, and game information output terminal board to notify the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the output port Information and the like are output.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory area of the main ROM 110b includes a game ROM area in which programs and data relating to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data relating to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored. An unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored together with the above, a ROM comment area in which data such as the program title and version are stored, and a vector table in which the start address of the timer interrupt process described later is set. An area and an HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in this order.

The game ROM area includes a game program area in which a program relating to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data relating to the progress of the game. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area to which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the game machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the game machine. are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing the game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when the information program is executed are arranged in order. there is

The game RWM area consists of a game work area used as a work by the game program, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the game program is temporarily stored. A game stack area to be temporarily saved and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The game work area includes a set value area for storing set values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (a checksum to be described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes according to the progress of the game. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area used by the information program as a work area, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data being processed by the information program is temporarily saved. Information stack areas are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information relating to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information relating to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for performing processing based on a game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for performing processing based on an information program will be described. Describe relationships.

When the main CPU 110a performs a process based on a game program, it basically refers to the game data area and, while using the game RWM area as a work, refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area. ing. Also, when performing processing based on an information program, basically the data area for information is referenced, and the contents of the RWM area for information are referenced and updated while using the RWM area for information as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to. Further, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

When performing processing based on the information program, after the flag register is saved in the game RWM area in the processing based on the game program, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the game RWM area immediately after the process based on the program is completed and the game program is returned to.

Immediately after the information program is started, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set. immediately before the information program ends, all registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, the data used by the game program can be protected when processing based on the information program is performed, and inconvenience will occur when returning from the information program to the game program. will disappear.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the reception of payout commands from the main control board 110 and controls the shooting of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 for driving the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 for driving the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs and the like, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and uses the payout RAM 121c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing relating to the payout of game balls, thereby providing a game ball payout device. 100, or transmit a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Input ports of the payout control unit 121 include an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit. , and the output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 .

When receiving a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to control a predetermined number of game balls to be put out. When it is detected that a predetermined number of game balls have been put out, control for putting out game balls is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, and the like, which are not shown. The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected with the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b. ing.

When the shooting control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the shooting handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the energization of the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the shooting solenoid 28b. When the change in rotation angle of the shooting handle 15 is detected by the detection signal from the shooting volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is shot so that the shooting intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the shooting handle 15. A solenoid 28b is driven to shoot a game ball.

The shooting solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the hitting member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. . The operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the game ball is fired in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a subordinate control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed in the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110 . The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores a performance control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., display/sound control unit 140, frame lighting device 10, handle light emitting device 15c, button driving device 17b, and board A lamp/driving control unit 150 for controlling the lighting device 76, the board driving device 75, etc., and an input port and an output port for effect control are provided.

The sub CPU 130a reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b upon receiving an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to effects while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area. In response to an input signal from the effect button detection switch 17a or the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display/sound control unit 140, lamp/driving control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects ( output data or commands).

The input port of the effect control board 130 is connected with the effect button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like. In the performance control board 130, a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 is operated is input from the performance button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing for executing an effect according to the detection signal is performed.

The display/sound control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130m, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. or control the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display/sound control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 having an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, and a VDP (image processor). a CGROM 146 storing image data and the like; and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. a VRAM 147, an audio controller 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored, an input/output port and the like.

The supervising CPU 142 reads out the display control program stored in the supervising ROM 143 in response to the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while using the supervising RAM 144 as a work area. In response to an effect instruction command or the like, the image control unit 145 and the sound control unit 148 are controlled to execute various effects (output data and commands).

The overall ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM and the like, and includes a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of a drawing control command group, and an animation of a production pattern. An animation pattern for the purpose, animation scene information, etc. are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation that constitutes the specific content of the image presentation, and is associated with animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes wait frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters for drawing (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method , the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various image data are stored. Based on the image data, drawing data that is the source of a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, a performance design image, a background image constituting the background of the performance design. , character images, and dialogue images. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame formed by combining (superimposing) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and stores compressed image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg, 32×32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read in units of image data by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

The CGROM 146 also stores palette data in which color number information specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated without being compressed. Note that the CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a portion of the image data without compressing all of the image data. As a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM with which image data can be written or read at high speed. The VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub It has a frame buffer area etc. corresponding to liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time drawing is started.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) transfers the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 to the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142). , the drawing data is read from the "frame buffer for display" in the frame buffer area, a video signal (such as an RGB signal) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Then, it outputs to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operation clock is supplied from a crystal oscillator to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and by dividing this operation clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronizing signal (horizontal synchronizing signal/vertical synchronizing signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are generated. output to In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be 60 fps (1/60 second=approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

General-purpose controllers for converting image data into a predetermined image format and outputting them are provided between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). A substrate 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function to convert image data into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) for displaying image data. For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device with XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected. Absorb.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and based on various production data (including commands) transmitted from the production control unit 130m, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area for arithmetic processing, an input/output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp/driving control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and uses the lamp RAM 150c as a work area to perform arithmetic processing related to the production. Controls (outputs data and commands) are performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined effects in accordance with the received effect instruction commands and the like.

The frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp/driving control section. 130m (sub CPU 130a) based on the various performance data (including commands) transmitted, lighting of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the board lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 It also controls driving of drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the button driving device 17b and the board driving device 75 .

The power board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, It is supplied to the production control board 130 and various electronic parts). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure); A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when power is cut off (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state for supplying main power to the game machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130 and various electronic components) and an OFF state for stopping. A power switch is provided so as to be operable by a game store clerk, and when the power switch is turned on, the supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. The supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is in the OFF state.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a stops operating.

The backup power supply circuit 163 has a capacitor that stores electricity when power is supplied to the game machine. supply. As a result, the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c are retained even at the time of power failure (power failure), and after recovery from power failure (power failure), the control state of the game is restored to the state before power failure (power failure). can be restored. A backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 .

(Description of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, it has a "low probability gaming state" and a "high probability gaming state" as the state related to the special symbol jackpot lottery, and the state related to the movable member 48 of the second start port 47 "non-time-saving game state” and “time-saving game state”.

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-short-time gaming state that is a “low-probability gaming state” and a “non-short-time gaming state” (2) A low-probability short-time gaming state that is a “low-probability gaming state” and a “short-time gaming state” (3) “ High probability game state "and" time saving game state "high probability time saving game state"

In addition, the game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "low-probability short-time game state", and this game state is referred to as the "normal game state ” will be called. In addition, in the present embodiment, "low-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability short-time gaming state" may be referred to as "specific game state" because it is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. .

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is "1", the first start port 45, or , a game state in which the probability of winning a big win is set as low as about 1/300 in a special pattern big win lottery performed on the condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 47.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the "high-probability gaming state", the probability of winning the jackpot is improved compared to the low-probability gaming state. It says the game state that has been set.

Concretely, there are 4 kinds of setting values from "1" to "4." The probability of winning the jackpot in the probability game state is about 1/60, and when the set value is "2", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability game state is about 1/295, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability game state is about 1/295. The probability of winning is about 1/59, and when the set value is "3", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability game state is about 1/290, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability game state is about 1/58. When the set value is "4", the probability of winning a jackpot in the low-probability game state is about 1/285, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". In addition, the change from the low probability game state to the high probability game state is after the jackpot game, which will be described later, is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variable jackpot". Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called a "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, "non-time-saving gaming state" means that in the normal pattern hit lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average variation of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result It refers to a game state in which the time is set longer than the "time-saving game state" and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the normal pattern display device 62. For example, the display is stopped after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for 0.2 seconds, for example, after the stop display of the normal symbols.

On the other hand, the "time-saving game state" means that in the normal pattern winning lottery performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result A game state that is set shorter than the "non-time-saving game state" and is set longer than the "non-time-saving game state", for example, 2.5 seconds for the opening time of the second start port 47 when the winning is won. say. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example, 127. /128 is set high. Therefore, in the "time-saving gaming state", when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" is more advantageous than the "non-time-saving gaming state" in terms of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. is set to However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol fluctuation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. . In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, the probability of winning a winning lottery of normal symbols may be set to 0/128, for example.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is five times the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state (common regardless of the set value). The probability of being determined as is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to an arbitrary value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as the value is 10 times or less.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the jackpot lottery, a small win that is less advantageous to the advantageous person than the big win is not won. may In this case, it is preferable to set the small winning probability to be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the set value is, the more advantageous it is to the player (the higher the probability of a big hit). can be

In addition, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state may be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), for example, two or three setting values ( 1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the low probability game state and/or the high probability game state may be the same.

Also, the set values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, but are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

(Types of jackpot games)
Next, the types of jackpot games will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, "first jackpot game", "second jackpot game", and "second jackpot game" 3 jackpot games", and "first jackpot game" and "second jackpot game" are provided as types of jackpot games that can be won in a jackpot lottery based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 47. are doing.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game is executed up to 10 times, in which the big winning hole 50 is opened for up to 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

After the end of the first jackpot game, the high-accuracy short-time game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

"Second jackpot game" means that the round game is executed up to 10 times. After the end of the second jackpot game, the low-probability short working hours game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

"Third jackpot" means that the round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third jackpot game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10000 times. Therefore, judging from the probability of winning the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially decided.

In addition, the number of times of fluctuation display (in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times or 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) set after the jackpot game is referred to as "high probability It may be expressed as "number of times" or "time reduction number of times".

In this embodiment, the number of types of jackpot games is three, but the number is not limited to three, and may be less or more than three. In addition, the opening time of the opening and closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds in any jackpot game (first jackpot game to third jackpot game), but the opening time may not be 29.5 seconds, It is good also as opening time which changes with round games.

(Type of winning game)
Next, the types of hits will be explained.

In this embodiment, as the type of winning game that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the normal figure gate 44, "first winning game" and "second winning game", If the winning lottery is executed in a non-time-saving game state, it becomes a "first winning game", and if the winning lottery is executed in a time-saving game state, it becomes a "second winning game".

The "first winning game" is to open the second starting port 47 up to 0.2 seconds. That is, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

"Second winning game" means that the second starting port 47 is opened until 2.6 seconds, then closed until 1.5 seconds, and then opened again until 2.6 seconds. That is, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enters the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time elapses.

Thus, in the "time-saving gaming state", it is easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and the player can enjoy the game without consuming the game ball than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(main processing of the main control board)
Main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. As shown in FIG. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and waits for activation of other boards in step S3. Specifically, the activation of the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 is waited for one second so that no command is missed from the main control board 110 .

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device 26 .

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. When the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S7 assuming that the power is restored, and when the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S8 assuming that the power is turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S9 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation, the process proceeds to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs setting change processing in step S9. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the setting value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. display the current setting values saved in , and transmit a setting change designation command to the performance control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4", and the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is turned off. When there is a setting confirmation operation to change from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting value after change (update) is saved in the setting value area as confirmation of the setting value, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is terminated. At the same time, the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

Incidentally, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed is performed. Specifically, a setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are displayed in a predetermined manner during the setting change. All of the LEDs are lit in a luminescent color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (the data in the game RWM area is normal), the process proceeds to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the game RWM area is abnormal), Assuming that the control state before the power-off cannot be normally restored, the process proceeds to step S12.

If the backup flag is not saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the proper range, the process proceeds to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S12. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130 , set interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. and wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 130, processing for executing non-restorable error notification is performed.

"Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without changing the settings, the error will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Although the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be canceled when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

The "unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred. ) is displayed, the lighting device 10 for the frame and the lighting device 76 for the board are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the voice output device 9. An unrecoverable error sound ("This is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "drawing device."

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been an RWM clear operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S14 assuming that the RWM clear is to be executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process proceeds to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the game control state (initializing areas other than the set value area of the game RWM area) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability short-time game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process proceeds to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs processing for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized. ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. A power-on notification sound (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating initialization is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a state confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or being confirmed is displayed on the state confirmation display 68, and the setting value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. display the current setting values saved in , and transmit a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

Further, when the setting key switch 112a is turned off from the ON state, when the confirmation end operation is performed, the display of the set values on the information display 113 is ended, and the state confirmation display on the state confirmation display 68 is ended. Perform processing to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed is performed. Specifically, a setting checking screen indicating that the setting is being checked is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and predetermined light emission is performed while the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are checking the setting. All the lights are lit in a color (for example, white). Note that the voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Confirming the setting value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (0 clears) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 130, the processing for ending the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification is performed.

"Power restoration notification" is notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before power interruption, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at the time of power restoration on the image display devices 70 and 71 symbol “135”), or the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are fully lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the audio output device 9 to output a power recovery notification sound ("power has been restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the notification of power recovery, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a indicates other commands (first special symbol reserved number (U1), special symbol storage specification command indicating second special symbol reserved number (U2), normal symbol reserved number (G)). Ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures and the number of reserved normal figures, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70 is performed. will be done.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the effect control board 130 in step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. In addition, this set value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted. Also, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time the variable display of the special symbol is started, or may be transmitted each time the big winning game is started.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol determination random number value. An initial value random value update process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, in step S26, the main CPU 110a determines whether power failure (power failure) has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply substrate 160. If the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S24 to detect power failure. When the signal is input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupts, performs processing to clear the output port in step S28, and clears the game RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S29. ) are calculated and saved in the game RWM area, and in step S30, a backup flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, Processing for prohibiting RAM access is performed, and the system waits until the supply of the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, making it difficult to change settings easily. It is possible to

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, so that the game machine may perform unexpected operations, causing inconvenience to the game store and players. It becomes possible to improve the reliability of the game machine.

Also, if the value in the setting value area is not within the proper range, that is, if there is a possibility that the previous power failure occurred while the settings were being changed, unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game by pressing the button, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game arcade is set. Become.

In addition, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the lighting device for the frame are displayed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1. 10 and the board illumination device 76, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed, and on the back side (rear side), it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113. ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (surface) or the rear (back) of the gaming machine 1 .

Note that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the number of conditions increases, fraud can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Also, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and it is determined that there has been no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing will be performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

Also, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (that is, the power is restored) and that there is no setting change operation, and if it is determined that the checksum is abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area is initialized (cleared to 0) by the game program and the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area. , the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.

Also, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the game program calculates the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c. may be calculated. In this case, the calculated checksum should be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing may be performed.

Also, the setting change designation command is transmitted at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on designation command is transmitted after the setting change processing is completed. However, instead of the setting change designation command, the setting change start designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, a setting change end designation command may be transmitted instead of the power-on designation command. In this case, the setting change end designation command may be transmitted at the end of the setting change process, or may be transmitted after the setting change process ends.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting is changed, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting is changed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as update processing of the special symbol time counter, opening time of the special electric accessory, etc. , update processing of normal symbol time counter, update processing of opening and closing time of movable member 48, and other time control processing for updating various timer counters. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from a counter such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting opening timer counter, a starting opening closing timer counter, or the like is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a special symbol, a random number for determining a special symbol variation pattern, a random number for determining a hit, a random number for determining a normal symbol, and a normal symbol variation pattern. Performs specific random number update processing for updating the random number used. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. When the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the countermeasure The random value is newly updated by setting the initial value random value to be used as the new cycle initial value.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value random value for judging a big win, the initial random value for determining a special symbol, the initial random value for determining a hit determination, and the initial random value for determining a normal symbol in step S130. Initial value random value update process to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the normal winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, and the like. Input control processing is performed to determine whether or not there is an input to each switch, and to set predetermined data if there is an input. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination (jackpot determination, etc.), special symbol display control, opening/closing control of the big winning opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), special symbol special electric control for controlling the game state, and the like. process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a carries out normal pattern memory determination (hit determination, etc.), display control of normal symbols, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. .

It should be noted that the type of normal pattern per determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, the type of the normal pattern loss is the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game is not overly complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various normal patterns determined as the determination result of the normal pattern determination information performed in the normal pattern normal electric control process, and the selection ratio of various losing normal patterns are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the player's degree of advantage does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or controls a prize ball counter (three prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter), and perform payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning ports to the payout control board 120 . As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 .

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of magnetic anomaly or radio wave anomaly based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a. A magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130 is performed. When the effect control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or an electric wave anomaly error designation command, it performs control for performing magnetic anomaly error notification or electric wave anomaly error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting opening/closing data to be output to the second starting opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening/closing solenoid 51b to output. Winning opening opening/closing data, first special symbol display device 60, and special symbol display data output to second special symbol display device 61, normal symbol display data output to normal symbol display device 62, first special symbol reservation display device 63, and special design reservation display data to be output to the second special design reservation display device 64, data creation processing to create data such as normal design reservation display data to be output to the normal design reservation display device 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing for outputting signals such as the external information data created in step S700, the starting opening opening/closing data, and the big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , display output processing for outputting signals such as special symbol reserved display data and normal symbol reserved display data, and payout command transmission processing for sending the command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120 Also, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting the command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an information program calling process. Specifically, after the interrupt is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and the processing for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the normal medium payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening starting opening) during normal gaming state, out during normal gaming state A process for counting the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state, is performed.

It should be noted that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set values are changed (irrelevant to the set values). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (a normal base value, which will be described later) from which the influence of the set value is eliminated, and it is possible to use it to grasp the performance of the gaming machine 1 .

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number/normal medium out number) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the RWM area for information is calculated. Save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area of .

The game interval is updated each time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game interval, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game interval two times before, and a normal base value in the game interval three times before A fourth area is provided for playing, and base values for four game intervals including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area are displayed on the information display device 113 while being switched every five seconds. Performs processing for setting performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to a test facility used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various displays, and processing for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return processing. Specifically, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area, the interrupt is permitted, and the process for returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, no timer interrupt is executed in the setting change process, RWM clear process, and setting confirmation process. Since the performance information is not displayed, the control load on the main control board 110 can be reduced.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. FIG. Also, the game ball counting process may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110 . Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
Input control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing input control processing in the main control board 110 .

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. In this general winning hole detection switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43 or not. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, data indicating 10 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter (10 winning ball counter) for the general winning hole used for winning balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updated (D←D+1), and then the normal winning hole detection switch input processing is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning hole detecting switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning hole detecting switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning hole detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter for the big winning hole (15 winning ball counter) used for winning balls. The winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entering the winning hole is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1) to determine whether the jackpot game (special game) is currently in progress. determine whether When the jackpot game is currently in progress, the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have won the jackpot 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1) to the jackpot. Terminate the detection switch input process.

If the current game state is not the special game state, the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning hole (second starting hole 47, big winning hole 50) outside the winning period. The counter (E) is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the fraudulent winning ball counter (E) is greater than a specified number (for example, 10), resulting in fraudulent winning. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the fraudulent prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is assumed that the fraudulent prize winning (illegal prize winning) occurs outside the winning period, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is specified. Set the command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the error designation command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 informs that the fraudulent winning has occurred by performing the fraudulent winning error notification.

Then, the external information data (output data) for outputting the illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect the large winning opening. End switch input processing. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to recognize (specify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process. In this first starting hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starting hole detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start opening detection switch input process. In this second starting port detection switch input processing, substantially the same processing as the first starting port detection switch input processing shown in FIG. 6, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process is terminated.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal pattern reservations, which is the number of normal pattern reservation memories stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area, is less than four. When the number of general pattern reservations is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the normal pattern reservation number is less than 4, add "1" to the normal pattern reservation number and update it, normal pattern determination information (random number for hit judgment, normal pattern determination random value, normal pattern fluctuation pattern Random number for determination) is acquired, and the vacant storage units are searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired normal pattern judgment information is stored in the vacant storage unit and input. End the control process.

(Input processing of the first start opening detection switch of the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the first starting port detection switch input processing in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first 1 End the starting port detection switch input processing.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination information ( Random number for jackpot determination, random number for special pattern determination, random number for reach determination, random number for special figure variation pattern determination) is acquired.

The main CPU 110a determines whether or not the first special symbol reserved number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area is less than four in step S230-4. When the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process is moved to step S230-5, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, this first start End the mouth detection switch input process.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) and updates it (U1←U1+1). A first special symbol memory specifying command corresponding to the number of symbol reservations (U1) is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the first special symbol reserved number.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for free storage units from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and stores acquired special symbol determination information in the free storage units. Remember.

As described above, in the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, special figure determination information (random number for jackpot determination, random number for special symbol determination, random number for reach determination, and special figure variation pattern determination random values, etc.) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-8. In this first pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure determination information (first reservation storage) acquired this time is displayed before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A scheduled variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be determined and executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled variation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process of step S230-8 in the effect transmission data storage area, and this time ends the first starting opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the scheduled variation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first starting point winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that receives the first starting point winning designation command receives the first starting point winning. A designated command is analyzed, and a predetermined notice performance is performed over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start winning prize designated command. can be executed. It should be noted that the pre-reading notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the lighting device 10 for the frame, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the lighting device 76 for the board. is done using

In addition, regarding the second start opening detection switch input processing, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the first special symbol reservation storage area, the first reservation memory, the first special symbol reservation number (U1), the first special symbol storage designation command, first pre-determination process, first starting opening winning designation command, respectively, second starting opening detection switch 47a, second special symbol reservation storage area, second reservation storage, second special symbol reservation number (U2), second 2 special symbol storage specification command, second pre-determining process, second start opening winning a prize specification command may be replaced.

(Special special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special figure special electric control processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and stores the special symbol if the special figure special electric processing data=0. Determination processing (step S310) If the processing is transferred to the special symbol change processing (step S320) if the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, if the special symbol special electric processing data = 2 special symbol stop processing (step S330), if the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is moved to the big hit game processing (step S340), if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing goes to the jackpot game end processing (step S350) Move.

Since this "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as will be described later, the subroutines necessary for the game are appropriately processed. .

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol storage determination processing for determining a big hit, processing for determining the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and processing for determining the fluctuation time of the special symbols.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, and if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more, To determine whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more (is "0") , the customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not the variable display of special symbols and the start of the customer waiting state in which the jackpot game is not executed (the waiting state in which the game is not progressing) is set to "0 ” is determined.

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", the customer waiting state designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area assuming that the customer waiting state has started, and while maintaining the special figure special electric processing data = 0, When the special symbol storage determination process is completed and the customer waiting state determination flag is not "0", the customer waiting state has already started, and the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. Terminate the special symbol memory determination process.

When the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, after subtracting "1" from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area, in the second special symbol reservation storage area Various random numbers (special figure determination information) stored in a certain first storage unit to fourth storage unit are shifted to the previous storage unit, and the second corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number after subtraction (U2) 2 Set the special symbol memory specification command in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the second special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the second special symbol reserved number.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a big win determination (big win lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a big win game. Specifically, the random number for special symbol determination out of the various random numbers (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit in the second special symbol reservation storage area, the RWM area for the game Based on the set values (here 1 to 4) stored in the set value area and the current probability game state (low probability game state, high probability game state), the jackpot game will be executed. ” or “losing”.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, in the first special symbol reservation storage area After subtracting "1" from the stored value, various random values stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area are shifted to the previous storage unit, A first special symbol memory designation command corresponding to the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) after subtraction is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special symbol storage specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the first special symbol reserved number.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a big win determination (big win lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a big win game. Specifically, the random number for special symbol determination out of the various random numbers (special figure determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, the game RWM area Based on the set values (here 1 to 4) stored in the set value area and the current probability game state (low probability game state, high probability game state), the jackpot game will be executed. ” or “losing”.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol determination processing for determining the type of special symbols to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the big hit determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the value stored in the 0th storage unit A special jackpot pattern or a losing special pattern is determined based on the random number value for the jackpot pattern, and a performance design designation command corresponding to the determined special design is set in a transmission data storage area for performance. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the big hit determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the jackpot symbol stored in the 0th storage section is determined. A special pattern (big win special pattern, losing special pattern) is determined based on the random number value, and a performance design designation command corresponding to the determined special design is set in a performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols. Specifically, when the big hit determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the value stored in the 0th storage unit Based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for special figure variation, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the determined variation pattern A corresponding variation pattern specification command is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In addition, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reach determination stored in the 0th storage unit The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number and the random number for special figure variation, the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern. The designated command is set in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the variation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets variable display data for causing the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 to perform variable display (blinking of the LED) of special symbols in a predetermined processing area. .

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, data for lighting or extinguishing the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. Variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61 .

Then, special symbol electric processing data=0 is set to special symbol electric processing data=1, preparations are made to move to a subroutine of special symbol variation processing, and the special symbol storage determination processing of this time is completed.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing for determining whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). If the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation processing is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=1.

When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the big winning special symbol or the losing special symbol determined in step S310 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61, and is determined in advance. The stop time (0.5 seconds) of the received special symbol is set in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the big hit determination.

Then, special symbol electric processing data=1 is set to special symbol electric processing data=2, preparations are made to move to a special symbol stop processing subroutine, and this special symbol variation processing is completed.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol stop processing to determine whether or not the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). When the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop processing is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data=2.

When the stop time has elapsed, when the number of times of time saving > 0, the time saving number counter is updated by subtracting 1, and when the number of times of time saving = 0, the time saving game flag is cleared, and when the number of times of high probability > 0, it is high. The probability number counter is updated by subtracting 1, and when the high probability number=0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stopped special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. In the case of a jackpot special pattern, clear the time-saving game flag, high-probability game flag, time-saving number counter, and high-probability number counter, and set from special figure special electric processing data = 2 to special figure special electric processing data = 3 Then, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game processing, and the special symbol stop processing of this time is finished.

On the other hand, if the special pattern is lost, the special pattern special electric processing data is set to 0 from the special special electric processing data = 2, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special design storage determination processing, and the special design stop processing of this time is performed. exit.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a selects the first jackpot game, second jackpot game, or third jackpot game based on the type of jackpot special symbol set in step S310 (stopped symbol data). A jackpot game process is performed.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the driving data of the big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening/closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the number of round games (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls win (enter a ball) during this opening, or the opening time of the big winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10, or special game timer counter = 0), a large The drive data output of the winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is stopped, and the opening/closing member 51 is closed. This completes one round game. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the round game is completed a predetermined number of times (4 times or 16 times in this embodiment), the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3 , the special figure special electric processing data is set to 4, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and the jackpot game processing of this time is finished.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines either the high-probability game state or the low-probability game state, and also determines the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state. A jackpot game ending process is performed.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special design (stop design data) set in step S310, the setting of the high probability game flag, the setting of the high probability number, the setting of the time saving game flag, and the setting of the number of time saving Then, the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is set to special figure special electric processing data = 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and the big hit game end processing of this time is completed.

(Description of commands related to the production control board)
The types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 are diagrams showing types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. FIG.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the first special symbol reservation number (U1), and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases or decreases, the main RAM 110c It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

"Second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the second special symbol reservation number (U2), and when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) increases or decreases, the main RAM 110c It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" may be collectively referred to as "special symbol memory designation command".

The "performance design specification command" indicates the type (kind) of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbols is started, the main RAM 110c is transmitted for performance. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

In addition, since the type of the special pattern ultimately determines the type of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game ends, the production pattern designation command indicates the jackpot type and the game state after the jackpot ends. It can also be said.

The "first special symbol variation pattern specifying command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, and the first special symbol display device 60 displays the variation of the special symbol. is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

The "second special symbol variation pattern specification command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display device 61, and the second special symbol display device 61 displays the variation of the special symbol. is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern specification command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern specification command" may be collectively referred to as "variation pattern specification command".

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed. , and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

"Normal design determination command" indicates that the normal design is stopped and displayed, and when the normal design is stopped and displayed on the normal design display device 62, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the production is performed. It is sent to the control board 130 .

The "start opening winning designation command" is for notifying the effect control board 130 in advance of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery), and the game ball wins the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47. When this is done, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "jackpot opening designation command" indicates the start of a jackpot game (special game), and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various jackpot games are started, and the production control board. 130.

The "round specifying command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the production control board 130 when the round game of the jackpot game is started. .

The "jackpot ending designation command" indicates that the jackpot game is to end, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various jackpot games are finished, and is transmitted to the production control board 130. be.

"Normal symbol storage designation command" indicates the normal symbol reserved number (G1), and when the value stored in the normal symbol reserved number (G1) storage area increases or decreases, the main RAM 110c stores performance transmission data. It is set in the area and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "general design specification command" indicates the type of normal design to be stopped and displayed on the normal design display device 62, and when various normal designs are determined and the variable display of the normal design is started, the main RAM 110c is stored. It is set in the performance transmission data storage area and transmitted to the performance control board 130 .

The "normal pattern variation specification command" indicates the normal symbol variation time on the normal symbol display device 62, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the normal symbol variation display is started. , is transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "winning opening designation command" indicates that a winning game (auxiliary game) starts, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the winning game starts, and the production control board 130 sent to.

The "winning ending specifying command" indicates that various auxiliary games end, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the winning game ends, and is transmitted to the production control board 130. be.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether it is a time-saving game state or whether it is a high-probability game state. ), and at the end of the jackpot, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110 c and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The 'power-on designation command' and 'power-restoration designation command' indicate whether power-on of the gaming machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. When it is turned ON, whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized, and a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command corresponding to the game state are transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "customer waiting state designation command" indicates that a customer waiting state in which the variable display of special symbols is not performed is entered, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the customer waiting state is entered. and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "error designation command" indicates that an error has occurred in the game machine 1 and the type of error. When it is determined that an illegal prize has occurred in the above-described big winning opening detection switch input process or the above-described second start opening detection switch input process, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the production control board 130 sent to.

Also, when the payout control board 120 detects the opening of the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4, the fullness of the lower tray 12, or the payout abnormality, it is set in the payout RAM 121c performance transmission data storage area, and is set in the performance control board 120. 130.

The "error release designation command" indicates that an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c or payout RAM 121c when the resolution of various abnormalities is detected. and transmitted to the effect control board 130 .

The "set value designation command" indicates the set value set in the game machine 1. Specifically, after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is executed. After being transmitted, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130. - 特許庁

(Main processing of production control unit)
Next, the main processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the effect control section 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupt in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub-ROM 130b, flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing for updating various random values stored in the sub-RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit)
Timer interrupt processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a timer interrupt process that is executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it determines whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the production button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and performs processing of setting predetermined data when there is an input.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, it determines whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received. Processing for executing change notification is performed, and when the setting confirmation designation command is received, processing for executing the above-described setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power-on designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power-on notification is performed. Specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the power-on sound is output from the voice output device 9 .

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if received, a process for executing power failure restoration notification is performed. Specifically, a power restoration notification command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 to display a power restoration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), A power restoration sound is output from the voice output device 9 . note that,

In step E300, the sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not a customer-waiting state designation command has been received, and if the command has been received, processing for performing a customer-waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined time has elapsed is performed. conduct. Specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140, and a customer waiting demo screen is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , the voice output device 9 outputs a customer waiting demonstration sound. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 12 .

The sub CPU 130a performs a game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state designation command has been received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c when the command has been received. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a pending information update process in step E400. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received, and if received, the second stored in the sub-RAM 130c. 1 special design reservation number, second special design reservation number, normal design reservation number, etc. are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a look-ahead effect process. Specifically, by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a start-point winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command is received. Processing related to production, continuous advance notice production, and lamp change production is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 .

The “icon change effect” is a type of preview effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by changing the display mode of the pending icon and the icon. In the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a suspended icon may be referred to as a "suspended icon change effect", and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as a "pertinent icon change effect".

A “continuous advance notice effect” is a type of foreseeing advance notice effect that makes a player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
"Lamp change effect" is a kind of fore-reading forewarning effect that makes a player expect a big win game to be executed by changing the lighting mode of the prize winning hole lamp over one or more variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs a special special electric effect process. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a performance design designation command, a special design variation pattern designation command, a special design decision command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command, etc. is received, and processing is performed to execute an effect corresponding to the received command if received.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a carries out a general/universal electric presentation process. Specifically, referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, whether the general pattern designation command, general pattern variation designation command, normal pattern determination command, opening designation command for winning, and ending designation command for winning, etc. are received It determines whether or not, and performs processing for executing an effect corresponding to the received command when it is received.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referenced to determine whether or not an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. and end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it outputs signals such as predetermined data, and transmits various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150. .

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and terminates the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting effect processing of the effect control unit)
The customer waiting effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E300-1. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, in step E300-2, until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect. selects the demonstration waiting time determination table (see FIG. 13) for determining the waiting time of Details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demonstration standby time and sets the demonstration standby timer. Specifically, the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is referred to, and one demonstration standby time is determined from a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration is on standby. Specifically, it is determined whether the demonstration standby timer is set. If it is not on standby for a demonstration, the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated assuming that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed, and if it is on standby for a demonstration, the demonstration standby timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demonstration standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not equal to 0, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not yet executed, and the current customer waiting effect processing is terminated. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the present customer waiting effect processing is terminated. As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the customer waiting demo effect for appealing to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demonstration waiting time determination table)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect.

The game state, the current state, and the selected demo waiting time are associated with each other in the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. There are 4 types of demo standby time from 30 seconds to 70 seconds for the normal game state, and 4 types of demo standby time from 35 seconds to 75 seconds for the specific game state. is set.

A first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. Demonstration standby time after is displayed statically, demonstration standby time after the variable display of the production pattern is finished (variation time has passed) and the production design is statically displayed, and production design after the end of the customer waiting demo production is different from the demonstration standby time after is displayed still. By doing so, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

A second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demonstration standby time after the time has passed and the production pattern is statically displayed is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demonstration standby time after static display of the effect pattern on the image display device immediately after is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the demo standby time after the design is statically displayed is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time after the performance symbol is statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance is the shortest. By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to the player, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

As a sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the possibility that the player is playing a game, and to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Prefetching effect processing of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 14, the look-ahead effect processing of the effect control section 130m will be described. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the look-ahead effect processing in the effect control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect and the effect mode of the icon change effect. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 15 .

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the display mode of the pending icon already displayed or the icon). Perform update processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs continuous announcement effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, the effect mode of the continuous announcement effect, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous announcement effect execution process for executing the continuous announcement effect determined to be executed in the continuous announcement effect determination process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (lighting the winning entrance lamp NR so as to have a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed). Terminate the look-ahead effect processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing icon change effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command from the main control board 110 in step E510-1. When the start opening winning designation command is received, the process is moved to step E510-2, and when the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is the executable period of the icon change effect. If it is during the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the icon change effect executable period, the process moves to step E510-8.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, when the received starting opening winning designation command is based on the winning to the first starting opening 45, the normal game state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is for winning to the second starting opening 47 If it is based on, it may be provided that it is a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines that all of the pre-determination results of the pre-reservation (pre-reservation storage corresponding to the previously received start-up winning designation command) are normal reach or less, that is, all the pre-determination results of the pre-reservation are normally fluctuating, Decide whether it is shortened variation or normal reach. If all are equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-5, and if none is equal to or less than the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determination random value for determining the final display mode of an icon to be additionally displayed on first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6. , selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the final display mode of the icon in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. , to determine one final icon display mode from among a plurality of final icon display modes.

In step E510-8, sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If it is the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-10, and if it is not the display mode for executing the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the change scenario determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining the change scenario of the icon change effect. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the pending icon to the disappearance thereof.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, based on the final display mode of the icon, the number of pending memories of the special symbols corresponding to the start winning prize designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario to determine one change scenario from a plurality of change scenarios.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and selects the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination processing is terminated. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed as a special icon) is output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is displayed, or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all the preliminary determination results of the precedence suspension are equal to or less than the normal reach. Alternatively, the icon change performance may be executed when the preliminary determination result of the preceding suspension is not to perform the ready-to-win performance, and the icon change performance may not be executed when the ready-to-win performance is to be performed. In this way, the change in the display mode of the pending icon does not occur during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the hold icon during the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. change of the display mode occurs, the ready-to-win effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, even if the result of the preliminary determination of the precedent hold includes the ready-to-reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the result of the preliminary determination of the precedent hold includes the ready-to-reach effect. The icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) in the case where there is no ready-to-win effect than in the case where the ready-to-win effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the final icon display mode.

The final icon display mode determination table is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the start winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of the final display mode of each icon, and the final display mode of the icon to be selected.

The final icon display mode includes a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character as special icons that indicate the possibility of a big win (a big win game will be played). icon is set.

The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot related to the special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon<) blue character icon<red character icon<rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that confirms a big win. .

Here, as a main feature of the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the selection rate of the final icon display mode is varied according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the scheduled variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is at a higher rate than when the scheduled variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not become reach. Like to be selected.

In the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the normal icon (CD icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode in the case of a big win, but it may be selected. .

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the final display mode of the icon, the reserved memory number of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected. , and for reference, prior changes in each change scenario and the mode of icon update in the changes are described.

"Advance variation" is a variable display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information stored earlier than the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting entrance winning designation command. , "The variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the change (the icon change effect is executed). Scenarios (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation (suspended icon change effect is executed) but do not change during execution of the change (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed), and icon display modes change during execution of prior variation and during execution of the variation (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect are executed ) scenarios (for example, scenario 15, etc.) are set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, the scenario in which the icon display mode is changed is determined regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win effect (may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed according to a change scenario determination table in which whether or not a ready-to-win effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in advance fluctuation is executed is a determination factor. You may make it determine the scenario to which it makes. When such a change scenario determination table is used, there is no change in the display mode of the icon during the execution of the advance variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. It is preferable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, a change in the display mode of the icon occurs during the execution of the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is executed and the preliminary variation in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the change in the display mode of the icon occurs at a higher rate during the execution of the advance variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon display mode update processing of effect control unit)
The icon display mode update processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing icon display mode update processing in the effect control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E520-1. When the variation pattern designation command is received, the process proceeds to step E520-2, and when the variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3 determines whether or not the icon change scenario is stored. . If no icon change scenario is stored, the change scenario is cleared from the sub-RAM 130c. moves the process to step E520-4.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a pending icon that changes (updates) the display mode in the current variable effect. If there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-5, and if there is no pending icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-8.

In step E520-5, sub CPU 130a selects the change pattern determination table for pending icon (see FIG. 19) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the pending icon to be changed. The details of the pending icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-6. Specifically, referring to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. , determines one pending icon change pattern.

In step E520-7, sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 is changed according to the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the hold icon displayed on the (main liquid crystal) is changed, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

In step E520-8, sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon display mode updating process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among a plurality of change pattern determination tables for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed, the A change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 20 and 21) for the icon is selected according to the change stage in which the icon changes. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

In step E520-10, the sub-CPU 130a performs a power-off time control function for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not have been executed due to the occurrence of power restoration. The icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 22) is selected. The details of the icon change pattern determination table for power failure will be described later.

Sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-11. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, a plurality of the icons are selected based on the mode of change of the icon in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from the change patterns.

In step E520-12, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current icon display mode update process. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 is changed according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon displayed on the (main liquid crystal) is changed, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

As described above, according to the icon display mode updating process shown in FIG. 18, when the power is restored during execution of the icon change effect, when the icon change effect is executed again in the fluctuation effect that is started after the power is restored. There seems to be By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the termination of the icon change effect due to the occurrence of power restoration, and to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, even if the icon change effect is executed again in the change effect that is started after the power is restored, the icon change effect is performed based on the current change pattern. By newly determining the mode, it is not executed from the continuation of the change scenario before power restoration (the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped). By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, if the power supply recovery occurs during the execution of the icon change effect, in the fluctuation effect that starts after the power is restored, the pending memory (special figure determination information) prior to the pending memory (special figure determination information) that triggered the execution of the icon change effect ( The icon change effect may not be executed in the variable effect corresponding to the special figure determination information), and the icon change effect may be executed in the variable effect corresponding to the pending memory that triggered the execution of the icon change effect.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a pending icon change pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a pending icon change pattern.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the mode of pending icon change in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the pending icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the pending icon change effect generation timing and change stages in each pending icon change pattern are described.

As for the hold icon change pattern, normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shift-displayed (at the start of fluctuation) in response to the disappearance of the icon. , a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while fluctuating with the output of a sound effect, and when a character appears, an action effect that acts on the icon is performed with the character as the starting point, and the icon is displayed. A character effect change pattern 01 in which the mode changes and a change notification pattern indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the variable effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect effect acting on the reserved icon starting from the change notification pattern. is set to change the display mode of the pending icon.

The change effect generation timing of the pending icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect, and when the variable effect is started (at the start of the variable effect), during the execution of the variable effect (during fluctuation), and the effect pattern When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

In the change stage of the pending icon, there is a 1UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode that is one step higher, and a jackpot icon. A 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon) is set to change the display mode of the winning expectation to two levels higher.

Although the above-described three timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the pending icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
20 and 21 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon to be referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. FIG. 21 is a table referred to when changing the display mode of the icon by two stages.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of change of the icon in the current variable effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes at the start of fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and a normal change pattern 01 in which the display state of the hold icon changes during fluctuation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. There are set a change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 in which when a character appears, an action effect acting on the icon is performed with the character as a starting point, and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the state of progress of the change effect. When 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes a 1UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon) in which the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot changes to a display mode one level higher, and a jackpot icon. 2UP (for example, a change from a CD icon to a red character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon, etc.) is set to change the display mode of the winning expectation to two levels higher.

Although the pattern effect change pattern 01 is not selected in the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, it may be selected. For example, in the variation effect for performing the pseudo-continuous effect, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo continuous effect" is a variable display of the effect pattern as if it were multiple times for the big hit determination based on the winning (entering the ball) to the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) once. In order to make it look as if it was executed, all within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (entering the ball) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) It is a variable display of a special effect design in which a re-variation display for starting a change again after the effect design 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times.

Although the above-mentioned two timings are used as the timings for generating the change effect of the icon, the timings are not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it is possible to provide a state during execution of a variable effect until a reach is established (during fluctuation), during execution of a normal reach, during execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, or the like.

(Relevant icon change pattern determination table for power failure)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an icon change pattern determination table for power failure, which is referred to when determining the icon change pattern.

The icon change pattern determination table for the time of power failure contains the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command, the final display mode of the icon, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, and the icon to be selected. and the icon change pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and for reference, the change effect generation timing and change stage of the icon in each icon change pattern are described.

It should be noted that the icon change pattern, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon, and the change stage of the icon are the same as those described in the change pattern determination table for the icon described above, so descriptions thereof are omitted here. do.

(Relationship of change effect occurrence frequency between pending icon display mode and change effect occurrence timing)
FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the appearance frequency of the pending icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the pending icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command. ing.

Further, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. getting low.

In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after the variation pattern designation command is received. It can be said that the display mode of is likely to change to the blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command. getting higher.

Further, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to a red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command. getting low.

In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the holding icon is more effective than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of is likely to change to a red character icon. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a starting entry winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is that the game ball wins the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) and the pending icon is displayed. It is a change effect (change effect at the time of winning) in which the reserved icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing of winning, and a normal change pattern 01.
Also, the change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command is the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the pending icon display mode and the change effect generation frequency is the relationship as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command is better than the predetermined command Since the frequency of the change effect of changing to a red character icon with a higher expectation of winning a big win than the frame update timing according to the reception of the is high, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change effect occurrence timing, improving the interest of the game. It is possible to

Also, since the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher frequency of occurrence of the change effect of changing to the blue character icon than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs earlier. In addition, although it is difficult to change to a red character icon with a high expectation of winning a jackpot, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so that the player can pay attention to the subsequent variation performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Relationship 1 between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect)
FIG. 23(b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the changing effect occurrence frequency between the changing effect type and the changing effect occurrence timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher for the pending icon change effect than for the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the icon change effect is lower than that of the pending icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect has the relationship as described above, the pending icon is likely to change at an early stage of the change effect. It is possible to draw out the expectations of the players for the jackpot game over a long period of time, and to improve the amusement of the game. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a starting entry winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship 2 between the type of change effect and the frequency of occurrence of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect)
FIG. 23(c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 of the changing effect generation frequency between the changing effect type and the changing effect generation timing.

When the change effect occurs at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the frequency of occurrence of the icon change effect is higher than that of the pending icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the pending icon change effect is lower than that of the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency of the change effect occurrence timing has the relationship as described above, the icon is likely to change in the late period of the change effect, so the game It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by drawing the expectation of the player to the big winning game until the time when the variation presentation is late.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon occurs (changes))
FIG. 23D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generated notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated. A second generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound when an icon is generated (changed). A third generated notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at the time of change), and when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at the time of icon change. is set to be output.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for a plurality of icon display modes (four types). , and a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon. Alternatively, when the CD icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes in any manner. You may make it output. Also, for the rainbow character icon that is determined to be a big hit, three types of special change notification sounds may be provided.

(Continuous notice effect determination processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing continuous announcement effect determination processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command from the main control board 110 in step E530-1. When the starting opening winning designation command is received, the process is moved to step E530-2, and when the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect determination processing is terminated.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of the effect (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is during which the continuous announcement effect can be executed. If it is during the continuous advance notice performance executable period, the process is moved to step E530-4, and if it is not the continuous notice performance executable period, the process is moved to step E530-6 assuming that the continuous announcement performance is not executed. .

The 'executable period of the continuous advance notice effect' means that the jackpot game is not being executed, the continuous notice effect is not being executed, and the continuous notice effect is not scheduled to be executed. Any one of the above three conditions, or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, when the received starting opening winning designation command is based on the winning to the first starting opening 45, the normal game state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is for winning to the second starting opening 47 If it is based on, it may be provided that it is a specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state).

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the announcement scenario determination table (see FIG. 25) for determining the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement effect. Details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later. This advance notice scenario indicates the transition of the advance notice effect over one or more variable effects.

In step E530-5, the sub CPU 130a determines the announcement scenario, sets it in the pre-reading information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current continuous announcement effect determination process. Specifically, referring to the notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, one announcement scenario is determined from a plurality of announcement scenarios (including non-announcement scenarios). Details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario in which the continuous announcement effect is not executed, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and terminates the current continuous announcement effect determination process. do.

(Advance scenario decision table)
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an advance notice scenario determination table referred to when deciding an advance notice scenario for continuous advance notice effects.

The announcement scenario determination table contains the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting entry winning designation command, the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the starting opening winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each announcement scenario, and the announcement scenario to be selected. are associated with each other, and for reference, the advance fluctuation in each advance notice scenario and the effect mode of the advance notice effect in the change are described.

The advance notice scenarios include a non-announcement scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which an effect image is displayed around the performance design 70a at the start of the variable production, and an effect image is displayed around the production design 70a at the start of the advance fluctuation. is not displayed, but an effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a at the start of the variation (for example, scenario 01), at the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and at the start of the variation, the effect around the production pattern 70a A scenario in which an image is displayed (for example, scenario 02, etc.) is set.

(Continuous notice effect execution processing of effect control unit)
Continuous advance notice effect execution processing of the effect control section 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing continuous advance notice effect execution processing in the effect control section 130m.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110 in step E540-1. When the variation pattern specification command is received, the process is moved to step E540-2, and when the variation pattern specification command is not received, the current continuous announcement effect execution process is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the announcement scenario of the continuous announcement effect stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E540-3 determines whether or not the announcement scenario is stored. . If the advance notice scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E540-4, and if the advance notice scenario is not stored, the advance notice scenario is cleared from the sub-RAM 130c. E540-6 is processed.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines a continuous announcement pattern (effect mode) corresponding to the announcement scenario, and in step E540-5 sets a continuous announcement effect command corresponding to the determined continuous announcement pattern in the transmission buffer. . As a result, the continuous notice performance command is transmitted to the display/sound control section 140 and the lamp/driving control section 150, the continuous notice performance is executed according to the continuous notice pattern, and the performance pattern 70a is executed at the start of the variable performance. An effect image is displayed around the , or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E540-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the alternative notice pattern determination table (Fig. 27) to determine the notice pattern. Specifically, the selected alternative notice pattern determination table is referred to, and based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command and the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, one alternative is selected from a plurality of alternative notice patterns. Determine the warning pattern. The details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

"Alternative notice effect" is a effect to compensate for the continuous notice effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration (power outage), and multiple mini characters with different expectations for big wins are displayed on the image display device. It is a kind of advance notice effect that makes the player expect that a big win game will be executed by displaying any of them.

In step E540-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined alternative notice pattern is for executing the alternative notice effect. If the alternative notice effect is not to be executed, the current continuous notice effect execution processing is terminated as if the alternative notice effect is not to be executed, and if the alternative notice effect is to be executed, the alternative notice pattern is executed. An alternative notice effect command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current continuous notice effect execution processing is terminated. As a result, the alternative notice effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the alternative notice effect is executed according to the alternative notice pattern. is displayed, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

As described above, according to the continuous notice effect execution processing shown in FIG. 26, when the power supply is restored (power failure) during execution of the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is resumed in the variable effect that is started after the power is restored. Instead, an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the continuous announcement effect due to the occurrence of power restoration (power failure), and to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table referred to when deciding an alternative notice pattern.

In the alternative notice pattern determination table, the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the selected alternative notice pattern are associated. The presentation mode in the pattern is described.

The alternative notice patterns include a pattern 00 in which no alternative notice effect is executed, a pattern 01 in which the mini character A is displayed on the image display device, a pattern 02 in which the mini character B is displayed on the image display device, and a mini character C is displayed on the image display device. A pattern 03 is set in which a mini-character D is displayed on the image display device.

The degree of expectation for winning a big win related to mini-characters is higher in the order of mini-character A<mini-character B<mini-character C<mini-character D, and mini-character D is a mini-character that is sure to win a big win.

The first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that an alternative notice effect is executed in a variation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot rather than a variation pattern with a low expectation of winning a jackpot. One reason is that the pattern is easily determined. By doing so, the alternative notice effect is executed when there is a high possibility that the continuous notice effect was executed before the power restoration occurred, and the dissatisfaction accompanying the end of the continuous notice effect is reduced. It can be reduced, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the execution trigger of the continuous notice effect. The alternative notice pattern for executing the alternative notice performance is more likely to be determined than when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that does not trigger the execution of the continuous notice performance prior to the suspension is executed. By doing so, after the power supply is restored, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance is the variable performance corresponding to the holding that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, in the variable effect that is executed after the power supply is restored, it is decided whether or not to execute the later-described big hit notice effect (serif notice effect, step-up notice effect), so the execution of the big hit notice effect By increasing the probability more than usual, the alternative notice effect may not be executed.

Even in this case, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the execution trigger of the continuous notice effect before the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect. It is preferable to make it easier to execute the big hit announcement performance than when the variable performance corresponding to the suspension that is not set is executed. In this way, after the power is restored, it becomes easy to grasp which variable performance corresponds to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous advance notice performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not an icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is to be executed. Assuming that the power supply is cleared, the process proceeds to step E550-6.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is time to change the icon. If it is the icon change timing, the process proceeds to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning entrance lamp NR changes corresponding to the color change of the icon, thereby executing the lamp change effect. will be

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. When the ramp changing flag is set, the current ramp changing effect execution processing is terminated, and when the ramp changing flag is not set, the ramp changing flag is set and the ramp changing effect is executed this time. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current ramp change effect execution process is terminated.

At step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, at step E550-8 sets a ramp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current ramp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp/driving control section 150, and the lamp change effect being executed is terminated.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, the light emission mode (light emission color, lighting/blinking) of the prize winning entrance lamp NR is changed in correspondence with the change of the icon in the icon change effect. It is designed to perform a performance. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance effect by synergistic effect with the icon change performance, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution processing shown in FIG. 28, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous notice effect, even if the power is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. or not to execute the alternative notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to secure the rarity of the ramp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when power restoration occurs like the icon change production, the lamp change production may be executed again in the fluctuation production started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that starts after the power is restored.

Further, instead of executing the lamp change performance corresponding to the icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the winning entrance lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery, and the lamp change performance is executed. You may do so.

(Jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit)
Using FIG. 29, the jackpot announcement effect determination processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot announcement effect determination processing in the effect control unit 130m. process).

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, the forewarning pattern of the jackpot foretelling performance that makes the player expect that the jackpot game will be executed. A jackpot prediction determination table (see FIG. 30) is selected to determine a prediction pattern. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot notice determination table shown in FIG. 30, a plurality of notice patterns (non-prediction patterns ) is determined. Details of the jackpot announcement determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a forewarning pattern for executing a dialogue forewarning effect. If it is the announcement pattern for executing the speech announcement effect, the process moves to step E650-4, and if it is not the announcement pattern for executing the dialogue announcement effect, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Dialogue notice effect" means that, in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period that occurs during the variable effect, a dialog image suggesting the degree of expectation of the big win is displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device is displayed. It is a kind of jackpot announcement effect in which a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from 9. Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed (the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high) than when the jackpot game is not executed, the dialogue with the relatively high expectation is displayed. When a line with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, the effect button 17 vibrates, for example, for one second.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the dialogue pattern in the dialogue preview effect, and determines the dialogue pattern. Specifically, referring to the dialogue pattern determination table, one dialogue pattern is selected from a plurality of dialogue patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variation production pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue pattern. decide.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a sets a speech announcement effect command corresponding to the speech pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialog preview effect command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the dialog preview effect corresponding to the dialog pattern is executed. is displayed, and audio corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9 .

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a notice pattern for executing a step-up notice effect. If it is the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process is shifted to step E650-7, and if it is not the notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination processing is terminated.

“Step-up notice effect” is a jackpot notice effect that executes step effects in a predetermined order until one of a plurality of steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage). It is one kind. Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the big win game is executed (higher expectation for the big win) than when the big win game is not executed.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up pattern in the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, referring to the step-up pattern determination table, one step-up pattern is selected from among a plurality of step-up patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variation production pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern. Decide on a step-up pattern.

In step E650-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up notice effect command corresponding to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer, and terminates the current jackpot notice effect determination process. As a result, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect corresponding to the step-up pattern is executed. Step images are displayed on the screen, and sound effects corresponding to the step images are output from the audio output device 9 .

(Jackpot notice pattern decision table)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a big-hit announcement effect determination process referred to when determining the announcement pattern of the big-hit announcement effect.

The jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the notice pattern to be selected are associated with the big win notice determination table.

The notice pattern includes a notice pattern without notice, a notice pattern in which a dialogue notice effect is executed, and a notice pattern in which a step-up notice effect is executed. The degree of expectation for winning the jackpot is higher when the up notice effect is executed.

(Main processing of the integrated control unit)
Main processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing main processing of the integrated control unit 141. As shown in FIG.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the supervising CPU 142, and the supervising CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, in step T1, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and in step T2, performs initialization processing. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the general ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the general RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

The supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupt in step T3, and refers to the reception buffer of the supervising RAM 144 in step T4 to determine whether or not the effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130m. If it is not received, the process proceeds to step T7, and if it is received, in step T5, an animation pattern is determined and set from the animation group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command. Perform animation pattern setting processing.

The production instruction commands include a customer waiting production command, an icon display command, a change production command, a variation production pattern command, a pattern stop pattern command, an opening production pattern command, a round production pattern command, an ending production pattern command, and the like.

In addition, the animation group includes the type of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) for displaying the effect image, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns, which are specified (specified) information such as parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying the image display device that displays the effect image, etc. It is a group formed by being

The types of animation groups include, for example, a production pattern group for displaying the animation of the production pattern 70a, an icon group for displaying a pending icon or animation of the icon, and a variable production animation such as a background or character. , a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, a special game effect group for displaying an animation for a special game effect, and the like.

In step T6, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from the sound group of the type corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is time to update the frame (to draw a new effect image). If there is, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the supervising CPU 142 performs display list generation/output processing for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands and outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for shaping effect images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of a plurality of units (frame update timing), and in this embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process, which will be described later, a drawing control command is set according to the content of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current frame number is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group with the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group with the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set for the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. , but the opposite is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 142 performs drawing command processing for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw the effect image based on the output display list. By executing this drawing command process, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer is transferred to the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) are displayed.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound list generation/output processing for generating a sound list composed of sound control commands and outputting the generated sound list to the sound control unit 148. FIG.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9. When outputting a new sound, It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 142 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound control unit 148 to output sound based on the output sound list. By executing this sound output command process, the sound control unit 148 causes the sound output device 9 to output sounds based on the sound list.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to synchronize (tune) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP). Output from the audio output device 9 is terminated.

The output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. may be stopped or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (addresses) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then proceeds to step T4. After that, the processing from step T4 to step T13 is repeated in a loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit)
Command reception interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141, and this processing is executed by receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs command reception processing for receiving the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control section 130m. Specifically, the process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 144 is performed, and the current command reception interrupt process is terminated.

(V blank interrupt processing of integrated control unit)
V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing V blank interrupt processing of the integrated control unit 141. In the V blank interrupt processing, display of one frame of effect image from the image control unit 145 (VDP) ends (1/30 It is executed each time (1/30th of a second = approximately 33 ms) a V blank signal transmitted every second (approximately 33 ms) is received.

In step T30, the supervising CPU 142 performs counter update processing for updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding "1"), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( VDP), frame buffer switching instruction processing is performed to instruct switching between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 .

As a result, the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are changed to the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms). will switch alternately.

In step T32, the supervising CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has switched, and terminates the current V blank interrupt process. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed each time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of the change effect at the time of winning)
34 and 35 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed (changed to) the blue character icon when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and wins.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal change period in which the normal change of the effect pattern 70a is performed. At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, a start opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 45 .

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, it is determined that the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed as a blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second generated notification sound is generated from the voice output device 9. output does not start.

Also, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen b is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started. . The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data e (background image, various variable effects images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. be.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image data e drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. be.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display), and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 continues.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Also, drawing of the image data i (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer. display is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data i drawn to the second frame buffer is displayed. Display on the device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generated notification sound in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , compared to the case where the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generated notification sound start with a lag in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

Also, while the output of the second generated notification sound was started in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon was displayed, the blue character icon was erased and the second generated notification sound was output. Since this is done at a frame update timing different from the stop of , the output of the second generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Example of change production at the time of winning)
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed (changed to) a blue character icon when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 and wins.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the production pattern 70a is variably displayed in a state in which the first pending icon and the second pending icon are not displayed, that is, in a state in which no pending memory is stored. A normal variation effect is being executed.

Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting hole 45, a starting hole winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m, icon change effect determination processing is executed, and a change scenario is performed. Suppose that "scenario 02" (the display mode of the first pending icon is displayed with a blue character icon when winning a prize) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 36(b), in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45, the first pending icon (blue character The icon) H11 is displayed, and the second notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(c), a combination (here, "234") indicating that the performance symbol 70a that has been variably displayed is a failure is stopped and displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(d), the performance pattern 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36(e), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and the central variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stop-displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and also ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the audio output device 9 during the variable presentation. The same applies to subsequent FIGS. 39, 42, 43, 46, and 47. FIG.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
37 and 38 are timings showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the blue character icon. Chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the start of the variable effect and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period during which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, drawing of image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, a variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control section 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 to change the first pending icon to a blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 generates the second sound. The output of the notification sound does not start either.

Also, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various fluctuation effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the stop effect display screen b is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the next variable effect (timing at which the variable effect is started). At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed, and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started. . The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data e (background image, various variable effects images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display), and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 continues. .

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image data e drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display), and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 continues. .

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display), and the output of the second generated notification sound from the voice output device 9 continues.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the second generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, dynamic effect image, various patterns) to the second frame buffer image, various icon images, etc.) is started, the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data i drawn to the second frame buffer is displayed. Display on the device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the sound output device 9 starts outputting the second generated notification sound in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , compared to the case where the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generated notification sound start with a lag in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

Also, while the output of the second generated notification sound was started in synchronization with the frame update timing when the blue character icon was displayed, the blue character icon was erased and the second generated notification sound was output. Since this is done at a frame update timing different from the stop of , the output of the second generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when changing the display mode of the first pending icon to a blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of fluctuation (during shift).

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the first pending icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, , and the stop display of the production pattern indicating the loss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(b), the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2. H11 and H12 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 displayed in the second display portion 70B2 is displayed with its display mode changed to a blue character icon when the shift display is performed in the first display portion 70B1. . Also, the CD icon is changed to a blue character icon and displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs the second notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(c), a stop display is performed with a combination (here, "164") indicating that the performance symbol 70a that has been variably displayed is lost, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(d), the effect symbol 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(e), while the production pattern 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a that has been variably displayed, the central fluctuation display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39(f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stop-displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and also ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of character effect change pattern 01)
40 and 41 are timings showing various timings when the character effect change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process, and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon. Chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variable performance (timing of starting the variable performance), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the performance symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m has decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the icon TH to a red character icon, but the character or the like is not displayed on the image display device, and the voice The output of the third generated notification sound from the output device 9 also does not start.

At timing T2, the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the second frame buffer, and is drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been displayed on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data e (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that was drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen d (character display). not started.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 63rd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen e (character display). is continued.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data g (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that was drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen f (character display). is continued.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 91st frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device. be.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data i (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn to the first frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, the image display device displays the normal variation effect display screen h (red character icon display), and the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started. . The timing of this T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specifying command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues, and the image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn in the first frame buffer. is started, the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, dynamic effect image, various patterns) to the second frame buffer. image, various icon images, etc.) is started, the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen j (red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, the image data l (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is displayed. Display on the device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the third generated notification sound in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , compared to the case where the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound are started with a lag in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, while the output of the third generated notification sound was started in accordance with (synchronized with) the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the red character icon was erased and the third generated notification sound was output. Since this is performed at a frame update timing different from that of stopping the output, the output of the third generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the red character icon, and the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Production example of character action change pattern 01)
FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character effect change pattern 01) during the variable effect.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), in a state in which the first pending icon and the second pending icon are not displayed, that is, in a state in which no pending memory is stored, the production pattern 70a is variably displayed. A normal variation effect is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42B, after the character C1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. A performance to fly towards is performed.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon as shown in FIG. is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(a), while the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporarily stopped display) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a which has been variably displayed, the center variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 43(b), an effect is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(c), a combination ( Here, "222") is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(d), the effect pattern 70a returns from reduced display to its original size and is stopped and displayed in the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

(Timing chart of pattern action change pattern 01)
44 and 45 show various timings when the symbol effect change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the red character icon. It is a timing chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variable performance (timing of starting the variable performance), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the performance symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, the drawing of the image data b (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn to the second frame buffer is Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame after the start of the variable effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variable period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 for changing the display mode of the first pending icon to a red character icon, but no change pattern or the like is displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 , the output of the third generated notification sound does not start either.

Also, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, transition symbol images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and is rendered to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been displayed on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period during which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, the image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, transition symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the first frame buffer, and is being drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (variation pattern display) is displayed on the image display device. No output is started.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the second frame buffer, and has been drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, transition symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the first frame buffer, and is being drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (variation pattern display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, transition symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the first frame buffer, and is being drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (changing pattern display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, changing symbol images, etc.) starts to be drawn to the second frame buffer, and has been drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen h (changing pattern & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third occurrence is notified from the voice output device 9. Sound output starts. The timing of this T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specifying command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the variable effect is started, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, stop effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that was drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data i on the image display device is started, and the image display device displays the temporary stop effect display screen i (changing pattern & red character icon display). output continues.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generated notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various patterns) to the second frame buffer. image, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) is started, the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the image data l (background image, dynamic effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is started to be drawn in the first frame buffer, and the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is displayed. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the temporary stop effect display screen k (changing pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the audio output device 9 starts outputting the third generated notification sound in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the frame update timing at which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , compared to the case where the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generated notification sound are started with a lag in frame update timing, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to

In addition, while the output of the third generated notification sound was started in accordance with (synchronized with) the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the red character icon was erased and the third generated notification sound was output. Since this is performed at a frame update timing different from that of stopping the output, the output of the third generated notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing of erasing the red character icon, and the interest in the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

(Production example of pattern action change pattern 01)
FIG. 46 and FIG. 47 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the suspended icon is changed to a red character icon (symbol action change pattern 01) while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped).

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in a state in which the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, the normal fluctuation for variably displaying the production pattern 70a A performance is running.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(b), "2" is displayed in the left variable display area, "3" is displayed in the right variable display area, and "change" effect pattern 70a is stopped in the central variable display area (temporary display). (stopped display), an effect like a lightning bolt appears from the changing pattern stopped (temporarily stopped) in the central variable display area toward the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1, When hit, the display mode of the first pending icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the third generated notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(c), the effect symbol 70a starts to be variably displayed, and the first pending icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display portion 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(a), the production pattern 70a of "2" is stop-displayed (temporary stop display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a which has been variably displayed, and the center fluctuation display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is variably displayed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 47(b), an effect is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the production pattern 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting a big win, and the combination ( Here, "222") is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the effect pattern 70a returns from reduced display to its original size, and is stopped and displayed in the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display is finished, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the production control unit 130m executes the change production at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command (starting entrance winning designation command or variation pattern designation command), Since the effect control unit 130m may execute the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the increase in variations of the change effect makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start-up winning designation command, the icon change effect determines the final display mode and scenario, but the method is not limited to this. . For example, it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode each time it becomes possible to change the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon). In addition, when the effect control unit 130m receives the starting entrance winning designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how it changes depends on the timing at which the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) can be changed. may be determined each time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there are four display modes of the icons (the relevant icon and the pending icon): a CD icon as a normal icon, and a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon as special icons. Although there are types, the number is not limited to four types, and may be more or less.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided that suggests that the likelihood of winning a big win is lower than that of the blue character icon and that it may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, since the expectation of winning the jackpot is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (after receiving the variation pattern designation command It is desirable not to change to a special icon in a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing). By doing so, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) are easily changed to a display mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot. Since the change to a special icon does not occur in the change effect that occurs in the game), it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed, increase the variation of the icon display mode, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Also, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation for the icon (the icon, the pending icon) is in the order of (CD icon <) blinking CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon It should be made higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the character action change pattern 01 and the symbol action change pattern 01, whenever the character C1 or the change pattern is displayed, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) is always changed. However, there may be a case where the character C1 and the changing pattern are displayed but are not changed (so-called fake effect). When such a fake effect is provided, the fake effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command). has a higher execution ratio than the change effect at the time of winning and the fake effect for the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command), or normal change pattern 02, character action change It is desirable to be able to execute only the ghost effect for the pattern 01 and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed multiple times during one variation effect, but may be executed multiple times. In this case, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command) have only one timing during the change effect, so the normal change The pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect occurring at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be executed multiple times. By doing so, there is a possibility that the display mode of the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) may change a plurality of times in one variable effect, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at the time of winning and normal change pattern 01) that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is determined by a predetermined command (starting win designation Although the frame update timing is set to be two frames after the number of frames in which the command or variation pattern specification command) is received, it is not limited to two frames later. It can be after the frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 was not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, when "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the change pattern designation command, but the timing is not limited to this timing. You may make it perform a change production|presentation in the frame update timing according to reception of a design memory designation|designated command and the production|presentation design designation|designated command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when executing "normal change pattern 02", "character action change pattern 01", and "symbol action change pattern 01", at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command Although the change effect is executed, the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command, without being limited to this timing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect for informing that the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon) has changed. However, it is not limited to such effects, and in addition to outputting an icon generation (change) notification sound, the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 can be used to display the changed icon (the icon, the pending icon). The lamp may be made to emit light in the same color as the color of the display mode of the icon). In this case, similar to the output of the icon occurrence (change) notification sound, at the frame update timing when the changed icon (the icon, the pending icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) At the same time (synchronously), light emission of the lamps of the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 may be started. Alternatively, the processing may be terminated in accordance with (synchronization with) the frame update timing for erasing the icon (the relevant icon, the pending icon).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the pending icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). good too.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted depending on the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted depending on the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the pattern effect change pattern 01 (change effect occurring at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) may be made unexecutable. By doing so, the first specific game state and the second specific game state are set to have a short change time, so that the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the , By limiting the execution of the pattern action change pattern 01 (variation effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command), the game characteristics of the first specific game state and the second specific game state are improved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game without spoiling it.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the suspended icon or the icon itself, but is not limited to such a change. Without changing the mode (with the CD icon remaining), a color effect indicating the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot may be displayed around the pending icon or around the icon, or around (near) the pending icon or the icon. A character indicating the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot may be displayed on the icon, or a character image suggesting an effect scheduled to be executed (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-run") may be displayed around (near) the pending icon or the icon. may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the change scenario is determined regardless of whether the big win is won or lost, but the change scenario may be determined with reference to the big win. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the final display mode of the icon, the current pending number, the hit/loss of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). .

In this way, when determining the change scenario with reference to the hit or drop of the jackpot, if you win the jackpot and change to the red character icon, the current number of reservations is "1" or "2". In the case of 3" and "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario in which the icon changes to the red character icon when winning is more likely to be selected.
In other words, if you have won a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the red character icon It can also be said to be the selection rate (%) at which it is difficult to select a change scenario that changes to an icon.
In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if the character icon changes to a red character because it is a loss, the change scenario is that the red character icon changes to the red character icon when the prize is won rather than the case where the jackpot is won and the red character icon changes. should be set to a selection rate (%) at which is difficult to select.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when determining the pending icon change pattern, it is determined regardless of the current pending number or the hit/loss of the jackpot. may Specifically, based on the mode of change of the pending icon in this variable effect, the current number of pending, the hit and drop of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%), one pending icon is selected from a plurality of pending icon change patterns. A change pattern may be determined.

In this way, when determining the pending icon change pattern with reference to the current pending number and the hit or loss of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and the red character icon changes, the current pending number is "1" or " The selection rate (%) may be set so that the "normal change pattern 01" is more likely to be selected as the reserved icon change pattern when the icon change pattern is "3" or "4" than when the icon change pattern is "2".
In other words, if you win a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the pending icon change pattern is better when the current pending number is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4" can be said to be the selection rate (%) at which "normal change pattern 01" is difficult to be selected.
In addition, when the jackpot is not won, that is, when the icon changes to a red character icon due to a loss, the pending icon change pattern is "normal change pattern 01" rather than when the jackpot is won and the icon changes to a red character icon. ” is set to a selection rate (%) that makes it difficult to select.

As described above, when changing to a red character icon in the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command), the current pending number is "1". or "2", the expectation for winning the jackpot is higher than that for "3" or "2".

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
A modified example of the first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 49A, a special symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is displayed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 . It differs from the first embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying the symbol TZ is provided.

Also, at the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70, the first reserved number display area 70E for displaying the first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1), and the current number It is also different from the first embodiment in that a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the number of 2 special symbol reservations (U2) is provided.

Incidentally, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F corresponds to the first pending information, the first pending icon display area The first pending icon displayed in 70B and the second pending icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D correspond to the second pending information, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C is the execution information. corresponds to

(Concrete example when the variable production is started from the customer waiting state)
A specific example when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 38 is a timing chart when the variable effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 49(a) to (f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the standby time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F, and the pending icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generated notification sound is the notification sound when the icon is generated. output is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display portion 70B1. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol pending number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of special symbols) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of customer waiting state 5th frame from ). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the first reserved number, and the display (decrease display) due to the change of the first reserved icon to the icon by animation are started. be.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(c), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". At the same time, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display portion 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect pattern 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated notification sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the effect The reduced display of the pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame timing (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after the start of the display (decrease display) due to the change to the first pending icon. At this timing, the display due to the change to the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and When the icon becomes TH, the reduction display of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 45th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 55th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variable effect (230th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left variable display area, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side, The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and is lost. A combination of effect symbols 70a indicating that there is a state is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (the 305th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The combination "365", which is the same as the pattern 70a, is stopped and displayed. Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, one frame in which the increase display by non-animation of the reserved number and the reserved icon is the shortest. To improve interest in a game by immediately shifting to a variable performance (reduced display of reserved numbers and display by changing to a reserved icon) without delaying because the game ends in a period of minutes (hours). becomes possible.

In addition, the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon is (frame Since it continues until the update timing, the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the display of the reserved number decreases by non-animation, and the display of the reserved icon changed to the icon by animation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing of completing the display of the decrease in the pending number (frame update) is earlier than the timing of completing the display of the pending icon changing to the icon (frame update), the special symbol is reserved. While directing that the numbers change, the reserved number makes it easier for the player to grasp that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, until the display of the change of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the display due to the change of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the pattern scrolling (update to the next effect pattern) starts, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable effect starts after the reserved memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases (changes from "0" to "1") during the customer waiting state, instead of executing the increased display of the reserved icon with non-animation, rather than the increased display of the reserved number Animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) may be executed so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of starting the decreasing display of the pending number and the display of the pending icon changing to the corresponding icon (decreasing display) at the same (frame update) timing, the timing of completing the decreasing display of the pending number (frame update) is changed. Either can be started first, as long as it is faster. By doing so, the degree of freedom of display control can be improved, and the fact that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased can be grasped at an early stage, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of starting the scrolling of the production pattern (update to the next production pattern) at the timing when the display due to the change of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change of the pending icon It is also possible to start scrolling the effect pattern (update to the next effect pattern) at (frame update) timing slightly before the display is completed.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases during the variable effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a timing chart showing an increase in the number of holdings during variable effects, and FIGS. 52(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (c) of FIG.

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect by the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 60th frame from the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1". At this timing, the non-animated increment display of the first hold number and the increment display of the first hold icon with animation are started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display portion 70B1, and enlarged display is started. In addition, the voice output device 9 outputs the first generated notification sound (beep).

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 70th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 ends and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of reserved special symbols increases, the increase display of the reserved number by non-animation and the increase display by animation of the reserved icon are executed, so that the player can know that the number of reserved special symbols has increased. It is possible to reliably recognize the game, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the increase display of the pending number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the number of special symbol pending changes. While directing this, the player can easily grasp that the reserved number of special symbols has increased by the reserved number, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the variable performance, the increasing display of the reserved icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of reserved special symbols increases during the customer waiting state. Therefore, the player can surely recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the pending number and the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending icon end in synchronization with the end of the increasing display of the pending icon (frame update), so special symbol pending The increase in the number can be effectively produced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the period (10 frames) related to the increased display of the suspended icon is shorter than the period (20 frames) related to the display of the suspended icon changing to the icon, the start of the variable effect is indicated. It can be emphasized, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending number and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing of completing the increased display of the pending number (frame update) is earlier, which may start first. By doing so, the increase in the number of reserved special symbols can be grasped at an early stage while the degree of freedom of display control is improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, instead of shortening the period of increasing display of the pending icon, the period of increasing display of the pending icon may be made longer than the period of displaying the pending icon to change to the corresponding icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, instead of shortening the period associated with the increase display of the pending icon than the period associated with the display of the pending icon changing to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Concrete example when the number of pending items increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 53 is a timing chart in which the number of holdings increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 54(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) of FIG.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 5th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the production pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating the failure and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. It has become. Also, "2" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and a first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. state.

The timing of T1 is the timing (the 20th frame after the stop display of the effect symbol 70a) at which the variable effect (variable display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started. At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the first reserved number, the display of the first reserved icon changing to the icon by animation, and the animation of the first reserved icon Decrease display by .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". . In addition, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 displayed in the first display portion 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second icon displayed in the second display portion 70B2 1 pending icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display portion 70B1. Furthermore, the special design TZ starts scrolling while the production design 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another production design).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increment display of the first pending number is started, but since the display by the change of the first pending icon and the decreasing display are being executed, the increment display and icon generation of the first pending icon are performed. The output of the generated notification sound, which is the time notification sound, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the reduction display of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the display due to the change of the first pending icon and the decrease display (the 40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the display due to the change of the first pending icon and the decrease display are terminated. In addition, the animation display of the waiting first hold icon is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 moved from the first display portion 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and As the icon TH becomes the icon TH, the first reserved icon H12 moved from the second display portion 70B2 is positioned at the center of the first display portion 70B1, and the reduction display of the production pattern 70a stops. In addition, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 and enlarged display is started, and the output of the first generated notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 is started. be.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the start of the increasing display of the first pending icon (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the output of the first generated notification sound are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display portion 70B2 and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (blink) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first pending icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stop-displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first pending icon ends, and the output of the first generated notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 ends and the normal size is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the scrolling (downward movement) of the production pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, when the number of reserved symbols is increased during the execution of the change display of the reserved icon to the icon and the reduced display of the reserved icon, the display due to this change and the reduced display are completed. Even before the timing (frame update), the increase display of the pending number is started, so the display by the change of the pending icon and the increase of the special symbol pending number even during the execution of the decreasing display It is possible to make the player recognize it and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved symbols increases during the execution of the display due to the change of the pending icon to the icon and the decreasing display of the pending icon, the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound are on standby. (Limited), and at the timing when the display due to the change of the pending icon and the decreased display are completed (frame update), the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started, so the number of special symbol pending It is possible to prevent the transition from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of outputting the notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number. good too.

Also, at the timing when the display due to the change of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started (the start is delayed than usual). , the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the notification sound may be started at the timing (frame update) slightly before the completion of the display due to the change of the hold icon and the decrease display. By doing so, it is possible to suppress difficulty in grasping the transition of the number of reserved special symbols, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special pattern pending increases during the increasing display of the pending icon, the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound are displayed in the same way as during the display due to the change of the pending icon or during the decrease display. While waiting (limiting), the increasing display of the pending number is started, and at the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon is completed (frame update), the increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the generated notification sound can be started.

(Specific example when the number of pending increases during specific reach production)
A specific example when the number of pending games increases during the specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 56(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to FIGS. .

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal ready-to-win effect executed before the SP ready-to-win effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are continued.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, a first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 90th frame from the start of the normal ready-to-win effect (the 430th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed on the screen. Move to the upper left and start zooming out.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the development effect is started (the 445th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, the development effect for developing into the SP reach effect continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and The effect pattern 70a being scrolled is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen and displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the development effect is started (the 460th frame after the change effect is started). At this timing, while the development effect is finished, the SP ready-to-win effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(c), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a in the left, middle, right variable display area is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and is displayed at the center of the screen. A confrontation production is started in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other. In addition, while leaving the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C, the suspended icon (here, only the first pending icon) is hidden together with the pending icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ is the same "7" symbol as the production symbol 70a, and is in the ready-to-win state.

The timing of T5 is the timing (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increment display of the first pending number is started, but since the SP reach effect (showdown effect) is being executed, the increment display of the first pending icon at this timing and when the icon occurs The generated notification sound, which is the notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(d), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for informing whether or not it is a big win) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decision effect) of the confrontation effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(e), in the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, and an effect pattern 70a displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. ("777") that indicates a big hit, temporarily stop (become in a swaying state).

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect (showdown effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP ready-to-win effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the non-animated return display and increase display of the first pending icon are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that has been displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen, and is temporarily stopped (shaking state). become). Also, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in the normal size on the second display portion 70B2.

Finally, the performance symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the performance symbol 70a, "777". Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), even before the timing of the end of this specific effect (frame update), the number of reserved numbers Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the reserved icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific effect is completed (reduced display At the timing when the losing performance pattern or the jackpot performance pattern is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), the increase display of the reserved icon is started, so it is possible to prevent the transition of the special pattern reserved number from becoming difficult to grasp, and the interest of the game is improved. It is possible to

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the increase display of the pending icon is performed by non-animation completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of reserved special symbols increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of executing the increase display of the pending icon and the timing of executing the increase display, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol reservations increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generated notification sound. It becomes difficult for the player to misunderstand that the player has done so, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific effect (SP ready-to-win effect), the display of the increased number of reserved numbers is executed, and the execution of the increased display of the reserved icon is waited (restricted). It is preferable that the display of the increased number of pending icons be performed collectively in one frame at the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update).

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols increases during execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the generated notification sound is output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number instead of not outputting the generated notification sound. good too.

Moreover, although the SP ready-to-reach effect was exemplified as the specific effect, the specific effect may include the SPSP ready-to-win effect, or may include the full rotation ready-to-reach effect.

(Concrete example when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
With reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, a specific example when the number of pending games increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state will be described. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing that the number of holdings increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 58(a) to (f) and FIGS. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect corresponding to (i);

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the start of the last (100th) variable effect in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(a), "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, the first pending icon display area 70B is deleted, and the second pending icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively. and the icon TH is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable performances that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "remaining 0 times") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, a game ball is directed toward the right side area of the game area 5a. A right-hand shot image MU prompting the player to shoot is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing (the 415th frame after the start of the variable effect) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2". At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first pending number is started, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon is generated Output of the generation notification sound is not performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the scrolling of the production pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the variable effect is started. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left, middle, and right variability display areas are temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (becomes in a swaying state) in the left, middle, and right variable display areas. A combination of performance symbols 70a indicating that the game is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started to show the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, and "special time end" indicating the end of the specific game state and a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. The number of times of the executed jackpot game "jackpot x 1" is displayed inside. Also, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed on the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(e), on the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are finished.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen is moved to the center of the screen and stopped, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. Stop display is performed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Also, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing (the 490th frame from the start of the variable performance) at which the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state is started. At this timing, the production pattern 70a, and the variable display of the special pattern TZ, the decrease display by non-animation of the second reservation number, the display by the change of the second reservation icon to the icon by animation, the animation of the second reservation icon A decreasing display, a non-animated return display of the first pending icon, and a non-animated increasing display of the first pending icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3". At the same time, the second pending icon (CD icon) H21 displayed in the first display portion 70D1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display portion 70D2 to the fourth display portion 70D4. The second pending icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 displayed in the .

Further, the first pending icon display area is restored and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display portion 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display portion 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Furthermore, the special design TZ starts scrolling while the production design 70a starts to be displayed in reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another production design). In addition, a left-hand shot image HU is displayed on the upper left of the screen to prompt the shooting of the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame after the start of the display by the change of the second pending icon and the decrease display (the 510th frame from the start of the previous variable effect). At this timing, the display due to the change of the second pending icon and the decrease display are terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(h), in the first image display device 70, the second suspended icon H21 moved from the first display section 70D1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and As the icon TH becomes the icon TH, the second reserved icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display section 70D2 to the fourth display section 70D4 are positioned at the center of the adjacent display section, and the reduced display of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame after the end of the display due to the change of the second pending icon and the decrease display (520th frame from the start of the previous variable effect). At this timing, the effect pattern 70a continues to scroll (downward movement).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbols 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbols 70a are displayed in the central variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

Thus, when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increased display of the first reserved icon is waited (restricted), while the increased display of the first reserved number is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of the specific performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, when the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first reservation icon occurs at the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends (frame update). is started, even if the increase display of the first reserved number executed before is overlooked, the increase of the first special pattern reserved number can be recognized, and the amusement of the game is improved. becomes possible.

In addition, when starting to increase the display of the first reserved icon at the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends, to perform the increased display of the reserved icon by non-animation completed in one frame, special symbol reservation Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of increasing the number and the timing of executing the increasing display of the pending icons, the sense of incompatibility of the player can be reduced, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, when the increase display of the pending icon starts at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the generated notification sound is not output, so the special symbol at the timing when the specific game state ends due to the generated notification sound It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, until the display due to the change of the pending icon to the icon is completed, the effect pattern does not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and at the timing when the display due to the change of the pending icon is completed (frame update) Since the scrolling of the production pattern (update to the next production pattern) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the production during the variable production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of reserved first special symbols increases during the specific game state, while executing the increased display of the reserved number, the execution of the increased display of the reserved icon is put on standby (restricted), At the timing when (the last variable effect in) the specific game state ends (frame update), the increased display of the reserved icons corresponding to the increase may be collectively performed in one frame.

In addition, when the number of first special symbol reservations increases during the specific game state, instead of not outputting the generated notification sound, the generated notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increasing display of the reserved number.

In the present embodiment, the first reserved icon display area 70B and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal game state, but the second reserved icon display area 70D is set ( Alternatively, only the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed) without displaying.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not the specific effects (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) are being executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during execution of the specific effect. , the icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F were set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but set on the second image display device 71 ( display), or may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. And, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the special symbol pending number by the lighting color and lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

(Ramp/Accessories Initial Processing of Drive Control Unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150. This processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the lamp/drive control unit 150. executed.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110 or not. If the power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "1" in step R103. If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is shifted to step R105 assuming that the character object origin return processing is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is executed in step R104. , and the present accessory initial processing is terminated. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial processing number is set. Processing such as setting to "2" is performed. Details of the origin return processing will be described later.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is "2" in step R105. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial action processing for the accessory is not executed, and the initial action processing for this time is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , terminates the initial processing of the character product. Specifically, an initial operation and initial light emission are performed to confirm whether or not the accessory operates normally, and an initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation process will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 60, the origin return processing for performing the operation of returning various accessories to the origin position, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and initial light emission of the various accessories. Operation processing is not executed at the same time. By doing so, the return operation to the origin position of each character and the initial operation and initial light emission of each character are not mixed, and the return operation, the initial operation and the initial light emission are separately confirmed. becomes possible.

Further, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 60, the origin return process is executed before the initial action process. By doing so, the various accessories are initially moved from the origin position, and it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Origin return processing of lamp/drive control section)
The return-to-origin process of the lamp/drive control section 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing origin return processing in the lamp/drive control unit 150. As shown in FIG.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the return-to-origin status of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is moved to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the driven object to be returned to the origin is selected as the first. 1 movable member 73, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

The ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R105-3. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the driving target to be returned to the origin is selected. The second movable member 74 is set, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position. The board accessories abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that the return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9. , the process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets, in the lamp RAM 150c, return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven. , In step R105-10, clear the board accessory abnormality determination timer.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the second movable member 74 is driven. If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessories (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

At step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the state of returning to the origin of the frame role object (production button 17) is "0". If the frame role object processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R105-13, and if the board role process number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R105-20.

At step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is shifted to step R105-19.

At step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and at step R105-15, the effect button 17 is held within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return error has occurred in the production button 17, and the process is moved to step R105-17. end the return-to-origin process.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18 clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame accessory (production button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, performs the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-described initial processing number. "2" is set, and the current origin return processing is terminated.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin position at the same time (simultaneously), but are returned in a predetermined order (first movable member 74). member 73→second movable member 74) to return to the origin position. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not the various board accessories have returned to the origin position. In addition, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other with difficulty in separation, it is possible to prevent the two movable members from applying loads to each other, so that both movable members are damaged at the same time. Inconvenience can be suppressed.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) It is possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) execute the return operation to . By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return motion of various roles, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial motion of various roles to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory to return to the origin position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the return motion of various accessories is never finished. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the various accessories are performing the returning motions even during the variable performance and the performance motions are not performed, and it is possible to prevent the amusement of the game from being lowered.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the operation of returning the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (the effect button 17) When both of the return operations to return to are completed, a process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. By doing so, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and the return operation and initial operation of various accessories are separately confirmed. becomes possible.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are arranged to return to their origin positions in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73→the second movable member 74). You may make it start the operation|movement which returns to. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various characters to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp/drive control unit)
Initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing initial operation processing of the lamp/drive control unit 150 .

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board accessory is "0". When the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is shifted to step R107-2, and when the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is shifted to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory are performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2" so that the initial action of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board role item initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the board role item initial motion pattern. The details of the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial motion pattern of the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the movement pattern.

The ramp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-7. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp is set in the RAM 150c The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the existing board accessory.

In step R107-9, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial action of the board accessory have been completed. If all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have not been completed, the process is shifted to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial motion of the board accessory have been completed, step R107-10 is performed on the board accessory. The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame role object processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation state of the frame role object (effect button 17) is "0". If the frame role-playing process number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame role-playing process number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the processing is shifted to step R107-14 assuming that the initial action of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame "2" is set to the frame role product processing number assuming that the initial action of the role product is not performed, and the process is shifted to step R107-17.

At step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role-playing object initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the initial motion pattern of the frame role-playing object. The details of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table will be described later.

At step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role item (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the frame role initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power ON command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "0", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role-playing product.

The lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is "1" in step R107-17. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is moved to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", in step R107-18, the lamp is set in the RAM 150c. The initial motion of the frame role object is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the frame role object.

At step R107-19, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial motion of the frame role-thing has been completed. If the initial action of the frame role has not been completed in all steps, the process is shifted to step R107-21, and if the initial action of the frame role has been completed in all steps, in step R107-20, the frame role The processing number is updated by +1. Specifically, if the frame role-playing process number is "1", the frame role-playing process number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of initializing the frame role-playing.

In step R107-21, the ramp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, this initial operation process is terminated.

The ramp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the initial processing number described above in step R107-23, and ends this initial operation processing. .

Thus, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 62, the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed. They can be executed simultaneously (simultaneously). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial actions of various roles, and to prevent obstruction of performance actions of various roles during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessories, the first movable member 73 and The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being completely broken down or damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 constituting the frame accessory, the initial operation of the production button 17 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as complete failure or breakage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which the return abnormality is occurring.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, even if the initial operation of the board role object in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame role object in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and the return abnormality is performed. Even if the initial action of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial action of the board accessory in which the recovery abnormality has not occurred is executed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the action of the accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial action process shown in FIG. 62, both the initial action of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial action of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. The initial operation process is terminated when the By doing so, even though one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performs the initial action, the other performs the effect action, and it is unclear whether it is the initial action or the effect action. will no longer occur.

(Board accessories initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

Types of commands at power ON, presence/absence of recovery abnormality information, and initial operation patterns to be selected are associated with the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. The number of steps is described.

The initial operation pattern includes patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01-03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns 04 to 06 that are determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 have no return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 moves in the order of small descent→return to origin→large descent→return to origin. , the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→return to origin, and during that period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and the first movable member 73 does not operate, and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→origin return, During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent→origin return→large descent→origin return, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue. Same as pattern 01.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member LED does not light up in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off. It is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04 .
"Initial operation pattern 08" is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that it is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality and the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that it is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality and the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described. This is because the member LED blinks in red to notify an abnormality.

A first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The first movable member and the second movable member have the same operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) in the initial operation. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory is the same at least in each process, and the operation time in each process may be the same, or the operation time in each process may be the same. can be different.

Further, the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

Further, when the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is to be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation not included in the initial operation at power restoration may be performed in the initial operation at power recovery, or an operation not included in the initial operation at power recovery may be performed in the initial operation at power on. In this way, it is possible to more easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

A second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second The difference is that the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

A third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although they are the same, they are different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

It should be noted that the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the customer waiting state is restored, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, on the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state, the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is made different, while the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Also, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored when the state is restored to the customer waiting state. good too. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

A fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply to restore the customer waiting state, the initial operation due to the restoration of the power supply during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are extinguished during the variable display of the special symbols or when the power supply is restored during the jackpot game. The member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same light emission manner as when the power is restored to restore the customer waiting state.

A sixth characteristic of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. If the movable member 74 has no return abnormality, the second movable member 74 is initialized without performing the initial movement of the first movable member 73, and if the first movable member 73 has no return abnormality, the second movable member The point is that when there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation according to the presence or absence of the recovery abnormality.

(Frame Accessory Initial Operation Pattern Decision Table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of power-on command and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described as a reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and during that period, the production button LED Lights up (lights up) in order of red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power supply restoration designation command indicating that it is in the state of waiting for customers is received, and the production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, During that period, the production button lights up (lights up) in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when receiving a second power restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress, The production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the production button LED is turned off during that period.

It should be noted that the continuous vibration time (2 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2 seconds) of the production button 17 are executed by operating the production button 17 during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable production. The time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance (1 second vibrates in the case of the valid period for the big win notice to expect the big win, and 5 seconds in the valid period for the decision performance to notify whether or not the big win will occur). Second vibration) is different time.

A first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. (Production button 17) differs in the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is an initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or an initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes possible.

As a second feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on performs an action that is not the initial action of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that it is designed to By doing so, it is easier to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes possible.

It should be noted that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame object.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the initial operation of the frame accessory (production button 17) is performed when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. is different in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

As a fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing this, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes.

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols, or at the time of power restoration during the jackpot game, the production button LED is turned off, but it is the same as at the time of power restoration in which the production button LED is restored to the customer waiting state. You may make it light up in a light emission mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is the number of luminous colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on, and the luminous color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One point is that the numbers are different. By doing so, it is easier to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes possible.

Although the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, the opposite may be done.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it contains an emission color that is not found in By doing so, it is easier to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by the restoration of the power (the control state of the game is restored). becomes possible.

It should be noted that the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power restoration may include a emission color that is not included in the initial emission color of the presentation button 17 upon power-on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial action pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable effect. This is different from the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. - 特許庁By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the vibration is the initial operation of the effect button 17 .

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial action of the effect button 17 where the detection of is performed. By doing so, the confirmation of the operation of the performance button 17 and the confirmation of the operation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for confirmation of the operation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T10, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball enters the first start port 45. When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting). When the time elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process has been described. In the case of power-on, after the initial screen is displayed, the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command, so that the setting change screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is received by the effect control board 130. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return action and initial action of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Operation processing is started, and initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Then, the second movable member 74 starts its return operation. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED blinks red ( (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is completed at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED complete the initial light emission and turn on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished, and the image display device displays a return-in-progress screen containing the characters "Please restart the game." , the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 3, second number of reservations = 0) as a command at power ON, the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device, so the first number of reservations A state in which no pending number is displayed in the display area 70E or the second pending number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-suspension display 83 has a display mode indicating "3", and the second sub-suspension display 84 has a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T7, the second When the initial motion of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the special symbol determination command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying (still display) is displayed (same as the second standby screen), and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound "Don♪".

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "2". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

In addition, when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and there is no pending memory, "0" is displayed on the first sub-holding display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The flow of the basic operation from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 is the same, except that the variable effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command in .

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

If the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case, in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "Reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has passed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It will be in a control state in which it is possible to execute the production.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the performance corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

Although the first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

If the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which the power supply (only the main power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line There is a third case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., but the first case will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without power supply to the main control board 110 . At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "Reading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the production.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration specifying command for customer waiting is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started, and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and A second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) is displayed. Also, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

Although the second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power restoration designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the second standby screen.

In addition, although the voice output device 9 was set to be in a silent state when the power restoration designation command was received, a notification sound (alert, etc.) is output to indicate (make it possible to grasp) that the power has been turned on. You may do so. In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power ON command cannot be received normally, the effect control board 130 is supplied with power, but the main control board 110 is not supplied with power. There are a second case in which the command communication line to the substrate 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state). Case 3 will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the characters "reading" is displayed.

At the timing of T2, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number, and , second pending number=0), the image display device maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when receiving the first special symbol memory designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the state where the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T4, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and , The second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the pending icon or the icon change, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 77 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed. , Sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure The hold indicator 86) also maintains its display contents.

Even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect), the customer waiting state designation command When the demonstration standby time elapses after the reception or after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration, the customer-waiting demonstration is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the power supply instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen. The first standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). It is clear." is output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Timing of T4 even when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen ), the power supply to the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state is stopped and then restarted. 17), the return operation and the initialization operation are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the like.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 78 shows that only power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case of resuming after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case will be described where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" production pattern 70a and a special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), or a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed. The member LED and effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the image display device displays the A second standby screen is displayed in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 79 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, during the execution of the variable production, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including characters "Please restart the game." The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first suspension display 83, sub second suspension display 84, Sub normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub normal figure reservation indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable Initial operation of member 74 is initiated.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, in the image display device, the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed). is displayed, and the stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9. Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this variable performance is a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, on the image display device, a confirmation screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a such as "777", which is a big hit effect symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the first sub-variation display 81 is displayed. Then, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot.

At the timing of T11, when receiving a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED will be in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. By adopting a mode, it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has passed before receiving the special symbol determination command, the temporary stop display or the stop display of the performance symbol 70a is not performed, The variable display on the first sub-variable display and the second sub-variable display will not end either.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 80 shows that the power to the main control board 110 is being supplied during the execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is executed during the execution of the jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command. A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the right-hand hit is displayed on the upper right of the screen. A right-handed display image MG is displayed, and a jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is stopped (still displayed) at the bottom right of the screen. In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for the middle of the jackpot transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a big win including characters "Please restart the game (during the big win)". While the return-in-progress screen for intermediate use is displayed and the audio output device 9 is silent, the sub information display device 80 (sub first change display 81, sub second change display 82, sub first hold display 83, Sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure holding display 86) maintains the display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as when the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 79 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable Initial operation of member 74 is initiated.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives a round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives a round designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead. , a normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

Note that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is being displayed, the normal ending effect screen is displayed. will be displayed.

Also, when a round designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen, the special jackpot performance screen is displayed until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command. may be continued, or a special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Also, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED go into the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are extinguished or set to a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation of the various roles and light emission (red flashing) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. will take place.

In FIGS. 77 to 80, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the game control state is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of the power supply is performed before displaying the effect symbol 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory Restoration The display mode of the specific display (initial screen+recovery screen display) to be displayed later on the image display device is made different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the image display device is performing a specific display (recovery screen display) that suggests restarting the power supply, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display is executed in the sub hold display. It is possible. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing. can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load involved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the sub-variation display device (first sub-variation display device 81, second sub-variation display device 82) restarts the supply of power that was stopped during the variation effect. When the control state of the game is restored by doing, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display ( flashing display) is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, for the sub-suspension displays (the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84), the return screen is displayed on the image display device. When it is (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received), the display mode shows the number of reservations. By doing so, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as in the case, that is, at the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various roles is performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the return operation of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the return operations of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (the first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light-emitting portions of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the effect button LED) are turned off. ing. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the recovery motion is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the character having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. From the timing after (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the production pattern 70a is displayed), the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) However, when the power supply stopped during the variable display of the special symbols is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the production symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (display of the screen during recovery middle) to perform the initial actions of various roles. By doing so, it is possible to perform initial actions of various roles at appropriate timing according to the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the board components (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) are turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of power supply restoration without accompanying, when the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (during the fluctuation display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83 , and the second sub-holding display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of holdings, and then the initial operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial action of the board role after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, , When the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the production symbol 70a), the sub-suspension display device (sub-first suspension display device 83, sub-second suspension display device 84 ) becomes a display mode indicating the number of pending, the initial operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial action of the frame role after the player has grasped the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the performance design 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the performance design 70a is displayed) to the initial stage of various roles It is designed to work. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the variable effect being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is finished, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the initial screen is simply displayed to restore various characters. Action, initial action, and initial light emission are not executed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, a winning sound is output when a special symbol storage specification command is received from the main control board 110 based on the winning of the game ball into the starting port. It is designed to By doing so, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When the control board 130 receives a variable start command from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect corresponding to the command, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. there is By doing so, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When a variable start command is received from the main control board 110 when the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, the variable effect is performed without executing the return action or the initial action of various characters. is set to run. By doing so, it is possible to execute the production using various accessories without being hindered by the return operation and the initial operation during the execution of the variable production.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the production control board 130, which is in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) has been completed, responds to the command. Even during the control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the production control board 130 is already in the process of changing production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed, the main control board 110 If a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting only the power supply to , the return operation of various roles and the initial operation ( including initial light emission). By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute the effect according to the command, such as during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It's like By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 responds to the command during the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which it is possible to execute the effect shown above, when the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110 , the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the reset operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are not executed, but the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9. You can also just output the .

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the production control board 130, which is in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) has been completed, responds to the command. Even during a control state in which it is possible to execute a corresponding effect, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It's like By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Even in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended or during the jackpot game, the main control board When the power supply to 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed, and the first standby screen is displayed. ing. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the production control board 130 is already in the process of changing production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, in response to the command. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the screen during recovery is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the performance control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as during the jackpot performance after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the initial screen is not displayed, and the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot is displayed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 executes the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect or during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which the power supply is possible, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power restoration designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated, and cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means can be smoothly performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, production control Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 stops while the power supply to the board 130 continues, the display screen up to that point can be displayed continuously. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, production control Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

(Modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
In FIG. 81, only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is performed during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed. A certain "753" effect symbol 70a and a second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) are displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device , the standby screen is displayed in a state in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub Information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal figure reservation display device 86) also maintains the displayed content.

In addition, even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the fluctuation effect, or (after the end of the customer waiting demonstration), the customer waiting demonstration is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished. do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "135" when the power is turned on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 issues an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". A sound is output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demo production after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and during the execution of the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and the jackpot Even if only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 stops and then resumes during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is changed. The example shown in FIG. 77 except that it is a customer waiting demo effect screen, a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen), or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). is basically the same as

(Modification 2 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 82 shows that only power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process have been completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modified example 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A description will be given of a case where the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply is still continuing.

At the timing of T1, if there is already a waiting state for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device shows the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

In addition, even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the fluctuation effect, or (after the end of the customer waiting demonstration), the customer waiting demonstration is started.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are extinguished.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub The general pattern holding display 86) is hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are pressed. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the initial pattern "753" at the time of power restoration. , and the second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED is lit in blue as initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is completed. At the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ).

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demo production after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and during the execution of the fluctuation production (losing fluctuation production, jackpot fluctuation production) and the jackpot Even when the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is changed. 78 to 80 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a fluctuation production screen (losing fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), or a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). is basically the same as the example above.

In FIGS. 81 and 82, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen on which the production pattern 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed while the initial screen is being displayed. , and the production button LED is turned off. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial action of various characters from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, the various characters start at the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or between the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen. may be started.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen is switched to the initial screen when the power ON command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received. You may make it switch to a screen. In this case, the initial action of each character may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or at the timing before the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen. At the switching timing, the initial actions of various roles may be started.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial actions of various characters may be started at the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen, or at the timing from the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. At the timing of switching to , the initial actions of various roles may be started.

(Modified example in the case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a modification in which the second movable member 74 returns abnormally after power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on to start supplying power, an initial screen displaying the words "reading" is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are returned to the origin position. Action is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off, and the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and The first standby screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is finished, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with the second movable member 74 having a return abnormality, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify that the return abnormality has occurred. (Abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the production button LED is completed and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) is performed. The initial operation process ends without executing the operation.

At the timing of T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball enters the first start port 45 When receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number = 1) based on the winning, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reservation icon display area 70B The first pending icon is displayed, the sub-first pending indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the prize winning sound "Pong♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display device 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED The LED and effect button LED are lit during variation, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is in a display mode indicating "0".

Even if the first movable member 73 has a restoration abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. , the first movable member 73, and the second movable member 74 are completed without executing the initial movement.

Further, even when the power supply is restored, if there is a restoration abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED inform the occurrence of the restoration abnormality. In order to do so, the red blinking (abnormality notification mode) is performed, and the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 .

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, not only the movable member with the return abnormality but also the return abnormality occurs. The initial operation is not executed for any movable member that does not have one. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member in which the return abnormality does not occur) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (fluctuation effect, jackpot game), thereby reducing the enjoyment of the game. can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flashes in red to notify recovery failure. By doing so, it is possible to easily recognize that there is an abnormality in the movable member, compared to the case where only the movable member LED provided for one of the movable members having the return abnormality is blinking in red.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member The effect button 17 that has no danger of colliding with the member 74 is designed to perform an initial action. By doing so, the operation of the effect button 17 can be confirmed, and an abnormality of the effect button 17 can be grasped.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, even if there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect button LED provided in the effect button 17 is restored. Initial light emission is performed instead of red flashing for announcing an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the effect button 17 has not returned abnormally.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial action process may be terminated without executing the initial action for the presentation button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial action process may be ended without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may flash red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
FIGS. 84 and 85 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 84(a), when the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is stop-displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the portion 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a red character icon, and the icon change effect is started. By changing to a red blinking state, the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84(c), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a which has been variably displayed, the central variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 84(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

After that, when the SPSP ready-to-win game develops, as shown in FIG. 84(e), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C displaying the icon is erased together with the icon. At this time, the prize-winning lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect of the prize-winning lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the prize winning opening lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 84(f).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 85(g), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "Reading", but the winning entrance lamp NR is turned off. maintained.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed over the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect (including the execution period of the promotion effect for whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect pattern is promoted to the jackpot effect pattern of higher value for the player). However, here too, the win-win lamp NR remains turned off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that becomes a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. A stop screen (second standby screen) in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed) are displayed without performing fluctuation), To end a variable performance without resuming a lamp change performance.

At this time, the same CD icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the rectangular By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started and displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2. A first pending icon (CD icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "777" that suggests the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing fluctuation/swing display) ("3" that formed the reach state before power off) ↓ A combination of performance symbols different from the reach combination by the performance symbols of 3”), and a stop screen with the special symbol TZ stopped (still displayed) is displayed, and the lamp change effect is resumed at the winning entrance lamp NR. The variable production ends without doing.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variation performance in which normal variation is performed, variable performance in which shortened variation is performed, variable performance in which normal reach performance is performed, SP reach performance is executed), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is resumed and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation/swing display) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed and "753", or a combination of the same production pattern as the ready-to-win combination by the production pattern that formed the ready-to-win state before the power was cut off, or a combination of different production patterns, which is a stop display (static display). will be

Also, with regard to the special symbol TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, whether the state after that is the normal game state or the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) Regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol TZ, the same display mode (shape, design) will be stop-displayed (stationary display) with numbers that are in the same combination as the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 85(l), information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that it is the first jackpot game) is displayed on the image display device. An opening effect is started, and the first reserved icon display area 70B, the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, after the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation), the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable production that is stopped and displayed is resumed. After the game control state is restored, the special symbol fluctuation time has passed and the special symbol confirmation command (if the special symbol confirmation command is missed and the customer waiting state is entered after that, the customer waiting state is specified) command) is received, the effect pattern 70a is stop-displayed (stationary display) without being temporarily stopped (shaking fluctuation/swing display). By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed (still displayed) after the power supply stopped during execution of the loss variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When it is done, the combination of the production design which is the initial design at the time of power restoration is stopped (still displayed) instead of the normal losing production design. By doing so, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as determining the stop display (stationary display) effect pattern by lottery, and the power supply is restored by restoring the control state of the game. It is possible to grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time of stop has ended.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the big hit variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When there is, the combination of the jackpot production pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed). By doing so, it is possible to grasp that the game control state is restored and the power supply is restored, and that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variable performance. Become.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, after the control state of the game is restored, when the combination of the jackpot production pattern is stopped and displayed (still display), the reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (stationary display) a combination of big hit production patterns different from the reach combination by the production pattern that was used. By doing so, the player does not have to be conscious of the jackpot effect pattern which was scheduled to be displayed stopped before the power supply is stopped, and the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted can be reduced.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the execution period of the promotion production described above is included in the variable production executed when the power supply is stopped, the power supply is restarted and the control is performed. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect pattern is stopped and displayed (still displayed) without executing the promotion effect. By doing so, no useless performance is performed until the performance pattern is stopped (still displayed), so that the variation performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped was the big hit variation performance. can be grasped immediately by the player.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the losing variation production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and when the jackpot fluctuation production is executed, it is stopped. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after the power supply is restarted is the same as when the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored. By doing so, simple display control can be performed without being conscious of whether the losing variation effect is being executed or the big win variation effect is being executed, and the display after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load related to control.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the special symbols TZ are displayed in the same manner as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. Then, the numbers that are the same combination as the production pattern 70a are stop-displayed (still-displayed). By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the variation performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped has ended.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the power supply that was stopped during the display of the icon is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) is started, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is changed to a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the stopped power supply is resumed while the pending icon is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is finished, and then the next operation is performed. Until the variable effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the suspended icon display area, so that the suspended icon display space (display area) can display the effect image such as the background image. It is now reserved and has a pending icon. By doing so, even when the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the suspended variable effect is not extinguished, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. becomes.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the variation production corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) When the stopped power supply is resumed during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR is hit big without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (extinguishing or white lighting) is set so as not to suggest the degree of winning expectation. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not being executed. It becomes possible.

After the end of the execution period of the big hit variation effect, the stop screen in which the big win effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped is displayed. A second standby screen may be displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed).

Also, after the execution period of the big hit variation performance is over, the stop screen in which the big win performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stop-displayed is displayed, but the stop screen is not displayed and the jackpot performance pattern 70a is displayed. You may start the opening effect of the jackpot game in which is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening effect, a jackpot special pattern TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special pattern of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, may be displayed. TZ may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the loss variation performance is over, the performance symbol 70a which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the big win variation performance is over, the big win is performed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed.

In addition, when it is made possible to execute a specific effect of inciting whether or not the big win game is executed without displaying the ready-to-win state effect symbol 70a in the variable effect (makes people expect that the big win game is executed), the specific effect After the power supply stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) in the case of a loss, and in the case of a big win. You may make it stop-display (still display) the big hit production|presentation pattern 70a.

Further, when the combination of the jackpot performance symbols is stopped (still displayed) after the game control state is recovered, one of the combinations of the plurality of jackpot performance symbols corresponding to the type of the jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is “333” and “777”, and the combination of jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is “222” and “ 444", "666" and "888", and the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is "111", "555" and "999".

Then, when the ready-to-win combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" constituting a part of the combination of the jackpot performance symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game, the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, one of ``333'' and ``777'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols different from the ready-to-win combination of the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of ``111'', ``555'' and ``999'' (a combination of jackpot performance symbols that are the same as or different from the ready-to-win combination by the performance symbols forming the ready-to-win state) should be stopped.

In addition, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the special symbol TZ is not stopped (still displayed) with a number that is the same combination as the production pattern 70a, but is a combination different from the production pattern 70a. You may make it stop display (still display) with a number.

Further, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, when the normal game state and the customer waiting state are displayed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed), while the power supply is stopped. When the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state) and customer waiting state are after the restart and the control state is restored, stop display (stationary display) of the production pattern 70a, The special symbol TZ may be stopped (still displayed).

(An example of an effect when the power supply to the game machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect)
FIG. 86 and FIG. 87 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous notice effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the losing effect symbol 70a of "728" is stop-displayed when the player is on.

After that, when the variable performance that is the preliminary variation is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the third display portion 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started, and the first pending icon ( The final display mode of the icon (= red character icon) is changed to a blue character icon to start the pending icon change effect, and accordingly the winning entrance lamp NR changes from the off state to the blue flashing state. By doing so, the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 86(d), after the effect symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the losing effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .

After that, when the variable production that is the preliminary fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started, and the pending icon change effect and the lamp change effect are continued. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device becomes non-display and the winning hole lamp NR is extinguished as shown in FIG. 86(g).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain the turned-off state without resuming the change performance.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. is displayed over the execution period of the pre-variation, but the win-win lamp NR remains turned off here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the advance variation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol determination command indicating a failure), as shown in FIG. A stop screen in a state in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the lamp change production is changed in advance without restarting. ends.

At this time, the CD icon, which is not the blue character icon before the power supply is stopped, is displayed in the first display portion 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, by displaying the rectangular area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP ready-to-win effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 1 pending icon (CD icon) is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, when a lottery for the newly executed icon change effect is won, the display mode of the icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue character icon according to the result. The icon change effect is started. On the other hand, since the lottery relating to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the lamp change effect is not restarted while the prize winning entrance lamp NR is kept turned off.

In addition, when a lottery relating to the alternative notice effect performed by restarting the power supply is won, the mini-character MCB is displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the mini-character MCB moves out of the frame to substitute. A preview effect is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(l), the dialogue uttered by ally A is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the image display device, and a voice corresponding to the dialogue from the voice output device 9, "Your chance is here!" is displayed, the dialog announcement effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(m), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and the central variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 87(n), SP reach effect is started, effect pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size at the upper left of the screen, first pending icon display area 70B, and second The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 87(o), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. "333" jackpot performance symbol 70a suggesting the type of jackpot game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation), then stop-displayed, and the variable performance is completed.

In addition, while the initial screen and/or the returning screen are displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot) ) to turn on the winning entrance lamp NR.

In addition, when the special symbol determination command cannot be received during the fluctuation production (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the production pattern 70a), the temporary stop display (shake fluctuation) production pattern 70a does not stop and display. The temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) is continued.

Thus, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the continuous notice production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration It is possible to execute an alternative notice effect different from the continuous notice effect without restarting the continuous notice effect in the variable effect corresponding to the determination information. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice performance due to the stoppage of the power supply, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the reserved icon displayed as a special icon (including the case where it has not changed until the final display mode and the case where it has changed until the final display mode) When the power supply stopped during icon display is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspended icon displayed as the special icon is displayed as the normal icon. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after resuming the power supply without being conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the icon change production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration In the variable effect corresponding to , the pending icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed again. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change effect due to the stoppage of the power supply, thereby making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, during the execution of the variation production corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration, even if the icon change production is executed again, The continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply was cut off is no longer executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the variation production corresponding to the holding icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production (the lighting color (blue, red , Rainbow) Even if the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure determination information to be changed to the rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the lamp change effect is not restarted. The lamp NR is set to a notification mode (extinguished or lit in white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation for winning a big win. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not being executed. It becomes possible.

(Concrete example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detecting means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wires from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. and

First, FIG. 88(a) will be described.
FIG. 88(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in a state in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). .

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is half-inserted and only the first start port detection switch 45a is disconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. , and the effect control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG containing the words "connection error detected" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 issues an alarm and a message "connection error". A connection error notification sound is output.

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start opening detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released. However, the connection error notification continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 88(b) will be described.
FIG. 88(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection states of the first starting door detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T1. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in a state in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). .

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is inserted halfway and the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are disconnected, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the performance control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays the characters "Magnetic Error Detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "Radio Wave Error Detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the characters "Connection Error" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error annunciation image EG including the words "detected" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error annunciation sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "Magnetic error".

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first starting port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been cancelled, but various error reports continue until the game machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, when the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the occurrence of the connection error is not detected by the main control board 110, and the error Notification is not executed.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIG. When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a) change from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error is notified. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (connector half-inserted, disconnection, fraudulent act), and to take prompt action.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, the specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) is non-operating. Even when the connected state returns to the connected state, the error notification of the magnetic error or the radio wave error continues until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts with respect to the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the error notification is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of cheating is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

It should be noted that even when the power supply to the game machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (the starting port detection switch, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , During the display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (at the start of display of the first standby screen or the second standby screen), various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) may be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues. The connection error notification may be canceled when the unconnected state changes to the connected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent conduct is low, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the radio error notification sound associated with a radio wave error with a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error and the connection error notification sound associated with a connection error with a lower priority (importance) than a radio error are If they occur at the same time, they are not output. However, it is also possible to output notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred in order.

In the magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may be output. may not be output.

(Second embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings.

(Ramp/Accessories Initial Processing of Drive Control Unit)
The accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control section 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the accessory initial processing of the lamp/driving control unit 150 .
Here, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same processes as those of the role product initial process of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted, and the different processes are described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag to be set in the lamp RAM 150c when power supply is started. If there is no power ON flag, the process proceeds to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received. , the process moves to step R102B, and if the power-on command is not received, the process moves to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, which should have completed the restoration operation and the initial operation since the power was turned on last time) has passed, the process proceeds to step R103, and the predetermined period of time has not passed. In that case, the process moves to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes origin return processing of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial processing number updated in each processing of the accessory initial processing. is set to "1".

As described above, according to the modified example of the role initialization process shown in FIG. 89, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and initial operation of various roles are started. It's becoming By doing so, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether the control state of the game is initialized or whether the control state of the game is restored. It is possible to reduce the processing load associated with the operation.

Further, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 89, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, the power-on command (power-on designation command, power supply restoration designation command), the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation are performed again. By doing so, the main control board 110 did not start up normally, and the power-on command was sent later than usual (an abnormality related to the power supply line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 occurred. It is possible to grasp that

Note that when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, regardless of the elapsed time since the power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, the return operation of various characters, and , the initial operation may be performed. In this way, the player does not have to be conscious of the elapsed time since the power supply to the game machine 1 was started, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing when the power ON command is received.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power-on with initialization of main RAM 110c.

Power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white. Then, the lighting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T8, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T9, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power-on)
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. . In addition, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white, and the effect button LED turns red → Lights up in order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. finish.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a command when the power is turned on, which is transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes to alternately light red and white. , the light emission mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in order of red→green→blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. finish.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the production button after turning on the power)
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process is described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change to alternately turn on red and white. do.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state is established.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without changing the setting has been described. When the power is turned on, after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, the effect control board 130 receives the setting change designation command, so that the setting change screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is effected. When the substrate 130 receives the signal, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return action and initial action of various accessories (the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the production button 17) are started. . Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no recovery error in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as a power-on time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change to light up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during customer waiting (white light). Become.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored)
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return-to-origin process ends with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started. . At this time, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white, producing a production The light emission mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial motion of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial motion of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial motion processing is performed without executing the initial motion of the second movable member 74. When the process ends, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after the power is restored)
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished.
In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is finished with the return abnormality occurring in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change and light up in blue. .

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial action process is performed without executing the initial action of the first movable member 73. When the process ends, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, and the sub-first variable display 81 starts variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on. It becomes lighting during variation, and the sub first suspension display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a recovery error in the production button after the power is restored)
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the restoration operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where the production button 17 has a return abnormality, the restoration operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. Operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for waiting customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emission mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed).

Furthermore, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At timing T4, when the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned on during customer waiting (white lighting).

At the timing of T6, when receiving the first special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45, the reservation displayed in the first number of reservations display area 70E The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound is output from the audio output device 9 "Pong♪" is output.

At the timing of T7, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "0". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, and the first sub-variation display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. Lights up, and the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "0".

(Concrete example when the state after power restoration is during variable display of special symbols and with reserved memory)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during variable display of special symbols (loss variable display) and with reserved storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return processing is started, and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started to return to the origin position. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the returning motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, and the initial motion processing is started, and the initial motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and turns on alternately in blue and white, The light emission modes of the second movable member LED and the production button LED change and light up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a recovery-in-progress screen including characters of "Please restart the game", and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first number of reservations = 3, second number of reservations = 0) as a command at power ON, the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device, so the first number of reservations A state in which no pending number is displayed in the display area 70E or the second pending number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the first sub-suspension indicator 83 becomes a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-suspension indicator 84 and the sub-normal figure suspension indicator 86 become a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T4, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T5, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At the timing of T7, when the special symbol determination command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device stops displaying (still display) is displayed (same as the second standby screen), and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound.

At this time, three first suspended icons are displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes to "2". Effect (variation display of effect symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, movement of pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "2".

(Concrete example when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when power is turned on.

If the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case, in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., will be described here.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the game machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110 and power supply is started. Then, the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain extinguished. In addition, the first sub-variation display 81, the second sub-variation display 82, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 is in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T3, when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial motion processing is started, the initial motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started, and the initial motion of the effect button 17 is started. At timing T5, when the initial action of the effect button 17 is completed, and at T5 the initial action of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the time T6, the second movable When the initial action of the member 74 is finished, the initial action process is finished, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which the effect corresponding to the command can be executed.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the performance corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial light emission, and the effect button LED light up in order of red→green→blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. After that, when the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the sound becomes silent.

Although the first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display of the dark display screen, or may be output from the start of display of the first standby screen.

(Concrete example when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power restoration specifying command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

If the power restoration designation command cannot be received normally, power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected to the main control board 110 ( The first case in which the power supply (only the main power supply) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line There is a third case where the connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state), etc., but the first case will be described here.

Note that the timings from T1 to T7 are the same as the timings from T1 to T7 in FIG. 99, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T7 will be described.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 is started even though the control state is such that the effect corresponding to the command can be executed. , and the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed). The output device 9 remains silent.

After that, when the return action of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return action of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept turned off.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED is alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and effect button LED are lighted in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T9, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T10, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. Lights up (lights up in white).

Although the second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power restoration designation command, the dark display screen as a kind of initial screen is displayed instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, although the audio output device 9 is set to be in a silent state when a power restoration designation command is received, an information sound (alert, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (to be comprehensible) is emitted for a predetermined period. You may make it output over (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received may be issued, or a different alarm may be issued.

In FIGS. 99 to 100, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

(Concrete example when the command at power-on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power supply restoration designation command cannot be received normally, the case where power is not supplied to the main control board 110, the case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line connector is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state).

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 99, so the description is omitted here, and the timing after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, while the effect control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the special symbol storage designation command (the first pending number and the second When the pending number=0) is received, the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial motion processing ends, and the display mode of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED changes and turns off. becomes.

At the timing of T7, when receiving the first special symbol memory designation command (first reserved number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the first sub-suspension display 83 changes to the display mode indicating "1", and the voice output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At the timing of T8, when a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, and , The second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ, the movement of the pending icon or the icon change, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

(Concrete example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 102 shows that only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 in the case of resuming after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is the case where the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then contacted due to an external factor. , the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is in a disconnected state (including a half-inserted state), and then the connector is in a connected state. mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the state of waiting for customers after the returning operation of various characters and the initial operation are completed, and the image display device displays the initial symbol "753" at the time of power restoration. 70a and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed) or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button are displayed. The LED is lit while the customer is waiting.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first 1 fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure holding display 86) also display contents maintain.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as initial light emission, the effect button LED is lit in white as initial light emission, and the image display device is powered on. The first standby screen is displayed in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). It is clear." is output.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the customer waiting lighting (white lighting) ), and when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance (losing variation performance) after the return operation of various roles, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, and the jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) Timing of T4 even when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as being executed. The screen displayed on the image display device before receiving the power-on designation command is a variable effect screen (losing variable effect screen, jackpot variable effect screen) or a jackpot effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen ), the power supply to the main control board 110 during the customer waiting state is stopped and then restarted. 17), the return operation and the initialization operation are performed, and an initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9, and the like.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various roles, as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

(Concrete example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
In FIG. 103, only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 2 in the case of resuming after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 A case will be described where the main power supply is restarted while the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if there is already a waiting state for customers after the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound are completed, the image display device shows the initial pattern at the time of power restoration. A second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and effect button LED are lit while the customer is waiting.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the completion of the variable effect executed after the completion of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various roles, the image display device displays a failure. A standby screen in which the shown production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed) or a customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the first sub-holding display 83, the second sub-holding display 84, and the sub-normal drawing holding display 86 are in a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and displays sub-information. Device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure holding display 86 ) also retains the displayed content.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 resumes, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first holding display 83, the sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

It should be noted that even if the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether it is after the end of the variable effect, or When the demonstration standby time elapses (after the end of the previous customer-waiting demonstration effect), the customer-waiting demonstration effect is started.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command as a power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started, the first movable member 73, and the effect button 17. return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed). A second standby screen of status is displayed.

Also, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first reservation number and second reservation number = 0) as a power ON command, the first reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and the second reservation number "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub first variation display 81, the sub second variation display 82, and the sub normal pattern variation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Also, the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84 display "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return motion of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return processing is performed. After the end, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin processing is completed, the initial operation processing is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. Lights up (lights up in white).

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, the initial operation and initial light emission of various roles are performed in the same manner as the specific examples shown in FIGS.

(Concrete example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 104 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process is completed (during the power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, during the execution of the variable production, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At timing T1, the variable effect is being executed, the image display device displays the variable effect screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during variation. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 is performing variable display, and the sub-first suspension display 83 is displaying the pending number "1".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power supply restoration designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game" is displayed, and the audio output device 9 is silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub The second fluctuation display 82, the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, the sub-normal figure suspension display 86) maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in the loss of the variable effect. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the voice output device 9 is displayed. output a stop sound. Also, "1" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second pending number display area 70F. Further, the first sub-variation display 81 is in a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that there is a loss.

In addition, when the result of this variable performance is a big hit, when the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol determination command, the determination display of the big hit of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a such as "777", which is a jackpot effect symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the first sub-variation display 81 is displayed. Then, a big win display mode is displayed to indicate that a big win has been made, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9 .

At the timing of T11, when receiving a variation start command (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the variable display is started on the sub-first variable display device 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during fluctuation, and the sub-first reservation display device 83 , "0" is displayed.

Note that at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but may be extinguished or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has passed before receiving the special symbol determination command, the temporary stop display or the stop display of the performance symbol 70a is not performed, The variable display on the first sub-variable display and the second sub-variable display will not end either.

(Concrete example 4 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 105 shows that the power supply to the main control board 110 during execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed (during power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which only supply is stopped and then restarted;

Here, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is executed during the execution of the jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute the performance according to the command. A case in which the supply of the main power is resumed while the supply of the main power is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the big win effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the big win effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the big win special pattern TZ ("777") is displayed. is stopped (still displayed). In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variation display 81 displays the big win (lights up).

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-ordinary figure fluctuation display 85, sub-ordinary figure reservation display 86) also maintains the display content. .

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and the game control state is restored. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first holding display 83, The sub-second holding display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure holding display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives a power supply restoration designation command for the middle of the jackpot transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return processing is started and the first movable member 73 and the origin of the effect button 17 A return motion to the position is initiated.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights in blue as initial light emission, the effect button LED lights in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, a during-returning screen for during-jackpot including characters of "Please restart the game (during-jackpot)" is displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first holding display 83, sub second holding display 84, sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub normal A view hold indicator 86) maintains its display contents.

It should be noted that instead of displaying the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot, the same during-return screen as in the case where the power supply (only the main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variation performance shown in FIG. 104 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return motions of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are completed, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return motion of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the return-to-origin process ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 are started.

At the timing of T7, the initial action of the effect button 17 is finished, and at the timing of T8, when the initial action of the first movable member 73 is finished, the initial action of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives a round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of a normal jackpot performance screen, and the jackpot special pattern TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F. Furthermore, the sound output device 9 outputs a big hit effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED light up during the big win.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives a round designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead. , a normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

Note that when the effect control board 130 receives the ending designation command, not when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is being displayed, the normal ending effect screen is displayed. will be displayed.

Also, when a round designation command is received while the special jackpot performance screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot performance screen, the special jackpot performance screen is displayed until the performance control board 130 receives the ending designation command. may be continued, or a special jackpot performance screen may be continued until the performance control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a variation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Also, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are extinguished or in a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. , it may be made possible to grasp that the power supply restoration designation command is received during the fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various roles, as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. will be done.

In FIGS. 102 to 105, when a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command is received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are restored. However, the initial motions of various roles may be performed without performing the return motions.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the game control state is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of production patterns 70a are the first combination. When the first initial effect pattern ("135") is displayed and the game control state is restored, the second initial effect pattern (" 753”) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting resumption of the power supply is performed before displaying the effect symbol 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (display of the initial screen only), and during the variable display of special symbols and without / with hold memory Restoration The display mode of the specific display (initial screen+recovery screen display) to be displayed later on the image display device is made different. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the pending icon display area (first pending icon display area 70B, second pending icon display area 70D), and sub pending display (sub first pending display It is possible to perform a pending display indicating the number of pending memories on each of the device 83 and the second sub-holding display 84), and the power supply stopped in the state where there is a pending memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, while the image display device is performing a specific display (recovery screen display) that suggests restarting the power supply, the hold display is not executed in the hold icon display area, but the hold display is executed in the sub hold display. It is possible. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing. can be suppressed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demonstration effect is restarted and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped (still displayed). By doing so, it is not necessary to be conscious of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load involved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, for the sub-variation display device (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82), the power supply that was stopped during the variation effect is resumed. When the control state of the game is restored by doing, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during recovery is displayed), the variable display ( flashing display) is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after restarting the power supply.

In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed (displaying the screen during recovery) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, for the sub-suspension displays (the first sub-suspension display 83 and the second sub-suspension display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. When it is (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received), the display mode shows the number of reservations. By doing so, it is possible to allow the player to grasp the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (the first sub-variation display 81 and the second sub-variation display 82) performs a variable display (blinking display) while the recovery screen is being displayed on the image display device, In accordance with the start of this variable display, the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) may display the number of holdings. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed when the control state of the game is restored, and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing at which the initial screen is displayed), the return operation of various roles is performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the return operation of various roles, and to reduce the processing load of the return operations of various roles.

90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17), the light-emitting portions of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, the production button LED) are turned off. ing. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish from the initial motion of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the recovery motion is being performed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when there is a recovery abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the recovery abnormality flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, anomaly notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the accessory having the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the abnormality is notified by flashing red the light-emitting part of the character having the return abnormality, the display is continued until the next variable effect is started. The anomaly notification continues. By doing so, it is possible to reliably notify the accessory having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the role, a return operation may be performed for returning the role having the return abnormality to the origin position at the timing when the next variable effect is started. Further, in the case where the abnormality notification is performed by flashing red the light-emitting portion of the accessory having the recovery abnormality, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. At the same timing as the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed), the initial actions of various roles are performed. By doing so, it is possible to avoid complicating the control of the initial motions of various roles and reduce the processing load of the initial motions of various roles.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the board accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) are turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of power restoration without accompanying, the sub-suspension display (the first sub-suspension display 83, the second sub-suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device It is designed to perform an initial operation before By doing so, it becomes easier to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, regarding the frame role (effect button 17), when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, , The initial operation is performed before the sub-suspension display (sub-first suspension display 83, sub-second suspension display 84) becomes a display mode indicating the number of suspensions (the screen during recovery is displayed on the image display device) It's like By doing so, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the presentation is hindered by the initial motion of the frame role. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the production pattern 70a is output. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the variable effect being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is finished, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even if the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the recovery operation, initial operation, Then, the display of the initial screen is continued while executing the initial light emission. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even if the display of the initial screen is continued due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), When a special symbol memory specification command is received from the main control board 110 based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port when the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command, a winning sound is generated. is output. By doing so, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has entered the starting hole.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the initial screen is displayed due to failure to receive power-on commands (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command), the effect When receiving a variation start command from the main control board 110 after the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to the command, the variable effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. there is By doing so, the start of the variable performance is executed without delay, and the variable performance can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbols.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130, which is in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during the control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing this, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as during the variable effect after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. is received again, the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing this, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. is received again, the return action of various characters and the initial action (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing this, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation becomes possible to eliminate

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute the effect according to the command, such as during the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It's like By doing this, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in this state, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to By doing this, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various characters. You can just do it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the production control board 130, which is in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed, responds to the command. Even during a control state in which it is possible to execute a corresponding effect, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by stopping and then restarting only the power supply to the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It's like By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

In addition, the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as the returning operation of various roles and the variable effect after the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed and the jackpot effect. Even in the state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. By doing this, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as during the variable effect after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) is completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command. When it is received, the screen during recovery is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 is already in response to the command, such as during the jackpot effect after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a special effect, only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power restoration designation command When it is received, the initial screen is not displayed, and the during-return screen for the mid-jackpot is displayed. By doing so, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 executes the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect or during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended. Even in the control state in which the power supply is possible, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is displayed. The first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power restoration designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 deviate, the deviation can be eliminated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, production control Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 stops while the power supply to the board 130 continues, the display screen up to that point can be displayed continuously. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, during the control state (customer waiting state, variable production, jackpot production) in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command, production control Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued and then the power supply is restarted, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

The control states in which the production control board 130 can execute the production according to the command are the customer waiting state, the variable production, and the jackpot production. The state of waiting for a command (for example, during display of the initial screen) may also be included in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command.

In the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters) of "1" to "9", but may be composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decorative portion). In this case, it is preferable to use a different character for each number, such as "1" and character A, "2" and character B, and so on. Also, in the normal game state, the production pattern 70a is displayed with numbers + characters, and in the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state), the production pattern 70a is only numbers or numbers + characters smaller than the normal game state. can be displayed with

Also, three types of production modes A to C may be provided in the normal game state, and at least one of the number design and character design of the production pattern 70a may be different for each production mode. Also, two types of production modes D to E may be provided in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, and at least one of the design of the numbers and the design of the characters of the production pattern 70a may be changed for each production mode. Furthermore, two types of production modes F to G may be provided in the low-probability short-working-time gaming state, and at least one of the design of the number and the design of the character of the production pattern 70a may be changed for each production mode.

In this case, when the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes A to C in the normal game state, and then the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, the production mode A is always set. At the same time, after the end of the display of the initial screen or the returning screen, the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is displayed still without being oscillatingly displayed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the production mode A is always set, and the production pattern 70a corresponding to the production mode A is statically displayed without swinging after the initial screen is displayed. will be

Then, when the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes D to E in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, and then the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, the production mode D is always performed. In addition to being set, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode D is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the production mode A is always set, and the production pattern 70a corresponding to the production mode A is statically displayed without swinging after the initial screen is displayed. will be

Furthermore, when the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes F to G in the low-probability short-time game state, and the power supply is resumed after that and the control state of the game is restored, the production mode F is always performed. In addition to being set, after the display of the initial screen or the screen during recovery is finished, the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the effect mode F is not oscillatingly displayed but is still displayed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the production mode A is always set, and the production pattern 70a corresponding to the production mode A is statically displayed without swinging after the initial screen is displayed. will be

In addition, when the performance pattern 70a is reduced in the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance in the normal game state, the performance pattern 70a is changed to numbers only, and the performance pattern 70a is temporarily displayed after the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is completed. When the stop display (swing display) is performed, the production pattern 70a may be returned to the number+character.

In this case, the power supply is stopped during SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal game state, that is, when the effect pattern 70a is changed to only numbers, and then the power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. When this is done, after the end of the display of the screen during recovery, the production pattern 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but is still displayed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed.

Furthermore, the power supply is stopped during the SP reach or SPSP reach in the specific game state (low-probability short-time game state, high-probability short-time game state), that is, when the production pattern 70a is only a number, and then the power supply When the game is resumed and the control state of the game is recovered, the production pattern 70a with only numbers is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed after the display of the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a of numbers and characters is not oscillatingly displayed but still displayed.

<Content 1 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed is obtained, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is established, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance becomes a special result, a special game is executed. Among such gaming machines, there is one that displays a pending image corresponding to undetermined determination information (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-33530). In addition, the gaming machine enhances the interest of the game by changing the normal pending image to the pending image of the display mode suggesting the possibility that the variable effect will result in a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine described above in order to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and signals from the main control means In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control means (effect control unit 130m) that controls game effects based on (commands, etc.), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judgment means (main CPU 110a) for judging whether or not, and reservation means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding the judgment right, wherein the slave control means controls a reserved image corresponding to the reserved right. Image display means (display/sound control unit 140) for displaying (holding icon) on display means (first image display device 70), and predetermined notification effect ( an effect execution means (display/sound control unit 140) for executing an icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display means displays an image to be displayed on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is configured to be updated, and it is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to change from the reserve image to a special reserve image indicating the possibility of whether or not to perform the special game, and the change effect is the A first change effect (change effect at the time of winning) executed at frame update timing in response to reception of a command (starting win prize designation command) indicating that the right has been generated transmitted from the main control means, and the main control means A second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and pattern effect change to be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from pattern 01), wherein the effect execution means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing at which the first change effect starts, and the frame update timing is different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. , the notification effect is terminated. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and signals from the main control means In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control means (effect control unit 130m) that controls game effects based on (commands, etc.), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main CPU 110a) for judging whether or not, holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding the judgment right, and based on the result of the judgment, the symbol is variably displayed and then the symbol is stopped and displayed. and an image display means (display/ an audio control unit 140), an effect execution means (display/audio control unit 140) for causing the effect means (audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) in the course of the game; wherein the image display means is configured to update an image displayed on the display means each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and a special It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to change to a pending image, and the change effect is a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating that the variable display of the pattern transmitted from the main control means starts ) and a command indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means (variation pattern designation command). and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing, and the effect execution means starts the first change effect. The notification effect is started at frame update timing, and the notification effect is ended at frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and signals from the main control means In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control means (effect control unit 130m) that controls game effects based on (commands, etc.), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judging means (main CPU 110a) for judging whether or not, holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding the judgment right, and based on the result of the judgment, the symbol is variably displayed and then the symbol is stopped and displayed. and a variation control means (main CPU 110a) to allow the right to change, and the slave control means includes a pre-judgment pending image (holding icon) corresponding to the reserved right, and Image display means (display/sound control unit 140) for displaying on the display means (first image display device 70) a post-judgment pending image (the icon) corresponding to the right of , and effect means ( Effect execution means (display/audio control unit 140) for causing the audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (an icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display means is provided with a predetermined frame update timing. It is configured to update the image displayed on the display means each time, and the pre-judgment special holding image or post-judgment showing the possibility of whether or not to perform the special game from the pre-judgment holding image or the post-judgment holding image It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to change to a special reserved image, and the change effect is a command (variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control means when the variable display of the pattern starts ) and a command indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means (variation pattern designation command), which is predetermined after receiving and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing, and the effect execution means starts the first change effect. than the case where the notification effect is started at the frame update timing to be set, the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the image is changed to the pre-judgment special reservation image. It is better to change to a special hold image after the judgment , the ratio of execution of the second change effect is high. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and signals from the main control means In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control means (effect control unit 130m) that controls game effects based on (commands, etc.), the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. Judgment means (main CPU 110a) for judging whether or not, and reservation means (main RAM 110c) capable of withholding a predetermined number of the judgment rights, and the slave control means corresponds to the reserved rights. Image display means (display/sound control unit 140) for displaying a pending image (suspended icon) on display means (first image display device 70), and predetermined notification to production means (sound output device 9) in the progress of the game and an effect executing means (display/sound control unit 140) for executing an effect (an icon generation (change) notification sound), wherein the image display means causes the display means to display at each predetermined frame update timing. It is configured to update the image, and it is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) for changing from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of whether or not to perform the special game, and the change effect is , executed at the frame update timing according to the command (starting winning prize designation command, variation pattern designation command, special pattern storage designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the number of said reserved rights changes. Predetermined predetermined frame update after receiving the first change effect (change effect at the time of winning, normal change pattern 01) and the command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means Including a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at the timing, and the display mode of the special hold image is the first display mode (blue character icon) and a second display mode (red character icon) in which the possibility of performing the special game is higher than that of the first display mode, and the effect executing means sets the frame update timing at which the first changing effect is started. , the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the second change effect is performed before the first change effect is executed. is executed, it is easier to change to the second display mode, and the first change When changing to the second display mode in the production, the special game when the number of the reserved rights is a second number larger than the first number than when the first number Likely to do so. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, "special pending image" and "special pending image before judgment" are those that change the shape and color of the normal pending icon, and the color that indicates the expectation of winning the jackpot around the pending icon. One that displays an effect, one that displays a character indicating the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot around (near) the pending icon, and a character image (e.g., "SP") suggesting an effect to be executed around (near) the pending icon. and "pseudo ream", etc.).

In addition, the "post-judgment special hold image" is an image that changes the shape of the normal icon, an image that changes the color, an effect that displays a color effect around the icon that indicates the expectation of winning the jackpot, A character that indicates the degree of expectation for winning a jackpot is displayed around (near) the icon, and a character image that suggests an effect to be executed around (near) the icon (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-run"). ), etc.

Also, the "first display mode" includes a special icon (blinking CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
Also, the “second display mode” includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

In addition, the "post-judgment pending image" and "post-judgment special pending image" are those that are displayed from the start of the variable effect to the end, those that are displayed for a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect, and the variable The specific period (SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) during the production includes those in which the display is erased.

<Content 2 of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, determination information acquired by establishment of an acquisition condition is stored as a pending memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result is used. It is common to execute a variable production based on. In such a game machine, by performing an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold memories, or by displaying the execution image corresponding to the hold memory in which the variable effect is executed, There have been some that allow a player to grasp the progress of a game (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reserved memories when the number of reserved memories changes.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories is decreased, the information display means can execute the display of the first pending information and the second pending information. There is a decrease display of the first hold information (1 is subtracted) from the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the next display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing that will complete the update to the pending digits) is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means to control the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first pending information and the second pending information in which the variable effect is started. It is possible to perform a change display that changes to the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second hold information to the execution information (moving from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the decrement display of the first pending information (update to the pending number decremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the frame is updated. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means can execute the display of the first pending information and the second pending information. when the number of the reserved memories increases, it is possible to display an increase of the first reserved information and an increased display of the second reserved information, and during the display of the decreased second reserved information, When the number increases, even before the frame update timing at which the decreasing display of the second pending information (moving to the center of the next display unit in the pending icon display area) is completed, the first pending Incremental display of information (update to pending digits incremented by one) is to be initiated. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means to control the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the reserved memories decreases, the information display means displays the reduced first reserved information and the second reserved information whose variable display is started. A change display that changes to the execution information (the icon) can be executed, and when the number of the pending memories increases, an increase display of the first hold information and an increase display of the second hold information can be executed. Yes, and when the number of pending memories increases during change display of the second pending information, the decreasing display of the second pending information (moving from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing of , the increase display of the first reservation information (update to the reservation number incremented by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (a pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the image display means displays a predetermined frame update timing (1/ 30 ms), the display image is updated, and when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means can increase the display of the first pending information and increase the display of the second pending information. Yes, when the number of the pending memories increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the second pending information (enlargement of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to the normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increased display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number incremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which . By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means to control the presentation of the game. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by an image display means (image display device); number) and second pending information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, wherein the variable effect execution means is capable of displaying during execution of the variable effect It is possible to execute a specific effect (SP ready-to-win effect, SPSP ready-to-win effect, full rotation ready-to-win effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected, and the information display means displays the first pending information when the number of the pending memories increases. and an increased display of the second pending information, and when the number of the pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, the increased display of the first pending information (1 is added update to the reserved number) is executed, but the increase display of the second reserved information is executed until a predetermined condition is established (the specific effect is completed, the losing effect pattern or the jackpot effect pattern that has been displayed in a reduced size is enlarged and displayed). It is designed not to be By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command etc.) from the main control means controls the game effect. In a gaming machine comprising a subordinate control means (performance control board 130), the main control means determines determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory, A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, wherein the sub-control means displays a variable effect according to the result of the determination. Variable effect execution means executable by display means (image display device), first reservation information (reservation number) indicating the number of the reservation memories, and second reservation information indicating the identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories ( and an information display means capable of displaying a pending icon), wherein, when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means increases display of the first pending information and increases display of the second pending information. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the first starting port) as a first reservation storage, and the establishment of the second acquisition condition When the determination information based on (entrance of the game ball to the second starting port) is stored as a second reservation memory, and the number of the first reservation memory increases in the specific game state, the first reservation information Increased display (updated to the reserved number with 1 added) is executed, but the increased display of the second reserved information satisfies a predetermined condition (finishing the final variation effect in the specific game state, returning to the normal game state). It will not run until By doing so, it becomes easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

(Content 3 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to judge whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute the special game according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , effect control capable of performing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during execution of the game. means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means changes the operation mode of the initial operation (operation mode, light emission mode, etc.) are made different. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an operating means (effect button 17) that can be operated by a player and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, and an electric power Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of supply, or restoring to the state before the stop of power supply, and the operation means after the start of power supply Effect control means (effect control board 130) that performs initial light emission and is capable of performing effect light emission of the operation means during execution of the game, wherein the effect control means initializes the control state of the game. The light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is made different between when the control state of the game is restored and when the control state of the game is restored. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation and the effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of the game. ), wherein the effect control means determines the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the number of steps and the Although the operation mode of the operation of each step, etc.) is the same, the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is made different. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a game machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of a game; The effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means controls when the control state of the game is initialized. and when the control state of the game is restored, at least part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means is the same. are designed to be different. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine where a game can be played, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to stop the power supply Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the previous state, and variable display of a plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. and a production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by the production, wherein the plurality of production patterns include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that allow each to be identified, and the production When the game control state is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means to a first combination (for example, "135"), and sets the game control state. is restored, the second combination (for example, "753") is used as the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or whether the control state of the game has been restored.

(Content 4 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional game machine generally initializes the control state of a game after power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs an initial operation of movable effect means after power supply is started (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the movable effect means may not be able to perform a suitable initial action.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the stop of the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (power supply restoration) at which the game control state is restored. In this case, the initial action is performed after the return action of the movable effect means to the first position is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the stop of the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (power supply restoration) at which the game control state is restored. In this case, the return operation of the movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the movable effect means returns to the first position, the initial motion is performed, but when the movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial motion is performed. The initial operation is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the stop of the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is arranged so that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) when the control state of the game is restored. , the return operation of the first movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the first movable effect means is Instead, the initial motion of the second movable effect means is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial motion for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the stop of the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is arranged so that the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position at the start of power supply (recovery of power supply) when the control state of the game is restored. , the return operation of the first movable effect means to the first position is performed, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial motion for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the stop of the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of a game. a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the movable effect means includes first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and second movable effect means (second movable member 74); The effect control means is configured such that when the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first If it is at the position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and if the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial action of the first movable effect means is performed. , the initial motion of the second movable effect means is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a game machine capable of playing a game has a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70). Initialize the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or restore the state before the stop of the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable effect means after the power supply is started, and an effect capable of performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during execution of the game. A control means (rendering control board 130) is provided, and the movable rendering means includes a first movable rendering means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable rendering means, and a second position of itself. Including a second movable effect means (second movable member 74) that overlaps with the effect control means, the control state of the game is initialized When the power supply starts (power on), the When the first movable effect means is at the second position and the second movable effect means is at the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position, and the first movable effect means is moved to the first position. When the effect means does not return to the first position, the initial movement of the second movable effect means is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial action for the movable effect means.

(Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply that was stopped during the variable presentation is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest in the game is reduced. There was a problem that there is a possibility to

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine where a game can be played, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or to stop the power supply Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the previous state, and variation accompanied by variation display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing production is provided, and in the variable production, the production pattern that is being variably displayed is oscillatingly displayed (temporary stop display) and then statically displayed ( When the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect that oscillates the effect symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means returns a predetermined (at the time of receiving the command for confirming the special design and at the time of receiving the command for waiting for the customer), the performance design can be statically displayed on the display means without being oscillatingly displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can be played, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of the acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after the start of power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before stopping power supply, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed production patterns, and in the variable production, a ready-to-win state is determined by a part of the production patterns. Including a ready-to-win variation effect that is formed and displayed to execute a ready-to-win effect, the effect control means, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the ready-to-win effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, at a predetermined timing ( At the time of receiving a special pattern confirmation command, at the time of receiving a customer waiting command), the combination of the production patterns different from the ready-to-win combination by the production patterns that formed and displayed the ready-to-win state can be displayed on the display means in a stationary state. . By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

(Content 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the power supply is started, or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest in the game. There was a problem that there is

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110), initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before stopping the power supply, and determination by the determination means According to the result, a production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display of the production pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), are a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state without the pending memory, and an execution period of the variable performance in the state with the pending memory. When the game control state is restored, the effect control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbols on the display means. and the mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the power supply is stopped in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen+screen during recovery) when the power supply is resumed and the first state or the second state is restored is made different. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

(Content 7 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on the display means when the player is not playing a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after the start of power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before stopping power supply, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with a variable display of the displayed production pattern, and the production control means, after statically displaying the production pattern on the display means When a predetermined period of time elapses, it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) by the display means, and when the effect pattern is statically displayed after the fluctuation time of the variable effect elapses, and the control state. It is possible to change the period until the customer waiting effect is executed depending on whether the effect pattern is statically displayed after the initialization of or after the control state is restored. By doing so, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Content 8 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to determination information during execution of a variable effect on a display means (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest in the game. There was a problem that there is

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a control state of the game after the start of power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and an effect displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production with variable display of symbols, and the production control means, when the control state of the game is restored, displays the production on the display means. It is possible to perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the pattern, and the determination information during execution of the variable effect is displayed in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. It is possible to display the corresponding execution information (the icon), and when the power supply stopped during the display of the execution information is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the next from the end of the specific display Until the start of the variable display, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), and the execution information is displayed in the predetermined display area. It is set not to display. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp that the variable performance being executed at the time when the power supply is stopped is completed, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

(Content 9 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information, there was a gaming machine that executes a look-ahead notice effect over a plurality of fluctuation effects (for example, JP-A-2017-143904 reference). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a problem that there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply stopped during the pre-reading notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. there were.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. determination means (main control board 110), prior determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before determination by the determination means, and initialization of the game control state after the start of power supply. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state before the power supply is stopped, and according to the determination result of the determination means, the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) A production control means (production control board 130) capable of performing a variable production accompanied by a variable display, and the production control means performs the variable production a plurality of times based on the determination result of the prior determination means. It is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) over a period of time, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the pre-reading notice effect is not resumed, and in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance in which the power supply is stopped, a notice performance (for example, an alternative notice performance) different from the look-ahead notice performance can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous advance notice performance due to the stoppage of the power supply, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Content 10 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed over a plurality of variable effects (for example, JP-A-2017 -143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the specific effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. rice field.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. determination means (main control board 110), prior determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before determination by the determination means, and initialization of the game control state after the start of power supply. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state before the power supply is stopped, and according to the determination result of the determination means, the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display, wherein the performance control means steps the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over a plurality of times of the variable performance. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that is explicitly suggested, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power supply is Although the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance executed next to the stopped variable performance, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before stopping the power supply. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect in accordance with the content of the current variation effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Content 11 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such game machines, there is a game machine that executes a specific effect in which the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each piece of determination information for which the execution of the variable effect is not completed is changed in stages. There was (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed is high. There was a fear that

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. determination means (main control board 110), prior determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before determination by the determination means, and initialization of the game control state after the start of power supply. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state before the power supply is stopped, and according to the determination result of the determination means, the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) Effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display, and the effect control means is provided with the determination information and the variable effect that the execution of the variable effect is not completed. It is possible to display identification information (the corresponding icon, pending icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not been started, and the special game is executed by changing the display mode of the identification information step by step. It is possible to execute a specific effect (e.g., icon change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation to be held, and the display mode includes a first stage mode (e.g., CD icon) and a second stage mode (e.g., blue (character icon) and a third stage mode (red character icon), and the power supply stopped during the display of the identification information in the second stage mode, which changes up to the third stage mode, is resumed to resume the game. When the control state is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. By doing so, the user does not have to be conscious of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

(Content 12 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and according to the result of the determination, the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied with a variable display. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of pending memories, which is determination information for which determination has not been performed, in a display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it takes a long time to grasp the number of reserved memories. There is a problem that there is a possibility that the

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110), initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before stopping the power supply, and determination by the determination means A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance with variable display of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result, and the control state of the game is determined. When restored, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, and the first display area (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second Suspension display indicating the number of suspension storage in each of the suspension display 84) and the second display area (first suspension icon display area 70B, second suspension icon display area 70D) different from the first display area When the power supply stopped in the state with the reserved memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the reserved display is executed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display. However, the hold display can be executed in the first display area. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of reserved memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and the interest of the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

(Content 13 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In a conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the obtained determination information, and the effect pattern displayed on the display means is varied according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can execute effects are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed during the effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and the control state of the game is restored, the interest in the game is lost. There was a problem that it could drop.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play a game, determination information (special figure determination) acquired by establishment of acquisition conditions (entering a game ball into the start opening) information), and based on the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Judging means (main control board 110), preliminary judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment means, and initializing the control state of the game after the power supply is started. Or, initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state before the power supply is stopped, and according to the determination result of the determination means, the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) Effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect with variable display, and light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes, and the effect control The means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and the change effect is being executed. When the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from the specific notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation in which the player is confused that the ramp change effect is restarted even though the change effect is not being executed. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

(Content 14 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional gaming machine comprises main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with movable effect means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate.

◇ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to the signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command etc.), the initial operation can be performed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and it is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration specifying command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and it is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and from the main control means during execution of the variable effect When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to the signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to execute a special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the special game effect The initial operation can be executed when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , wherein the effect control means is capable of executing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is capable of executing the effect operation and light emission of the movable effect means. In the case where the game control state is initialized and in the case where the game control state is restored, the operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (the operation mode such as the number of steps and the motion of each step) is the same. However, the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the production), the initial operation of the movable production means can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination information ), a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game is initialized after the power supply is started. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state before the power supply was stopped, and the effect control means initializes the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the performance operation of the movable production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and the determination by the determination means Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable effect, the variable display of the effect pattern is shaken. It is possible to perform static display (stop display) after moving display (temporary stop display), and the effect control means restarts the power supply that was stopped during execution of the variable effect that oscillates the effect pattern. When the control state of the game is restored by doing so, it is possible to statically display the performance symbols on the display means at a predetermined timing (at the time of receiving the special symbol confirming command, at the time of receiving the customer waiting command) without oscillating display. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance corresponding to the signal can be executed. is received, the initial operation can be performed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the game machine The states include a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state that is the execution period of the variable performance in the state without the pending memory, and an execution period of the variable performance in the state with the pending memory. and a second state, wherein the effect control means performs a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbols on the display means when the game control state is restored. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + screen during recovery) when the power supply stopped during the second state is resumed and the state is restored to the first state or the second state is changed, and according to the signal If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance can be executed, the initial It is possible to perform operations. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and the display means When a predetermined period of time elapses after the static display of the production pattern, the display means can execute a customer waiting production (customer waiting demonstration production), and after the fluctuation time of the variable production has elapsed, the production pattern is displayed. It is possible to change the period until the customer waiting effect is executed between the case of static display and the case of static display of the effect symbol after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored, A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the signal. If so, it is possible to carry out said initial operation. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect with a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and the prior Based on the judgment result of the judging means, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading foretelling effect (continuous foretelling effect) for a plurality of times of the variable performance, and the power supply stopped during execution of the fore-reading foretelling effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the predictive notice effect is not restarted, and the notice effect different from the predictive notice effect in the variable effect executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped (for example, A predetermined signal (power-on designation command , power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling the production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination Information) can be stored as reserved storage (main control board 110), and based on the determination information, determination means ( Main control board 110) and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring to the state before stopping the power supply, and the production The control means controls the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the production operation of the production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display). It is possible to execute, and according to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), and a plurality of times It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that gradually suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the variable effect, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored by doing so, the specific effect can be executed in the variable effect executed next to the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped, but it was suggested before the power supply was stopped. It is not executed from the continuation of the stage, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, When a command specifying power restoration, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling a light emitting means (winning entrance lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, and an operation in a predetermined mode (Action, light emission, sound output, image display) possible production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and establishment of acquisition conditions Based on the storage means (main control board 110) that can store the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by (entering the game ball into the starting port) as a pending storage, and the determination information, the player Determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (jackpot game), and whether to initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or before stopping the power supply and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state of the production control means, the initial operation of the production means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display), and the production It is possible to execute the effect operation of the means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and it is expected that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests a degree, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is changed to the above. During the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to control to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from a specific notification mode and to execute an effect according to the signal, the main control When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means, and in response to the signal When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which performance can be executed, the predetermined It is possible to output a notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and the game is progressing. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a waiting state (customer waiting state) where there is no customer waiting, and during execution of the customer waiting effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means. In this case, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) , the effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous to the player It is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and during execution of the variable effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration) from the main control means designated command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means Sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous to the player It is possible to execute a special game effect (jackpot effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during execution of a special game (jackpot game), and a predetermined signal from the main control means during execution of the special game effect. When receiving a command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the deviation between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

(Content 15 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional game machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine provided with display means capable of displaying effect images (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187648). However, in such a game machine, no consideration is given to the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the effect control means continues.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect corresponding to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means A game machine having a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling a display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying a production image (variation production, jackpot production, etc.) The effect control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (a static display screen of effect symbols) on the display means in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and the game standby screen When the power supply to the main control means stops during display, the display of the game standby screen can be continued. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Content 16 of the invention described in this embodiment)
A conventional game machine generally comprises main control means for controlling the progress of a game, and effect control means for controlling effects according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is one that performs abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not appropriately performed.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a detection means (starting door detection switch, Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means and, when the power supply to the game machine is started, if the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic Anomaly notification, radio wave anomaly notification, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) in a game machine that can be played sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, and when the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the game machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification , radio wave anomaly notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined anomaly notification, for a predetermined period (30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.) Execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) in a game machine that can be played sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, When the control means and the detection means become disconnected (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a game machine that can be played, a detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means, When the control means and the detection means become disconnected (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality When the control means and the detection means are connected during execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined period of time (elapsed 30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.) Continue execution of anomaly notification. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to perform anomaly notification appropriately.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is assumed to shift to a high-probability game state over a predetermined number of times after all jackpot games are completed. In this case, the game machine may be configured to shift to a high probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the big winning game.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are completed, the high-probability game state is entered, and when the falling lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols in the high-probability game state is won, the high-probability game state is ended and the normal It may be a game machine that returns to a game state.

In addition, when the type of the special jackpot pattern is the normal pattern, the low-probability game state is entered after the jackpot game is finished, and when the jackpot special pattern is the specific pattern, the next game is played after the jackpot game is finished. The game machine may be configured to shift to a high-probability game state that continues until the jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority. However, the gaming machine may be such that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed at the same time (in parallel).

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

(When the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Next, the case where the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described. When the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, for example, the command is not received due to disconnection, partial disconnection, or connector disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 Communication abnormalities such as abnormal reception of commands due to garbled commands due to noise, partial disconnection, or the like are conceivable. In addition, in the following description, when the production|presentation control part 130m cannot receive a command normally, when the predetermined state arises, it expresses by "x" in the drawing(s). Then, during a predetermined period from when a predetermined state in which a command cannot be received normally occurs for the first time to before a command can be normally received, one or more commands of the same type and/or different types may not be normally received. . In addition, the command is written as "cd" in the figure.

The effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal game state includes a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG which is a part of the character, and a background of the character. It is assumed that it is composed of a decoration part made up of a pattern effect image ZE to be decorated and an identification part made up of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character). Also, the production pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the specific game state is composed only of the identification portion consisting of the number portion (identification character).

Also, in the normal game state, the background images corresponding to each of the effect modes A to C are scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion). Also, in the specific game state, the background images corresponding to each of the production modes D to E are scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion).

In addition, when the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed. On the other hand, in the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the command line connector for communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

In the following specific example, usually describes the case where the production control unit 130m can not receive the command normally in the game state, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variation game state), basic The flow is the same as the normal game state.

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol storage designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 60, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the sub-first fluctuation display device 81, the sub-th 1 reservation display device 83, first reservation number display area 70E, first reservation icon display area 70B, first lamp pattern, and first start port 45, respectively, second reservation number, second special pattern storage designation command, first 2 special symbols, second special symbol display 61, second special symbol reservation display 64, sub second variable display 82, sub second reservation display 84, second reservation number display area 70F, second reservation icon display The area 70D, the second lamp pattern, and the second starting port 47 may be read as replacements.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 1 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. FIG. 106 is a timing chart when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". It starts with the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". At the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first
When the production control unit 130m receives the special symbol variation pattern designation command), the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1" and the variation production is started. processing is performed.

At this time, while the changing BGM is being output, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number (numerical information) displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is "2" in one frame of non-animation. becomes "1". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two suspended icons H1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the special pattern (referred to as the first lamp pattern when distinguished in particular) on the first sub-variation display 81 is started, but the production pattern 70a performs a preparatory operation. Start scrolling after going.

In addition, the first special symbol reservation display 63 displays the first reservation number U1 (holding memory) stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m by turning on/off/blinking of the LED. The variable display of the first lamp pattern is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81 . Also, in the sub-first suspension display 83, the first suspension number U1 (holding memory) stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed by lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of the LED.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (grasped) first pending number U1 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one pending icon T12 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B2 (see FIG. 107(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 107(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 107(c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished) and the actual stop is made.

Next, at P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". A variable display of one special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two suspended icons H1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 of the one lamp symbol is started. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a part of the decoration part moving or a whole or a part expanding or contracting operation as in the present embodiment (FIG. 107(d) reference).

After that, at timing P5, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 107(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 107(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is extended, and accordingly the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 107(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of special symbols is started by the first special symbol display device 60. - 特許庁Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, one suspended icon H1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TH. Also, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 107(g)).

Then, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern on the sub first holding display 83 continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the performance symbol 70a is the decorative part as in the present embodiment. After performing a preparatory operation such as partly moving or enlarging/reducing the whole or part, scrolling is started (see FIG. 107(g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the scrolling of the background image is continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 107(h)).

Next, at the timing of P10, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("365"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the icon TH is continuing the rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 107(i)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub first variable display 81 is displayed. is extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during variation is maintained (see FIG. 107(i)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At this time, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the special symbol stop time has passed (a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation of P8 ), the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a is continued (see FIG. 107(j)). Furthermore, the variation of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may be continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). In this way, the customer waiting demonstration effect (predetermined effect) is not performed on the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation of P8.

In a state where the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", as a predetermined effect executed after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a (special symbol) is not limited to customer waiting demonstration effects, but may be adjustment guidance effects such as adjustment of volume and brightness of image display devices, guidance effects related to game operations, and other effects. In this case, the customer waiting demo effect may be executed after the effect other than the customer waiting demo effect is executed. Thus, the predetermined effect includes the effect executed until the next variable effect is started for the effect symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped or permanently stopped. Note that the predetermined effect is not limited to being executed by the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), and may be executed by other commands, time by a timer, or the like.

Thus, according to the specific example 1 shown in FIGS. 106 to 107, when the command is not normally received in the production control unit 130m in the state in which the variable production of the production pattern 70a is performed, A performance pattern 70a whose variable performance is completed can be displayed in a swinging state, and the swinging state of the performance pattern 70a is continued even after a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance to perform a customer waiting demonstration performance. It is set not to run. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to prevent the loss of the player's interest and reduce the interest in the game.

After that, since the first reservation number U1 memorized (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the game shifts to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m performs processing for ending the variable production.

In this case, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and a special The symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

In addition, at the timing of P7, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even when the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is normally received by the production control unit 130m. The same processing as when it is impossible will be performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 2 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the winning command (first special symbol When the production control unit 130m receives the storage designation command, the first start opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command), the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "4 ”. It should be noted that, in the specific example 2, based on the first reservation memory due to the winning at the timing of P1, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of the big win is high is executed in advance. In the following description, the reserved memory that serves as a reference for the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target reserved memory.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one suspended icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 109(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 109(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 109 (c)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, at the timing when the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3", the start command (first special symbol storage When the production control unit 130m receives the specified command, the production pattern specification command, the first special symbol variation pattern specification command), the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "4" to " 3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and after performing the preparatory operation, the scrolling is started (see FIG. 109(d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 109(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 109(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Also, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 109(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 109(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 109(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not change from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, but from "3" to It becomes "1" directly. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 109(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reservation icon T13 is set to the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without shifting display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Then, the required two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Also, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (Fig. 109 (h )reference).

When the surplus reserved icons T1 are erased and the necessary reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed, the necessary reserved icons T1 may be shifted and displayed while the redundant reserved icons T1 remain as they are.

Thereafter, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the holding icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 109(i)). Here, in specific example 2, it is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( Also in the pre-reading effect target), normal zone effects (pre-reading zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are executed according to the announcement scenario (see FIG. 109(i)), and effect pattern 70a is executed. The look-ahead zone effect ends at the time when is fully stopped.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 109-1, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes "0" Special symbols Based on the variable effect (target of the pre-reading effect) that is executed during the variable display, the normal zone effect (pre-reading zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) continues according to the notice scenario. It is also possible to terminate the look-ahead zone effect without executing the command. When the look-ahead zone performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead zone performance is erased and changed to a mode of performance such as a mode A background in which the degree of expectation for a big win is lower than that of the look-ahead performance.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 3 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 110. FIG. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

110 differs from the specific example 2 of FIG. 109 in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead preview effect, and an icon change effect is executed. Only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is partly operated as in the present embodiment, and the whole or part is enlarged or reduced. After performing preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 110(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 110(d)), and an effect sound is output.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 110(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 110(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variably displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 110(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) is continuously executed, and the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2". Except for , the state of FIG. 110(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound) 110(g) is maintained.

At the timings of P8 and P9, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not change from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, but from "3" to It becomes "1" directly. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 110(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reservation icon T13 is set to the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without shifting display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect rendering is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a and an effect sound is output in accordance with the advance notice scenario. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 110(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect effect sound) and scrolling of the background image are continued. is executed.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is executed to produce the production pattern 70a. is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon T11 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating action (effect action) (see FIG. 110(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the fluctuation production executed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes "0" Also in (target of expectation degree suggestion by pre-reading preview effect), pre-reading effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) and icon change effect (the icon change effect) are executed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 3, it is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

Like the modification shown in FIG. 110-1, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes "0" Special symbols Icon change production and prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) according to the notice scenario The look-ahead effect may be terminated without continuing execution. When the look-ahead performance is not continuously executed, the look-ahead effect performance is erased at the timing of P10, and the mode of performance is changed to a performance mode with a lower expectation for a big win than the look-ahead effect performance, such as mode A background only. Further, the pending icon T1, which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 4 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 111. FIG. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. For example.

In addition, in specific example 4 of FIG. 111, the first image display device 70 executes the icon change effect as the pre-reading notice effect, and the first movable member 73 is used as the pre-reading notice effect (action effect and light emitting effect). 110 in that it is different from the specific example 3 in FIG. 110, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained. In specific example 3, a look-ahead effect effect can also be executed, but since it is the same as in specific example 2, the explanation is omitted.

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is partly operated as in the present embodiment, or the whole or a part thereof is enlarged or reduced. After performing preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 111(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-reading preview effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the expectation for the big win is high (for example, a large movement or a mode similar to the big win). (see also FIG. 111(d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. It should be noted that the look-ahead advance notice effect by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects of the effect pattern 70a during the period before the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a. The partial period of the variable production is the variable production period from the start of the variable production to the stop (temporary stop or final stop) of the variable production, for example, at the timing of the start of the variable production, the first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times. execution of a look-ahead effect to perform, a look-ahead effect in which the first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times at the timing during the variable performance, and a predetermined number of operations of the first movable member 73 at the timing at the end of the variable performance. It is possible to execute the look-ahead effect at various times, such as executing the look-ahead effect. In this specific example, the look-ahead effect executed during a partial period of the variable effect period is scheduled to be executed in two or more variable effects.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 111(e)). Further, the look-ahead foretelling effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 111(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variably displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 111(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2" without executing the pre-reading notice effect by the first movable member 73, Fig. 111 (g) state is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 111(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

In addition, at the timings of P8 and P9, the pre-reading announcement effect (the motion effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73) by the action of the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not change from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, but from "3" to It becomes "1" directly. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T3 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 111(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reservation icon T13 is set to the first The first pending icon display area 70B3 is erased without shift display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first movable member 73 performs the pre-reading forewarning effect. Specifically, the action effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73 are executed in accordance with the advance notice scenario, and sound effects are output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 111(h)). In this way, the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead foretelling effect and scrolling of the background image by the operation of the first movable member 73 are continuously executed.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the pre-reading notice effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed. It will scroll at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 111(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the fluctuation production executed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes "0" Also in (target of expectation degree suggestion by pre-reading notice effect), the pre-reading notice effect and icon change effect (the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are executed. Then, at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, the look-ahead notice performance is completed, and at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TH is erased and the icon change performance is completed. Here, in specific example 4, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

Like the modification shown in FIG. 111-1, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes "0" Special symbols icon change effect and pre-reading notice effect (action effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) according to the notice scenario based on the change effect executed during the variable display of The look-ahead effect may be terminated without continuing execution. When the read-ahead performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P10, the execution of the read-ahead announcement performance is stopped, and the mode of performance is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big win than the look-ahead announcement performance, such as mode A background only. Further, the pending icon T1, which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win. Furthermore, the look-ahead effect by the first movable member 73 and the like is not executed.

According to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, at the timing of P7 to P9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is normally transmitted by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, it is also transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the given command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, at the timing of P10, when the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m becomes "1" from "3" However, when the first reservation number U1 changes from "4" to "2", and when the first reservation number U1 changes from "2" to "0", that is, the main control unit 110m grasps If the divergence between the number of reservations held and the number of reservations grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

In specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P10. As described above, in specific examples 2 to 4, the variable production of the production pattern 70a is not executed in a predetermined period. In addition, during a predetermined period, the effect pattern 70a whose variable effect is finished can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the effect pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporary stop state.

Thus, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of pending icons (for example, two more than the predetermined number (eg, one)) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number during the display of the first reservation information), the surplus of the reserved icons of the specific number of reserved icons (for example, the third hold icon) are not shift-displayed, but a required number of hold icons (for example, the first and second hold icons) are shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of pending icons (first hold information), when the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number of It now shows a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number while the number of reservations (for example, three) is being displayed, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 5 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. FIG. 112 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (grasped) first pending number U1 changes from "3" to "4". In specific example 5, a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance based on the pending memory due to the winning at the timing of P1. In the following description, the reserved memory that serves as a reference for the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target reserved memory.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 113(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icons T1 to T4 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 113(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 113 (c)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 113(d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 113(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 113(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variably displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are maintained and the prefetch zone effects are continuously executed (see FIG. 113(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1". At the timing of P7 to P11, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not go through "3" to "2" and "1" in the non-animation for one frame, It becomes "0" directly from "3". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 and the redundant reserved icon T12 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B2 are erased by one frame of non-animation, All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (Fig. 113). (h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the reservation icon T13 is set to the first The first suspended icon display area 70B3 is erased without shifting display from the suspended icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the suspended icon T12 is erased from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 without being shifted and displayed from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 to 70B1. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Then, the necessary one reserved icon T11 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Also, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (Fig. 113 (h )reference).

When the surplus reserved icons T1 are erased and the necessary reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed, the necessary reserved icons T1 may be shifted while the surplus reserved icons T1 remain.

Thereafter, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 113(i)). Here, in specific example 5, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

After that, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( Also in the pre-reading effect target), normal zone effects (pre-reading zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are executed according to the notice scenario (see FIG. 113(i)), and the effect pattern 70a is executed. The look-ahead zone production ends at the time when is fully stopped.

Like the modification shown in FIG. 113-1, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P13, the first pending number U1 becomes "0" Special symbols Based on the variable effect (target of the pre-reading effect) that is executed during the variable display, the normal zone effect (pre-reading zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) continues according to the notice scenario. It is also possible to end the look-ahead zone effect without executing the command. When the look-ahead zone performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead zone performance is erased, and the mode of performance is changed to a performance mode such as a mode A background in which the degree of expectation for a big win is lower than that of the look-ahead performance.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 6 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 114. FIG. FIG. 112 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

114 differs from the specific example 5 in FIG. 113 in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead preview effect and an icon change effect is executed. Explanations of common parts are omitted, and only different parts are explained.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is partly operated as in the present embodiment, or the whole or a part thereof is enlarged or reduced. After performing preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 114(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a (see FIG. 114(d)), and an effect sound is output.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect presentation is temporarily stopped, and the icon change presentation is started. Specifically, the third pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 114(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 114(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variably displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect is continued while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 114(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound) , the state of FIG. 114(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 114(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 114(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 114(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

At the timing of P8 to P11, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not pass through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation, It becomes "0" directly from "3". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the two surplus reserved icons T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a ( The production pattern 70a), which was scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable production, is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 114(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the reservation icon T13 is the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without shifting display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the suspended icon T12 is erased from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 without being shifted from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, the necessary one reserved icon T11 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the look-ahead effect rendering is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a and an effect sound is output in accordance with the advance notice scenario. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 114(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect effect sound) and scrolling of the background image are continued. is executed.

When a predetermined period of time has passed after the completion of the display of the pending icon T1, at the timing of P13, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is displayed at high speed. It will be scrolled. Specifically, the first pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (production operation) (see FIG. 114(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be normally received, the fluctuation production executed during the fluctuation display of the special symbol where the first reservation number U1 becomes "0" Also in (target of expectation degree suggestion by pre-read preview effect), pre-read effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) and icon change effect (the icon change effect) are executed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 6, it is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

Like the modification shown in FIG. 114-1, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes "0" Special symbols Icon change production and prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) according to the notice scenario The look-ahead effect may be terminated without continuing execution. If the look-ahead effect is not continuously executed, at the timing of P12, the look-ahead effect effect (if it is displayed) is erased, and the expectation for a big hit is lower than the look-ahead effect effect such as mode A background only. changed to a mode. Also, the pending icon T1, which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect, is changed to the normal mode (CD), which is a mode of performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win.

(Concrete example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 7 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 115. FIG. FIG. 112 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

115, the first image display device 70 executes the icon change effect as the pre-reading notice effect, and the effect of the first movable member 73 as the pre-reading notice effect (movable effect and light emitting effect). 115 in that this differs from the specific example 6 in FIG. 115, the description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described. In concrete example 7, a look-ahead effect effect can also be executed, but since it is the same as in concrete example 6, the explanation is omitted.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is partly operated as in the present embodiment, or the whole or a part thereof is enlarged or reduced. After performing preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 115(d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the expectation for the big win is high (for example, a large movement or a mode similar to the big win). Together with this (see FIG. 115(d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, a predetermined sound effect is output. It should be noted that the look-ahead advance notice effect by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of times of the variable effect of the effect pattern 70a in the period before the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 115(e)). Further, the look-ahead foretelling effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 115(f)). At this time, the pre-reading announcement effect by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variably displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 115(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, except that the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 is displayed as "2" without the pre-reading notice effect by the first movable member 73 being executed, FIG. 115 (g) state is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of 1 special design is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

It should be noted that, at the timing of P8 to P11, the pre-reading announcement effect by the first movable member 73 (the action effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not pass through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation, It becomes "0" directly from "3". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and the surplus reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B2 T12 is erased with one frame of non-animation. All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (Fig. 115). (h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the reservation icon T13 is the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shift-displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the suspended icon T12 is erased from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 without being shift-displayed from the first suspended icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, the necessary one reserved icon T11 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first movable member 73 performs the pre-reading forewarning effect. Specifically, an action presentation of the first movable member 73 is executed along with the advance notice scenario, and a sound effect is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 115(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the pre-reading notice effect and scrolling of the background image by the first movable member 73 are continuously executed.

After that, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead announcement effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is executed, and the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the changing scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 115(i)).

After that, when the production control unit 130m is in a state where various commands from the main control unit 110m can be received normally, the fluctuation production ( The target of the degree of expectation suggestion by the pre-reading advance notice effect) is also executed by the first movable member 73 and the icon change effect (the icon change effect). Then, at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed, the look-ahead notice performance is completed, and at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, the icon TH is erased and the icon change performance is completed. Here, in specific example 7, it is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 115-1, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes "0" Special symbols icon change effect and pre-reading notice effect (action effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) according to the notice scenario based on the change effect executed during the variable display of The look-ahead effect may be terminated without continuing execution. When the read-ahead performance is not continuously executed, at the timing of P12, the execution of the read-ahead notice performance is stopped, and the performance mode is changed to a performance mode with a lower degree of expectation for a big win than the read-ahead notice performance, such as mode A background only. Also, the pending icon T1, which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect, is changed to the normal mode (CD), which is a mode of performance with a low degree of expectation for a big win.

According to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, at the timing of P7 to P9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is normally transmitted by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, it is also transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the given command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, at the timing of P10, the first pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "0" As described above, when the first number of reservations changes from "4" to "1", that is, the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the effect control unit 130m is " 3”, the basic flow is the same as described above.

In specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P12. As described above, in specific examples 5 to 7, the variable production of the production pattern 70a is not executed in a predetermined period. In addition, during a predetermined period, the effect pattern 70a whose variable effect is finished can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the effect pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporary stop state.

In this way, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, four) of pending icons (for example, three more than a predetermined number (eg, one) When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number during the display of the first reservation information), the number of reservation icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed without displaying the predetermined number. It is designed to display a number of pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, four) of pending icons (first hold information), when the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number, the number of hold icons less than the specific number by one is not displayed, and Also, a number of pending icons less by two is displayed, and then a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) (For example, four) while displaying the number of reservations, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is less than the specific number by one or two A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed without displaying . Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Concrete example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. FIG. 116 is a timing chart 4 when the command is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m, and FIGS. 115(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG. This is an example of a production.

117 is the same as the specific example 5 in FIG. 112 up to the timing of P0 to P11, so the explanation is omitted.

At the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is accompanied by the decrease in the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m from "1" to "0". is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 117(g) is obtained.

Next, at the timing of P13, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 117(g) is maintained.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the stop time of the special symbol has passed (a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation of P12 ), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is continued (see FIG. 117(h)). Furthermore, the variation of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may be continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Also, the look-ahead effect is continuously executed. In this way, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed on the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation of P12.

Thus, according to the specific example 8 shown in FIGS. 116 to 117, when the command is not normally received in the production control unit 130m in the state in which the variable production of the production pattern 70a is performed, A performance pattern 70a whose variable performance is finished can be displayed in a swinging state, and the swinging state of the performance pattern 70a is continued even after a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance to perform a customer waiting demonstration performance. It is set not to run. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to prevent the loss of the player's interest and reduce the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 117-1, since the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", it may be shifted to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). . When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m performs processing for ending the variable production.

In this case, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and a special The symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

Here, when the production control unit 130m receives a customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), the production design 70a may be permanently stopped instead of continuing the temporary stop display of the production design 70a. In this case, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and a special The symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a losing mode (turning off). Even in this case, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed on the first image display device 70 .

Thus, according to the modification of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. 117-1, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, , All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a displaced from the predetermined stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stop-displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position. It's like Therefore, it is possible to let the player know that the variable effect has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

At the timings of P7, P11, and P13, the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m will be sent to the production control unit 130m. is not received normally, the same processing will be performed.

Here, at the timing of P14, the case where the customer waiting state designation command is received in the state where the first pending number stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "3" has been described, but the first pending number Even if the customer waiting state designation command is received in any one of states "4", "2" and "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 9 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. FIG. 118 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

117 and 119 are different in that the command received at the timing of P14 is the opening designation command, the description of the common parts is omitted here, and the different parts are only explained.

At the timing of P14, when the stop time of the special symbols elapses, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the jackpot game is played. A process for starting the opening effect of is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 displayed in the sub-first reservation display device 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E remains "3", and is displayed in the effect pattern 70a and the icon display area. The pending icon T1 and the icon TH are erased, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect end. In addition, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined failure mode ("248"), and the first lamp symbol is permanently stopped in a failure mode (for example, turning off), and an opening effect image is displayed (Fig. 119 ( h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game ends (time reduction game state, variable probability game state), when the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special symbol storage designation command from the main control unit 110m, The first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E is updated to the number corresponding to the command in non-animation for one frame (see FIG. 119 (j)) . FIG. 119(j) shows the case where the number of pending commands at start is "1". At this time, a predetermined (same) performance symbol 70a is displayed regardless of the combination of the performance symbols 70a that results in a big win. For example, even if the combination of the production pattern 70a is "777" and the combination of "222" is a big hit, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

At the timing of P7 to P13, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of P14, the case where the opening designation command is received in a state where the first pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "3", but the first pending number is "4 , 2, or 1, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Thus, according to the ninth example shown in FIGS. 118 to 119, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the predetermined All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a displaced from the stopped position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position, and the jackpot game is played. is designed to display the opening effect image of. Therefore, the opening effect is not hindered by the effect pattern, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 10 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. FIG. FIG. 120 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started.

Next, at the timing of P1, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (grasped) first pending number U1 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one suspended icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 121(a)).

In specific example 10, based on the first pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 121(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and a look-ahead zone effect (ordinary zone effect) is displayed in which a blue zone image is displayed with the characters "ZONE" scrolling in the horizontal direction, and zone BGM is output. ) is running. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 121(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 121(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 121 (c)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 121(d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 121(f)).

At the timing of P0 to P6, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, scrolling of the background image continues, and while the effect pattern 70a is performing a variable effect, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (a effect motion).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are maintained and the prefetch zone effects are continuously executed (see FIG. 121(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 121(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 121(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not change from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, but from "3" to It becomes "1" directly. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T13 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 121(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reservation icon T13 is set to the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without shifting display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Also, without continuing the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (Fig. 121). (h)).

When the surplus reserved icons T1 are erased and the necessary reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed, the necessary reserved icons T1 may be shifted while the surplus reserved icons T1 remain.

At the timing of P10, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( The normal zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are not continuously executed according to the announcement scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead zone effect is erased, and the mode is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead effect, such as mode A background (see FIG. 121(h)). As described above, in specific example 10, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Alternatively, the previously executed look-ahead effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a big win, or the look-ahead effect is erased.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 121(i)).

In addition, at the timing of P10, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes "0". Ordinary zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) may be continuously executed along the announcement scenario based on the effect (target of the prefetch effect).

(Specific example 11 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 11 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 122. FIG. FIG. 120 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

121 and 122 are different in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead preview effect, and an icon change effect is executed. The explanation of the common parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In specific example 10, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 121(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of the big win is high is executed in advance. In specific example 11, as the look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect effect and an icon change effect are executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, an icon change effect is being executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is partly operated as in the present embodiment, and the whole or part is enlarged or reduced. After performing preparatory operations such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 122(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, the icon change effect in which the pending icon T1 is changed to the blue character icon is continuously executed. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 122(d)). At this time, the scrolling of the background image is continued, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 122(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 122(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect continues while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 122(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound) , the state of FIG. 122(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 122(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

At the timings of P8 and P9, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not change from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, but from "3" to It becomes "1" directly. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T3 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 122(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reservation icon T3 is set to the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without shifting display from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display areas 70B1 and 70B2 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon. Displayed as TH. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 122(h)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 122(i)).

At the timing of P10, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( Based on the pre-reading effect target), the pre-reading effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change effect (pending icon change effect and relevant icon change effect) are continuously executed according to the notice scenario. do not. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead effect production is not executed, and the effect mode is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead production, such as mode A background (see FIG. 122(h)). Also, the hold icon T1 that was the blue character icon becomes the normal hold icon T1 of the CD image. Thus, in specific example 11, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Alternatively, the previously executed look-ahead effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a big win, or the look-ahead effect is erased.

In addition, at the timing of P10, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes "0". Based on the production (target of the look-ahead production), the pre-reading effect production (display of the effect image EF, the output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change production (pending icon change production and the icon change production) are continued according to the notice scenario. You can also run

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 12 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 123. FIG. FIG. 120 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

123 differs from the specific example 11 in FIG. 122 in that a pre-reading effect (action effect or issue effect) is executed by the first movable member 73 as the pre-reading preview effect, so here it is common. Explanation of parts is omitted, and only different parts are explained.

In specific example 12, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 123(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. In specific example 12, as the look-ahead effect, the effect by the first movable member 73 and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, an action effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined action and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. Also, an icon change effect is executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 123(d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the expectation for the big win is high (for example, a large movement or a mode similar to the big win). At the same time, the first movable member 73 emits light. A sound effect is also output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 123(d)). It should be noted that the look-ahead advance notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects of the effect pattern 70a during the period before the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a.

Also, the first pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is changed to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is executing a predetermined action effect. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 123(e)). Further, the look-ahead foretelling effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 123(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. period is extended. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect is continued while the suspended icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 123(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. 123 ( The state of g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 123(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

In addition, at the timings of P8 and P9, the pre-reading announcement effect by the first movable member 73 (the motion effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not change from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, but from "3" to It becomes "1" directly. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 123(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first pending number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the reserve icon T1 is set to the first It is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shift-displayed in the pending icon display area 70B.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 123(h)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 123(i)).

At the timing of P10, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( Based on the pre-reading effect target), the pre-reading notice effect and icon change effect (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are not continuously executed along the notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the first movable member 73 does not execute the pre-reading forewarning effect, and the first movable member 73 stops at the standby position and turns off or emits light in a more plain manner than the fore-reading forewarning effect. As shown in FIG. 123(h), the effect mode is changed to a mode in which the degree of expectation for a big win is lower than in the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 123(h)). Also, the hold icon T1 that was the blue character icon becomes the normal hold icon T1 of the CD image. Thus, in specific example 11, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Alternatively, the previously executed look-ahead effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a big win, or the look-ahead effect is erased.

In addition, at the timing of P10, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes "0". Based on the effect (target of the prefetch effect), the prefetching notice effect and the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed along the notice scenario.

According to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, at the timing of P7 to P9, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is normally transmitted by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, it is also transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the given command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, at the timing of P10, the first pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "1" As described above, when the first number of reservations changes from "4" to "2", and when the number of first reservations changes from "2" to "0", that is, the reservation grasped by the main control unit 110m If the divergence between the number and the number of reservations grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow is the same as described above.

In specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P10. As described above, in specific examples 10 to 12, the variable production of the production pattern 70a is not executed in a predetermined period. In addition, during a predetermined period, the effect pattern 70a whose variable effect is finished can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the effect pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporary stop state.

Thus, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, in the reserved icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of reserved icons ( When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number during the display of the first reservation information), the surplus of the reserved icons among the specific number of reserved icons (for example, the third hold icon) are not shift-displayed, but the necessary number of hold icons (eg, the first and second hold icons) are shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of pending icons (first hold information), when the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number of It now shows a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number while the number of reservations (for example, three) is being displayed, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Concrete example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 13 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started.

Next, at the timing of P1, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (grasped) first pending number U1 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 125(a)).

In specific example 13, based on the first suspension memory corresponding to suspension icon T12 in FIG. 125(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, and a look-ahead zone effect (ordinary zone effect) is displayed in which a blue zone image is displayed with the characters "ZONE" scrolling in the horizontal direction, and zone BGM is output. ) is running. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 125(a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 125(b)).

Then, at the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248") (see FIG. 125 (c)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 125(d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 125(f)).

At the timing of P0 to P6, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, scrolling of the background image continues, and while the effect pattern 70a is performing a variable effect, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (a effect motion).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are maintained and the prefetch zone effects are continuously executed (see FIG. 125(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

After that, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not pass through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation, It becomes "0" directly from "3". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 125(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the surplus reservation icon T1 is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shift-displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Then, the required one reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Also, while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (Fig. 125 (h )reference).

When the surplus reserved icons T1 are erased and the necessary reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed, the necessary reserved icons T1 may be shifted while the surplus reserved icons T1 remain.

At the timing of P13, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( The normal zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) are not continuously executed according to the announcement scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead zone effect is erased, and the effect is changed to a mode with a lower expectation for a big hit than the look-ahead effect, such as mode A background (see FIG. 125(h)). Thus, in specific example 13, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Alternatively, the previously executed look-ahead effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a big win, or the look-ahead effect is erased.

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time has passed since the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 125(i)).

In addition, at the timing of P13, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes "0". Ordinary zone effects (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) may be continuously executed along the announcement scenario based on the effect (target of the prefetch effect).

(Concrete example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 14 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 126. FIG. FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

125 and 14 in FIG. 126 are different in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead preview effect, and an icon change effect is executed. The explanation of the common parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In specific example 13, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 125(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. In specific example 14, as the look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect effect and an icon change effect are executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, an icon change effect is being executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 126(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed behind the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Also, the icon change effect in which the pending icon T1 is changed to the blue character icon is continuously executed (see FIG. 126(d)). At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 126(e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 126(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect is continued while the suspended icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 126(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound) , the state of FIG. 126(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 126(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

After that, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" without executing the look-ahead effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound) , the state of FIG. 126(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 126(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

At the timings of P8 and P11, the look-ahead effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not pass through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation, It becomes "0" directly from "3". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 126(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the surplus reservation icon T1 is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shift-displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Then, the required one reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 126(h)).

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 126(i)).

At the timing of P13, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( Based on the pre-reading effect target), the pre-reading effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change effect (pending icon change effect and relevant icon change effect) are continuously executed according to the notice scenario. do not. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead effect production is not executed, and the effect mode is changed to a mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than the look-ahead production, such as mode A background (see FIG. 126(h)). Also, the hold icon T1 that was the blue character icon becomes the normal hold icon T1 of the CD image. Thus, in specific example 14, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Alternatively, the previously executed look-ahead effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a big win, or the look-ahead effect is erased.

In addition, at the timing of P13, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes "0". Based on the production (target of the look-ahead production), the pre-reading effect production (display of the effect image EF, the output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change production (pending icon change production and the icon change production) are continued according to the notice scenario. You can also run

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
124 and 127, a specific example 15 when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described. FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

127 is different from the specific example 14 in FIG. 126 in that a pre-reading effect (action effect or issuing effect) is executed by the first movable member 73 as the pre-reading preview effect, so here it is common. Explanation of parts is omitted, and only different parts are explained. In concrete example 15, a look-ahead effect effect can also be executed, but since it is the same as in concrete example 14, the explanation is omitted.

In specific example 15, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 127(a), a pre-reading effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation of a big win is high is executed in advance. In specific example 15, as the look-ahead effect, the effect by the first movable member 73 and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, an action effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined action and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. Also, an icon change effect is executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol has passed, the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "4" to "3", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Also, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 127(d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the expectation for the big win is high (for example, a large movement or a mode similar to the big win). At the same time (see FIG. 127(d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. A sound effect is also output. It should be noted that the look-ahead advance notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be continuously executed in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects of the effect pattern 70a during the period before the ready-to-win effect of the effect pattern 70a. be.

Also, the first pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is changed to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is executing a predetermined action effect. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 127(e)). Further, the look-ahead foretelling effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (drawing motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 127(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. period is extended. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion). Further, the icon change effect is continued while the reserved icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained (see FIG. 127(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. 127 ( The state of g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "2".

After that, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the 1 special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. 127 ( The state of g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reserved number U1 of the first special symbol reserved display 63 is "1".

In addition, at the timings of P8 and P11, the pre-reading announcement effect by the first movable member 73 (the action effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73) may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E does not pass through "3" to "2" and "1" in one frame of non-animation, It becomes "0" directly from "3". In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 directly changes from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the production patterns 70a including the production pattern 70a shifted from the stop position (past The production pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable production is displayed (instantaneously derived display) at the stop position (see FIG. 127(h)). Thus, when the divergence between the first reservation number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first reservation number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the surplus reservation icon T1 is erased from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shift-displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Then, the required one reserved icon T1 displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory motion (see FIG. 127(h)).

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time has passed since the completion of the shift display of the icons, the production pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 127(i)).

At the timing of P13, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the fluctuation production ( Based on the pre-reading effect target), the pre-reading notice effect and icon change effect (suspended icon change effect and icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are not continuously executed along the notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P12, the first movable member 73 does not execute the pre-reading forewarning effect, and the first movable member 73 stops at the standby position and turns off or emits light in a more modest manner than the fore-reading forewarning effect. As shown in FIG. 127(h), the effect mode is changed to a mode in which the degree of expectation for a big win is lower than in the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 127(h)). Also, the hold icon T1 that was the blue character icon becomes the normal hold icon T1 of the CD image. Thus, in specific example 14, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Alternatively, the previously executed look-ahead effect is changed to an effect with a lower expectation for a big win, or the look-ahead effect is erased.

In addition, at the timing of P13, when the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes "0". Based on the effect (target of the prefetch effect), the prefetching notice effect and the icon change effect (suspended icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed along the notice scenario.

According to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, at the timing of P7 to P11, the command (command at stop, command at start) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is normally transmitted by the production control unit 130m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, it is also transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the given command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, at the timing of P12, the first pending number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "0". As described above, when the first number of reservations changes from "4" to "1", that is, the divergence between the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations grasped by the effect control unit 130m is " 3”, the basic flow is the same as described above.

In specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P12. Thus, in the specific examples 13 to 15, the variable production of the production pattern 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. In addition, during a predetermined period, the effect pattern 70a whose variable effect is finished can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the effect pattern 70a can be maintained in a temporary stop state.

Thus, according to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, in the reserved icon display area, a specific number (for example, 3) of reserved icons (for example, 3) larger than the predetermined number (for example, 1) When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number during the display of the first reservation information), the surplus of the reserved icons among the specific number of reserved icons (for example, the third hold icon) are not shift-displayed, but the necessary number of hold icons (eg, the first and second hold icons) are shift-displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, in the pending icon display area, a specific number (eg, three) of pending icons (first hold information), when the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number of It now shows a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display in which the number of reservations is a predetermined number while the number of reservations (for example, three) is being displayed, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. A predetermined number of pending numbers are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Concrete example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 16 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. FIG. 128 is a timing chart when the command is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, and FIGS. 129(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. This is a production example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the number of first reservations stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, while the changing BGM is being output, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. becomes. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two suspended icons T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B1 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Also, the variable display of the first lamp pattern is started in the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variable display device 81, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 129(a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first pending number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The processing for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m is not performed, and remains "1" (see FIG. 129(b)).

After that, at the timing of P3, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (drawing motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 129(c)).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue character icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 129). (d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of special symbols is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance The first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the control unit 130m is from "1" to "1", that is, the processing for starting the variable effect without changing the first reservation number U1 is performed.

At this time, the first pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display area A second pending icon T1 (CD icon) in 70B is additionally displayed in non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 129(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Also, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 129(e)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 129(f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production (the SP reach production ends), the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in a reach loss mode (“161”). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 129(g)).

Then, at the timing of P8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is in a losing mode (extinguishing). Main stop (see FIG. 129(h)).

After that, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of special symbols is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "1" to "0" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display One pending icon T1 displayed in the area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 129(i)).

Next, at the timing of P10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon TH is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 129 ( j) see).

After that, when the effect control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

In addition, at the timing of P2 to P4, the production control unit 130m was able to receive normally the command (a winning command, a stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command sent from The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of P5, the case where the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" has been described, but the first reservation number U1 is "0" to "0", when the first reservation number U1 changes from "2" to "2", when the first reservation number U1 changes from "3" to "3", that is, the main control unit 110m stores If the number of pending (understanding) and the number of holding stored (understood) by the effect control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Thus, according to the 16th specific example shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of pending icons (first pending information) are displayed in the pending icon display area 70C, a predetermined number of pending When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is the number, after displaying the pending icons one more than the predetermined number (for example, two), the pending icons are shift-displayed. , a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending number in the sub-first pending indicator 83 or the first pending number display area 70E, the number of pending When the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display in which is a predetermined number, the predetermined number of reservations is displayed without displaying the number of reservations that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). It is designed to Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70C, but the pending number is "0" while the icon is displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display of The pending icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, while displaying the number of reservations of "0" in the sub-first reservation indicator 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, the number of reservations is "0" When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, the number of reservations of “0” is displayed (maintained) without displaying the number of reservations that is one more than “0” (for example, one). ). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

(Concrete example 17 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Concrete example 17 when the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. FIG. 130 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "2" to "1", a process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display area Two pending icons T1 displayed in 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are scrolled in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Also, the first pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 131(a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The processing for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m is not performed, and remains "1" (see FIG. 131(b)).

After that, at the timing of P3, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "3". If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The processing for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m is not performed, and remains "1" (see FIG. 131(b)).

Next, at the timing of P4, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The processing for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m is not performed, and remains "1" (see FIG. 131(b)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 131(c)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed.

At this time, in a state in which the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are performed. period is extended. In addition, the zone effect (prefetch zone background display, blue zone image display, zone BGM output) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue character icon is maintained to continue the icon change effect (Fig. 131). (d)).

After that, at the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of special symbols is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m normally receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance When the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", processing for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first pending number displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display area A pending icon T1 (CD icon) is additionally displayed in non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning) in the second to fourth positions of 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) ( See FIG. 131(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Also, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 131(e)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation) (Fig. 131(f)).

After that, when the effect control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

In addition, at the timing of P2 to P6, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m (command at winning, command at stop, command at start) was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, but based on the reception of this command Even if the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m, the command (the winning command, the stopping command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m , start time command) is not normally received by the effect control unit 130m.

Here, at the timing of P7, the case where the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" has been described, but the first reservation number U1 is "1". to "2", when the first reservation number U1 changes from "0" to "2", when the first reservation number U1 changes from "0" to "1", that is, the main control unit 110m stores If the number of pending (understood) is greater than the number of pending (understood) by the effect control unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Thus, according to the concrete example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of pending icons (first pending information) are displayed in the pending icon display area, the number of pending When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) greater than the specified number, after displaying a number of pending icons that is one more than the specific number (for example, three), A specific number of pending icons are displayed by shifting the pending icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, while displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending number in the sub-first pending indicator 83 or the first pending number display area 70E, the pending number When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that is a specific number (for example, 2) that is greater than a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is 1 more than the specific number (for example, 3) is displayed. It is designed to display a specific number of pending counts without Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the concrete example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area, but the pending number is a predetermined number (for example, When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display of 1), after displaying a number of pending icons that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two), these pending icons are shift-displayed. By doing so, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, while the number of reservations of "0" is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, the number of reservations is a predetermined number ( For example, when the production control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display that is one), the predetermined number of reservations is displayed without displaying the number of reservations that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). It is designed to display. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

According to the above-described specific example, when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command during the temporary stop of the production design 70a, the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the fluctuation period of the special design TZ and the lamp design , the output period of the changing BGM is extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example described above, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotation of the icon are continued. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the boring performance with extremely no movement during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) is continued (executed). Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the pre-reading notice performance is not terminated, and the game is played by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the above-described specific example, even if the pre-reading notice effect (icon change effect, pre-reading zone effect) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol During the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period 70a, the advance notice mode (icon type, zone effect type) of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not changed. As a result, the advance of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not abnormal, and the game can be more interesting by avoiding inconveniences that cause dissatisfaction of the player.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the production that is shifted from the predetermined stop position After all the production patterns 70a including the pattern 70a (the production patterns 70a which were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), the variable display is started. . Therefore, compared to the case where the variable display is started with the performance pattern 70a deviated from the stop position, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the command at the start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the lamp design are not stopped and displayed. The variable display is continued. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol. In addition, even if the production pattern 70a is displayed at the stop position (immediately derived display), the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern can inform the player that the variable production is being performed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command at start during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the icon is displayed for the normal time (when the command at stop is received). It is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than 10 frames of animation in the case of Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the change performance to be newly executed to be hindered by the erasure of the icon, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the above-described specific example, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a in which the look-ahead forewarning effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the effect control unit 130m normally issues the start time command. When received, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect even in the newly executed fluctuation effect. Therefore, even if a communication abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the pre-reading notice performance is not terminated, and the game is played by avoiding the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the above-described specific example, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect pattern 70a in which the look-ahead forewarning effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed), the effect control unit 130m normally issues the start time command. When received, it is possible to execute an effect of contents according to the scenario of the pre-reading notice effect in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even when a command abnormality in which the performance control part 130m cannot receive the command normally occurs, the advance of the pre-reading notice performance does not become abnormal, and the inconvenience that the player is dissatisfied is avoided. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Concrete example 18 when the production control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 18 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. FIG. 132 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and FIGS. For example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display The two pending icons T1 displayed in the area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, the shift display of the pending icon is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

Then, at the timing of P2, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m can not normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, production control The processing for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains "1" without being performed.

At this time, since the winning command in which the first reservation number U1 is "2" has not been received, the first reservation number U1 displayed in the sub first reservation display device 83 and the first reservation number display area 70E "1" remains, and the second pending icon T1 corresponding to the first pending number "2" in the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed (see FIG. 133(a)).

After that, at the timing of P3, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "2" to "3" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (prefetching designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (grasped) first pending number U1 changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display 3 corresponding to "3" of the first reservation number U1 without displaying the reservation icon T1 in the second area corresponding to "2" of the first reservation number U1 that could not receive the command at the time of winning of the area 70B. Second, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 133(b)).

Next, at the timing of P4, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 133(c)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is in a losing mode (for example, turning off). (See FIG. 133(d)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". Variable display of special symbols is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "3" to "2" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display In the area 70B, the second pending icon T1 corresponding to the first pending number "2" for which the winning command could not be received is additionally displayed as one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning) and displayed. The three pending icons T1 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames, and the top one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 133(e)).

After that, at the timing of P7, the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, so that the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation). (See FIG. 133(f)).

Next, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 133(g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stop-displayed in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is in a losing mode (for example, turning off). (See FIG. 133(h)).

After that, at the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of special symbols is started. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start time command (first special symbol storage designation command, performance design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit A process for starting the variable effect when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed in the sub-first pending display device 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first pending icon display The two pending icons T1 displayed in the area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 133(i)).

Next, at the timing of P11, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon Th is in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 133 ( j) see).

After that, when the effect control part 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control part 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timing of P2, the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. is not normally received by the display/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/driving control unit 150, it is the same as when the effect control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. will be processed.

Here, at the timing of P3, when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "1", the first reservation number is "3" When the winning command is received As described above, when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is "1" and the first reservation number U1 is "4" When the winning command is received, the production control unit When the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by 130m is "0", the first reservation number U1 is either "2", "3", or "4". However, the basic flow is the same as described above.

Thus, according to the eighteenth specific example shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the holding icon (first holding information ) is not displayed, when the effect control unit 130m receives a prize-winning command in which the reserved number is a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas Instead of displaying the pending icon in the area corresponding to (eg, the second), the pending icon is displayed in an area (eg, the third) corresponding to a specific number of the pending icon display areas. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 to 133, a number (eg, one ), when the effect control unit 130m receives a prize-winning command in which the number of reservations is a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number, display the number of reservations of the predetermined number. It is designed to display a specific number of pending counts instead of Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Thus, according to the eighteenth specific example shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the holding icon (first holding information ) is not displayed, when the production control unit 130m receives a winning command with a specific number (for example, four) that is more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas A region corresponding to a specific number (for example, 4th) to display a pending icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the wrong number of reservations, thereby preventing the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 to 133, a number (eg, one ) while displaying the number of reservations, when the production control unit 130m receives a winning command that makes the number of reservations more than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the predetermined number is less than the specific number by one. It is designed to display a specific number of pending counts without displaying the number of pending counts. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, since the exact number of reservations is displayed immediately, it is possible to inform the player of the number of reservations quickly.

Further, according to the concrete example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, a predetermined number When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start that the number of reservations is a predetermined number while the reservation icon is displayed in an area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the reservation After a specific number of reserved icons are displayed by additionally displaying a reserved icon in an area (for example, second) corresponding to a predetermined number of icon display areas, the reserved icons are shift-displayed to display a predetermined number of reserved icons. icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

132 and 133, an area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas and a number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, (e.g., 3)) without displaying a pending icon in an area corresponding to a specific number (e.g., 4) that is more than a predetermined number (e.g., 4). When the effect control unit 130m receives a start time command that is one less than the number, an area corresponding to a predetermined number of the pending icon display areas (for example, the second) and a number that is one more than the predetermined number ( (for example, 3) to display a specific number of reserved icons, and then shift-display those reserved icons to display a number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number. It is designed to Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the concrete example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the effect control unit 130m can not normally receive the command at the time of winning, and the icon corresponding to the first pending storage is displayed as a pending icon. , the icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to the failure to normally receive the winning command, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the above-described specific example, in a state where the main control board 110 has a predetermined number (four or three) of pending memories, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first special In the symbol reservation display 63 (first display), the number of reservations is continuously reduced even during the occurrence of an abnormality. Then, after the occurrence of the abnormality, the main control board 110 has a specific number (the number is less than the main control board 110 by 2 or more) less than the predetermined number (4 or 3)), and the effect control board 130 When the command is normally received in the first image display device 70 (second display), the hold display (for example, the number of hold icons is 4 to 2 or 1, 3 to 1) are not displayed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the pending display (display of the number of pending, pending icon) enables a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, and the effect is performed during the pre-reading effect by the pending display. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the control board 130, the read-ahead effect by the pending display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the background display (for example, a background image that is different from the one normally used, such as the look-ahead zone background) enables a look-ahead effect (advance notification) that increases the expectation of a big hit in advance. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance by the background display, the look-ahead performance by the background display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received. .
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, it is possible to perform a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is increased in advance by displaying text (for example, a telop or text such as "ZONE"), and execution of the pre-reading effect by displaying text. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during this, the read-ahead performance by character display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF) enables a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance by the degree of expectation display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as advance notification to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance, in a period before reach, in a plurality of variable effects, a foreseeing effect that can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect (for example, the first movable member 70 (such as board and frame accessories, operation such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, chance eye of the same color of the production pattern, etc.), and the production control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive the command When an abnormality occurs, it is possible to continue the look-ahead effect until the command is received normally.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, a look-ahead performance (advance notification) to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance is possible, and an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance, and performance control is performed. When there is a jackpot in the reserve memory that the substrate 130 has missed, the read-ahead performance by the reserve display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received, and the predetermined big prize winning opening can be opened. good.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the player's attention and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as advance notification to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance, in a period before reach, in a plurality of variable effects, a foreseeing effect that can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect (for example, the first movable member 70 (such as board and frame accessories, operation such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, chance eye of the same color of the production pattern, etc.), and the production control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive the command After an abnormality has occurred, when the command is received normally, the read-ahead effect that was scheduled to be executed continuously will not be performed from the continuation.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as advance notification to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance, in a period before reach, in a plurality of variable effects, a foreseeing effect that can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect (for example, the first movable member 70 There are board accessories and frame accessories such as, operations such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eyes of the production pattern. After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a continuous look-ahead performance across a plurality of pattern variations based on the first suspension storage, it is stored after the first suspension storage. When the command corresponding to the second reserved memory is normally received, the read-ahead performance which was scheduled to be continuously executed based on the predetermined reserved memory is not performed from the continuation.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, in a state where the main control board 110 has a predetermined number (four or three) of pending memories, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first special In the symbol reservation display 63, the number of reservations (first display) continues to decrease even during the occurrence of an abnormality. Then, after the occurrence of the abnormality, the main control board 110 has a specific number (the number of which is less than the main control board 110 by 2 or more) less than a predetermined number (4 or 3)), and the effect control board 130 when the command is normally received, the pending display (second display, for example, four pending icons from 2 or 1, from 3 to 1) are not displayed. On the other hand, in the reservation number display areas 70F and 70E of the first image display device 70, the reservation display (third display, for example, reservation number) that gradually decreases from the predetermined number to the specific number is not displayed, It is designed to change to a specific number of pending display.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the production control board 130, the production pattern 70a in which the variable production is completed can be displayed in a temporary stop state (swing state). Even if a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a, the temporary stop state (swing state) of the performance pattern 70a is continued, and the customer waiting demonstration performance is not executed.
Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance based on the first suspension storage, the second suspension storage stored after the first suspension storage. When the command corresponding to is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production pattern 70a, the look-ahead production (advance notification) scheduled to be continuously executed for the first reserved storage is not continued. Alternatively, the look-ahead effect is changed to a display with a lower expectation, or the look-ahead effect is deleted.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the effect control board 130 during execution of the prefetch effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used, such as the prefetch zone background) After an abnormality due to reception occurs, when the command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, the normally received performance pattern 70a fluctuating display is different from the first pending memory. Do not continue the pre-reading effect (advance notification) by the background display that was scheduled to be executed continuously, or change the pre-reading effect to a display with lower expectations, or erase the pre-reading effect It's becoming
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, during execution of the read-ahead effect by character display (for example, a telop or characters such as "ZONE"), after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the effect control board 130 , When the command corresponding to the second reserved memory stored after the first reserved memory is normally received, the normally received variable display of the effect pattern 70a is continuously executed for the first reserved memory. The planned read-ahead performance (advance notification) by character display is not continued, the read-ahead performance is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the read-ahead performance is erased.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, during the execution of the pre-reading effect by the degree of expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), the effect control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive a command. After the occurrence, when the command corresponding to the second reserved memory stored after the first reserved memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production pattern 70a, it is continuously with respect to the first reserved memory. The pre-reading effect (advance notification) due to the expectation level display that was scheduled to be executed is not continued, or the pre-reading effect is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the pre-reading effect is erased. .
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. As advance notification to the effect that the degree of expectation for a big hit is increased in advance, in the period before reach, in a plurality of variable effects, a look-ahead effect that can be executed in a partial period of each variable effect (for example, board accessories such as the first movable member 70, etc. Frame accessories, actions such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission,
There is a chance eye of the same color of the production pattern, etc.). Then, based on the first reserved storage, abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command in the performance control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead performance executed in a partial period of each variable performance in the plurality of variable performances in the period before reach. After an abnormality has occurred, when the command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, the normally received performance symbol 70a fluctuating display with respect to the first pending memory The read-ahead performance (advance notification) scheduled to be continuously executed is not continued, the read-ahead performance is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the read-ahead performance is erased.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, when there is a big hit in the command (reserved memory) missed by the performance control board 130 due to the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command in the performance control board 130, the memory is stored after the big win reserving memory or the big winning reserving memory. When the command corresponding to the pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a, the anticipation performance (advance notification) by the degree of expectation display scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory. may not be performed continuously, the look-ahead effect may be changed to a display with a lower degree of expectation, or the look-ahead effect may be deleted.
In this case, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the effect control board 130 during the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the first pending memory, the first pending memory or before the first pending memory is stored When the command corresponding to the second pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a, the pre-reading performance (advance notification) scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory. can continue to run.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the effect control board 130 during the execution of the look-ahead effect based on the first pending memory, the first pending memory or before the first pending memory is stored When the command corresponding to the second pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance pattern 70a, the pre-reading performance (advance notification) scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory. will not continue to run.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the effect control board 130 during execution of the prefetch effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used, such as the prefetch zone background) After an abnormality due to reception occurs, when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, the normally received effect pattern 70a fluctuating display shows the The pre-reading effect (advance notification) by the background display, which was scheduled to be continuously executed for one reserved memory, can be continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the effect control board 130 during execution of the prefetch effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used, such as the prefetch zone background) After an abnormality due to reception occurs, when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, the normally received effect pattern 70a fluctuating display shows the The pre-reading effect (advance notification) by the background display, which was scheduled to be continuously executed for one reserved memory, is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, during execution of the read-ahead effect by character display (for example, a telop or characters such as "ZONE"), after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the effect control board 130 , When the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production pattern 70a, for the first pending memory The read-ahead performance (advance notification) by character display, which was scheduled to be executed continuously, can be executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, during execution of the read-ahead effect by character display (for example, a telop or characters such as "ZONE"), after the abnormal reception or non-receipt of the command occurs in the effect control board 130 , When the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production pattern 70a, for the first pending memory The read-ahead effect (advance notification) by character display, which was scheduled to be executed continuously, is not executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, during the execution of the pre-reading effect by the degree of expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), the effect control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive a command. After the occurrence, when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production pattern 70a, the first pending memory It is possible to continue to execute the look-ahead effect (advance notification) by displaying the degree of expectation that was scheduled to be executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. Then, based on the first pending storage, during the execution of the pre-reading effect by the degree of expectation display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF), the effect control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive a command. After the occurrence, when the command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received production pattern 70a, the first pending memory The pre-reading effect (advance notification) due to the degree of expectation display, which was scheduled to be executed continuously, will not be executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (display of pending number, pending icon), background display (for example, pre-reading zone background, etc.) Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation level display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board such as first movable member 70 It is possible to combine a plurality of the accessories, the frame accessories, the operation such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eye of the production pattern. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command in the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of prefetch effects, the first prefetch effect (for example, hold display) can be continuously executed, while the second look-ahead effect (for example, background display, motion effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) out of the plurality of look-ahead effects is not continuously executed. there is
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (display of pending number, pending icon), background display (for example, look-ahead zone background, etc.) Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board such as first movable member 70 It is possible to combine a plurality of the accessories, the frame accessories, the operation such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eye of the production pattern. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of prefetch effects, the first prefetch effect (for example, hold display) can be continuously executed, while the second look-ahead effect (for example, the background display, the motion effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) out of the plurality of look-ahead effects is not continuously executed. there is
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (display of pending number, pending icon), background display (for example, pre-reading zone background, etc.) Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation level display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board such as first movable member 70 It is possible to combine a plurality of the accessories, the frame accessories, the operation such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eye of the production pattern. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead performances, the first image display device 70 is used among the plurality of look-ahead performances until the command is normally received. While the first prefetch effect to be executed (for example, pending display) can be continuously executed, the second prefetch effect executed using a device other than the first image display device 70 ( For example, the action rendering of the first movable member 70, etc.) is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (display of pending number, pending icon), background display (for example, look-ahead zone background, etc.) Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board such as first movable member 70 It is possible to combine a plurality of the accessories, the frame accessories, the operation such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eye of the production pattern. After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of prefetch effects, when the command is normally received, the first prefetch effect out of the plurality of prefetch effects (for example, pending display ) can be continuously executed, but the second look-ahead effect (for example, the background display, the motion effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) out of the plurality of look-ahead effects is not continuously executed. .
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, as a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, pending display (display of pending number, pending icon), background display (for example, pre-reading zone background, etc.) Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation level display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board such as first movable member 70 It is possible to combine a plurality of the accessories, the frame accessories, the operation such as vibration of the operation button, light emission, and the same color chance eye of the production pattern. After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-receipt of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead performances, when the command is normally received, the first image display device 70 is used to execute one of the plurality of look-ahead performances. While the first prefetch effect (for example, pending display) can be continuously executed, among the plurality of prefetch effects, the second prefetch effect (for example, , motion effects of the first movable member 70, etc.) are not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the player's interests. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, when abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop time command (special symbol determination command) occurs in the effect control board 130 in a state where there is a pending memory, the effect symbol 70a in the first image display device 70 is changed. The production pattern 70a which has not been started and has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T1 corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and the identification portion (number) constituting the effect pattern 70a and the effect (EF) attached to the character are displayed. ) is executed.
Therefore, even when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, when abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop time command (special symbol determination command) occurs in the effect control board 130 in a state where there is a pending memory, the effect symbol 70a in the first image display device 70 is changed. The production pattern 70a which has not been started and has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T1 corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and a part of the decoration (for example, the bar image) attached to the character constituting the effect pattern 70a SG) is executed.
Therefore, even when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In the above-described specific example, when abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop time command (special symbol determination command) occurs in the effect control board 130 in a state where there is a pending memory, the effect symbol 70a in the first image display device 70 is changed. The production pattern 70a which has not been started and has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and the motion effect of the pending icon T is executed.
Therefore, even when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

When the number of reservations stored in the main control board 110 is less than the number of reservations stored in the effect control board 130 by 2 or more, it is displayed on the liquid crystal (first image display device, second image display device) The number of reserved icons corresponding to the number of reserved commands input from the main control board 110 is rewritten without performing the performance of gradually reducing the number of reserved icons that have been deviated.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control section 110m and the effect control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Pre-notification (read-ahead effect) that increases the expectation of a big hit includes, for example, change of hold, character display for hold change, change of character display for hold change, character display (telop) that suggests transition to a mode consisting of multiple types. , Background color change, Background change, Return of appearing characters, Appearance of new characters, Display of expectations by multiple types (colors, effects, characters, etc.), Predetermined production performed for the first period (before reach) from the start of fluctuation (Button vibration, movement of frame/board accessories, effect, thunder, character display, specific sound, predetermined lamp light emission) may be executed in parallel.

When the production control board 130 normally receives the next and subsequent stop commands via the state in which the stop command is abnormally received or not received, the production pattern 70a is statically displayed (main stop), and according to the command Display processing may be executed.

Even if the effect control board 130 has abnormally received or not received the stop time command, the background image associated with each of the plurality of effect modes may be displayed. At this time, in a plurality of production modes, although a common display mode (shape and color) is displayed for suspension, simulation, group notice, etc., the degree of expectation may differ depending on the production mode. For example, an operation image of an operation button, an operation image of an operation means such as a lever, a display of a light guide plate, a title display, and the like are displayed in a mode with different expectations for a big win depending on the production mode.

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance is continuously displayed in the state of abnormal reception or non-reception. However, if the next command is received normally, the previous look-ahead effect may not continue to be executed.

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance is continuously displayed in the state of abnormal reception or non-reception. However, when the next command is normally received, it may be possible to execute a new effect (including, for example, changing the icon at that time).

When the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance is continuously displayed in the state of abnormal reception or non-reception. However, when the next command is normally received, it may be possible to change the display mode to a display mode with a lower degree of expectation than the previous look-ahead effect (for example, change the pending display from a blue icon to a plain display).

When the production control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-reading production for changing the background display (mode, stage), abnormal reception or non-reception In the state, a look-ahead effect that changes the background display (mode, stage) may be continuously displayed.

When the production control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-receipt of the stop command during the pre-reading production of displaying the character display (for example, telop), abnormal reception or non-reception In the state of , the look-ahead effect of displaying characters (telop) may be continuously displayed.

When the production control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormal reception or non-receipt state of the stop command during the pre-reading production that displays the expected value display (color change, effect, suspension), abnormal In the state of reception or non-reception, a look-ahead effect of displaying an expected value display (color change, effect, suspension) may be continuously executed.

When a command of the performance control board 130 is missed, the variable performance is completed without being limited to displaying a part of the plurality of performance patterns 70a after the completion of the variable performance in a temporary stop state (swing state). A part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a may be displayed in a temporary stop state (oscillating state), and the rest of the plurality of performance symbols 70a may be displayed in a permanent stop state (stationary state). For example, when a command of the production control board 130 is missed, the left and right two production patterns 70a are permanently stopped, while the central production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, and the left and right two production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped. , and can be changed as appropriate, such as by permanently stopping the center effect pattern 70a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the performance design 70a is designed to swing up and down as a temporary stop of the performance design 70a, but the performance design 70a may be expanded and contracted. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, the production pattern 70a is shifted from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) and in the direction of expanding (smaller than the normal size). large), it should be normal size and displayed at the stop position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect pattern 70a. You may make it fluctuate|move like this. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (time saving game state, variable probability game state), since the production pattern 70a is composed only of the number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates during the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. The performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decorative part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. You may make it fluctuate motion (drawing motion).

When a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, an effect may be executed such that the identification part (number) constituting the effect pattern 70a in which the variable effect is finished operates. In this case, it is not limited to executing the operation production with a part of the plurality of production patterns 70a for which the variable production is completed, and the operation production is executed by a part of the plurality of production patterns 70a for which the variation production is completed. You may make it not perform operation|movement production|presentation by the remainder of the production|presentation patterns 70a.

When a command of the production control board 130 is missed, an effect (for example, a pattern effect image ZE decorating the background of the character) attached to the character (for example, the character image CG) constituting the production pattern 70a for which the variable production is completed is displayed. ) to operate. In this case, it is not limited to executing the operation production with a part of the plurality of production patterns 70a for which the variable production is completed, and the operation production is executed by a part of the plurality of production patterns 70a for which the variation production is completed. You may make it not perform operation|movement production|presentation by the remainder of the production|presentation patterns 70a.

When a command of the production control board 130 is missed, decorations (for example, a stick-shaped image SG that is a part of the character) attached to the character (for example, the character image CG) that constitutes the production pattern 70a for which the variable production is completed. ) to operate. In this case, it is not limited to executing the operation production with a part of the plurality of production patterns 70a for which the variable production is completed, and the operation production is executed by a part of the plurality of production patterns 70a for which the variation production is completed. You may make it not perform operation|movement production|presentation by the remainder of the production|presentation patterns 70a.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the stick image SG and the symbol effect image ZE, which constitute the decorative portion, fluctuate (act effect). Only one of the above may perform the fluctuation motion (effect motion).

When a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to execute an effect such that a pending display (for example, a pending icon) operates.

When a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to execute an effect such that a pending display (for example, a pending icon) operates.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to continue the fluctuation of the special symbol TZ.

Even if the numerical information of the production pattern 70a and the numerical information of the special pattern TZ are different when the variable production of the production pattern 70a is started based on the normal command after the command of the production control board 130 is missed. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a were not mentioned, but during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the frame lighting device At least one of the plurality of light emitting units that constitute 10 may be in the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change and movement than during fluctuation). , At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the board illumination device 76 is set to the same light emission mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower luminance than during fluctuation, light emission with less change and movement than during fluctuation) mode, extinguished). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 changes (switches) to a lighting mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the production pattern 70a of the losing mode is finally stopped, the special pattern TZ is stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but the same number as the production pattern 70a The main stop may be made in such a failure mode. In addition, when the production pattern 70a of the jackpot mode is actually stopped, the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined jackpot mode ("333"). You may make it stop.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the command at the start of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the production design 70a (first special design storage designation command, production design designation command, first special design variation pattern specified command) is received by the effect control unit 130m, the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern is continued, but similar to the effect pattern 70a, it is instantaneously derived and displayed, and then the variable display is performed. You may start. In this case, as for the special symbols TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbols TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start command or the customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TH is being displayed, the icon TH is erased by one frame of non-animation. It may be shorter than the 10 frames required for erasing the icon TH upon receipt of the command, the 20 frames required for the shift display of the pending icon T, and the 10 frames required for the additional display of the pending icon. You may do so.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the start command is received while the number of pending icons greater than the number of pending icons is displayed, the surplus pending icons T1 are erased by one frame of non-animation. Any number of frames shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon T1, 20 frames for shift display of the pending icon HI, and 10 frames for additional display of the pending icon based on the reception of the stop command may be used, for example, 5 frames. It may be erased after a minute animation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start when the number of reservations is a predetermined number, so that the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored (grasp). If there is an inconsistency (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the direction of increase) due to command abnormalities between the reserved number and the number of pending icons that are one more than the predetermined number Although a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed after being displayed, the predetermined number of pending icons may be displayed as they are without displaying a number of pending icons that is one more than the predetermined number.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start when the number of reservations is a predetermined number, so that the number of reservations and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored (grasp). If there is an inconsistency between the pending number and the command abnormality (abnormality with the same number, abnormality with divergence in the direction of increase), it will be executed according to the reception of this command at the start Although the icon is displayed during the variable effect, the icon may not be displayed during the variable effect executed in response to the reception of the command at the start.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is the CD icon regardless of the type of effect mode. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of production mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed according to the type of production mode or game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is changed according to the type of effect mode or game state, the action mode (mode of effect action) during the variable effect is changed according to the form of the normal icon. good too. Furthermore, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is changed according to the type of the effect mode or the game state, the mode of action (mode of the effect action) during the variable effect can be changed according to the form of the special icon. good too.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect. A specific icon suggesting that a ready-to-win effect (for example, an SP ready-to-win effect or an SPSP ready-to-win effect) is executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon and the specific icon and the mode of the effect action should be different from the form of the normal icon and the special icon and the mode of the effect action.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hold icon is displayed when both the prefetch designation command of the hold number designation command as the winning command are normally received, but the hold number designation command is received and the prefetch designation The pending icon may be displayed when the command is not received normally, while the pending icon may not be displayed when the prefetching designation command is normally received without the pending number designation command being received normally. and vice versa. In addition, when receiving only one of the pending number designation command and the prefetch designation command and displaying the pending icon, the icon change effect for the pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by operating the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by operating the effect button 17.例文帳に追加In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality that the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the operation for changing the production mode is not accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to regulate the change of the production mode based on the operation of .

Further, in the present embodiment, the pending icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the pending icon is displayed as a button icon prompting the operation of the effect button 17, In response to the operation of the effect button 17 during display of the button icon for which is valid, an operation change effect of changing the button icon to any of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed. . In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 is changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibrating, non-projecting state at the standby position) to the second operating mode (vibrating, projecting state at the effect position). You may do so. In this case, the production button 17 is changed from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-described speech announcement effect and final effect, rather than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect. The rate of change should be higher.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the operation unit for performing operation effects (dialogue announcement effect, decision effect) was only the effect button 17, but an operation unit such as a effect lever is provided separately from the effect button 17, for example During the valid period generated during the SP ready-to-play performance, an operation promoting performance to prompt the operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever is executed, and the operation performance (decision performance, etc.) is executed according to the operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever. may In this case, the decision effect in the SP reach effect that can be executed only in the specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) is better than when executing the SP reach effect that can be executed only in the normal game state. An operation promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 may be executed at a low rate (hardly executed).

In addition, in the present embodiment, during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, an operation notice effect indicating the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed is not executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 that has become effective. In the first half period of the ready-to-win effect (for example, during normal reach) and the second half period (for example, during SP ready-to-win effect), the operation announcement effect may be executed respectively. In this case, the operation announcement effect executed in the second half period of the ready-to-win effect is more likely than the operation announcement effect executed in the first half period of the ready-to-win effect. ) should be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of the notice in the big win notice effect and the motion of the movable member are not linked, but the degree of expectation of the notice in the big win notice effect and the motion of the movable member may be linked. In this case, during the execution of the variable performance, the movable member operates more in the case where the announcement performance with high jackpot expectation is executed than in the case where the announcement performance with low jackpot expectation is executed. It is preferable to make the ratio high (easy to operate).

In the present embodiment, as pending storage in the first image display device 70, the pending icon T1 (T2) is displayed in the pending icon display area 70B (70C), and the pending number is displayed in the pending number display area 70E (70F). there is In this way, in the pending icon display area 70B (70C), the number of pending is displayed by the number of display of the pending icon T1 (T2), and in the pending number display area 70E (70F), the number of pending is displayed by the numeric information of the pending number. it's shown. The pending icon T1 (T2) is not limited to a single picture, figure, character or symbol as in the "CD" shape of the present embodiment, but may be a combination of a plurality of pictures, figures, characters or symbols, or a It is possible to adopt an appropriate configuration, such as adding effects (effect production) and decorations to main parts such as figures, characters, and symbols.

The display of the number of holds, such as the hold icon change effect, is not limited to changing the hold icon alone. good. In addition, the change in the pending icon change effect is not limited to the timing of the specific example described above.

As a look-ahead effect (advance notification) by character display, the example of scrolling the characters of "ZONE" in the left and right direction was given, but the character display is not limited to meaningful character strings, but also symbols, pictures, drawings, or these. It may be a combination of Also, a plurality of character displays may be provided, and the selected character display may vary depending on the level of expectation. The character display is not limited to scrolling left and right, but can be zoomed in or out, panned or tilted, etc., to attract the attention of the player.

As the anticipation effect (advance notification) by the degree of expectation display, the blue effect image EF was exemplified, and the one by the color effect was mentioned, but it is not limited to the color effect. Appropriate displays can be employed, such as working effects such as being sucked in like a hall, or blowing wind. In addition, the degree of expectation display is not limited to accompanying the production pattern 70a or by the production pattern 70a itself, but may be displayed in the background or the like. Furthermore, the degree of expectation display is not limited to being displayed on the first image display device 70, and may be a winning device such as an accessory provided on the game board, a light-emitting device, or a starter, or an accessory or light-emitting device provided in the game frame. You may perform by light emission, etc., such as.

The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the degree-of-expectation display may be an effect executed only before the ready-to-win or an effect also executed after the ready-to-win. Moreover, when performing the degree-of-expectation display after the reach, the display may be continued in the form before the reach, or may be changed so as to be displayed in a form different from the form before the reach.

The look-ahead effect (preliminary notification) may proceed at a variable effect or at an appropriate timing according to the drawn scenario, but for each variable effect, the presence or absence of progress and the necessity of changing the degree of expectation, etc. A lottery may be held and progress may be made according to the results.

As the effect presentation represented by the effect, the design effect image ZE for decorating the background of the character and the color effect exemplifying the blue effect image EF were mentioned, but not limited to the color effect, for example, a halo is shining. It is possible to adopt an appropriate display such as a light emitting effect such as a black hole sucking in or a wind blowing effect.

In the present embodiment, a specific example was described in which the icon TH is not displayed when the command is normally received from a predetermined state in which the command cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m. When the icon TH is received and returned, the icon TH may be displayed and then deleted.

Similar to the effect control unit 130m described above, when the first special symbol holding display 63 can not normally receive the command (signal) from the main control unit 110m, the holding displayed by the first special symbol holding display 63 A predetermined state may occur in which the number and the number of reservations grasped (stored) by the effect control unit 130m diverge.
That is, the first special symbol reservation display device 63 (first display means) is capable of executing the first shift display that sequentially decreases the reservation memory by one each time the variable production is started, and the production control unit 130m In a state where there are a predetermined number (for example, four) of reserved memories, when a command (signal) for a specific number of reserved memories (for example, two) less than the predetermined number by two or more is received from the main control unit 110m, the It is possible to perform a second shift display that reduces the reserved storage from a predetermined number to a specified number in a manner different from the one-shift display (directly reducing from four to two without going through three). On the other hand, the first image display device 70 (second display means) controlled by the effect control section 130m displays the effect symbols even when either the first shift display or the second shift display is executed. Each time the variable performance of 70a is completed, the reserved memory can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one.
According to this, therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In a specific example, it is possible to display the pending memory stored (grasped) by the production control unit at a plurality of locations. In this embodiment, the pending icon display area 70B (70
D) and the pending memory display area 70E (70F) are displayed in two places, for example,
The pending memory may be displayed on each of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, or at a plurality of locations on the second image display device 71. FIG.

In a specific example, in the pending icon display area 70B (70D), it is possible to execute the first shift display in which the pending memory is decreased by one each time the variable effect is started. This first shift display, for example, is displayed such that the pending icon T1 (T2) is shifted one by one each time the variable effect is performed. Further, in a state in which, for example, four pending icons T1 (T2) are displayed in the pending icon display area 70B (70D), when the effect control unit 130m receives commands corresponding to, for example, two pending storage, the pending The same display as the first shift display, in which the icons T1 (T2) shift from 4 to 3 and then decrease to 3 and then shift from 3 to 2, is not performed, and the reserved icon T1 (T2) is displayed. After the fourth item of , the second shift display is performed such that the number of items is shifted from three to two items. On the other hand, in the pending number display area 70E (70F) that displays the pending memory by the pending numbers (number information), the pending numbers are displayed so as to decrease one by one each time the variable effect is started. there is In a state where, for example, the pending number "4" is displayed in the pending number display area 70E (70F), for example, when the effect control unit 130m receives a command corresponding to two pending memories (the second shift display is executed ), instead of sequentially decreasing the reserved digits by one, the third shift display is performed to display the reserved digit "2" corresponding to two reserved memories from the reserved digit "4". It's becoming

As a look-ahead effect (advance notification), by executing a related effect in a partial period of each variable effect in a plurality of variable effects, it is possible to indicate that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high. Suggestion is feasible. "Related production" includes various productions such as production by action and light emission by accessories provided on the game frame and game board, action and light emission such as vibration of operation button, chance eye of the same color of production pattern 70a. Even if the same performance is executed in each variable performance, the contents of the performance may be different for each variable performance such as, for example, a different performance that increases the degree of expectation is executed as the variable performance is repeated.

When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the first image display device 70 does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the main control unit 110m, the performance related to the look-ahead effect (advance notification) is continued. It doesn't matter if it's executed or not. In such a case, it is possible to attract the player's interest by continuously executing the related effects. Also, by not continuously executing related effects, the consistency of the effects can be maintained.

For example, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory stored after the target memory and becomes normal, the read-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory can be prevented from being executed from the continuation of the related performance. In addition, an effect related to the look-ahead effect based on the target pending memory (for example, performing a large action effect of the first movable member 73) can be replaced with another related effect with a lower expectation than the related effect (for example, the first movable member 73). The action effect of the member 73 may be reduced). Additionally, the associated effects of the look-ahead effects based on the target pending memory may be deleted.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the reserved memory stored before the target memory, the look-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory can be executed from the continuation of the related performance. In this case, the expectation of the player can be improved by continuing the look-ahead effect.

For example, when the predetermined state is canceled and becomes normal based on the reserved memory stored before the target memory, the read-ahead performance based on the target reserved memory can be prevented from being executed from the continuation of the related performance. In this case, consistency of presentation can be maintained.

(Inspection mode of main control board 130)
For example, in a conventional game machine such as JP 2018-118109 A, a drive source is operated to change the state of the big winning port or the starting port from the closed state to the open state by controlling the main control board. ing. However, in a conventional game machine, when a game board is replaced in a game arcade or a game board constituting the front side of the game board is replaced, the drive source operated by the control of the main control board does not generate an activation trigger. is not easy, and it is difficult to check the operation of these drive sources.
Therefore, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIGS. 134 to 138 has a drive source (large winning opening SOL, starting opening SOL, V distribution SOL) for which the main control board 110 performs operation control as a result of the game, and the main control The substrate 110 initially operates the drive source in a predetermined manner in a pre-start state before shifting to a playable state for controlling a game after power supply is started.
As a result, for a certain period of time limited to the state before the start of the game (pre-start state), the special electric role item, the normal electric role item, and the distribution mechanism in the big prize opening are operated, and the installation is confirmed by confirming the operation. In addition, it is possible to more reliably perform inspection and confirmation after part replacement.

As shown in FIG. 134, when a setting change device is installed, the pre-start state is a certain period after the end of setting change or setting confirmation. In this case, there is RWM clear preparation in progress.

As shown in FIG. 135, when the setting change device is not installed, the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, and a certain period after pressing the RWM clear switch 111a again is set as the pre-start state. . In this case, there is no RWM clear preparation in progress.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the setting change device is not mounted, the pre-start state is a certain period after the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a. In this case, for example, after 7 seconds have passed since the transition to the pre-start state, each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the game result is turned ON (for example, 0.512 seconds) and OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) three times, for example. After doing so, it is better to shift to a playable state.

As shown in FIG. 137, when a setting change device is installed, the state before starting is changing settings or checking settings.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the setting change device is not installed, the pre-start state is the period from when the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a until when the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed again. In this case, when shifting to the pre-start state, each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the result of the game is turned ON (for example, 0.512 seconds) and OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a. Repeat until you move. In this case, RWM clear preparation is in progress.

During the above-mentioned pre-start state, payout of prize balls due to entry of game balls into the winning opening, activation of special symbol display devices or special electric accessories due to entry of game balls into the starting opening, and normal operation of game balls The operation of the normal design display device or the operation of the normal electric accessory due to passing through the gate or winning the winning opening related to the operation of the design display device is invalidated. On the other hand, during the pre-start state, the launch permission signal is output immediately after the power is turned on, so the launch of the game ball is not invalidated. Also, in the pre-start state, the performance display monitor should be extinguished (not displayed).

During the pre-start state described above, the payout of prize balls backed up on the payout board is not invalidated. Further, while the big winning hole is open in the pre-start state, the open signal is not output from the game information output terminal board. A power-on/power-recovery command should be transmitted when transitioning to the playable state, and the initial operation of the gimmick (accessory) should be performed after transitioning to the playable state. Then, during the operation of the large winning opening solenoid in the pre-start state, the large winning opening LED and the like should not emit light as in the case of a big win.

It is preferable that the performance display monitor performs full lighting for, for example, 5 seconds after the end of the scan mode, and then displays the base value. In addition, it is preferable to stop firing in the state of "other than power recovery" (state before start, during unrecoverable error).

◆ The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and sub-control means for controlling the presentation of the game based on signals (commands) from the main control means. (Production control unit 130m), the main control means (main control unit 110m) stores a pending memory based on establishment of a starting condition (a winning of a game ball to the starting ports 45 and 47). In addition, it is controllable to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reserved displays 63, 64), and whether a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player is performed based on the reserved memory. It is possible to determine whether or not, the secondary control means (effect control unit 130m) controls to display the pending memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) In addition, the second display means can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform the variable effect A first shift display (e.g., 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the pending memories by one each time is started, and a predetermined number (e.g., 4) of pending memories , when the slave control means receives from the main control means a specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage signals that are two or more less than the predetermined number, the first shift indication (for example, 4 to 3); can execute a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved memory from the predetermined number to the specific number in a different reduction mode, and the first display means (special symbol reservation display 63, 64 ) is suspended each time the determination is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. It is characterized in that the memories can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls and can store the pending memory based on the first display means (special symbol pending display 6
3, 64), it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the sub control means (effect control unit 130m) can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the second display means (first image display device 70, The second image display device 71) can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) suspends each time the variable effect is started. It is possible to execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the memory one by one, and in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memory is displayed, the slave control means ( When the production control unit 130m) receives a specific number (for example, 2 pieces) of reserved storage signals that are two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the first A second shift indication (e.g., 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved storage from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specified number (e.g., 2) in a manner different from the shift indication (e.g., 4 to 3) ) can be executed, and the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device) that suggests that the degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high 71) can be executed by holding storage (for example, icon change effect) displayed in the first display means (special symbol holding display 63, 64) from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2 number), the reserved memory displayed on the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) during the period in which the reserved memory is displayed so as to decrease by one is the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) even in a predetermined state, the advance notification can be continued and executed, and the first display means (special symbol reservation display 63, 64) reserves storage each time the determination is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls A special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory can be stored and can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation displays 63, 64). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a (jackpot), and the secondary control means (effect control section 130m) stores the pending storage in the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). , and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (second The 1-image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved storage by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) is a specific number (for example, 2) that is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the predetermined number of reserved memories (for example, 4 ) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed (for example, from 4 to 2), and the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high. Suggested advance notification can be executed by background display (for example, change to look-ahead zone background) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display In the means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), the second display means during the period in which the reserved memory is displayed to decrease by one from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) Even if the reserved memory displayed on (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (for example, 4) is not reduced to the specific number (for example, 2), It is possible to continue the pre-article notification, and the first display means (special symbol The holding indicators 63, 64) indicate whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. , the reserved storage can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one each time .

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls A special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory can be stored and can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation displays 63, 64). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a (jackpot), and the secondary control means (effect control section 130m) stores the pending storage in the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). , and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (second The 1-image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved storage by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) is a specific number (for example, 2) that is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the predetermined number of reserved memories (for example, 4 ) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed (for example, from 4 to 2), and the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory is high. Suggested advance notification can be executed by character display (eg, "ZONE" telop) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display means ( The second display means (second Even if the number of pending memories displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) is not reduced from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), the preliminary The notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol reservation Indicators 63, 64) make the determination regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is performed. It is characterized by being able to sequentially decrease and display the reserved storage by one each time it ends.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls A special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory can be stored and can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation displays 63, 64). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a (jackpot), and the secondary control means (effect control section 130m) stores the pending storage in the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). , and the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect pattern, and based on undetermined pending storage In addition, advance notification suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game is high can be executed by the degree of expectation display (for example, look-ahead effect production), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display The device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved storage by one each time the variable effect is started, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved In the state in which the memory is displayed, the slave control means (production control section 130m) outputs a specific number (for example, 2) of pending memory signals that is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the main control means. (main control unit 110m), the reserved storage is reduced from the predetermined number (eg, 4) to the specific number (eg, 2) in a manner different from the first shift display (eg, 4 to 3) It is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that decreases to , and the predetermined number (for example, 4
displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) during the period in which the reserved memory is displayed so as to decrease by one from the specific number (for example, two) to the specific number (for example, two) even in a predetermined state in which the number of pending memories does not decrease from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means ( Special symbol holding display 63, 64), even if any of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed, It is characterized in that the reserved storage can be sequentially reduced and displayed by one each time the determination is completed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls A special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory can be stored and can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation displays 63, 64). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a (jackpot), and the secondary control means (effect control section 130m) stores the pending storage in the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). , and the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute the variation performance of the performance symbols, and each of the plurality of the variation performances By executing the related production (for example, the operation production of the first movable member 73, etc.) in a partial period of the variable production, the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high. The second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute the notification, and the first shift that sequentially decreases the pending memory by one each time the variable effect is started Display (for example, 4 to 3) can be executed, and in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed, the subordinate control means (effect control unit 130m) controls a predetermined number (for example, 4) ) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) is said first display means being capable of executing a second shift display (e.g. 4 to 2) for decreasing the reserved storage from said predetermined number (e.g. 4) to said specific number (e.g. 2) in a different decreasing mode; (Special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) are performed. , Each time the determination is completed, it is possible to sequentially decrease and display the pending memory one by one, and the slave control means (production control unit 130m) is the first display means (special symbol holding indicators 63, 64) In spite of the increase/decrease of the reserved memory, the second display means (the first image display device 70, A predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, and the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory stored after the target pending memory that is the target of the advance notification. When, the advance notification is not executed from the continuation of the related effect (for example, the action effect of the first movable member 73, etc.).

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to control to display the reservation memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and an advantageous special game (jackpot) based on the reservation memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform, and the secondary control means (effect control unit 130m) displays the pending memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) In addition, the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the second display means (second The 1-image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) can execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved storage by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state in which a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) is a specific number (for example, 2) that is two or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the reserved memory is reduced from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a decreasing mode different from the first shift display. a second shift indication (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be performed, and the number of pending memories can be indicated by numerical information, and when said second shift indication is performed, said numerical information can be executed to display the numeric information corresponding to the specific number (for example, 2) of the reserved storage without displaying the numbers sequentially decreasing one by one (for example, 4 to 2), and When the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64) performs any of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) However, each time the determination is completed, the reserved storage can be sequentially displayed with a decrease of one.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls A special game advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory can be stored and can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reservation displays 63, 64). It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a (jackpot), and the secondary control means (effect control section 130m) stores the pending storage in the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). , and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (second The one-image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) can execute a predetermined effect (for example, a customer-waiting demonstration effect) when there is no reserved memory after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, and the above-described It is possible to execute a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved memories by one each time the variable effect is started, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories is displayed. In the state, the slave control means (production control section 130m) outputs a specific number (for example, 2) of reserved storage signals that are two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4) to the main control means (main control section 110m). a second shift that reduces the reserved storage from the predetermined number (e.g. 4) to the specified number (e.g. 2) in a different decrementing manner than the first shift indication (e.g. 4 to 3) if received from Display (for example, 4 to 2) can be executed, and the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64) reserves from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2). The reserved memory displayed on the second display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) during the period in which the memory is displayed so as to decrease by one is reduced from the predetermined number (for example, four) When it is in a predetermined state in which it does not decrease to the specific number (for example, two), the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and even if a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable production, the predetermined Without executing the production (for example, customer waiting demonstration production), the first display means (Special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) and the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) are performed. , the reserved storage can be sequentially reduced and displayed by one each time the determination is completed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a), and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display etc.) can be executed, and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease in the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory does not increase or decrease, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the advance notification can be continued and the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory stored after the target pending memory, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed, any one of changing the prior notification to another prior notification with a lower expectation than the prior notification, and erasing the prior notification based on the target reservation memory. characterized by

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) ) The display means (the first image display device 70 , the second image display device 71) can be executed by the background display (for example, the look-ahead zone background), and the display means ( When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the above-mentioned The pre-notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the retained memory stored after the target retained memory that is the target of the pre-notified, the pre-notification based on the target retained memory The prior notification based on the target reserved memory is changed to another prior notification with a lower expectation than the prior notification, and the previous notification based on the target reserved memory and erasing the pre-notification.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) , the display means (first image display device 70 , second image display device 71) can be executed by character display (for example, "ZONE" telop), and the display means When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed in the display does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance The target pending memory does not continue to perform the advance notification based on the target pending memory when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory stored after the target pending memory to be notified. any one of changing the pre-announcement based on the pre-announcement to another pre-announcement with a lower expectation than the pre-announcement, and erasing the pre-announcement based on the target reservation memory. characterized by performing

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a) in the, and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high, by the expectation display (for example, look-ahead effect production) Retained memory that can be executed and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in spite of an increase or decrease in the retained memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the prior notification can be continued and the subject of the prior notification. The advance based on the target reserved memory, wherein the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is not continuously executed when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory stored after the target reserved memory. Any one of changing the notification to another prior notification with a lower expectation than the prior notification and erasing the prior notification based on the target reservation memory. do.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable performance of the performance pattern (70a), and by executing the related performance (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73) in a partial period of each variable performance in the plurality of the variable performances, Undetermined It is possible to execute advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the pending memory, and the display despite the increase or decrease in the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, The advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reservation memory stored after the target reservation memory that is the target of the advance notification, based on the target reservation memory The advance notification is not executed from the continuation of the related performance (eg, the operation of the first movable member 73), and the performance related to the prior notification based on the target reservation memory (eg, the operation of the first movable member 73) is changed to another related effect with a lower expectation than the related effect; characterized by performing

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect pattern (70a), and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display ) can be executed, and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease in the reserved storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the reserved memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance notification is performed. When returning from the predetermined state based on the pending memory memorized after the target pending memory, the previous notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed based on the target pending memory. performing any one of changing the previous notification to another prior notification having a lower expectation than the prior notification and deleting the prior notification based on the target reservation memory, and displaying the display; Means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) executes a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the reserved memory by one each time the variable effect is started. It is possible, and in a state where the subordinate control means (production control section 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four) of pending memories, the subordinate control means (production control section 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four) When a specific number (for example, 2) of reserved storage signals smaller by 2 or more is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), a decrease mode different from the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) The predetermined number of reserved memories (for example a second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) that decreases from the specified number (for example, 4) to the specified number (for example, 2); the numerical information is capable of displaying the number of pending memories; When the shift display is executed, a third shift display (for example, 4 to 2) can be executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display) that suggests that the expectation for the special game based on undetermined pending memory is high. can be executed, and when there is no reserved memory after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production, the display means can execute a prescribed production (for example, a customer waiting demonstration production), and the main control means (main When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease despite the increase or decrease in the reserved memory in the control unit 110m), the While the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in the temporary stop state, the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state occurs, the production pattern can be displayed in the temporary stop state. At the same time, even if a predetermined time elapses after the start of the variable performance, the predetermined performance (for example, customer waiting demonstration performance) is not executed, and the holding memory stored after the target holding memory that is the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is resolved based on, the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is not continuously executed, and the advance notification based on the target reservation memory is expected more than the advance notification and erasing the advance notification based on the target reservation memory.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display) that suggests that the expectation for the special game based on undetermined pending memory is high. can be executed, and the hold displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease in hold storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the preliminary notification can be continued and the target targeted for the preliminary notification is held. It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory prior to storage, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable performance of the performance pattern (70a) with, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game based on undetermined pending memory is high. can be executed, and the hold displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease in hold storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the preliminary notification can be continued and the target targeted for the preliminary notification is held. It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory prior to storage, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A background display (for example, look-ahead zone background), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease of the pending storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the displayed reserved memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the advance notification can be continued and the advance notification can be performed. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory that is the object of (1), the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A background display (for example, look-ahead zone background), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease of the pending storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the displayed reserved memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the advance notification can be continued and the advance notification can be performed. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory that is the object of (1), the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) Character display (for example, "ZONE" telop), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease of the reserved storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed in the display does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory to be notified, the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) Character display (for example, "ZONE" telop), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease of the reserved storage in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed in the display does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory that is the target of notification, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a) in the, and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high, by the expectation display (for example, look-ahead effect production) Retained memory that can be executed and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in spite of an increase or decrease in the retained memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the prior notification can be continued and the subject of the prior notification. It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory, the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a) in the, and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high, by the expectation display (for example, look-ahead effect production) Retained memory that can be executed and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in spite of an increase or decrease in the retained memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the prior notification can be continued and the subject of the prior notification. It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A first advance notification (for example, a pending icon change effect) that can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) and suggests that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high; The degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory by executing a related performance (for example, an action performance of the first movable member 73, etc.) in a partial period of each variable performance in the plurality of variable performances. is high, and the display means (first image display device 70, When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the second advance notification is continued. and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that is the target of the preliminary notification, the second advance notification based on the target reserved memory is associated. It is characterized in that it can be executed from the continuation of the effect (for example, motion effect of the first movable member 73, etc.).

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A first advance notification (for example, a pending icon change effect) that can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) and suggests that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high; The degree of expectation for the special game based on the undetermined reserved memory by executing a related performance (for example, an action performance of the first movable member 73, etc.) in a partial period of each variable performance in the plurality of variable performances. is high, and the display means (first image display device 70, When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the second advance notification is continued. and when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory prior to the target reserved memory that is the target of the preliminary notification, the second advance notification based on the target reserved memory is associated. It is characterized in that the effect (for example, motion effect of the first movable member 73, etc.) is not executed from the continuation.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect pattern, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display, etc.) that suggests that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high. Retained memory that can be executed and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in spite of an increase or decrease in the retained memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the prior notification can be continued and the subject of the prior notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory prior to the target pending memory, the advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation level display, etc.) based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. The display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) is a first shift display (for example, from four to 3) can be executed, and in a state where the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories, the secondary control means (production control unit 130m) can execute a predetermined number (for example, When a specific number (for example, 2) of signals of reserved storage less than 4) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), reserved storage is performed in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display. is reduced from the predetermined number (e.g. 4) to the specific number (e.g. 2) (e.g. 4 to 2), and the number of pending memories can be displayed by numerical information. Yes, and the second shift indication is executed If so, a third shift display (4 to 2) is executed to display the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, two) of reserved storage without displaying the numerical information sequentially decreasing one by one. It is characterized by being possible.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect pattern, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation display, etc.) that suggests that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined pending memory is high. Retained memory that can be executed and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) in spite of an increase or decrease in the retained memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the prior notification can be continued and the subject of the prior notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the pending memory before the target pending memory, the advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation level display, etc.) based on the target pending memory is continuously executed. First, the display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) displays a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 ) can be executed, and in a state where the subordinate control means (production control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four) of pending memories, the subordinate control means (production control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four When a specific number (for example, 2) of signals of reserved storage that is less than the number of the reserved storage by 2 or more is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), reserved storage is performed in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display. A second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) can be performed to decrease the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2), and numerical information can display the number of pending memories. , when the second shift indication is executed In this case, it is possible to execute a third shift display (4 to 2) for displaying the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, two) of reserved storage without displaying the numerical information sequentially decreasing one by one. It is characterized by

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a) at, and it is possible to execute advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory, and the variable production is started. When there is no reserved memory after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display means can execute a predetermined effect (for example, customer waiting demonstration effect), and the main control means (main control unit 110m) can increase or decrease the reserved memory. Regardless, when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the advance notification can be continued. When the predetermined state occurs, the target that is the target of the advance notification without executing the predetermined effect (for example, the customer waiting demonstration effect) even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect. It is characterized in that, when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory before the reserved memory, the advance notification based on the target reserved memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a) at, and it is possible to execute advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory, and the variable production is started. When there is no reserved memory after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display means can execute a predetermined effect (for example, customer waiting demonstration effect), and the main control means (main control unit 110m) can increase or decrease the reserved memory. Regardless, when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease, the performance pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporary stop state, while the advance notification can be continued. When the predetermined state occurs, the target that is the target of the advance notification without executing the predetermined effect (for example, the customer waiting demonstration effect) even after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect. The pre-notification based on the target reserved memory is not continuously executed when the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved memory before the reserved memory.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) , the variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and the main control means (main control When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the unit 110m) differs from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (production control unit 130m), the production pattern (70a) is changed. It can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and when the predetermined state occurs, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) continues to display the pending memory and the production pattern ( 70a) is displayed in a temporary stop state, an effect production (for example, a pattern effect image ZE) can be executed in the production pattern (70a), and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed. , the slave control means (production control unit 130m) outputs a specific number (for example, 2) of reserved storage signals (commands) that are two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4) to the main control means (main control unit 110m ), the display rendering for gradually reducing the number of pending memories is not performed (for example, twice) by the difference between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2), and the It is characterized by displaying a predetermined number (for example, two) of pending memories.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) , the variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and the main control means (main control When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the unit 110m) differs from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (production control unit 130m), the production pattern (70a) is changed. It can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and when the predetermined state occurs, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) continues to display the pending memory and the production pattern ( 70a) is displayed in a temporary stop state, it is possible to execute an action effect of at least a part (for example, a bar-shaped image SG) of the decoration part of the effect pattern (70a), and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are stored. In the displayed state, the slave control means (production control unit 130m) outputs a specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage signals (commands) that are two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4) to the main control When received from means (main control unit 110m), a display effect for gradually reducing the number of pending memories is displayed by the difference number (for example, 2) between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2). times), and the predetermined number (for example, two) of pending memories are displayed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game production based on a signal (command) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In a gaming machine comprising a sub-control means (production control unit 130m) that controls It is possible to store the reservation memory based on, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory, and the secondary control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) , the variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and the main control means (main control When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the unit 110m) differs from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (production control unit 130m), the production pattern (70a) is changed. It can be displayed in a temporary stop state, and the display means (the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71) displays the production pattern (70a) in the temporary stop state when the predetermined state occurs. state, the display of the pending memory can be continued, and the effect rendering of the pending memory can be executed. ) receives from the main control means (main control unit 110m) a specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage signals (commands) that are two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the number of pending storage is not performed (for example, twice) by the number of deviations between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2), and the predetermined number (for example, 2) is reserved is displayed.

(Image change effect)
The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) can execute various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the effect pattern executed during the variable display of the special symbol There is a variable production with a variable display of 70a. In addition, as an effect display, on the screen of the first image display device 70 and/or the screen of the second image display device 71, an image corresponding to the entire screen and/or a partial area of the screen can be reduced, enlarged, transformed, rotated, or the like. It is possible to execute an image change effect that varies by combining one or more of. It can be said that the image change effect is to make the screen appear to be moving, such as by shaking the screen itself depending on the image displayed on the screen. The image change effect can be executed at any timing (for example, timing during the execution period of the variable effect, timing during the execution period of the jackpot game, or timing during the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect).

In the following description, in the drawings, the changing display of the screen on which the image changing effect is executed is referred to as "SV display", and the normal screen display on which the image changing effect is not executed is referred to as "normal display". and notation. In the image change effect, the first image (for example, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, etc.: FIG. 140(a)) displayed on the screen in the normal display, and the change in the first image are displayed on the screen in the change display. 140(c)) (for example, a reduced effect pattern 70a, a reduced background image HG, etc.: FIG. 140(c)). It can also be said that the second image in the change display can be recognized as being common and/or related to the first image in the normal display due to its shape and information.

The image change effect can be executed at an appropriate timing during the execution period of the variable effect or the like. For example, the image change effect is executed in accordance with the timing of the start of the variable effect (synchronized), executed in the middle of the execution period of the variable effect, or in accordance with the timing of the end of the variable effect (synchronized ) may be executed. In addition, the image change effect is triggered by an external factor such as the winning of a game ball into the winning hole or the operation of the effect button device 16, or a predetermined effect pattern such as the selection of a predetermined game state or a look-ahead effect. Execution can be triggered by various conditions, such as internal factors such as the selection of .

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is configured to be able to execute image change effects in the image display devices 70 and 71 in conjunction with light emission effects by the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 . In addition, the image change effects in the image display devices 70 and 71 may be performed in addition to or instead of the light emission effect by the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. , second movable member 74). Furthermore, the image change effects on the image display devices 70 and 71 may be configured to be executable in conjunction with the audio output of the audio output device 9 .

(First movable accessory - action)
The first movable member 73, which is a movable accessory, is driven by a driving force of a first movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2), and moves from an upper waiting position (origin position) to a lower position. It is possible to perform an effect motion of moving vertically between the effect position located at . It should be noted that a first position detection sensor (not shown) can detect that the first movable member 73 is at the origin position. Here, the first movable member 73 of the embodiment does not overlap the screen of the first image display device 70 or the degree of overlap is small in the first mode in which it is stopped at the standby position. Also, the degree of overlap with the screen increases as the first movable member 73 descends from the standby position to the rendering position. The first movable member 73 performs a predetermined effect action such as largely vibrating over the entire area between the standby position and the effect position, or finely vibrating in a partial range between the standby position and the effect position. It is configured to be changeable from the first mode to the second mode.

(First movable accessory-first light emitting area)
The first movable member 73 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The first movable member 73 is provided with one or a plurality of first light emitting regions HK1, and the first light emitting regions HK1 can emit light independently of other portions of the board lighting device 76. ing. The first light emitting area HK1 has a first state in which the first movable member LED is lit, blinked, changed in color, and the like, and a second state in which the first movable member LED is extinguished and no dramatic light is emitted. It is possible to change the light emission state at any time. By being in the second state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is extinguished, the whole or a part of the range of the first movable member 73 becomes dark, and by being in the first state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is in the dramatic light emission, the first state The first movable member 73 becomes brighter than when the light emitting region HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the first movable member LED is turned off in the second state. It may be made darker, less bright than in the first state, or less saturated than in the first state. Also, the range of the first light emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the first movable member LED that is lit or extinguished.

(Second movable accessory - action)
The second movable member 74, which is a movable accessory, is driven by a driving force of a second movable member driving motor, which is a part of the board driving device 75 (see FIG. 2), between a standby position (original position) positioned on the upper right side. It is possible to perform an effect motion of moving diagonally up and down between the effect position located in the lower left corner. It should be noted that it is possible to detect that the second movable member 74 is at the origin position by a second position detection sensor (not shown). Here, the first movable member 74 of the embodiment does not overlap the screen of the first image display device 70 or the degree of overlap is small in the first mode in which it is stopped at the standby position. Also, the degree of overlap with the screen increases as the second movable member 74 moves obliquely downward from the standby position toward the rendering position. The second movable member 74 performs a predetermined effect action, such as largely vibrating over the entire area between the standby position and the effect position, or finely vibrating in a partial range between the standby position and the effect position. It is configured to be changeable from the first mode to the second mode.

(Second movable accessory-first light emitting area)
The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The second movable member 74 is provided with one or a plurality of first light emitting areas HK1, and the first light emitting areas HK1 can emit light independently of other parts of the board lighting device 76. ing. The first light emitting area HK1 has a first state in which the second movable member LED is lit, blinked, changed in color, and the like, and a second state in which the second movable member LED is extinguished and no dramatic light is emitted. It is possible to change the light emission state at any time. By being in the second state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is extinguished, the entire or partial range of the second movable member 74 is darkened, and by being in the first state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is in the effect light emission, The second movable member 74 becomes brighter than when the light emitting region HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the second movable member LED is turned off in the second state. It may be made darker, less bright than in the first state, or less saturated than in the first state. Also, the range of the first light emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the second movable member LED, which is lit or extinguished.

In the embodiment, the movable accessory (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) moves back and forth in the second mode. You may make it perform production|presentation operation|movement by .

(Second light emitting region)
The gaming machine 1 is provided at least one of the parts different from the movable accessories (the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) as part of the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. A second light emitting region HK2 is provided. The parts of the board illumination device 76 that become the second light emitting area HK2 include, for example, the decorative frame 40, the space between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 (around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46). It may be an accessory attached to the game board 5 such as a prize winning hole lamp NR for emitting light in a predetermined manner, a general winning hole 43, a big winning hole 50, or the game board 5 itself. Further, the part of the frame lighting device 10 that becomes the second light emitting region HK2 includes, for example, the glass frame 4 and the like. It should be noted that a part other than the movable accessory, such as the handle light emitting device 15c and the production button device 16, may function as the second light emitting region HK2. Here, the second light emitting region HK2 is provided at a plurality of locations. NR) and the frame illumination device 10 provided on the glass frame 4 function as the second light emitting area HK2. A plurality of second light emitting regions HK2 may be divided into different members such as the decorative frame 40 and prize winning openings, or may be plural in one member such as the decorative frame 40 .

The second light emitting area HK2 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting LEDs (full color) in a predetermined light emitting mode. The second light-emitting region HK2 is capable of effecting light emission independently of the first light-emitting region HK1 and other second light-emitting regions. The first light emitting area HK2 changes the light emitting state between a first state in which the LED is turned on, blinked, changed in color, and the like, and a second state in which the LED is turned off and the light is not emitted. is possible. By being in the second state in which the second light emitting region HK2 is extinguished, in the embodiment, the whole or a part of the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70 becomes dark, and the second light emitting region HK2 emits the effect light. By being in state 1, the periphery of the screen becomes brighter than when the first light emitting region HK2 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the LED is turned off in the second state. Alternatively, the brightness may be lowered, or the saturation may be lowered from that in the first state. Also, the range of the second light emitting region HK2 may be changed by switching the LED that is lit or extinguished.

(Specific example 1 of image change effect)
Next, a specific example 1 of an image change effect executed in conjunction with effect light emission using the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 will be described. 139 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the sound output of the sound output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 4 is a timing chart of specific example 1 showing the relationship between image change effects. Also, FIG. 140 shows an effect example when the image change effect of the specific example 1 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 140(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first suspension number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first suspension at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Also, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Furthermore, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the effect symbol 70a that is being variably displayed, and the background image HG is displayed to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is performed on the screen at the timing of T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning entrance lamp NR and the frame All of the second light emitting areas HK2 made up of the lighting devices 10 are in the first state in which the effect light emission is performed. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to produce sounds (music, voice). It should be noted that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

At the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are changed in synchronization with the start of transition from the normal display to the change display. The first light emitting region HK1 changes from the first state to the second state in which it is extinguished (see FIG. 140(b)). At this time, in accordance with (synchronously with) the transition to the change display, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the second light emitting region HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the prize winning entrance lamp NR changes from the first state to the second state in which it is extinguished. Change. In addition, the second light emitting region HK2 formed by the frame lighting device 10 is maintained in the first state regardless of the change of the other second light emitting region HK2 in association with the first light emitting region HK1. Furthermore, in accordance with (synchronizing with) the start of the shift to the change display, the first movable member 73 shifts from the standby position to the second mode in which action production is possible from the first mode. At this time, the second movable member 74 is kept in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. Furthermore, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as "Pickin" is output from the voice output device 9 .

The timing of T1 is the frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the changing display, which has been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 1, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started in synchronization with (synchronously with) the update timing of the start frame of the change display. 1 The change from the first mode to the second mode of the movable member 73 is started, and the output of the change notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started. As described above, in Example 1, simultaneously with the start of the image change effect on the screen, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound are started. be.

As shown in FIG. 140(b), when the normal display is shifted to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 all change so as to shrink, and the picture frame is displayed from outside the screen. It is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so as to surround the outer periphery of the image with the frame image GG, and is configured such that the inside of the frame image GG looks like a part (or the whole) of the normal display is cut out. When shifting from normal display to change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special design TZ displayed in the special design display area are reduced and changed together with the effect design 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 140(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the pending icon T1, and the frame image GG in the change display are displayed so as to sway together. In Specific Example 1, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, which were in the second state at the beginning of the execution period of the image change effect, are switched to the first state in the middle of the image change effect execution period. It is set (see FIG. 140(d)). Further, in Specific Example 1, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output from the start of execution of the image change effect to the middle. Here, in Specific Example 1, the timing of switching the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 from the second state to the first state is matched (synchronized) in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing of T3). ), but the switching timing may be staggered. Then, in the specific example 1, the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2 are illuminated in the first state in the subsequent image change effect.

When the image change effect is executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are displayed in a range where the change display changes. , so that the changing change display and the reserved numbers and special symbols TZ do not overlap. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed so as to continue the variable effect, and the pending icon T1 and the pending number are also displayed so as to increase according to the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 in the second mode is returned to the first mode (see FIG. 140(e)) in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the start of return from the change display to the normal display at the timing of T4. The timing of T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 1, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is started in accordance with (in synchronization with) the timing of updating the return frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 140(e), when the change display is shifted to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed so as to expand together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside the When shifting from the change display to the normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special design TZ displayed in the special design display area are enlarged and changed together with the effect design 70a. It is displayed in the same position as it is.

In synchronization with the start of normal display at timing T5, the first movable member 73 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (see FIG. 140(f)). The timing of T5 is the frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to normal display on the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 1, the change from the second mode to the first mode of the first movable member 73 is completed in synchronization with the end frame update timing.

In the specific example 1, when the image change effect is performed, at least one of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 is linked, and the light emitting effect changing from the first state to the second state can be executed. is configured to By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display on the screen, and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the image change effect is performed, the player's attention is directed around the screen of the first image display device 70 by changing from the relatively bright first state to the second state darker than the first state. First, the change display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 1, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG are displayed normally or changed. . By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 1, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the easiness of visual recognition changes depending on whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are changed and displayed. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the visibility of the special symbol TZ and the reserved number does not change, regardless of whether the change display or the change display is performed. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (the third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (the first image and the second image) that changes with the image change effect.

In the specific example 1, when the image change effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in association with the change from the normal display to the change display. It is possible to display a picture frame image GG to be displayed. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be present in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG, and may be set as a separate image (another image layer). It may be expressed so as to change together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 1, the change to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 is performed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 1, the change to the second mode of the first movable member 73 and the output of the change notification sound are executed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 1, the change to the first mode of the first movable member 73 is performed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Specific example 2 of image change effect)
Next, a specific example 2 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 will be described. 141 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the sound output of the sound output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 10 is a timing chart of specific example 2 showing the relationship between image change effects. Also, FIG. 142 shows an effect example when the image change effect of specific example 2 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 142(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first suspension number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is the first suspension at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. In addition, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Furthermore, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the effect symbol 70a that is being variably displayed, and the background image HG is displayed to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is performed on the screen at the timing of T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning entrance lamp NR and the frame All of the second light emitting areas HK2 made up of the lighting devices 10 are in the first state in which the effect light emission is performed. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to produce sounds (music, voice). It should be noted that while the change notification sound to be described later is being output, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

At the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are changed in synchronization with the start of transition from the normal display to the change display. The first light emitting region HK1 changes from the first state to the second state in which it is extinguished (see FIG. 142(b)). At this time, in accordance with (synchronously with) the transition to the change display, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the second light emitting region HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the prize winning entrance lamp NR changes from the first state to the second state in which it is extinguished. Change. In addition, the second light emitting area HK2 formed by the frame lighting device 10 also changes from the first state in which it emits dramatic light to the second state in which it is extinguished. Furthermore, in accordance with (synchronizing with) the start of the shift to the change display, the first movable member 73 shifts from the standby position to the second mode in which action production is possible from the first mode. At this time, the second movable member 74 is kept in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. Furthermore, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as "Pickin" is output from the voice output device 9 .

The timing of T1 is the frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to the change display, which has been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 2, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the update timing of the start frame of the change display. 1 The change from the first mode to the second mode of the movable member 73 is started, and the output of the change notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started. As described above, in Example 2, simultaneously with the start of the image change effect on the screen, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound are started. be.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), when the normal display shifts to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 all change so as to shrink, and the picture frame is displayed from outside the screen. It is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so as to surround the outer periphery of the image with the frame image GG, and is configured such that the inside of the frame image GG looks like a part (or the whole) of the normal display is cut out. When shifting from normal display to change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special design TZ displayed in the special design display area are reduced and changed together with the effect design 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 142(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the pending icon T1 and the frame image GG in the change display are displayed so as to shake together. In Specific Example 2, part of the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73) and part of the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40) that were in the second state at the beginning of the execution period of the image change effect. is set to switch to the first state in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (see FIG. 142(d)). Further, in Specific Example 2, the remaining portion of the first light emitting region HK1 (the second movable member 74) and the remaining portion of the second light emitting region HK2 (the winning entrance lamp NR, the lighting device for the frame) are used throughout the execution period of the image change effect. 10) is set to be maintained in the second state (see FIG. 142(d)). In specific example 2, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output from the start to the end of the execution of the image change effect. Here, in Specific Example 2, the timing of switching the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 from the second state to the first state is matched (synchronized) in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing of T3). ), but the switching timing may be staggered.

When the image change effect is executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are displayed in a range where the change display changes. , so that the changing display and the pending numbers and special symbols TZ do not overlap. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed so as to continue the variable effect, and the pending icon T1 and the pending number are also displayed so as to increase according to the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 in the second mode is returned to the first mode after shifting from the change display to the normal display at timing T4 (see FIG. 142(e)). The timing of T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 2, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is started after the timing of updating the return frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 142(e), when the change display is shifted to the normal display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed to expand together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside the When shifting from the change display to the normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special design TZ displayed in the special design display area are enlarged and changed together with the effect design 70a. It is displayed in the same position as it is.

The first movable member 73 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode at a timing later than the start of the normal display (the end of the change display) at the timing of T5 (FIG. 142(f)). reference). The first light emitting area HK1 (the second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (the winning entrance lamp NR , the frame illumination device 10) returns to the first state, and effect light emission is performed. The timing of T5 is the frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to normal display on the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 2, the change from the second state to the first state of the first movable member 73 is completed with a delay from the end frame update timing, and the light emitting regions HK1 and HK2 return to the first state.

In the specific example 2, when the image change effect is performed, at least one of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 is linked, and the light emitting effect changing from the first state to the second state can be executed. is configured to By doing so, the player's attention can be attracted to the image change effect, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, when the image change performance is performed, the player's attention is directed around the screen of the first image display device 70 by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state. First, the change display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 can attract the player's attention, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the specific example 2, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG are displayed normally or changed. . By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 2, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the easiness of visual recognition changes between the change display in which the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are changed and displayed, and the normal display. On the other hand, in the embodiment, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the visibility of the special symbol TZ and the reserved number does not change in any of the normal display and the change display. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (the third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (the first image and the second image) that changes with the image change effect.

In specific example 2, when the image change effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in association with the change from the normal display to the change display. It is possible to display a picture frame image GG to be displayed. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can attract the player's attention more and the amusement of the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be present in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG, and may be set as a separate image (another image layer). It may be expressed so as to change together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 2, the change to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 is performed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 2, the change to the second mode of the first movable member 73 and the output of the change notification sound are executed in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 2, the change to the first mode of the first movable member 73 is executed with a delay from the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In specific example 2, the change to the second state of the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 is performed with a delay from the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Specific example 3 of image change effect)
Next, a specific example 3 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 will be described. 143 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the sound output of the sound output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 10 is a timing chart of specific example 3 showing the relationship between image change effects. Also, FIG. 144 shows an effect example when the image change effect of the specific example 3 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 144(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first suspension number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first suspension at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Also, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Furthermore, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the effect symbol 70a that is being variably displayed, and the background image HG is displayed to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is performed on the screen at the timing of T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning entrance lamp NR and the frame All of the second light emitting areas HK2 made up of the lighting devices 10 are in the first state in which the effect light emission is performed. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to produce sounds (music, voice). It should be noted that while the change notification sound to be described later is being output, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

In specific example 3, at the timing of T1a before T1 when the image change effect starts to be executed, the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40, winning hole lamp NR, frame illumination device 10) changes from the first state to the second state in which it is extinguished (see FIG. 144(a)). Then, at the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the first light emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the first light emitting region HK1 of the frame lighting device 10 are synchronized with (synchronized with) the start of transition to the change display. The second light emitting area HK2 changes from the second state to the first state, and effects light emission is performed (see FIG. 144(b)). At this time, the first mode in which the second movable member 74 is in the standby position is changed to the second mode in which the action can be produced in accordance with (in synchronization with) the start of the transition to the change display. The first movable member 73 is maintained in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. In addition, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as “Pickin” is output from the voice output device 9 . Note that the first light emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73, the decorative frame 40, and the second light emitting area HK1 of the prize winning opening lamp NR are maintained in the second state over the execution period of the image change effect.

The timing of T1 is the frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the changing display, which has been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 3, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light-emitting region HK1 and the second light-emitting region HK1 is started with a delay from the update timing of the change display start frame. The change from the first state to the second state of the second movable member 74 is started in conjunction with (synchronized with) the update timing of the start frame of the change display, and the output of the change notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started. be started.

As shown in FIG. 144(b), when the normal display shifts to the change display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 all change so as to shrink, and the picture frame is displayed from outside the screen. It is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so as to surround the outer periphery of the image with the frame image GG, and is configured such that the inside of the frame image GG looks like a part (or the whole) of the normal display is cut out. When shifting from normal display to change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special design TZ displayed in the special design display area are reduced and changed together with the effect design 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 144(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the pending icon T1 and the frame image GG in the change display are displayed so as to shake together. In specific example 3, the first light-emitting region HK1 and the second light-emitting region HK2 that have been in the second state are set to switch to the first state in accordance with the start of execution of the image change effect (FIG. 144(d)). reference). Further, in specific example 3, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output from the start of execution of the image change effect to the middle.

When the image change effect is executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are displayed in a range where the change display changes. , so that the changing display and the pending numbers and special symbols TZ do not overlap. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed so as to continue the variable effect, and the pending icon T1 and the pending number are also displayed so as to increase according to the winning of the game ball.

The second movable member 74 in the second state is returned to the first state (see FIG. 144(e)) in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the start of restoration from the change display to the normal display at the timing of T4. The timing of T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 3, the change of the second movable member 74 from the second mode to the first mode is started in accordance with (in synchronization with) the timing of updating the return frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 144(e), when the change display is shifted to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed so as to expand together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside the When shifting from the change display to the normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are enlarged and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as it is.

In synchronization with the start of normal display at timing T5, the second movable member 74 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (see FIG. 144(f)). The timing of T5 is the frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to normal display on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 3, the change from the second mode to the first mode of the second movable member 74 is completed in synchronization with the end frame update timing.

In the specific example 3, when the image change effect is performed, at least one of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 is linked, and the light emitting effect changing from the first state to the second state can be executed. is configured to By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display, and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the image change performance is performed, the player's attention is directed around the screen of the first image display device 70 by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state. First, the player's attention can be attracted to the image change effect executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 3, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG are displayed normally or changed. . By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 3, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the visibility of the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG changes between the normal display and the change display. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the ease of visual recognition does not change in any of the normal display and the change display. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (the third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (the first image and the second image) that changes with the image change effect.

In specific example 3, when the image change effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are changed on the screen of the first image display device 70 from normal display to change display. It is possible to display a picture frame image GG to be displayed. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can attract the player's attention more and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG, and may be set as a separate image (another image layer). It may be expressed so as to change together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 3, the change to the second state of the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 is performed with a delay from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 3, the change to the second mode of the second movable member 74 and the output of the change notification sound are executed with a delay from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 3, the second movable member 74 is changed to the first mode in accordance with (in synchronization with) the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In Specific Example 3, the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 is changed to the second state slightly before the start of the image change effect, and is synchronized with the start of the image change effect. d) performing the change to the first state of the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved. A little before the start of the image change effect, the movable members 73 and 74 are changed to the second mode, and together with (synchronized with) the start of the image change effect, or after the start of the image change effect, You may make it return the movable members 73 and 74 to a 1st state.

(Specific example 4 of image change effect)
Next, a specific example 4 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 will be described. 145 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the sound output of the sound output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 10 is a timing chart of specific example 4 showing the relationship between image change effects. Also, FIG. 146 shows an effect example when the image change effect of specific example 4 is executed.

At the timing of T0, the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variable display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 146(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first suspension number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first suspension at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Also, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Furthermore, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed corresponding to the variably displayed special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the effect symbol 70a that is being variably displayed, and the background image HG is displayed to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. In this manner, normal display is performed on the screen at timing T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning entrance lamp NR and the frame All of the second light emitting areas HK2 made up of the lighting devices 10 are in the first state in which the effect light emission is performed. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to produce sounds (music, voice). It should be noted that while the change notification sound to be described later is being output, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

In specific example 4, at the timing of T1a before T1 when the image change effect starts to be executed, the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73) and the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40, frame lighting device 10) changes from the first state to the extinguished second state (see FIG. 146(a)). At this time, the first light emitting area HK1 (the second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (the winning entrance lamp NR) remain in the first state. At timing T1a before T1 when the image change effect starts to be executed, the first movable member 73 starts changing from the first mode to the second mode. At the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the sound output device 9 outputs a change notification sound such as "Pickin" in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the start of transition to the change display. At the timing of T1b after T1 when the image change effect is started, the first light emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the second light emitting area HK2 of the prize winning entrance lamp NR change from the first state to the second state. do. Also, at the timing of T1b, the second movable member 74 shifts from the first mode in which the second movable member 74 is in the standby position to the second mode in which the action can be produced.

The timing of T1 is the frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) relating to the change display, which has been started to be drawn in the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70 is started. In Specific Example 4, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light-emitting region HK1 and the second light-emitting region HK1 is started with a delay from the update timing of the change display start frame. Further, the change from the first state to the second state of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is started with a delay from the update timing of the start frame of the change display. In response to this, output of the change notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with the update timing of the start frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 146(b), when the normal display shifts to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 all change so as to shrink, and the picture frame is displayed from outside the screen. It is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so as to surround the outer periphery of the image with the frame image GG, and is configured such that the inside of the frame image GG looks like a part (or the whole) of the normal display is cut out. When shifting from normal display to change display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special design TZ displayed in the special design display area are reduced and changed together with the effect design 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 146(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the pending icon T1 and the frame image GG in the change display are displayed so as to shake together. Further, in Specific Example 4, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output from the start of execution of the image change effect to the middle.

When the image change effect is executed, on the screen, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are displayed in a range where the change display changes. , so that the changing display and the pending numbers and special symbols TZ do not overlap. In addition, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed so as to continue the variable effect, and the pending icon T1 and the pending number are also displayed so as to increase according to the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 in the second mode are returned to the first mode in synchronization with (in synchronization with) or with a delay from the change display to the normal display at timing T4. The timing of T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation effect. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started.

As shown in FIG. 146(e), when the change display is shifted to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH and the pending icon T1 are changed so as to expand together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside the When shifting from the change display to the normal display, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are enlarged and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as it is.

In specific example 4, at timing T5a before T5 when the image change effect ends, the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73) and the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40, frame lighting device 10 ) changes from the second state to the first state, and effect light emission is performed. At this time, the first light emitting area HK1 (the second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (the winning entrance lamp NR) remain in the second state. In addition, the first movable member 73 starts to change from the second state to the first state before timing T5a, which is before T5 when the image change effect starts to be executed, and at timing T5a, the first movable member 73 returns to the first mode and stops. At this time, the second movable member 74 remains in the second mode. Then, at the timing of T5, the change display returns to the normal display, and the image change effect ends.

At the timing of T5b after T5 when the image change effect ends, the first light emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (winning entrance lamp NR) change from the second state to the first state. After changing, effect light emission is executed. In addition, the second movable member 74 starts to change from the second state to the first state at the timing before T5 when the image change effect starts to be executed, and the first movable member 74 changes to the first state at the timing T5b. Stop back to. It should be noted that the return of the movable members 73 and 74 to the first mode may be started after the image change effect is completed, or in synchronization with the end of the image change effect.

In specific example 4, when the image change effect is performed, at least one of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 is linked to execute the light emitting effect of changing from the first state to the second state. is configured to By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the change display, and to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when the image change performance is performed, the player's attention is directed around the screen of the first image display device 70 by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state. First, the player's attention can be attracted to the image change effect executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 4, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG are displayed normally or changed. . By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player if the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 4, the screen of the first image display device 70 can display the special symbol TZ and the pending number together with the effect symbol 70a, the pending icon T1 and the background image HG. In the image change effect, the easiness of visually recognizing the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG changes between the change display and the normal display. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the visibility of the special symbol TZ and the reserved number does not change, regardless of whether the change display or the change display is performed. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, the player can easily grasp the necessary information, and the interest in the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (the third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (the first image and the second image) that changes with the image change effect.

In specific example 4, when the image change effect is executed, the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in conjunction with the change from the normal display to the change display. It is possible to display a picture frame image GG to be displayed. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can attract the player's attention more and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG, and may be set as a separate image (another image layer). It may be expressed so as to change together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 4, the change to the second state of the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 is performed with a delay from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In specific example 4, the change to the second state of the movable members 73 and 74 and the output of the change notification sound are executed with a delay from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Concrete Example 4 completes the change of the movable members 73 and 74 to the first state after the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In Specific Example 4, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are returned to the first state after the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect ends, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, in the image change presentation, an effect EF decorating the change display may be displayed together with the change display. The effect EF may be a moving image or a static image, and may or may not be changed according to the change display. Also, the effect EF is displayed so as not to overlap the change display, whether it is superimposed in front of the change display (FIG. 147(a)) or behind the change display (FIG. 147(b)). (Fig. 148), or whatever.

In the image change presentation, when the effect EF is displayed together with the change display, the effect EF may be displayed in a shape, color, or the like corresponding to the degree of expectation for the big win. For example, when the expectation is low, a blue effect EF is displayed (FIG. 148(a)), and when the expectation is high, a red effect EF is displayed. It should be noted that the degree of expectation displayed by the effect EF may be changed during the period of the image change effect.

In the image change effect, an effect linked with a light guide plate or other effect means may be performed. Further, in accordance with the image change effect performed on the screen of the first image display device 70 , a linked effect may be performed on the screen of the second image display device 71 . For example, with the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 set to the second state, the screen of the second image display device 71 is darkened in accordance with the effect of making the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70 relatively dark. and so on.

In the image change effect, predetermined images such as the effect pattern 70a and the reserved icon are not included in the change display, and the effect pattern 70a and the reserved icon are fixedly displayed at the same position as the normal display, for example, in the same manner as the normal display. It may be displayed (Fig. 149(a)). In the image change effect, a predetermined image such as a pending icon may not be included in the change display, and the pending icon may be erased or displayed so as not to be seen, for example, during the execution period of the image change effect ( FIG. 149(b)). In the image change effect, predetermined images such as the effect pattern 70a and the pending icon included in the change display may be displayed in the same manner as in the normal display, such as fixedly displayed at the same position as in the normal display. .

Displayed on the screen are system information IF1, such as characters that induce right-handed hitting, which are included in the normal display (FIG. 150(a)), and game information IF2, such as characters that indicate the number of time reductions after the jackpot game ends. The information may be displayed as follows in the image display effect. For example, in the image change effect, the system information IF1 may not be included in the change display, and may be displayed in the same manner as the normal display, such as by fixedly displaying the system information IF1 at the same position as the normal display (FIG. 150(b)). . Also, in the image change effect, the game information IF2 may be included in the change display (FIG. 150(b)). In this case, an image showing the same information as the game information IF2 reduced in the change display may be displayed in an enlarged manner superimposed on the change display.

In the image change effect, an effect EF may be displayed that associates the movable members 73 and 74 in the second mode of performing the effect action with the change display (FIG. 151(a)). In the image change effect, for example, the position of the change display is changed by being pushed or pulled by the second movable member 74; You may make it link with the change of a change display (FIG. 151 (b), (c)).

The image change effect can be executed at various timings in association with other effects. For example, an image change effect may be performed during the look-ahead continuous effect.

The start or end of the execution of the image change effect (the start of reduction of the normally displayed image or the return of the changed displayed image to the normal display) may be associated with the operation of the operating means such as the button operation of the effect button device 16. . For example, when the image change effect becomes executable, a button image is displayed on the screen to guide the button operation, and when the button operation is executed, the image change effect is started to be executed. Incidentally, if the button image is commonly used in a plurality of presentation modes, the amount of data can be compressed. In addition, when a predetermined condition (for example, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is established by operating the operation means such as button operation of the effect button device 16, the effect EF or image displayed with the change display or the change display is changed (for example, , the glass will break). At this time, each time a predetermined condition (for example, a long press or repeated hits) is established by operating the operating means, the effect EF or image change displayed along with the change display or the change display progresses (for example, the glass gradually changes). ) may be used.

Image change effects may be selectable from a plurality of patterns. For example, a plurality of patterns such as an image change effect having a change display in which the effect pattern 70a and the background image HG change together, and an image change effect having a change display in which the background image HG changes without including the effect pattern 70a are set. may be

A change display may be a single image or a combination of separate images moving in unison. For example, by forming an image larger than the displayable area of the screen, the frame image GG is made invisible in the normal display (FIG. 152(a)), and the changed display is reduced to the displayable area of the screen. By changing, the frame image GG may be displayed on the screen (FIG. 152(b)). The change display can be rotated or oscillated (FIG. 152(c)), deformed so as to be stretched horizontally (FIG. 152(d)), tilted and stretched (FIG. 152(e)), or contracted.・It can be executed in various modes such as enlarging. Then, when ending the image change rendering, the change display may be changed so as to expand beyond the displayable area of the screen (FIGS. 153(a) and 153(b)). Also, at the end of the image change effect, when switching from the change display to the normal display, a switching effect such as a white-out momentarily displaying a white image may be interposed (FIG. 153(c)). After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing mode ("285") (FIG. 153(d)). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion). Then, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (FIG. 153(e)).

As for the image change effect, the display effect of changing display is executed in accordance with the frame update timing. At this time, in accordance with the change of the change display, it is possible to execute other effects (sound effect, light emission, action of the character) other than the change display. Alternatively, other effects may be executed at a timing different from the change of the change display. Then, when returning from a state in which the change display is changing to a normal display that does not change, the end timing of other effects (sound effects, light emission, movement of characters) other than the change display executed in accordance with the change display is It can be earlier, later, or the same as the change end timing of the change display.

At the start of the image change effect (when the change display shrinks), multiple effects (sound, image, lighting device, movable accessory operation) start at the same frame update timing, and at the end of the image change effect (change display expands), a plurality of effects (sound, image, lighting device, movable accessory operation) may not start at the same frame update timing.

In the image change effect, a change display is started in which a predetermined image (for example, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, etc.) that is in the normal position in the normal display is reduced toward the back of the screen and changed to the change position. The predetermined image, which was in the change position in the display, is enlarged from the depth side to the front side of the screen and returned to the normal position, thereby returning to the normal display. Here, in the image change effect, the start period during which the predetermined image changes from the normal position to the change position should be longer than the return period during which the predetermined image changes from the change position to the normal position. In other words, the number of frames when the change display shrinks at the start of the image change effect (start period) should be made larger than the number of frames when the change display expands at the end of the image change effect (recovery period). In this way, by increasing the number of frames at the start of the image change effect, it is easy for the player to understand, attracts attention to the image change effect, and enhances the amusement of the game. Also, by reducing the number of frames at the end of the image change effect, the transition to the normal display can be made quickly, and interest in the next change effect can be stimulated. Here, the operations of the movable members 73 and 74 and the changes of the light emitting areas HK1 and HK2 that are executed in accordance with the reduction/enlargement change of the predetermined image in the image change effect are also executed in conjunction with the start period. , should be longer than those executed in conjunction with the recovery period.

A specific example of operating the movable members 73 and 74 in the image change effect was described above, but it is not necessary to operate the movable members 73 and 74, and the movable accessories 73 and 74 are stopped during the execution period of the image change effect. may

(If the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Next, the case where the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. When the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, for example, the command is not received due to disconnection, partial disconnection, or connector disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 Communication abnormalities such as abnormal reception of commands due to garbled commands due to noise or partial disconnection can be considered. In the following description, when the production control unit 130m can receive the command normally, it is represented by "O" in the figure, and when a predetermined state occurs in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command , are represented by "x" in the figure. Then, during a predetermined period from when a predetermined state in which a command cannot be received normally occurs for the first time to when a command can be normally received, one or more commands of the same type and/or different types may not be normally received. . In addition, the command is written as "cd" in the figure.

The effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal game state decorates a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a stick-shaped image SG which is a part of the character, and a background of the character. It is assumed that it is composed of a decoration portion made up of a design effect image ZE and an identification portion made up of a hexagonal base image and a number portion (identification character). Also, the production pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the specific game state is composed only of the identification portion consisting of the number portion (identification character).

In the normal game state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the production modes A to C scroll left and right (reciprocating motion). Also, in the specific game state, the background images corresponding to each of the production modes D to E are scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion).

Predetermined detection sensors (starting port detection switches 45a and 47a, magnetic detection sensor 53a
, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately made. On the other hand, in the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the command line connector for communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

In the following specific example, usually describes the case where the production control unit 130m can not receive the command normally in the game state, even if the game state is a specific game state (time reduction game state, probability variation game state), basic The flow is the same as the normal game state.

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol storage designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 60, the first special symbol reservation display device 63, the sub-first fluctuation display device 81, the sub-th 1 reservation display device 83, first reservation number display area 70E, first reservation icon display area 70B, first lamp pattern, and first starting port 45, respectively, second reservation number, second special pattern storage designation command, first 2 special symbols, second special symbol display 61, second special symbol reservation display 64, sub second variable display 82, sub second reservation display 84, second reservation number display area 70F, second reservation icon display The area 70D, the second lamp pattern, and the second starting port 47 may be read as replacements.

(Specific example 1 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Using Figure 154 and Figure 155, production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally, concrete example 1 when specified condition is not met in production control section 130m is explained. FIG. 154 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and FIG. 155 is an effect example corresponding to the timing chart of FIG.

At the timing of P1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60, and the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the command is normally received by the production control unit 130m, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern on the sub first fluctuation display 81 are started (see FIG. 155(a)).

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished) and the actual stop is made.

At P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbols. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or a whole or a part expanding or contracting operation as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is extended, and accordingly the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command. If it cannot be received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is extended, and accordingly the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (see FIG. 155 (g)), and the sub first fluctuation display 81 , the first lamp pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command. If it cannot be received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 is in a losing mode (for example, extinguished). 155(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the real stop of the production symbol 70a, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special design confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the main stop of the production design 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special design TZ, and , the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. If it cannot be received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 is in a losing mode (for example, extinguished). 155(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the real stop of the production symbol 70a, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P15, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the main stop of the production design 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special design TZ, In addition, the period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

Specific example 1 relates to the designation of the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, the second condition (design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance design 70a, and the designation of the performance pattern of the performance design in the performance control unit 130m. If the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is satisfied (normal reception), the fluctuation of the production pattern 70a is started, and if the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of fluctuation of the production pattern 70a is not satisfied (missing), It swings and fluctuates in the production pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (production design designation command). On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state is satisfied (normal reception), the second condition (production design designation command) and the performance regarding the designation of the production design 70a If at least one of the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the designation of the pattern production pattern is not satisfied (missing), (regardless of satisfaction (normal reception) or lack of abnormality of the fourth condition (special pattern confirmation command)) , the production pattern 70a does not start to change. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 2 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Using Figure 155 and Figure 156, production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally, concrete example 2 when specified condition is not met in production control section 130m is explained. FIG. 156 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 2 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a and the special design. The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished) and the actual stop is made.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or a whole or a part expanding or contracting operation as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is extended, and accordingly the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 of the 1 lamp symbol is continued. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be variably displayed as it is, but the variably displayed effect pattern 70a may be started after being once (for a moment) fully stopped, erased, or rewritten.

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. is extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during variation is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the variable display of the performance design 70a is started. At the same time, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 is continued. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be variably displayed as it is, but the variably displayed effect pattern 70a may be started after being once (for a moment) fully stopped, erased, or rewritten.

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode (see FIG. 155 (g)), The main stop is made when the first lamp pattern fails (for example, turning off).

At P13 timing, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as partly moving the decorative portion or expanding/contracting the whole or part of the decorative portion as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 2, in the production control unit 130m, the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production design 70a, and the production pattern (variation pattern) concerning the production design 70a When satisfying the 3 conditions (fluctuation pattern designation command), it becomes the first state to start the fluctuation production, and when the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) regarding the fluctuation stop of the production design 70a is insufficient, based on the second condition It becomes the second state in which the shaking variation can be executed with the determined production pattern 70a. On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, if the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the It becomes a state to start the same fluctuation production as in the 1st state, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it becomes a state in which the same shaking fluctuation as in the 2nd state can be executed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example 2, in the production control unit 130m, when the predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the production design 70a are satisfied, the conditions regarding the game state (game state designation command) are satisfied or insufficient regardless of , When the condition for stopping the fluctuation of the production pattern 70a (special pattern determination command) is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation is performed with the production pattern 70a determined based on the predetermined condition production pattern designation command). It is viable. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 3 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Using Figure 155 and Figure 157, production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally, concrete example 3 when specified condition is not met in production control section 130m is explained. FIG. 157 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 3 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a and the special design. The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished) and the actual stop is made.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or a whole or a part expanding or contracting operation as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is extended, and accordingly the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 does not start. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is extended, and accordingly the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (see FIG. 155(g)), , the first lamp pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. When receiving, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 is in a losing mode (for example, extinguished). 155(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the real stop of the production symbol 70a, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special design confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the main stop of the production design 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special design TZ, and , the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command. When receiving, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 is in a losing mode (for example, extinguished). 155(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the real stop of the production symbol 70a, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P15, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the main stop of the production design 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special design TZ, In addition, the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

Specific example 3, in the production control unit 130m, the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production design 70a, and the production pattern (variation pattern) concerning the production design 70a When satisfying the 3 conditions (fluctuation pattern designation command), start the fluctuation production of the production design 70a, and when the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) related to the fluctuation stop of the production design 70a is insufficient, the second condition (production design A swing variation can be executed with the production pattern 70a determined based on the designated command). On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient , control is possible so as not to start the variable production of the production pattern 70a. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 4 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
155 and 158, the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and a specific example 4 when the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 158 is a timing chart when predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 4 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a and the special design. The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished), and the actual stop is made.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command. When not received, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production pattern 70a is stopped, the special pattern TZ is stopped, and , the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is stopped, special The period of the actual stop of the variable display of the symbol TZ and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command. If it cannot be received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. Therefore, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (FIG. 155(c) reference).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production design 70a is not started because the fluctuation production is not started. The periods of the stop, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the real stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. If it cannot be received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. Therefore, the period of the actual stop of the effect symbol 70a, the actual stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (FIG. 155(c) reference).

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even when the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a The periods of the stop, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the real stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command as the start time command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first sub-variable indicator 81 of one lamp symbol is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or a whole or a part expanding or contracting operation as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P15, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a failing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. is extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during variation is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be variably displayed as it is, but the variably displayed effect pattern 70a may be started after being once (for a moment) fully stopped, erased, or rewritten.

P17 onwards are as described above.

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 4, in the production control unit 130m, although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production design 70a and the production pattern (variation) of the production design 70a When at least one of the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding pattern) is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variation effect. On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, while the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, if the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the production When the variation of the symbols is started and the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) is insufficient, the shaking variation can be executed with the performance symbol 70a determined based on the second condition (the performance symbol designation command). By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 5 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Using Figure 155 and Figure 159, production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally, concrete example 1 when specified condition is not met in production control section 130m is explained. FIG. 159 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 5 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a and the special design. The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished) and the actual stop is made.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command. When not received, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production pattern 70a is stopped, the special pattern TZ is stopped, and , the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is stopped, special The period of the actual stop of the variable display of the symbol TZ and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At P7 timing, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command. When not received, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production pattern 70a is stopped, the special pattern TZ is stopped, and , the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production design 70a is not actually stopped because the variable production is not started. The period of the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At P10 timing, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. When not received, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and , the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is stopped, special The period of the actual stop of the variable display of the symbol TZ and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the P13 timing, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbols. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive any of the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special design TZ and the variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub first variable display device 81 are not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the sub first variable display device 81 The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P15, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is stopped, special The period of the actual stop of the variable display of the symbol TZ and the actual stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. When receiving, the production design 70a, the special design TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the production design 70a is stopped, the special design TZ is changed, and , the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P17, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P18, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop time command (special design confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is actually stopped. The period of the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P19, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command. When receiving, the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 are not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and , the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P20, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display device 81 The stop period for one lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P21, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is stopped, special The period of the main stop of the variable display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P22, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 5, in the production control unit 130m, when the predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the production design 70a are insufficient, the conditions related to the game state (game state designation command) and the fluctuation stop of the production design 70a It is possible to control not to start the variable production regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the condition (special symbol confirmation command). By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Concrete example 6 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
155 and 160, the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and a specific example 6 when the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 160 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 6 will be described with reference to the effect example of FIG.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a and the special design. The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 .

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the left, middle and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At the timing of P3, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a command for ending the variable production is executed. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("285") (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the sub-first In the variable display 81, the first lamp pattern is in a failing mode (for example, extinguished) and the actual stop is made.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first sub-variable indicator 81 of one lamp symbol is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or a whole or a part expanding or contracting operation as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating motion (effect motion) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance is not performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variably displayed, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. is extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during variation is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 does not start. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH are continuing, the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is extended, and accordingly the output of the changing BGM is maintained (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly swings (swings display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image that constitute the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode (see FIG. 155 (g)), and the sub first fluctuation display 81 , the first lamp pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern designation command. When receiving, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 is in a losing mode (for example, extinguished). 155(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the real stop of the production symbol 70a, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a is stopped, the special design The period of the actual stop of the variable display of TZ and the actual stop of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m normally receives the production pattern designation command. When receiving, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a is permanently stopped at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub-first variable display 81 is in a losing mode (for example, extinguished). 155(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60, the real stop of the production symbol 70a, the real stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is actually stopped on the first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P15, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the main stop of the production design 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special design TZ, In addition, the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the first sub-variation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the production design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as part of the decorative part moving or the whole or part expanding and contracting as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (production operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 6, in the production control unit 130m, although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production design 70a and the production pattern (variation) of the production design 70a pattern) when the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is satisfied, the variation effect is started, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the variation stop of the effect symbol 70a is insufficient, the second condition (effect symbol A swing variation can be executed with the production pattern 70a determined based on the designated command). On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient , It is possible to control so as not to start the variable production. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Concrete example 7 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 161, the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, and the specific example 7 when the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 161 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m.

At the timing of P1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60. - 特許庁At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (game state A), the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a. , the special symbol TZ and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. The effect control unit 130m determines that the internal state is the game state A based on the game state designation command that designates the game state A. In addition, the reception history of the game state designation command is stored in the effect control section 130m.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (game state A), the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a. , the special symbol TZ and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the effect control unit 130m, the game state designation command for designating the game state A received at the timing of P4 has the same content as the reception history of the previous game state designation command (game state A) (timing of P1). Since it is a command, the internal state remains the game state A. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or a whole or a part expanding or contracting operation as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued.

At the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (game state B), the performance design designation command, and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a. , the special symbol TZ and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the effect control unit 130m, the game state designation command for designating the game state A received at the timing of P7, has the same content as the reception history of the previous game state designation command (game state A) (timing of P4). Since it is not a command, the internal state is switched to game state B. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or a whole or a part expanding or contracting operation as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued.

At the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At the timing of P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command (game state A) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern designation command and the variation pattern designation command are produced and controlled. When the unit 130m receives normally, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the effect control unit 130m, the game state designation command for designating the game state A that could not be received at the timing of P10 is the same as the reception history of the previous game state designation command (game state B) (timing of P7). Although it is not a command of contents, the internal state is not switched to the game state A and remains in the game state B. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a part of the decorative part moving or a whole or a part expanding or contracting operation as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotating operation (a production operation).

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating action (effect action) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are continued.

At the timing of P12, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At the timing of P13, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command (game state A) and the production pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the variation pattern designation command is produced and controlled. When the unit 130m receives normally, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the sub first fluctuation display 81 does not start, and the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern are not started. The stopped state continues. In this case, the game state designation command designating the game state A that could not be received at the timing of P10 is the same as the game state designation command (game state B) of the previous reception history (timing of P7). Although it is not a command of the content, the internal state is not switched to the game state A and remains in the game state B.

At the timing of P15 after P14, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The first sub-variation display 81 remains in the stop state of one lamp pattern and does not change.

At the timing of P16, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command (game state A) and the variation pattern designation command as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern designation command is produced. When the unit 130m receives normally, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the sub first fluctuation display 81 of the 1 lamp pattern is not started, and the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern are not started. Stopped state continues. In this case, the game state designation command designating the game state A that could not be received at the timing of P10 is the same as the game state designation command (game state B) of the previous reception history (timing of P7). Although it is not a command of contents, the internal state is not switched to the game state A and remains in the game state B.

At the timing of P18 after passing through P17, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a losing mode. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop time command (special design determination command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the fluctuation production is not started, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and The first sub-variation display 81 remains in a stop state of one lamp pattern and does not change.

Temporarily, at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60, the game state designation command (game state A) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m is transmitted from the production control unit While 130m receives normally, if the production control unit 130m can not normally receive at least one of the production design designation command and the variation pattern designation command, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub first fluctuation display 81 The variable display of 1 lamp pattern is not started. In this case, if the game state of the game state designation command received at this timing is a command with the same contents as the game state designation command of the previous reception history, the effect control unit 130m does not switch the internal state, and the previous game is executed. remain in the state. On the other hand, the effect control unit 130m, if the game state of the game state designation command received at this timing is not a command with the same content as the game state designation command of the previous reception history, the game state designation command of this time switch the internal state to the game state determined based on

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

Specific example 7, in the production control unit 130m, if the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state is satisfied (normal reception), the game determined based on the first condition (game state designation command) If the state is the same game state as the first condition (game state designation command) specified last time, the game state grasped by the effect control section 130m is not changed. On the other hand, if the game state determined based on the first condition (game state designation command) is different from the previously designated first condition game state designation command), the game state grasped by the sub is changed. The game state is changed to one determined based on the first condition (game state specifying command). Also, in the production control unit 130m, if the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state is not satisfied (missing), other conditions (the second condition (special design designation command) concerning the designation of the performance design and the performance The game state is not changed regardless of the third condition (effect pattern designation command) regarding designation of the pattern effect pattern. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Concrete example 8 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 162, a specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 162 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 at the timing of P1. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command (hit design), and the variation pattern designation command (hit performance) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 are started. In this case, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the performance design designation command is a win and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is a win, the variation performance is started.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbols. At this time, when the production control unit 130m receives the game state designation command, the performance design designation command (hit design) and the variation pattern designation command (losing performance) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, The effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 are not started, and the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol of the sub-first variation display 81 are stopped. kept in good condition. In this way, while the production pattern 70a determined based on the production pattern designation command is a winning one, when the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is a losing one, the variation performance does not start.

As shown in FIG. 162(b), the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 at the timing of P1. At this time, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, the effect pattern designation command (losing pattern), and the variation pattern designation command (losing effect) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 are started. In this case, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the performance pattern designating command is a losing one and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designating command is a losing one, the variation performance is started.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production is terminated. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbols. At this time, when the effect control unit 130m receives the game state designation command, the effect pattern designation command (losing pattern), and the variation pattern designation command (hit effect) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control unit 110m, The effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 are not started, and the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol of the sub-first variation display 81 are stopped. kept in good condition. In this way, the production pattern 70a determined based on the production pattern designation command is a losing one, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is a winning one, the variation production does not start.

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 8, in the production control unit 130m, the production design 70a determined based on the second condition (production design designation command) regarding the designation of the production design 70a is the winning one, and the production pattern of the production design 70a ( When the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the variation pattern is a winning one, the effect pattern 70a can be started to vary. Similarly, in the production control unit 130m, the production design 70a determined based on the second condition (production design designation command) related to the designation of the production design 70a is a lost one, and the production pattern 70a is related to the designation of the production pattern When the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is a losing one, it is possible to start varying the production design 70a. On the other hand, in the effect control unit 130m, (the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, the second condition (effect design designation command) regarding the designation of the effect pattern 70a, and the effect pattern of the effect pattern 70a Even when satisfying (receiving) the third condition for designation (variation pattern designation command), the production design 70a determined based on the second condition for designation of the production design 70a (production design designation command), and the production When the hit/loss is different from the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the specification of the effect pattern of the symbol 70a, the variation of the effect symbol 70a is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 9 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 163, a specific example 9 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the prescribed conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 163 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m.

As shown in FIG. 163(a), the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 at the timing of P1. At this time, the game state designation command, the production design designation command (for the first special design) and the variation pattern designation command (for the first special design) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. is normally received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the production design 70a determined based on the production design specification command is for the first special design, and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern specification command is for the first special design. In that case, start the variable production.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a command for ending the variable production is executed. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbols. At this time, the game state designation command, the production design designation command (for the first special design) and the variation pattern designation command (for the second special design) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. is received, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub-first variation display 81 are not started, and the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 are One lamp symbol is held in a stopped state. In this way, the production design 70a determined based on the production design designation command is for the first special design, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the second special design. If it is one of, the variable production is not started.

As shown in FIG. 163(b), the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60 at the timing of P1. At this time, the game state designation command, the production design designation command (for the second special design) and the variation pattern designation command (for the second special design) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. is normally received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the production design 70a determined based on the production design designation command is for the second special design, and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the second special design. In that case, start the variable production.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable performance, the left, middle, and right performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode. At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion).

At the timing of P3, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. When the production control unit 130m normally receives a stop time command (a special pattern confirmation command, abbreviated as a pattern confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a command for ending the variable production is executed. processing takes place. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern in the sub first fluctuation display 81 is in a losing mode ( For example, when the light is turned off, the actual stop is performed.

At P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbols has passed, the first special symbol display device 60 starts the variable display of the first special symbols. At this time, the game state designation command, the production design designation command (for the second special design) and the variation pattern designation command (for the first special design) as the command at the start transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. is received, the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp design in the sub-first variation display 81 are not started, and the production design 70a, the special design TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 are 1 lamp pattern is held in a stopped state. In this way, the production design 70a determined based on the production design designation command is for the second special design, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the first special design. If it is one of, the variable production is not started.

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m was successfully received by the production control unit 130m, based on the reception of this command, the production command transmitted from the production control unit 130m was displayed/sound control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot receive normally, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 9, in the production control section 130m, the second condition (production design designation command) relating to the designation of the production design 70a is selected under a predetermined winning condition (for the first special design or for the second special design). In addition, when the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the production pattern of the production design is selected under the predetermined winning condition (for the first special design or for the second special design), the production design 70a can start fluctuating. On the other hand, in the effect control unit 130m, (the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, the second condition (effect design designation command) regarding the designation of the effect pattern 70a, and the effect pattern of the effect pattern 70a Even when the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding designation is satisfied (normal reception), the second condition (effect design designation command) regarding designation of the production design 70a is a predetermined winning condition (for the first special design or for the second special symbol), while the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) regarding the designation of the effect pattern of the effect symbol 70a is a predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol or the second special (for symbol) and another winning condition (for second special symbol or for first special symbol), variation of production symbol is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a problem has occurred in the effect control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Although the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m as described above was exemplified as a condition for executing the predetermined control in the effect control unit 130m, the condition is not limited to this, and the elapse of time, operation of the operation button, etc. event may be used as a condition.

As shown in FIG. 164, even when the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130m (such as the specific examples 1 to 9 described above), the main control unit 110m sends a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command etc.), the above-described initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17, etc. can be executed. Specifically, in a period in which the production pattern 70a is fluctuating even if the conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m, the main control unit 110m When the predetermined signal from is normally received by the production control unit 130m, the initial operation of the movable accessory such as the first movable member 73 is executed. In addition, during the period in which the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped because the conditions are not satisfied by the performance control unit 130m, the first movable member 73 and the like are movable while the shaking and fluctuating performance pattern 70a is displayed on the screen. Execute the initial operation of the character. Furthermore, in the period when the production control unit 130m does not meet the conditions and the production design 70a is actually stopped, when the production control unit 130m normally receives a predetermined signal from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a which is stopped. is displayed on the screen, the initial operation of the movable accessory such as the first movable member 73 is executed. In this way, in the embodiment, even if the condition that the production control unit 130m has (is not) met, if the initial operation condition based on the predetermined signal from the main control unit 110m is satisfied, the production pattern 70a is displayed. Regardless of the aspect, an initial operation is performed. In concrete example 10, the relationship between the condition that is (is not) aligned in the effect control unit 130m and the effect pattern 70a is the same as in concrete example 1, so the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 165, even when the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130m (such as the specific examples 1 to 10 described above), a detection means for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) and the main control means 110 become disconnected (disconnection of connector, disconnection, etc.) during power supply to the game machine 1, a predetermined abnormality notification (Disconnection notification, magnetic anomaly notification, radio wave anomaly notification, etc.) can be executed. This anomaly notification can be performed over a predetermined period. Specifically, in the period when the performance pattern 70a fluctuates even if the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, when the disconnection state (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) occurs, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. . Further, when the disconnection state (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) occurs during the period when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped because the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. Further, when the state of disconnection (disconnection of the connector, disconnection, etc.) occurs during the period in which the performance pattern 70a is permanently stopped due to the condition not being met in the performance control section 130m, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. As described above, in the embodiment, even if the condition that the effect control unit 130m has (is not aligned with) any condition, if the abnormality notification condition to be in the disconnected state is satisfied, regardless of the display mode of the effect pattern 70a , anomaly notification is executed. At this time, in the image display devices 70 and 71, the abnormal notification may be performed by overlapping with the production pattern 70a in the changing, temporary stop or main stop state, or in the area overlapping with the production pattern 70a. Anomaly notification can be performed using the image display devices 70 and 71 in various ways, such as by turning off the . In concrete example 11, the relationship between the conditions that are aligned (not aligned) in the effect control unit 130m and the effect pattern 70a is the same as in concrete example 1, so the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, when the conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m, other events, actions, productions, operations, notifications, etc. described in the present embodiment may be combined and executed.

<Content I of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed is obtained, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance becomes a special result, a special game is executed. As such a game machine, there is a game machine that transforms a display area of an image display device and also transforms an image being displayed in the display area (for example, JP-A-2017-196126). However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine described above in order to improve the amusement of the game.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment changes between the first mode (stopping at the standby position) and the second mode (effect operation). possible movable accessories (movable members 73, 74), and light emitting states provided in the movable accessories (73, 74) in a first state (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguished). and a first light emitting region (HK1) capable of changing the light emission, and provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessory (73, 74), emitting light in a first state (effect light emitting state) and a first light emitting state. A second light emitting region (HK2) capable of changing the light emitting state between two states (e.g., off) and display means (70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variable effect, wherein the second light emitting region (HK2), and in the variable effect, the first image displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) (for example, a normal display effect pattern 70a) and the first image It is possible to change to a second image (for example, the production pattern 70a of the change display) that is changed and displayed on the screen, and when the variation production that changes to the second image (for example, the production pattern 70a of the change display) is performed. , the light emitting effect of changing to the second state (for example, extinguished) by linking at least one of the first light emitting region (HK1) and the second light emitting region (HK2), and the display means (Image display devices 70 and 71) can display a third image (for example, a special symbol TZ) together with the first image, and the first image and the second image can be Three images (for example, special pattern TZ) can be displayed at the same position.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a movable accessory (movable member 73, 74), and a first light-emitting region provided on the movable accessory (73, 74) and capable of changing the light-emitting state between a first light-emitting state (effect light-emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguished). (HK1), provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessories (movable members 73, 74), and a first state (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguished) in which light is emitted. and display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variable effect, wherein the second light emitting region (HK2) is In the variable production, the first image displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) (for example, the production pattern 70a of normal display) and the first image change on the screen can be changed to the second image (for example, the production pattern 70a of the change display) displayed in the second image (for example, the production pattern 70a of the change display). At least one of the light-emitting region (HK1) and the second light-emitting region (HK2) can be linked to perform a light-emitting effect that changes to the second state (for example, extinguished), and the display means (image display device) 70, 71), it is possible to display a third image (for example, a special pattern TZ) together with the first image (for example, a normal display production pattern 70a), and the first image (for example, a normal display production pattern 70a). etc.) is changed to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display), the visibility is changed, and the third image is changed regardless of whether it is the first image or the second image. (For example, the special pattern TZ) can be displayed without changing the visibility.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a movable accessory (movable member 73, 74), and a first light-emitting region provided on the movable accessory (73, 74) and capable of changing the light-emitting state between a first light-emitting state (effect light-emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguished). (HK1), provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessories (movable members 73, 74), and a first state (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguished) in which light is emitted. and display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variable effect, wherein the second light emitting region (HK2) is In the variable production, the first image displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) (for example, the production pattern 70a of normal display) and the first image change on the screen can be changed to the second image (for example, the production pattern 70a of the change display) displayed in the second image (for example, the production pattern 70a of the change display). At least one of the light-emitting region (HK1) and the second light-emitting region (HK2) can be linked to perform a light-emitting effect that changes to the second state (for example, extinguished), and the display means (image display device) 70, 71), a third image (for example, It is characterized by being able to display a picture frame image GG).

<Content II of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information as to whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is to be executed is obtained, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance becomes a special result, a special game is executed. As such a game machine, there is a game machine that includes a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control board that controls the game effect based on a signal (command) from the main control board (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, the game machine does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate, and there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. It is

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a), and the third condition concerning the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) When (variation pattern specification command) is satisfied, the variation production is started, and when the fourth condition (special design determination command) related to the fluctuation stop of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (production design specification command) can be executed in the production pattern (70a) determined based on, and the production control means (production control board 130) satisfies the first condition (game state designation command), When at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is characterized in that it is controllable not to start the variable performance.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a), and the third condition concerning the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) When (fluctuation pattern specification command) is satisfied, it becomes the first state to start the fluctuation production, and when the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the fluctuation stop of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (Production design designation command) The production design (70a) determined based on the second state in which the shaking fluctuation can be executed, the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, but if the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the same state as in the first state is entered in which the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth When the condition (special symbol determination command) is insufficient, it is characterized in that it becomes a state in which shaking variation can be executed as in the second state.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), when the predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the production design (70a) are satisfied, regardless of the satisfaction or lack of the conditions regarding the game state (game state designation command), When the fluctuation production is started and the condition (special design determination command) regarding the fluctuation stop of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the predetermined condition (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) is determined based on It is characterized in that it is possible to execute shaking variation in the effect pattern (70a).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a), and the third condition concerning the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) When (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied, the variation production is started, and when the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the fluctuation stop of the production design (70a) is insufficient, it is determined based on the second condition. Shaking variation can be executed with the production pattern (70a) that is executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and the second condition (production pattern When at least one of the specified command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is insufficient, it is possible to perform control so as not to start the variation effect.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a) and the third condition concerning the production pattern of the production design When at least one of the conditions (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable performance, and in the performance control means (performance control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) When the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied while lacking, the production pattern (70a) starts to change, and the production pattern (70a) When the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the fluctuation stop is insufficient, it is characterized by being able to execute shaking fluctuation with the performance symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (performance symbol designation command). and

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), if the predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the production design (70a) are insufficient, the conditions related to the game state (game state designation command) and the production design (70a) It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable performance regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the condition (special symbol determination command) related to the variation stop.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a game machine (1) provided with a production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to a signal (command, etc.) of , movable production means (first movable member 73 , second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) performs initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) (initial action, initial light emission) and the action of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) (effect action, effect light emission) can be executed, and the signal Predetermined signals (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during the control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable production of the production pattern (70a), and the production control means ( In the production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a) and the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) If the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is satisfied, the variation effect is started, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) related to the variation stop of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (Production design designation command) It is possible to execute shaking fluctuation in the production design determined based on, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient. When at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is characterized in that it is controllable not to start the variable performance.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (In the image display devices 70 and 71, it is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the effect symbol (70a) when the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a) are satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the production design (70a ), when the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the fluctuation stop is insufficient, the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command) can be shaken and can be changed, In the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied, at least the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) It is characterized in that it is controllable not to start the variable performance when one of them is insufficient.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (In the image display devices 70 and 71, it is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the effect symbol (70a) when satisfying the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a), it becomes the first state to start the fluctuation production, When the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of fluctuation of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the shaking fluctuation is executed with the production design (70a) determined based on the second condition (production design designation command). It becomes the possible second state, and in the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition ( If the variation pattern specification command) is satisfied, it will be in a state where the variation effect is started as in the first state, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the shake variation can be executed as in the second state. It is characterized by being in a state of

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (In the image display devices 70 and 71, the variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and in the effect control means (the effect control board 130), the predetermined condition (the effect pattern designation command, the variable pattern designation command), regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the conditions related to the game state (game state designation command), to start the variable production, the condition for stopping the fluctuation of the production design (70a) (special design determination command ) is insufficient, it is characterized in that the shaking variation can be executed with the performance symbol (70a) determined based on the predetermined condition (the performance symbol designation command, the variation pattern designation command).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (In the image display devices 70 and 71, it is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the effect symbol (70a) when the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a) are satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the production design (70a ) regarding the fluctuation stop (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it is possible to execute shaking fluctuation with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the production control means (production In the control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable production.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (In the image display devices 70 and 71, the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) can be executed, and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied. , When at least one of the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the performance design (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern of the performance design is insufficient, the variation performance is not started. It is controllable, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, while the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern When the specified command) is satisfied, the variation of the production pattern (70a) is started, and when the fourth condition (special design confirmation command) regarding the stoppage of the variation of the production pattern (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (the production It is characterized in that the effect pattern (70a) determined based on the pattern designation command) can be shaken and varied.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (In the image display devices 70 and 71, the variable effect of the effect pattern (70a) can be executed, and in the effect control means (the effect control board 130), the predetermined condition (the effect pattern designation command, the variable pattern designation command) is insufficient, regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the condition (game state designation command) related to the game state and the condition (special design determination command) related to the fluctuation stop of the production pattern (70a), start the variable production It is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and from the main control means (main control board 110) In a gaming machine (1) equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects in response to the signals (commands, etc.) of the game, it is possible to output game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) Sound output means (audio output device 9) is provided, and the production control means (production control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means (audio output device 9) , power restoration notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be output. (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient. , When satisfying the second condition (production design designation command) regarding the production design (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a), the fluctuation production is started, When the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of fluctuation of the production design (70a) is insufficient, it is possible to execute the shaking fluctuation with the production design determined based on the second condition (production design designation command). , In the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) It is characterized in that it is controllable not to start the variable performance when one of them is insufficient.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production pattern (70a) can be executed variable production, in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) related to the game state, the second condition related to the production design (70a) (Production design designation command) and when satisfying the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production design (70a), the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth When the condition (special design determination command) is insufficient, the effect pattern (70a) determined on the basis of the second condition (performance design designation command) can execute shaking fluctuation, and the effect control means (effect control In the substrate 130), if the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied, but at least one of the second condition (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable production.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production pattern (70a) can be executed variable production, in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) related to the game state, the second condition related to the production design (70a) (Production design designation command) and when satisfying the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production design (70a), it becomes the first state to start the fluctuation production, and the production design (70a) is changed. When the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) regarding the stop is insufficient, the second condition in which the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command) allows the shaking fluctuation to be executed, In the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied. When it does, it will be in a state to start the variation production as in the first state, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it will be in a state where the shaking variation can be executed as in the second state. and

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production design (70a) can be executed variation production, in the production control means (production control board 130), predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the production design (70a) are satisfied. In the case, regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the conditions (game state designation command) related to the game state, to start the fluctuation effect, if the condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of the fluctuation of the effect pattern (70a) is insufficient, the It is characterized in that it is possible to execute shaking variation in the production pattern (70a) determined based on predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production pattern (70a) can be executed variable production, in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) related to the game state, the second condition related to the production design (70a) (Production design designation command) and when satisfying the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production design (70a), the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth When the condition (special symbol determination command) is insufficient, it is possible to execute shaking variation with the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the effect control means (effect control board 130), the When the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the fluctuation performance is not started. It is characterized by being controllable.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production pattern (70a) can be executed variable production, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied, but the production design (70a) If at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the production pattern of the production pattern is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable production, and the production When satisfying the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) while the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient in the control means (performance control board 130) , When the production pattern (70a) starts to fluctuate, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of fluctuation of the production pattern (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) based on It is characterized in that it is possible to execute shaking variation in the determined production pattern (70a).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production pattern (70a) variable production can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), a predetermined condition (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the production design (70a) is insufficient. In the case, regardless of the satisfaction or shortage of the condition (game state designation command) related to the game state and the condition (special symbol determination command) related to the fluctuation stop of the effect symbol (70a), it is possible to control so as not to start the variable effect. It is characterized by

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) for detecting the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board ) can execute a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays means (image display devices 70, 71 In the production pattern (70a) can be executed variable production, and in the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the production design (70a) When the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) concerning the production pattern of the production design (70a) are satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the production design (70a) fluctuation When the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop is insufficient, it is possible to execute shaking fluctuation with the production design determined based on the second condition (production design designation command), and the production control means (production In the control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable production.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). Production can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a) and the When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stoppage of the fluctuation of the production pattern (70a) is When it is insufficient, it is possible to execute shaking fluctuation in the production pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (production design designation command), and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first Although the condition (game state designation command) is satisfied, when at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, control is performed so as not to start the fluctuation performance. It is characterized by being possible.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). Production can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a) and the When satisfying the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a), it becomes the first state to start the fluctuation production, and the fourth condition (special pattern confirmation command) is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation command) determined based on the production design (70a) will be in a second state in which shaking fluctuation can be executed, and the production control means (production control board 130), when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, but the second condition (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the first state and Similarly, when the state for starting the variable performance is reached and the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) is insufficient, the state is such that the shaking variation can be executed as in the second state.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). Production can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), when satisfying the predetermined conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the production design (70a), conditions related to the game state (game State designation command) regardless of the sufficiency or shortage, start the fluctuation production, if the condition (special design determination command) related to the fluctuation stop of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the predetermined condition (production design designation command, It is characterized in that it is possible to execute shaking variation with the production pattern (70a) determined based on the variation pattern designation command).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). Production can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (production design designation command) concerning the production pattern (70a) and the When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied, the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stoppage of the fluctuation of the production pattern (70a) is If it is insufficient, it is possible to execute a swing variation in the production pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition, and in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command ) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable production. do.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to execute the production, and in the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is satisfied, the second condition (production design designation) concerning the production pattern (70a) command) and a third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the performance pattern of the performance pattern is insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable performance, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) In, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient while satisfying the second condition (production design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command), the production design (70a) When the variation is started and the fourth condition (special design determination command) regarding the stop of variation of the production design (70a) is insufficient, the production design (70a) determined based on the second condition (production design designation command) .

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). Production can be executed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), if the prescribed conditions (production design designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the production design (70a) are insufficient, conditions related to the game state (game It is characterized by being able to control not to start the variable performance, regardless of the sufficiency or shortage of the conditions (special symbol determination command) regarding the state designation command) and the fluctuation stop of the performance symbols (70a).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game is provided in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), production control means (production control board 130) capable of controlling production in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and predetermined events (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves etc.) and detecting means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the production control means (production control board 130) can perform predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means (starting door detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supplies power to the game machine. Inside, when the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to execute abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to execute the production, and in the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the second condition (production design designation) concerning the production pattern (70a) command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a), the fluctuation production is started, and the fourth condition (special pattern definite command) is insufficient, it is possible to execute shaking fluctuation with the production pattern determined based on the second condition (production design designation command), and in the production control means (production control board 130), the second When the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (performance pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, control is performed so as not to start the variable performance. It is characterized by being possible.

(Regarding the time-saving game state)
The above-mentioned "low-probability short-time gaming state" is performed after the end of the jackpot game. You may set the "low-probability short-time gaming state of the specified number of times variation opportunity" triggered by being executed. "Low-probability short-time gaming state with a specified number of times fluctuation opportunity" is executed after a pattern change of a specified number of times, for example, 1000 times, is performed in a low-probability short-time gaming state including a low-probability short-time gaming state. In addition to the effect, it is possible to combine and execute a time-saving rush effect such as counting down the number of fluctuations until the time-saving occurs.

In addition, the "low-probability short-time gaming state" is, in addition to or instead of the "low-probability short-time gaming state after the jackpot" and / or "low-probability short-time gaming state based on a specific symbol combination", in the low-probability gaming state in advance A "low-probability short-time gaming state based on a specific symbol combination" triggered by the display of a specified combination of special symbols may be set. ``Low-probability short-time gaming state based on specific symbol combination'' is executed after specific symbols such as ``1, 2, 3'' and ``7, 8, 7'' are displayed in a low probability state, such as whether it is a big hit or not. In addition to the effect of , it is possible to combine the reach of whether or not the time saving occurs and other time saving rush effects.

(Playing a game ball into the starting gate)
The game machine 1 of the embodiment is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first start port 45 or the normal figure gate 44 when the game ball is launched so as to pass through the left side area of the game area 5a. It is possible to win the second starting port 47 which is opened according to the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol. The game machine 1 of the embodiment is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first start port 45 or the normal figure gate 44 when the game ball is launched so as to pass through the right side area of the game area 5a. It is possible to win the second starting port 47 which is opened according to the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is easier to pass through the normal figure gate 44 when hitting the right side of the game area 5a than when hitting the left side of the game area 5a. Therefore, the game machine 1 of the embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled than the "non-time-saving game state" in the open mode "time-saving game state" (specific game state) , the player who aims to hit the game ball to the right side area of the game area 5a and to win the second start hole 47 is more likely to hit the game ball than the case where the game ball is hit to the left side area of the game area 5a. It is possible to advance the game advantageously without consuming .

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the entrance of the warp device 41 is opened on the left side of the decorative frame 41, and the game ball always wins directly below the stage portion 42 on which the game ball guided by the warp device 41 rolls. A first starting port 45 (entering a ball) is provided. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44, the second starting port 47 is less likely to be controlled than the "time-saving game state" in the open mode. Aiming to hit the game ball to the first start port 45 by hitting the game ball at the right side of the game area 5a is more advantageous for the player to play the game without consuming the game ball than when hitting the game ball to the right side area of the game area 5a. It is possible to proceed.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is designed to give a difference between advantages and disadvantages for the player depending on which of the left side area and the right side area of the game area 5a the ball is shot. It is preferable to switch the embossed area of the area 5a. In other words, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is required to proceed with the game aiming at winning at the start ports 45 and 47 according to the game state. However, since it is up to the player's shooting operation to decide whether to hit the right side or the left side of the game area 5a, the player proceeds with the game aiming at winning the wrong starting ports 45, 47. There is a risk of

In addition, in both the "non-time-saving gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state", the same area (eg, left side area) of the game area 5a Even if it is a gaming machine that only needs to launch the game ball, the right side of the game area 5a or Since it is up to the player's shooting operation to decide which area on the left side the ball should be launched into, there is a risk that the player may proceed with the game aiming at winning the wrong starting ports 45 and 47. No change.

(Production example 1)
FIG. 166 and FIG. 167 are diagrams showing an expectation level display, a hold icon change effect, a lamp change effect, a notification sound effect, a movable member operation effect, and a specific example 1 of the effect of continuous advance notice effect by these. In addition, various effects that make players expect execution of a jackpot game may be referred to as hit suggestion effects.

As shown in FIG. 166(a), the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the first display portion 70B1, the second display portion 70B2, and the third display portion 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the losing effect symbol 70a of "728" is stop-displayed when the player is on.

After that, when the variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 166(b), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section are displayed. The first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display portion 70B1, and the second display portion 70B2, respectively.

Here, a blue effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, thereby starting the first effect of the continuous advance notice effect, and the first effect that is shift-displayed in the second display portion 70B2. By changing the display mode of the pending icon to a blue character icon and displaying it, the pending icon change effect is started, and along with this, the winning entrance lamp NR changes from a state in which it is extinguished to a state in which it blinks in blue, thereby performing a lamp change effect. be started. In addition, an actuation presentation in which the first movable member 73 operates in a weak actuation mode in which the first movable member 73 vibrates in the vertical direction is executed for a predetermined period of time. In addition, the operation effect in the weak operation mode of the first movable member 73 is started at the timing before the effect pattern 70a starts to fluctuate, and is stopped before the effect pattern 70 is scrolled at high speed (for example, before the preparation operation). .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 166(c), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Also, in the first image display device 70, a zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image is changed to the zone background A, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" are horizontally scrolled is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 166(d), after the performance symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss performance symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed. .

After that, when the variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 166(e), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started and displayed on the first display portion 70B1 and the second display portion 70B2. The first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display portion 70B1.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a for starting the variable display, thereby starting the second effect of the continuous advance notice effect, and continuing the pending icon change effect, the lamp change effect, and the zone effect. remain. In addition, an actuation presentation in which the first movable member 73 operates in a weak actuation mode in which the first movable member 73 vibrates in the vertical direction is executed for a predetermined period of time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 166(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 166(g), after the performance symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the failure performance symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stop-displayed. .

After that, when the variable effect that becomes the change is started, as shown in FIG. 166(h), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first pending icon displayed on the first display section 70B1 is shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect pattern 70a that starts the variable display, thereby starting the third effect of the continuous advance notice effect. Displayed in high red. In addition, the symbol effect image ZE is displayed in a color that indicates a higher expectation for the jackpot game than before. Also, the pending icon change effect is continuously displayed. In addition, by changing the state of the prize winning hole lamp NR from lighting in blue to blinking in red, a lamp change effect is executed in which the expectation for a big win is higher than in the case of lighting in blue. In addition, an operation effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 moves greatly so as to fall from the upper side of the first image display device 70 to the front side of the first image display device. At this time, an actuation effect in which the second movable member 74 operates in a weak actuation mode in which the second movable member 74 vibrates in an oblique direction is executed for a predetermined period of time. In this way, the advance notification performed in the variable display provides a display with a higher degree of expectation for the big win than the previous notification.

Then, as shown in FIG. 167(i), the effect image EF displayed around the performance design 70a is erased, and the performance design 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effects of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are stopped. It should be noted that the zone effect is displayed by switching from the zone background A to the zone background B, which is a display with a higher expectation for a big win.

As shown in FIG. 167(j), the mini character MCB is displayed on the first image display device 70, and, for example, the mini character MCB moving across the screen produces an effect that stirs expectations.

After that, as shown in FIG. 167(k), for example, the line "CHANCE!" uttered by the ally is displayed in the line window displayed on the first image display device 70, and the voice output device 9 responds to the line. When the voice "Chance has arrived!" is displayed, the dialogue announcement effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 167(l), while the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the central variable display area is displayed. A ready-to-win effect (normal reach) for variably displaying the effect pattern 70a is executed. At this time, the display mode of the first reserved icon shift-displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to the red character icon, so that the reserved icon change performance with higher expectations for the big win game than the blue character icon is executed. . Further, the prize winning opening lamp NR changes from red lighting to multicolor (rainbow color) lighting along with it, so that a lamp change performance with a higher expectation for a big win than red lighting is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 167 (m), SP reach production is started, production pattern 70a is displayed in reduced size at the upper left of the screen, the first pending icon display area 70B, and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased. Note that the performance pattern 70a displayed in reduced size is a decorative portion composed of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG which is a part of the character, and a pattern effect image ZE for decorating the background of the character. Then, the normal display mode composed of the hexagonal base image and the identification part consisting of the numeric part (identification character) is changed to the simple reduced display mode with only the identification part.

Then, when it develops into SPSP ready-to-win, as shown in FIG. 167(n), the SPSP ready-to-win effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP ready-to-win effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. "333" jackpot performance symbol 70a suggesting the type of jackpot game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation), then stop-displayed, and the variable performance is completed.

In addition, while the SP and/or SPSP reach is displayed, the winning entrance lamp NR remains turned off, but the lamp change effect is continued or not used in the lamp change effect (not suggesting the expectation of winning the jackpot) ) The winning entrance lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (for example, white lighting).

(Expectation display)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, in the variable display of the production pattern 70a, it is possible to perform a so-called degree of expectation display, such as a color effect such as an effect image EF and a pattern effect image ZE, which makes the execution of a big winning game expected. . As shown in FIG. 168, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment provides a variable display of the production pattern 70a ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as special 1 variable display.), the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the expectation degree display by the color effect (execution rate a3 < execution rate a1). That is, in the normal game state, the game ball is hit toward the left side of the game area 5a, which is the so-called left-handed shot. It is difficult to display expectations.

As shown in FIG. 168, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment provides a variable display of the production pattern 70a ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as special 2 variable display.), the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the expectation degree display by the color effect (execution rate a3 < execution rate a4). That is, in the specific game state, the game ball is hit toward the right side of the game area 5a, so that the game ball is hit toward the right side of the game area 5a. It is difficult to display expectations.

With such an execution ratio of the degree-of-expectation display, it is not disadvantageous for the game ball to enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The degree of expectation display is not limited to color effects, but may be characters and decorations that are superimposed on images such as background images and production patterns, or are performed around images. Anything can be used as long as it can make players expect a game.

The number of types and contents of the production patterns in FIG. 168 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of expectation display by color effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of expectation display by color effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern A32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern A32 is not set), the production pattern A12 for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state However, the expectation level display of the effect pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern A12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the expectation degree display of the effect mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern A32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern A32 is not set), the production pattern A42 for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state However, the expectation level display of the effect pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern A42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the expectation degree display of the effect mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Zone production)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, in the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the zone effect accompanying the scene change of the background image can be executed. The zone effect makes the player expect the execution of the jackpot game over a predetermined period, and is either a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of one starting condition or a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of a plurality of starting conditions. is executable at the timing of

As shown in FIG. 169, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. (execution rate b3<execution rate b1). That is, in the special game state, the zone effect in the special 1 variation display is better in the case of hitting to the left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting to the left in which the game ball is hit toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. difficult to implement.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. (execution rate b3<execution rate b4). That is, in the special game state, the zone effect in the special 1 variation display is better in the case of hitting the left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state. difficult to implement.

With such a zone effect execution ratio, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can be made to notice that. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The number of types and contents of the production patterns in FIG. 169 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of zone effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Also, the number of types of zone effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern B32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern B32 is not set), the production pattern B12 for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state zone effect can be executed, but the zone effect of the effect pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern B12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the zone effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern B32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern B32 is not set), the production pattern B42 for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state However, the zone effect of the effect pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern B42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the zone effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The zone effect is not limited to being performed over a plurality of times of variable display, and the zone effect may be performed by one time of variable display. Then, when it is possible to execute a hit hint effect such as a zone effect over a predetermined number of variable displays, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is better than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. However, the ratio of short times (including 0 times) may be large. In other words, the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state executes a hit hint production such as a zone production of a pattern over a shorter number of fluctuation display times than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. It can be said that it is easy to be

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to change the scene such as the background, the telop that flows on the screen, and the pattern decoration change that changes to the production pattern 70a for zone production. However, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, it may be possible to regulate the execution of scene change such as background, telop flowing on the screen, pattern decorative change changing to effect pattern 70a for zone effect, and the like.

Even if it is done in this way, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Players can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

(Notification sound production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generated notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 166(b), when the hold icon and the blue character icon as the icon are generated (changed), the second generated notification sound is used as the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). (first change notification sound) is output. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 167(l), when a hold icon or a red character icon as the icon is generated (changed to), the third generated notification sound ( second change notification sound) is output. Furthermore, when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generated notification sound (third change notification sound) is output as a notification sound at icon change.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for a plurality of icon display modes (four types). , and a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon. Alternatively, when the CD icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes in any manner. You may make it output. Also, for the rainbow character icon that is determined to be a big hit, three types of special change notification sounds may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 170, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the change notification sound effect is higher in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. is small (execution rate c3<execution rate c1). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the change notification sound in the special 1 fluctuation display is better than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to execute the production.

As shown in FIG. 170, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is higher than the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. is smaller (execution rate c3<execution rate c4). That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state, the change notification in the special 1 figure fluctuation display Sound production is difficult to execute.

With such an execution ratio of the change notification sound effect, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball win the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice that it is. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display performed in the specific game state.

The change notification sound production is not limited to when the pending icon changes, but may be performed with a stimulating sound at the time of winning, the start of fluctuation, or the stop of fluctuation.

For example, when the execution ratio of the specific change notification sound for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific change notification sound is not set), the special 1 variation display in the normal game state At this time, it is possible to execute the notification sound effect by the predetermined change notification sound, but the notification sound effect by the specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the notification sound effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the specific change notification sound for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific change notification sound is not set), the special 2 variation display in the specific game state At this time, it is possible to execute the notification sound effect by the predetermined change notification sound, but the notification sound effect by the specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the notification sound effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The notification sound effect is not limited to being performed in association with the pending (relevant) icon change. Button change sound when a buried operation button appears, operating sound of movable members 73 and 74, change start/return sound and specific design when multiple movable members are combined to form a specific design It can be performed in association with various conditions, such as the complete sound when making a.

When the notification sound effect can be executed in association with a predetermined condition, the predetermined condition is executed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state rather than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. The rate of execution may be the same or smaller, and the rate of execution of the notification sound effect may be smaller.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, it is possible to execute the production by the fixed notification sound out of the information sound production, but in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state, the fixed notification It may be possible to regulate the execution of the presentation by sound. It should be noted that not only the fixed notification sound but also the various notification sound effects described above can be used in the same way. That is, in the special 1 variation display in the regular game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the effect by the predetermined notification sound out of the notification sound effects, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the predetermined It means that it is possible to regulate the execution of the presentation by the information sound.

By doing so, even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the first winning hole 45. can be brought to your attention. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

(Hold icon change effect)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, in the variable display of the production pattern 70a, by changing the form and color of the pending icon, it is possible to execute the pending icon effect that makes the player expect a big winning game. The hold icon change of the present embodiment makes the execution of the jackpot game expected over a predetermined period, and a predetermined fluctuation display period based on the determination of one starting condition, or a predetermined fluctuation based on the determination of a plurality of starting conditions It can be executed at any timing during the display period.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the pending icon change effect is higher in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. is small (execution rate d3<execution rate d1). That is, in the normal game state, when the game ball is hit toward the left side area of the game area 5a, so-called left-handed hitting is performed. It is difficult to execute the production.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is higher than the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. is small (execution rate d3<execution rate d4). That is, the case of hitting left in the specific game state is better than the case of hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state, the holding icon change in the special 1 fluctuation display It is difficult to execute the production.

With such an execution ratio of the pending icon change effect, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice that it is. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

The number of types and contents of the production patterns in FIG. 171 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of pending icon change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of pending icon change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The pending icon change effect is not limited to changing the color of the pending icon (including the relevant icon) or changing the mode of the icon itself, but also changes the icon itself or the effect attached to the icon, such as effects and characters attached to the icon. may Further, the pending icon effect is not limited to changing the round CD icon to the character icon as in the embodiment, but may change the shape of a triangle, a square, or the like.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern D32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern D32 is not set), the production pattern D12 for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. However, the zone effect of the effect pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern D12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the pending icon change effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern D32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern D32 is not set), the production pattern D42 for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state However, the pending icon change effect of the effect pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern D42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the pending icon change effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The number of types of pending icons that can be displayed in the special game state 1 variable display may be smaller than in the special game state special 1 variable display or the special game state 2 variable display. Also, in the pending icon change effect, the CD icon may change stepwise from blue to red to rainbow or the like, or may selectively change from the CD icon to blue, red, or rainbow. The number of types of display modes that can be changed from the current display mode of the pending icon to the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, compared to the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. may be less.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, a pending icon change effect can be executed, but in the special game state 1 change display, execution of the pending icon change effect can be regulated. may be In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, it is possible to execute a change effect that is performed when changing the pending icon change, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the change It may be possible to regulate the execution of the effect for use. Note that even when the pending icon effect is not executed, icon decorations displayed accompanying the pending icon, such as a pedestal on which the pending icon is placed and a frame surrounding the pending icon, may be displayed.

By doing so, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

(Lamp change effect)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, it is a kind of fore-ahead notice effect that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by changing the lighting mode of the prize winning hole lamp NR over one or more variable displays. A certain ramp change effect can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 172, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the ramp change effect is higher in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. (execution rate e3<execution rate e1). That is, the lamp icon change in the special 1 fluctuation display is better in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to execute the production.

As shown in FIG. 172, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the ramp change effect is higher in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state. smaller (execution rate e3<execution rate e4). That is, the case of hitting left in the specific game state is better than the case of hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state, the lamp change effect in the special 1 fluctuation display is difficult to implement.

With such an execution ratio of the ramp change effect, it is not disadvantageous to let the game ball win the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The number of types and contents of the production patterns in FIG. 172 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of lamp change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of lamp change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state.

The lamp change effect is not limited to the winning entrance lamp NR. It may be executed in conjunction with the device.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern E32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern E32 is not set), the production pattern E12 for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. However, the lamp change effect of the effect pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern E12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the ramp change effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the effect pattern E32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the effect pattern E32 is not set), the effect pattern E42 for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state However, the lamp change effect of the effect pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern E42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the ramp change production of the production mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state.

The special 1 variation display in the specific game state may have fewer kinds of lamp change effects than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. Further, in the lamp change effect, the color may be changed stepwise from no light emission→blue→red→rainbow, or the like, or may be selectively changed from no light emission to blue, red, or rainbow. Compared to the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has fewer types of light emission modes that can be changed from the current light emission mode. good too.

In the special 1 variation display of the normal game state or the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, for example, a predetermined pattern of the ramp change effect can be executed, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the ramp change of the predetermined pattern. It may be possible to regulate the execution of the production.

As the light emission (light emission pattern) that constitutes the lamp change effect, for example, when the pending (relevant) icon changes, when the game ball enters the starting hole, when executing a decided effect (fixed effect) such as “Koon”, “Gyuin ”, the operation sound of the movable members 73 and 74, the change start/reset sound and the specific design when a plurality of movable members are combined to form a specific design. It can be performed in association with various conditions such as the completed sound when the design is made.

When the lamp change effect can be executed in association with a predetermined condition, the predetermined condition is executed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state rather than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. The ratio to be executed may be the same or smaller, and the ratio to execute the ramp change effect may be smaller.

In the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, for example, among the lamp change effects, it is possible to execute the effect by the winning entrance lamp NR and the board lighting device (frame lighting device). In the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, for example, it is possible to perform the effect by the lighting device for the board or the lighting device for the frame, while it may be possible to regulate the execution of the effect by the winning hole lamp NR. That is, in the special 1 fluctuation display of the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display of the specific game state, it is possible to execute the production by the predetermined part (area, member unit, etc.) of the lamp change production, but the special game state special In the 1-variation display, it is possible to regulate the performance of the predetermined part.

The pattern selected in the ramp change effect or the ramp change effect depends on the timing (for example, at the time of winning, at the start of fluctuation, at the stop of fluctuation, how many times in a row, start / stop / decide the operation of the movable member, vibration or operation of the operation button etc.). In the special 1 fluctuation display of the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display of the specific game state, for example, it is possible to execute the lamp change effect at a predetermined timing when winning a prize and a specific timing when the movable member is operated. In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to regulate the execution of the ramp change effect at predetermined timings and specific timings.

From the execution period of the ramp change performance (predetermined pattern of lamp change performance) performed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the ramp change performance performed in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state. The execution period of (predetermined pattern of ramp change effect) may be shorter.

Special 1 variation in a specific game state from the number of types of parts (regions, members, etc.) that emit light in the light emission effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state The number of types of parts (regions, members, etc.) that emit light in the light emission effect (lamp change effect) performed in the display may be smaller. In addition, from the range where light is emitted in the light emission effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the light emission effect performed in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state ( The range in which light is emitted in the lamp change effect) may be smaller. Here, the light emission effect is a mode in which the number of light emissions and the light emission range changes in stages by changing the number of light emissions of the LEDs arranged side by side. Thus, the light emission mode may change.

By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Activation of movable parts)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, by operating the first movable member 73 in an operating mode including a weak operating mode and a strong operating mode in which the weak operating mode is operated more (conspicuously) than the weak operating mode, the player can It is possible to execute an operation effect to expect that a jackpot game will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is operated by the first movable member 73 more than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. The execution ratio of the effect in the weak operation mode is small (execution rate f31<execution rate f11). That is, the case of hitting left in the specific game state is more weak in the special 1 fluctuation display than the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. is difficult to execute.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is operated by the first movable member 73 more than the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the effect in the weak operation mode is small (execution rate f31<execution rate f41). That is, in the specific game state, the case of hitting the left in the specific game state is weaker in the special 1 figure fluctuation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state. It is difficult to execute the operation effect of the mode.

With such an execution ratio of the operating effect, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can be made to notice that. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Note that the execution ratio of the strong actuation mode in the actuation effect may be smaller, the same, or larger than that of the weak actuation mode. Also, in the strong actuation mode, the relationship between the winning to the starting ports 45 and 47 and the game state may be the same as in the weak actuation mode, or may be reversed to the weak actuation mode, or the execution ratio may be the same. good too.

Here, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state may have a smaller number of types of patterns of operation effects than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of patterns of operation effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display performed in the specific game state.

In this embodiment, the actuation effect of the first movable member 73 has been described, but the actuation effect of other movable parts such as the second movable member 74 may be the same as that of the first movable member 73 . In this case, the first movable member 73 and other movable accessories may be linked (associated) and operated.

For example, when the execution ratio of the operation effect of the specific operation mode at the time of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), at the time of the special 1 variation display in the normal game state Although it is possible to execute the operation effect by the predetermined operation mode, the operation effect of the specific operation mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation mode is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the operation effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the operation effect of the specific operation mode at the time of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), at the time of the special 2 variation display in the specific game state Although it is possible to execute the operation effect by the predetermined operation mode, the operation effect of the specific operation mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation mode is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the operation effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The operation effect can be executed at various timings such as when the fluctuation starts, when the effect develops, when the reach occurs, when the swing occurs, and when the final effect (fixed effect) occurs. In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the weak operation and strong operation effects at a predetermined timing such as the start of the fluctuation and at a specific timing such as a final effect. , In the special 1 fluctuation display of the specific game state, it may be possible to perform the strong action at the specific timing while it is possible to regulate the execution of the strong action at the predetermined timing. In this way, it is also possible to provide a difference in the operation mode and whether or not the operation effect can be executed depending on the timing.

The operation effect can be executed in association with a light emission effect by light emitting means such as an LED provided on the movable member. In this case, for the light emission effect, it is possible to select light emission patterns, light emission colors, light emission ranges, and the like, such as aspects in which the degree of expectation varies step by step, such as blue light emission→red light emission→rainbow light emission. Then, in the special 1 variable display of the normal game state or the special 2 variable display of the specific game state, it is possible to execute the operation effect of the predetermined light emission mode of blue light emission and the specific light emission mode of rainbow light emission, for example. In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to regulate execution of the operation effect in the predetermined light emission mode and to execute the operation effect in the specific light emission mode. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined light emission mode such as blue light emission and a specific light emission mode such as rainbow light emission in the operation effect, but the specific game state In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to regulate the execution of the light emission effect of the predetermined light emission mode in the operation effect, and to be able to execute the light emission effect of the specific light emission mode. Further, when having a predetermined light emission pattern that can be executed at the time of weak operation and a predetermined light emission pattern that can be executed at the time of strong operation, the specific The execution ratio of the predetermined light emission pattern may be smaller in the special 1 variation display of the game state.

By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Display effect by display means different from the first image display device)
As shown in FIG. 174, the light guide plate provided on the front side of the first image display device 70 displays the light guide plate image DG over one or a plurality of variable displays, thereby executing a jackpot game for the player. It is possible to execute a light guide plate display effect, which is a kind of anticipatory forewarning effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 174(a), in the first continuous announcement effect, for example, at the start of the variable display, the light guide plate image DG imitating a character is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 174(c), for example, at the start of the variable display, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character in a pose different from that of the first display is displayed, and as shown in FIG. For example, at the start of the variable display, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character in the same pose as the second time but in a different color (a red character or a rainbow character) is displayed. The timing of the light guide plate display effect is not limited to the start of the variation, but may be during the variation display or at the end of the variation display.

As shown in FIG. 174-1, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state is more effective in the light guide plate display effect than the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. The execution ratio is small (execution ratio g3<execution ratio g1). That is, the light guide plate display in the special 1 fluctuation display is better in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to execute the production.

As shown in FIG. 174-1, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is more effective than the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. The execution ratio is small (execution ratio g3<execution ratio g4). That is, the case of hitting left in the specific game state is better than the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state, the light guide plate in the special 1 figure fluctuation display It is difficult to execute the display effect.

With such an execution ratio of the light guide plate display effect, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice that it is. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the number of types of patterns of the light guide plate display effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of light guide plate display effect patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 change display executed in the specific game state.

In the present embodiment, the display effect of the light guide plate has been described, but the display effect performed by display means different from the first image display device 71, such as the second image display device 71 and the 3D filter, is the same as the light guide plate display effect. However, different execution ratios may be used. In this case, the light guide plate display effect and other display effects may be linked (associated) and executed.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern G32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern G32 is not set), the production pattern G12 for the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. However, the light guide plate display effect of the effect pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern G12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the light guide plate display effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the production pattern G32 for the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the production pattern G32 is not set), the production pattern G42 for the special 2 variation display in the specific game state However, the light guide plate change effect of the effect pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern G42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the light guide plate change effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed at various timings such as when the fluctuation starts, when the effect develops, when the reach occurs, when the swing occurs, and when the final effect (fixed effect) occurs. In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the light guide plate display effect can be executed at a predetermined timing such as the start of the variation and at a specific timing such as a final effect, but the specific game state In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to regulate the execution of the light guide plate display effect at a predetermined timing and to execute the light guide plate display effect at a specific timing. In this manner, a difference may be provided in the display mode and whether or not the light guide plate display effect can be executed depending on the timing.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed in association with other hit indication effect such as an actuation effect using a movable member. In this case, the light guide plate display effects can be selected from light emission patterns, light emission colors, light emission ranges, and the like, such as modes in which the degree of expectation varies stepwise, such as blue light emission→red light emission→rainbow light emission. In addition, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, other hit hints such as operation effects such as operating the light guide plate display effect of the predetermined display mode of blue light emission and the specific display mode of rainbow light emission, for example However, in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to regulate the execution of other hit hint effects in the predetermined display mode, while other hit hint effects in the specific display mode can be regulated. may be executable. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined display mode such as blue light emission and a specific display mode such as rainbow light emission along with the operation effect, but the specific game state In the special 1 variable display, it is possible to regulate the execution of the operation effect and the light emission effect of the predetermined display mode, and at the same time, it is possible to execute the specific display mode together with the operation effect. In addition, when having a predetermined display pattern (executable at weak operation) and a predetermined display pattern (executable at strong operation), special 1 variation display in normal game state or special 2 variation in specific game state The special 1 variable display in the specific game state may have a smaller execution ratio of the predetermined display pattern than the display.

By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

The display effect performed by other than the first image display device 71 is not limited to the light guide plate, and may be a sub-liquid crystal provided on the game board such as the second image display device, a sub-liquid crystal provided on the frame, or the like. Display effects may be performed by combining these display means including the light guide plate.

(Continuous notice effect)
As shown in FIGS. 166, 167 and 174, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment makes the player expect a big winning game by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable displays. It is possible to execute a continuous notice effect, which is a kind of anticipatory notice effect. In the present embodiment, color effects, zone effects, change notification sound effects, hold icon change effects, lamp change effects, display effects using a light guide plate, etc. are executed in a coordinated manner.

Therefore, according to FIGS. 169 to 173 and 174-1, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state rather than a special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. However, the execution ratio of the continuous announcement effect is small. That is, in the normal game state, when the game ball is hit toward the left side area of the game area 5a, so-called left-handed hitting is performed. is difficult to implement.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. That is, in the specific game state, the case where the game ball is hit to the right side of the game area 5a is hit to the right side, and the case where the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state. is difficult to implement.

With such an execution ratio of the continuous notice effect, it is not disadvantageous to let the game ball win the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the number of types of continuous advance notice effect patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. Further, the number of types of continuous advance notice effect patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The continuous notice effect is not only a linked effect that is performed continuously or in conjunction with multiple variable displays, but also the degree of expectation for the jackpot game is graded as the number of variable displays increases or as predetermined conditions such as the passage of time progress. It may include a development effect (such as a development stimulus effect, a step-up (SU) type effect, etc.) that becomes larger with a target or a continuous change. Note that the development effect may be a change effect such as a countdown or a timer effect in which the mode (display mode or content) changes when a predetermined condition (e.g., elapsed time) is satisfied.

Indirect effects such as roulette effects, effects that increase the layout at the time of reaching, etc. Depending on the content, content suggestions that suggest the details of the event that will be executed after the performance, such as a notice effect that foretells the occurrence of an event that will lead to a big win such as prediction or reach, and a jackpot type suggestion effect (XX bonus). Directing effects such as long-pressing of the button on the image display device, continuous-pressing effects (a gauge accumulates while the button is pressed for a long time, and the button vibrates with each level reached), and a movable accessory (a dedicated movable part). (including characters with other functions such as characters and light guide plates) (weak notice (suggestion) operation, strong notice (suggestion) operation, suggestion, development, decision effect) and operation such as vibration of operation buttons Other pre-notification effects such as effects may also have an execution ratio based on the relationship between the game state and the start condition described above.

For example, when the execution ratio of the continuous notice effect of the specific effect mode at the time of the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state At this time, the continuous advance notice effect in the predetermined effect mode can be executed, but the continuous advance notice effect in the specific effect mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined effect mode is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the continuous notice effect of the specific effect mode at the time of the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), special 2 variable display in the specific game state At this time, the continuous advance notice effect in the predetermined effect mode can be executed, but the continuous advance notice effect in the specific effect mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined effect mode is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 variable display of the normal game state, the light emission effect of the special 1 start port 45 is executed at the winning timing of the game ball to the first winning port 45 and/or the variation start timing of the performance symbol 70a (first special symbol). It is possible, and the action rendering of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74 can be executed. Similarly, in the special 2 fluctuation display of the specific game state, the special 2 start opening 45 emits light at the timing of winning the game ball to the second winning opening 47 and / or the fluctuation start timing of the effect symbol 70a (second special symbol) In addition to being able to execute the production, the action production of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74 may be executable.

On the other hand, in the special 1 fluctuation display of the normal game state, the special 1 start opening 45 , and the motion effect of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is not executed. That is, when hitting left in the normal game state, the light emitting effect and action effect are executed, but when hitting left in the specific game state, the execution of the light emitting effect and action effect is regulated.

In this way, by making the special 1 variation display in the normal game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state different in the light emission effect and the action effect, in the specific game state, as in the normal game state, an erroneous left hand hit is made. Even in such a case, the player can be reminded that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45.例文帳に追加Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

When the three production patterns 70a appear (stop) with a specific pattern (specific outcome = chance eye), it becomes a so-called sudden probability change (2R probability change), or SP reach (possibility of jackpot even in reach) It may be designed to develop into a high quality product). The variable display in which such a chance eye appears may be performed once or a plurality of times. In this case, the probability of appearance of the chance eye may be smaller in the special game state 1 change display than in the special game state 2 change display or the special game state 2 change display. In addition, chance numbers may appear in a plurality of variations in the special game state special 1 fluctuation display than in the special game state special game state 1 fluctuation display or the special game state special game state 2 fluctuation display.

The effect pattern 70a can be displayed in various ways, such as a predetermined display mode consisting of identification parts such as numbers (1 to 9) and letters (A, B, etc.) and decoration parts such as characters, and a specific display mode consisting only of identification parts. You may select and display from the aspect. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of types of predetermined display modes. In addition to the production pattern 70a or instead of the production pattern 70a, a pseudo-continuous pattern such as "NEXT" is displayed, and it seems that it is changing multiple times regardless of one start condition (one winning). A performance (pseudo-ream) may be executed. Also, in addition to the production pattern 70a, or instead of the production pattern 70a, for example, changing pattern, mode entry pattern, development pattern, etc. By the appearance of these patterns, a different mode (for example, production mode) or production may be expected to be executed. Special symbols such as pseudo-continuous symbols, change symbols, mode entry symbols, and development symbols have information (expectation degree of execution of the jackpot game) different from the normal performance symbols 70a. Appearance of such a special pattern can also be one of the elements of the linked performance.

The appearance ratio of the special symbols may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. In addition, the total number of types of symbols that can be displayed in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state (normal effect symbols + special symbols) is more than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. may be less. In addition, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has a higher execution rate of the link effect performed in conjunction with the appearance of the special symbol than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. It can be small.

Even in these cases, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Production example 2)
A specific example 2 of effect of variable display is shown.

(Special 1 fluctuation display in normal game state)
175 and 176, the special 1 variation display in the normal game state will be described. As shown in FIG. 175, at the timing of P0, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45 is from "0" to "1". increase to At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 176(a)).

Next, at the timing of P1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". be. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, a process for starting the variable production is performed when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the suspended icon T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started (see FIG. 176(b)).

At the timing of P2, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 176(c)).

At the timing of P3, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one suspended icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 176(d)).

After that, at the timing of P4, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("259"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 176(e)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("259") (see FIG. 176 (f)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1", and a process for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Also, the suspended icon T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and after the preparatory operation is performed, scrolling is started (see FIG. 176(g)).

At the timing of P7, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one suspended icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 176(h)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 176(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. Further, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 176 (j)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the normal game state according to the flow described above.

Although the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state has been explained, the basic flow is special 1 fluctuation Same as display.

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first Reservation number display area 70E, first reservation icon display area 70B, first lamp pattern, first starting port 45, respectively, second reservation number, second special design, second special design indicator 61, second special design Suspension display 64, sub-second variable display 82, sub-second suspension display 84, second suspension number display area 70F, second suspension icon display area 70D, second lamp pattern, second start port 47 Just do it.

(Special 1 variable display of specific gaming state)
177 and 178, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state will be described. As shown in FIG. 177, at the timing of P0, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45 is from "0" to "1". increase to At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the pending icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(a)).

Next, at the timing of P1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". be. Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, a process for starting the variable production is performed when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Note that the pending icon T1 is not displayed (not shifted) in the first pending icon display area 70B. Also, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 is started, but the performance symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 178(b)).

At the timing of P2, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(c)).

At the timing of P3, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(d)).

After that, at the timing of P4, even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production, the production pattern 70a remains in the stopped state (see FIG. 178(e)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the production pattern 70a remains in a stopped state. Also, the special symbol TZ is permanently stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("259") (see FIG. 178(f)), and the first lamp symbol is permanently stopped in a losing mode (for example, turning off).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 60 . Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "2" to "1", and a process for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". However, the pending icon T1 is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B. Also, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 178(g)).

At the timing of P7, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "1" to "2" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(h)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a remain in a stopped state (see FIG. 178(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol display 60 stops and displays the first special symbol in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the production pattern 70a remains in the stopped state, but the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 178(j)). , the first lamp pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, extinguished).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the specific game state along the flow described above. In the above example, the effect pattern 70a is not changed, but the effect pattern 70a may be changed.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variable display in which the special symbol TZ changes without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variable display in the specific game state. In the variable display, the performance pattern 70a is not changed. On the other hand, in the normal game state, from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display, the above-described specific variation display is not executed, and the pending icon T1 is displayed from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display, while the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol are displayed. TZ is made to fluctuate.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variable display in which the special symbol TZ changes without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variable display in the specific game state. In the variable display, the performance pattern 70a is not changed. On the other hand, in the specific game state, from the start to the end of the special 2 variation display, the above-described specific variation display is not executed, and the pending icon T2 is displayed from the start to the end of the special 2 variation display, while the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol are displayed. TZ is made to fluctuate.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the specific variation display, at least one of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ can be varied. For example, even if both the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ fluctuate, even if the production pattern 70a fluctuates and the special pattern TZ does not fluctuate, the special pattern TZ fluctuates but the production pattern 70a is not displayed. There may be.

In the embodiment, in the normal game state, it is possible to variably display the pending icon and the pending number in accordance with the increase or decrease of the pending number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, in the specific game state, it is possible to variably display the reserved icon according to the increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner, only the reserved number.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, in the specific game state, it is possible to variably display the pending icon and the pending number according to the increase or decrease of the pending number based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, in the specific game state, it is possible to variably display the reserved icon according to the increase or decrease in the reserved number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 in a specific manner different from the predetermined manner, only the reserved number.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 variation display of the normal game state or the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, information about the number of reservations is displayed by the reservation icon, the reservation number and the indicator, while the special 1 variation display of the specific game state It is intended to be displayed with reserved digits and indicators. That is, the total number of types of information related to the number of holds is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. In addition, it can be said that it is more difficult to grasp (confirm) the information on the number of holdings in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state.

Also, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the pending (relevant) icon may not be displayed, but may be displayed. Also, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, even if the hold (relevant) icon is not shift-displayed based on the increase or decrease in the number of holds, the special 1 change of the normal game state, such as not operating the hold (relevant) icon It may be displayed in a manner different from the special 2 variable display of the display or the specific game state. That is, in the special game state special 1 variation display or the special game state special 2 variation display, it is possible to shift display the pending icon, but in the special game state special 1 variable display, the execution of the pending icon shift display is performed. Regulatable. In addition, in the special 1 variation display of the normal game state or the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, the reserved icon can be displayed in a predetermined manner, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the reserved icon is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is possible to regulate the execution of display in

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Production example 3)
A specific example 3 of effect of variable display is shown.

(Special 1 fluctuation display of the number of holds "1" in the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 179, an example of special 1 variation display when the number of holdings is "1" in the normal game state will be described. It is assumed that the variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 179, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one suspended icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 179(a)).

Next, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, a process for starting the variable production is performed when the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Furthermore, the suspended icon T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or reducing the whole or part of the screen, scrolling is started (see FIG. 179(b)).

At this time, the scrolling of the performance design 70a starts in the order of the left performance design 70a, the center performance design 70a, and the right performance design 70a (see FIGS. 179(c) to (e)).

After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, the left side effect pattern 70a, the center effect pattern 70a, and the right side effect pattern 70a are temporarily stopped in this order (see FIGS. 179(f) to 179(h)). Further, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a also sway. (Direction action) is performed. In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIGS. 179(f) to (h)).

Then, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the production pattern 70a that has been temporarily stopped is actually stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 179 (i)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

(Special 1 fluctuation display of holding number "4" in normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 180, an example of special 1 variation display when the number of holdings is "4" in the normal game state will be described. It is assumed that the variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 180, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one suspended icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 180(a)).

Next, the variable display of the first special symbol is started as the first pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Also, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3", and a process for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first pending display 83 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the suspended icon T1 displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started (see FIG. 180(b)).

At this time, the left side effect pattern 70a, the center effect pattern 70a and the right side effect pattern 70a start scrolling at the same time (see FIG. 180(c)).

The first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. - 特許庁At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub-holding indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 180(d)).

After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable production, the left, middle, and right production patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, the left side effect pattern 70a, the center effect pattern 70a and the right side effect pattern 70a are temporarily stopped at the same time (see FIG. 180(e)). Further, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the production pattern 70a also sway. (Direction action) is performed. In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 180(e)).

Then, when the special symbol variation time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 60 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 180 (f)), and the first lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the normal game state with the variation pattern selected along the flow described above.

Although the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state has been explained, the basic flow is special 1 fluctuation Same as display.

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the sub-first variable display 81, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first Reservation number display area 70E, first reservation icon display area 70B, first lamp pattern, first starting port 45, respectively, second reservation number, second special design, second special design indicator 61, second special design Suspension display 64, sub-second variable display 82, sub-second suspension display 84, second suspension number display area 70F, second suspension icon display area 70D, second lamp pattern, second start port 47 Just do it.

In the embodiment, the three production patterns 70a shown in FIG. 179 start scrolling in order, and the three production patterns 70a shown in FIG. However, the variation pattern in which the 3 production patterns 70a temporarily stop at the same time has a shorter variation time.

As shown in FIG. 181, the average variation time of special 1 variation display in the normal game state is different between at least the number of holds "1" and "4". For example, the larger the number of holds, the longer the average variation time. . The special 1 variation display in the normal game state has the longest average variation time when the number of reservations is "1" and the shortest average variation time when the number of reservations is "4". Similarly, the average variation time of the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state is different between at least the number of holds "1" and "4". For example, the larger the number of holds, the longer the average change time. The special 2 variation display in the specific game state has the longest average variation time when the number of reservations is "1" and the shortest average variation time when the number of reservations is "4". In addition, even if the average fluctuation time is the same or different between the number of reservations "2" and the number of reservations "3", even if the average fluctuation times of the number of reservations "2" to "4" are the same or different, It can be anything.

On the other hand, the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is the same or different at least for the number of reservations "1" and "4". The average change time is the longest, and the average change time is the shortest when the number of holds is "4".

Here, from the difference between the average fluctuation display time with the number of holds "4" and the average fluctuation display time with the number of holds "1" when executing the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, in the specific game state The difference between the average variable display time with the number of reservations "4" and the average variable display time with the number of reservations "1" when executing the special 1 variable display is smaller. That is, even if the mean variation time differs between the holding numbers "4" and "1", the difference in the special game state special 1 variation display is smaller than the special game state special 1 variation display.

In addition, from the difference between the average fluctuation display time with the number of holds “4” and the average fluctuation display time with the number of holds “1” when executing the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, the special in the specific game state The difference between the average fluctuation display time with the number of holds "4" and the average fluctuation display time with the number of holds "1" in the case of executing one-variation display is smaller. That is, even if the mean variation time differs between the holding numbers "4" and "1", the difference in the special game state special 1 variation display is smaller than the special game state special 1 variation display.

In addition, in the embodiment, the difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of reservations "4" and the number "1" of the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the number of reservations "4" of the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state The difference in the average fluctuation time with the number of holds "1" is smaller, and the difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of holds "4" and the number of holds "1" of the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, In the specific game state The difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of reservations "4" and the number of reservations "1" in the special 1 fluctuation display is smaller (normal special 1>specific special 2>special special 1).

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, the three production patterns 70a shown in FIG. 179 start scrolling in order, and the three production patterns 70a shown in FIG. However, the variation pattern in which the 3 production patterns 70a temporarily stop at the same time has a shorter variation time.

In the special 1 variation display of the normal game state, when the number of reservations is "4", the variation pattern of FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern of FIG. The pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. That is, it has a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of reservations in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, even if the number of reservations "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. is difficult to be selected (the selectivity may be 0). That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In this way, when executing the special 1 fluctuation display of the losing judgment in the normal game state, the special 1 fluctuation display of the losing judgment is executed in the specific game state from the number of patterns of the fluctuation display time determined by the predetermined holding number. In this case, the number of variable display time patterns determined by the predetermined hold number is smaller.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern in FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. The pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. That is, it has a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of holdings in the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, even if the number of reservations "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. is difficult to be selected (the selectivity may be 0). That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In this way, when executing the special 2 fluctuation display of the losing judgment in the specific game state, the special 1 fluctuation display of the losing judgment is executed in the specific game state from the number of patterns of the fluctuation display time determined by the predetermined number of holdings. In this case, the number of variable display time patterns determined by the predetermined hold number is smaller.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Then, in the case of executing the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss judgment in the normal game state or in the case of executing the special 2 fluctuation display of the loss judgment in the specific game state, it is determined by the number of reservations from "4" to "1" From the number of patterns of the variable display time, the variable display time determined by the number of holds determined by the number of holds from "4" to "1" when performing the special 1 variable display of the loss judgment in the specific game state The number of patterns in is smaller. In this way, when comparing the total number of patterns of variable display time that can be determined by the number of holds from "4" to "1" instead of comparing each number of holds as described above, determination of loss in the normal game state There are fewer special 1 fluctuation displays for loss determination in a specific game state than special 1 fluctuation display or special 2 fluctuation display for deviation determination in a specific game state. Even in this way, the above-described effects can be obtained.

In the special 1 variation display of the normal game state, when the number of reservations is "4", the variation pattern of FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern of FIG. The pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. That is, it has a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of reservations in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, even if the number of reservations "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. is difficult to be selected (the selectivity may be 0). That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In other words, the holding number "4" and the holding number "1" are higher in the case of performing the special 1 fluctuation display of the losing judgment in the specific gaming state than in the case of executing the special 1 fluctuation display of the losing judgment in the normal gaming state. ” and the same variation pattern are executed at a high rate.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern in FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. The pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. That is, it has a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of holdings in the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, even if the number of reservations "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. is difficult to be selected (the selectivity may be 0). That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In other words, the holding number "4" and the holding number "1" are higher in the case of performing the special 1 fluctuation display of the losing judgment in the specific gaming state than in the case of executing the special 2 fluctuation display of the losing judgment in the specific gaming state. ” and the same variation pattern are executed at a high rate.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Regardless of the number of holds (hold number "4" and hold number "1") However, the execution ratio of the variation pattern of the same stop mode or start mode is high. And even if the total number of variation patterns with different stop modes (start modes) is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. I can say.

By doing so, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the effect design 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as partly moving the decorative portion or expanding/contracting the whole or part thereof. Execution of a jackpot game is expected depending on the presence or absence of such a preparatory action and the type of the preparatory action.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the preparatory motion is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. (execution rate h3<execution rate h1). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is more than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. difficult to implement.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the preparatory motion is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state. (execution rate h3<execution rate h4). That is, the case of hitting left in the specific game state is more preparatory in the special 1 fluctuation display than the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state. difficult to implement.

Due to such execution ratio of the preparatory motion, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even when the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can be made to notice that. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has fewer types of preparatory motions than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state. (number of types of variation pattern H3<number of types of variation pattern H1). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is more than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Easy to implement with the same pattern.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has fewer types of preparatory motions than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. (number of types of variation pattern H3<number of types of variation pattern H4). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is more than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Easy to implement with the same pattern.

With such a number of types of preparation motions, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball win the first winning hole 45 even when the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can be made to notice that. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, when temporarily stopping, the production design 70a is configured in addition to slightly swinging motion (swing display) so that the production design 70a moves up and down a predetermined stop position. A stop motion is executed in which the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that are moving are fluctuating motion (drawing motion).

As shown in FIG. 183, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the stop action is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the normal game state. (execution rate i3<execution rate i1). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the stopping operation in the special 1 fluctuation display is more likely than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. difficult to implement.

As shown in FIG. 183, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the stop action is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state. (execution rate i3<execution rate i4). That is, the case of hitting left in the specific game state is more preparatory in the special 1 fluctuation display than the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state. difficult to implement.

With such an execution ratio of the stop motion, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball win the first winning hole 45 even if it is erroneously left-handed in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can be made to notice that. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state has fewer types of stop actions than the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state. (number of types of variation pattern I3<number of types of variation pattern I1). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the stopping operation in the special 1 fluctuation display is more likely than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Easy to implement with the same pattern.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of kinds of stop actions is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. (number of types of variation pattern I3<number of types of variation pattern I4). That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific game state, the stopping operation in the special 1 fluctuation display is more likely than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Easy to implement in the same pattern.

With such a number of types of stop motions, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. The player can be made to notice that. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

Only one of the preparatory operation and the stop operation may be performed instead of performing both.

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped by the loss determination, the variation stop pattern for sequentially stopping (temporarily stopping) the three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 179, and the three performance symbols as shown in FIG. There is a variable stop pattern in which all 70a are stopped together. As shown in FIG. 184, from the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal game state, the loss that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are stopped together is smaller in the special 1 variation display to be judged. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state, the special 1 with the number of reservations "4" It is difficult to execute a mode in which the three performance symbols 70a are stopped together in the variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 184, from the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal game state, it is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are stopped in order is higher in the special 1 variation display that becomes the loss determination. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state, the special 1 with the number of reservations "4" A mode in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in order in the variable display is likely to be executed.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped by the loss determination, the variation stop pattern for sequentially stopping (temporarily stopping) the three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 179, and the three performance symbols as shown in FIG. There is a variable stop pattern in which all 70a are stopped together. As shown in FIG. 184, from the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss determination executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state, the loss that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are stopped together is smaller in the special 1 variation display to be judged. That is, the mode in which the three production patterns 70a are aligned and stopped in the special 1 fluctuation display with the number of reservations "4" when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state. is difficult to implement.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 184, from the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state, it is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a stop in order is higher in the special 1 variation display, which is the loss determination. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state, there is a mode in which the three production symbols 70a stop in order in the special 1 fluctuation display with the number of reservations "4". easy to implement.

As shown in FIG. 184, the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes the loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal game state or the loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state In the special 2 fluctuation display and the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state, the fluctuation pattern of the mode in which the three production patterns 70a stop together Execution percentages are the same. Also, as shown in FIG. 184, special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal game state or executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state In the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment and the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state, the variation of the mode in which the three production patterns 70a stop in order. Pattern execution percentages are the same.

In the embodiment, when the variable display is started in the loss determination, the variation start pattern of sequentially scrolling the three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 179 and the three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 180 are simultaneously scrolled. There is a variable onset pattern that causes As shown in FIG. 185, from the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal game state, the loss that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are aligned and the scrolling is started is smaller in the special 1 variation display that becomes the judgment. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state, the special 1 with the number of reservations "4" In the variable display, it is difficult to execute a mode in which scrolling is started with all three effect symbols 70a aligned.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 185, from the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss determination executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal game state, it is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a start scrolling in order is higher in the special 1 variation display, which is the loss determination. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state, the special 1 with the number of reservations "4" In the variable display, the mode in which the three production patterns 70a start scrolling in order is likely to be executed.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped by the loss determination, the variation start pattern for sequentially starting scrolling the three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 179 and the three performance symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 180 are aligned. There is a variable start pattern to start scrolling. As shown in FIG. 185, from the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes the loss determination executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state, the loss that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a are aligned and the scrolling is started is smaller in the special 1 variation display that becomes the judgment. That is, when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state, three performance symbols 70a are aligned and scrolling starts in the special 1 fluctuation display with the number of reservations "4". Aspects are difficult to implement.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 185, from the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss determination executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state, it is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three production patterns 70a start scrolling in order is higher in the special 1 variation display, which is the loss determination. That is, when hitting to the left in the specific game state than when hitting to the right in the specific game state, three production patterns 70a sequentially start scrolling in the special 1 variable display with the number of reservations "4". is easy to execute.

As shown in FIG. 185, special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal game state or a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state In the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes and the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state, the fluctuation pattern of the mode in which the three production patterns 70a are aligned and start scrolling have the same execution ratio. Also, as shown in FIG. 185, special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal game state or executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state In the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment and the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state, the three production patterns 70a sequentially start scrolling. The execution ratio of the variation pattern is the same.

By doing so, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

In the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the displayed production pattern 70a does not scroll, or a special display mode such as a part of the decoration part such as the character disappears from the production pattern 70a, or the production pattern 70a is not limited to not being displayed. For example, the decoration part such as the character of the effect design 70a does not perform a predetermined operation while scrolling. That is, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is more likely than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the effect symbol 70a is the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special game state in the specific game state. It can be said that the ratio of display in a special mode different from the mode displayed in the special 2 variable display is high.

A special symbol such as the above-described pseudo consecutive symbol may be displayed superimposed on the effect symbol 70a or instead of the effect symbol 70a. In this case, by displaying the special pattern, all or part of the normal scrolling of the production pattern 70a and the action (preparation action and stop action) of the decoration part such as the character of the production pattern become invisible. . Then, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is more likely than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the ratio or the range in which the normal pattern is hidden by the display of the special pattern. is getting smaller.

By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Production example 4)
Effect specific example 4 of variable display will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 185(a), the production pattern 70a of "8" is stopped (temporary stop display) in the left and right fluctuation display areas of the production pattern 70a that has been variably displayed, and is produced in the central fluctuation display area. It is assumed that the ready-to-win effect for variably displaying the pattern 70a is being executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186(b), an effect display is performed in which the temporarily stopped left and right effect patterns 70a change to a different display mode from the previous display mode (FIG. 186(b), thereby Then, a pattern size change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size on the upper left of the screen, and a predetermined effect such as inserting a moving image is performed on the first image display device 70. The performance pattern 70a displayed in reduced size is composed of a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a stick-shaped image SG which is a part of the character, and a pattern effect image ZE decorating the background of the character. The display mode changes from a normal display mode composed of a decoration part, an identification part consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character), to a simple reduced display mode of only the identification part.

As shown in FIGS. 185(d) and (f), by displaying pseudo production patterns (pseudo patterns) GZ so as to increase in three rows above and below, a production is performed to increase the degree of expectation for the jackpot game. . After that, when the execution period of the ready-to-win effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win), as shown in FIG. After the jackpot performance symbol 70a of "888" suggesting the type of game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shake fluctuation), they are stop-displayed and the variable performance is completed.

In the embodiment, the variable display is displayed in the normal mode production pattern 70a and at the predetermined timing of the variable display (for example, at the start of the fluctuation, during the fluctuation, during the fluctuation, etc.) It can be executed with the production pattern 70a of the specific mode to be executed. The production pattern 70a of the specific mode is not only a changed production pattern 70a (change pattern) or a pseudo pattern GZ as shown in FIG. It may be a development pattern or the like that arouses the expectation of.

As shown in FIG. 186, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has a smaller ratio of displaying the specific mode production pattern 70a than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state (m32 <m12). That is, it is more difficult to display the effect symbol 70a in the specific mode in the special 1 figure fluctuation display when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting left in the normal game state.

By doing so, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

As shown in FIG. 186, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has a smaller ratio of displaying the special mode production pattern 70a than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state (m32 <m42). In other words, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state has a higher ratio of displaying the production pattern 70a in the normal mode than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. That is, it is more difficult to display the effect symbol 70a in the specific mode when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 185, it is possible to execute a display size change effect for changing the display size of the effect pattern 70a in the variable display. Then, as shown in FIG. 187, the special 1 variation display that becomes the loss judgment executed in the specific game state changes the display size of the production pattern 70a more than the special 1 variation display that becomes the loss judgment in the normal game state. The execution ratio of the display size change effect to be caused is small (n3<n1). That is, the display size change effect of the effect symbol 70a is less likely to be executed in the special 1 figure fluctuation display when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting left in the normal game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 187, the display size of the effect pattern 70a is changed in the special 1 fluctuation display which is executed in the specific game state and becomes the loss judgment, rather than the special 2 fluctuation display which becomes the loss judgment in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the display size change effect to be caused is small (n3<n4). That is, the display size change effect of the effect symbol 70a is more difficult to execute when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

The display size change effect is not limited to being executed along with the ready-to-win effect, and can be executed at a predetermined timing such as at the start of variation or during variation. The display size change effect may be executed in association with a predetermined condition such as a win suggestion effect such as an operation effect of a movable member, a pending number, or an operation of an operation button.

From the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state , The execution ratio of the pattern change effect may be smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state, which is a loss determination. From the special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state , The execution ratio of the pattern change effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state, which is a loss determination.

Special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment executed when the number of holds is "4" in the specific game state, and special 1 fluctuation display that becomes a loss judgment that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in the specific game state , the execution ratio of the pattern change effect may be the same. In addition, from the special 1 fluctuation display that will be the loss judgment that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific game state, special 1 that will be the judgment of the loss that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific game state In the variable display, the execution ratio of the pattern change effect may be smaller or larger.

As an effect (symbol change effect) to expect execution of a big hit game by changing the symbol, not only the display size change effect, but also the position where the effect symbol 70a is displayed is changed, or the display order of the effect symbol 70a is changed. Other aspects such as changing or doing may also be possible. In addition, when the pattern change effect has a plurality of patterns with different display sizes, display positions, display orders, etc., special 1 in the specific game state is used instead of special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. The total pattern number of pattern change effects may be smaller in the variable display.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 186, the variable display is ready-to-win effects (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, ready-to-reach development fanning effects, etc.). Then, as shown in FIG. 188, the special 1 variation display that becomes the loss determination executed in the specific game state has a smaller ready-to-win effect execution ratio than the special 1 variation display that becomes the loss determination in the normal game state ( o3<o1). That is, the ready-to-win effect is less likely to be executed in the special 1 figure fluctuation display when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting left in the normal game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 188, the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes the loss judgment in the specific game state ( o3<o4). That is, the ready-to-win effect is less likely to be executed when hitting left in the specific game state than when hitting right in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state in the same way as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Prior to the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-reach effect is repeated multiple times so that the second effect such as the roulette effect and the development effect is performed after the first effect such as the mode entry effect and the development effect is performed. By performing production, it is done to increase the degree of expectation for the jackpot. Here, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notification effect executed before the ready-to-win effect than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. may In other words, the ready-to-win effect executed from the advance notification effect is smaller in the special game state 1 variable display than in the special game state 2 variable display or the special game state 2 variable display. In addition, the number of pre-notification effects executed before the ready-to-win effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. good too. In other words, compared to the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the ratio of executing the ready-to-win effect after performing the advance notification effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state. .

In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the degree of expectation for transitioning to the jackpot game after executing the ready-to-win performance is smaller than in the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, and in the special game state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state. The special 1 fluctuation display is less expected to shift to the jackpot game after the reach effect is executed (Special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state> Special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state> Special 1 in the specific game state variable display).

When the ready-to-win effect is selected from a plurality of patterns and executed, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is the total type of ready-to-win effect than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. The number may be small.

It is possible to select from a plurality of patterns and execute related effects such as the operation effect of the movable member and the vibration effect of the operation button performed in association with the ready-to-win effect at an appropriate timing such as during or before execution of the ready-to-win effect. In this case, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the related effect performed in relation to the ready-to-win effect than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state. In addition, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has a smaller number of types of related effects performed in relation to the ready-to-win effect than the special 1 change display in the normal game state or the special 2 change display in the specific game state.

The rate of development from normal reach to SP reach or SP reach is smaller in the special game state 1 change display than in the special game state 1 change display or the special game state 2 change display. The execution period of the ready-to-win effect is shorter in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect over a plurality of variations is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state.

By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Production example 5)
Effect specific example 5 of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. FIG. In addition, in the production example 5, the specific game state is set, and the first specific notification SR1 is performed in the upper right area of the first image display device 70 to guide the player to hit to the right.

As shown in FIG. 189, at the timing of P0, the second reservation number U2 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m by winning the game ball in the second starting port 47 is from "3" to "4". increase to At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED in the second special symbol reserved display 64 changes from "3" to "4". In addition, the first reservation number stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "0".

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the second sub-holding indicator 84 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T2 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) as animation for 10 frames in the second pending icon display area 70D (see FIG. 190(a)). Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is "0". Also, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the first sub display 83 is "0", and the pending icon T1 is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Next, at the timing of P1, the variable display of the second special symbol is started as the second pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". be. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED in the second special symbol reserved display 64 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the second pending number U2 memorized (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "3", and a process for starting the variable production is performed.

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the second sub-holding indicator 84 is changed from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the suspended icon T2 displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. In addition, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol on the second sub-variation display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started (see FIG. 190(b)).

At the timing of P2, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is increased from "0" to "1" by winning the game ball in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 190(c)).

Further, based on the winning to the first winning hole 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a display such as "Right shot" is displayed in the central part of the first image display device 70, and the voice output device 9 Then, the second specific notification SR2 is executed in which voice output such as "Please hit the ball to the right" is performed (see FIG. 190(c)).

After that, at the timing of P3, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (effect motion) (see FIG. 190(d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 61 in a losing mode. Further, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 190 (e)), and the second lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

Next, at the timing of P5, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the second pending number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 2 The variable display of special symbols is started. Also, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the LED in the second special symbol reserved display 64 changes from "3" to "2". Furthermore, the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the production control unit 130m is changed from "3" to "2", and a process for starting the variable production is performed. Although the main control unit 110m also has a first pending memory based on the winning to the first winning port 45, the second pending memory based on winning to the second starting port 47 is given priority, and the variable effect is executed. will be

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Also, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the second sub-holding indicator 84 changes from "3" to "2". Furthermore, the suspended icon T2 displayed in the second suspended icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Also, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol on the second sub-variation display device 81 is started. After performing a preparatory operation such as enlarging or shrinking the whole or a part, scrolling is started (see FIG. 190(f)).

At the timing of P6, the game ball wins the first starting port 45, so that the first reservation number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol reserved display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. In addition, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the suspended icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first suspended icon display area 70B (see FIG. 190(g)).

Further, based on the winning to the first winning hole 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a display such as "Right shot" is displayed in the central part of the first image display device 70, and the voice output device 9 Then, the second specific notification SR2 is executed in which voice output such as "Please hit the ball to the right" is performed (see FIG. 190(g)).

After that, at the timing of P7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable effect, the left, middle, and right effect patterns 70a are temporarily stopped in a losing mode ("913"). At this time, in addition to the effect pattern 70a slightly swinging up and down from a predetermined stop position (swinging display), the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE constituting the effect pattern 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (a performance action). In addition, the holding icon T and the icon TH are in a state of rotating motion (drawing motion) (see FIG. 190(h)).

Then, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol fluctuation time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 61 in a losing mode. In addition, processing for ending the variable production is performed in the production control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation of 10 frames. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined losing mode ("913") (see FIG. 190 (j)), and the second lamp The pattern is actually stopped in a losing mode (for example, lights out).

In this way, in addition to the first specific notification based on the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 45 when executing the first specific notification suggesting that it is in the specific gaming state, and the first specific notification It is possible to execute a second specific notification performed by By doing so, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The second specific notification SR2 is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 in the specific game state, unlike the right-handed notification notified at the start of the jackpot game.

When executing only the first specific notification SR1, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (hit hint effect) such as a notification sound effect, a light emitting effect such as a start port, and a holding icon change effect, but the second specific report SR1 is executed. When doing so, it is possible to regulate the execution of a predetermined effect such as a notification sound effect, a light emitting effect such as a start port, and a holding icon effect (execution of a winning hint effect). It can also be said that the second specific notification SR can be executed instead of executing the effect.

Also, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (hit hint effect) is smaller when both the first specific notification SR1 and the second specific notification SR2 are executed than when only the first specific notification SR1 is executed.

By doing so, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

(Production example 6)
As a notification effect (pre-notification effect) that expects the execution of a jackpot game, the first notification is executed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation), and the second notification is executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (at the time of start-up winning). There is For example, in the embodiment, when the production pattern 70a (special pattern) starts to fluctuate, the winning opening lamp NR (starting openings 45, 47) is blinked in blue, for example. It is possible to execute the notification effect of the first notification with a second light emission mode (see FIG. 191(b)) in which the lamp NR (start ports 45, 47) is blinked in red, for example, different from the first light emission mode. In addition, when the game ball enters the start openings 45 and 47, different from the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode, for example, the winning opening lamp NR, the board lighting device 76 such as the decorative frame 41, and the frame lighting device It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second notification by the third light emission mode (see FIGS. 191(d) and (e)) in which 10 are combined to emit light. Note that the first light emission mode and/or the second light emission mode may be executed even in the second notification. Furthermore, as a notification effect, there is provided a fourth light emission mode (see FIGS. 192(c) and (f)) which is different from the first to third light emission modes and which does not involve light emission from the prize winning entrance lamp NR, for example.

As shown in FIG. 192, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is more suitable than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. The execution ratio of the light emission mode is small (p31<p11). In addition, the execution ratio of the notification effect of the fourth light emission mode is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (p32>p12). That is, the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode in the notification effect are less likely to be executed when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits left in the normal game state. Further, the fourth light emission mode in the notification effect is more likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting left in the normal game state.

By doing so, even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will notice that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can let Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

As the notification effect, the first notification can be executed in the first lighting mode, the second lighting mode and the third lighting mode, and the second lighting can be executed in the first lighting mode and the second lighting mode. In the notification, the third light emission mode may be disabled. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 192, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is better than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. The execution ratio of the second light emission mode and the third light emission mode is small (p31<p11). In addition, the execution ratio of the notification effect of the fourth light emission mode is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state (p32>p12). That is, the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode in the notification effect are less likely to be executed when the player hits left in the specific game state than when the player hits left in the normal game state. Further, the fourth light emission mode in the notification effect is more likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting left in the normal game state.

Even in this way, the player is made to realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can be done. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

As shown in FIG. 191, the operation button 17 produces a vibration effect in conjunction with the notification effect described above. The vibration effect is to make the operation button 17 vibrate so that a big winning game can be expected, and may be executed in combination with the button light emission effect of causing the operation button 17 to emit light. In the notification effect, the winning opening lamp NR (starting openings 45, 47) is blinked in blue, for example, in a first light emission mode (see FIG. 191 (a)), and the winning opening lamp NR (starting openings 45, 47) is first emitted. The notification effect of the first notification can be executed in a second light emission mode (see FIG. 191(b)) that is different from the mode, for example, blinking in red. In addition, a second light emission mode that is different from the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode, for example, a winning entrance lamp NR, and other light emitting means such as the board lighting device 76 such as the decorative frame 41 and the frame lighting device 10 are combined to emit light. It is possible to execute the second notification by three light emission modes (see FIGS. 191(d) and (e)).

As shown in FIG. 193, in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the normal game state, the execution ratio of the vibration effect by the operation button 17 is larger in the second notification than in the first notification (q12>q11). That is, in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the vibration performance is more likely to be executed in combination with the second notification than in combination with the first notification. In addition, the execution ratio of the vibration presentation by the operation button 17 is smaller in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state (r3<r1). That is, the vibrating effect is less likely to be executed in the case of hitting left in the specific game state than in the case of hitting left in the normal game state.

The vibration presentation may be selected from a plurality of vibration patterns, such as a pattern that is executed over a certain period of time, a pattern that is intermittently executed at predetermined intervals, and the like. Also, the vibration effect may be selected from a plurality of effect patterns such as a weak effect pattern such as vibrating without emitting light, and a strong effect pattern such as vibrating while emitting light. Then, the total pattern of vibration performance may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. In addition, in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the vibration performance of the weak performance pattern and the strong performance pattern can be executed, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the weak performance pattern. While it is possible to regulate the execution of the vibration performance of the pattern, it may be possible to execute the vibration performance of the strong performance pattern.

By doing so, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The light emitting effect is not limited to the starting lamp NR, and other parts such as a game board or a frame may emit light.

As shown in FIG. 191, in accordance with the timing of the start of fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a, it is possible to execute the light emission performance by the winning entrance lamp NR, the operation performance of the first movable member 73, and the vibration performance of the operation button 17. . Here, the light emission effect includes a mode in which only the winning gate lamp NR emits light, the first movable member 73 other than the winning gate lamp NR, the operation button 17, the specific positions of the game board (board lighting device) and frame, etc. can be executed by selecting from a plurality of patterns, such as a mode of emitting light in combination with In addition, the light emission effect can be executed by selecting from a plurality of patterns of light emission colors such as blue, red, and rainbow colors. Also, the actuation effect of the first movable member 73 can be selected from a plurality of patterns such as weak actuation and strong actuation. Furthermore, the vibration presentation of the operation button 17 can be executed by selecting from a plurality of patterns with different periods, intensities, and intervals. As shown in FIG. 191, in this embodiment, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state, the light emitting effect of the winning entrance lamp NR and the motion effect of the movable accessories (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are changed. It can be executed at the timing of start. Similarly, in the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, even if it is possible to execute the light emission effect of the winning entrance lamp NR and the action effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) at the timing of the change start. good. On the other hand, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the light emission effect of the winning entrance lamp NR and the action effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are not executed at the timing of the start of the change. It has become. In the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the light emitting effect of the winning entrance lamp NR and the action effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) may not be executed at the same time, but may be executed at different times. .

In this way, the total number of types of win implied effects executed at the same time is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. . It should be noted that the timing for executing the effect may be during a fluctuation, a fluctuation stop, or the like, such as when winning a prize.

By doing so, the player is reminded that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

(Modified examples of production examples 1 to 6)
Although the performance symbol 70a is displayed in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state, the performance symbol 70a is not displayed in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state, and even if it is displayed, it is not scrolled. good too. In addition, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state, but in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state, the effect pattern 70a is not displayed, and even if it is displayed, it is not scrolled. can be By doing so, the player is reminded that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is hit to the left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state, even if the pending icon is not displayed, a related display such as a pedestal decorating the pending icon may be displayed.

The performance symbol 70a used in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state and the performance symbol 70a used in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state may be shared or separated. Further, the effect symbol 70a used in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the effect symbol 70a used in the special 1 change display executed in the specific game state may be shared or separated.

The special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state may be separate without being shared. Also, the special symbol TZ used in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state may be separate without being shared. The display position of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different between the special 1 variation display in the normal game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state. Also, the display position and/or display mode of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different between the special game state special 2 variation display and the special game state special 1 variation display.

The reserved number used in the special 1 variation display performed in the normal game state and the reserved number used in the special 1 variation display performed in the specific game state may be shared without being separated. Also, the reserved number used in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the reserved number used in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state may be shared without being separated.

Advance notice effects with different execution times can be combined and executed. At the time of start of variation, the degree of expectation for the big winning game can be suggested by the action at the start of variation of the performance pattern itself or characters of the performance pattern, the order of start of variation of the performance pattern, and the like. Further, at the end (stop) of variation, the degree of expectation for the big winning game can be suggested by the action at the start of variation of the performance pattern itself or the character of the performance pattern, the order of starting variation of the performance pattern, or the like. Furthermore, in the first half of the execution period of the advance notice effect in one or more variable displays, in the first half (first period) of the variable display, the conversation notice, the cut-in notice, the development destination roulette effect, Long-press effect and repeated hit effect of the operation button 17, change of the pending icon and change of the icon, display effect of the light guide plate, operation effect of the movable members 73 and 74 (suggestion, development, decision effect), vibration effect of the operation button (suggestion, development/decision effect), timer effect, lamp light effect of the starting ports 45 and 47, etc. can be executed singly or in combination. Furthermore, in the second half of the execution period of the advance notice effect in one or more variable displays, development effects and final effects on the display means such as liquid crystal, display effects of the light guide plate (light emission according to the result of the final effect, etc.) , Vibration production of operation button 17 (suggestion, development, decision production), operation production of frame accessories and board accessories (movable members 73, 74), jackpot type suggestion production (XX bonus, etc.), timer production, pending change It is possible to execute the lamp light emission effects of the start ports 45 and 47 according to the above, etc. singly or in combination.

In this case, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the execution time is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. In addition, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the execution period is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. The special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the latter half of the execution period than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. In addition, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the latter half of the execution period is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

When there are a first performance performed in the first half of the execution period and a second performance performed in the second half of the execution period as the advance notice performance, the first performance and the second performance are performed in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. However, while the first effect can be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state, the execution of the second effect may be restricted. In addition, although the first effect and the second effect can be executed in the special 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state, the first effect can be executed in the special 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state. , the execution of the second effect may be regulated.

Even in this way, the player is made to realize that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the player hits left by mistake in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can be done. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The execution ratio of various effects that expect the execution of the jackpot game, which is performed in the special 1 variation display in the above-described specific game state (time reduction game state or variable probability game state), may be "0".

The above-described various effects (generally referred to as a winning hint effect) that expect the execution of the jackpot game may be set with only one effect (display) pattern, but may be set with a plurality of effect (display) patterns. can be selected and executed. The hit indication effect is not limited to the fact that the execution ratio is different in relation to the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state, and the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state. In the hit hint effect, the execution ratio of a plurality of selectable patterns in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state (special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state, special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state) is the same. may also be different.

For example, when the win suggestion effect is selected from a plurality of patterns in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the execution ratio of the specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern may be smaller than that of the predetermined pattern. On the other hand, when the winning suggestion effect is selected from a plurality of patterns in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the predetermined pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is selected. Even if the same or corresponding first pattern and the same or corresponding second pattern as the specific pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific game state have the same execution ratio, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state and the execution ratio may be different. Due to such a difference in pattern execution ratio, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player notice that it is. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

For example, when the expectation level display by the color effect is selected from "blue", "red", and "rainbow", selectable "red" for special 1 fluctuation display in normal game state or special 2 fluctuation display in specific game state The execution ratio of the "red" color effect that can be selected in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state may be smaller than that of the color effect. In this case, the execution ratio of the "blue" and "rainbow" color effects may be the same or different. It should be noted that this is not limited to the degree of expectation display, and can be similarly applied to various effects that make players expect execution of the above-described big win game. That is, when the winning hint effect is selected from a plurality of patterns, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is selected from the predetermined pattern selectable in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. A specific pattern that is the same as or corresponding to the selectable predetermined pattern may have a smaller execution ratio. By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the pattern selected for the winning hint effect or the winning hint effect is the timing (for example, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, how many times in a row), the game state, or other patterns (for example, the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time, etc.) ), and the execution ratio may be different. For example, when a variation pattern in which three production patterns 70a stop in order is selected, from the "red" color effect executed at the start of variation in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, The "red" color effect that is executed at the start of the fluctuation in the special 1 fluctuation display of the specific game state may have a smaller execution ratio. Similarly, when a variation pattern with a short variation time of the production pattern 70a is selected, "Red The execution ratio of the "red" color light emission effect executed at the start of the variation in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state may be smaller than the "color light emission effect". It should be noted that it is not limited to the degree of expectation display and the light emission effect of the starting opening, and can be similarly applied to various effects that make the player expect execution of the above-described jackpot game. That is, when the winning hint effect is executed under a predetermined condition, the winning hint effect (predetermined pattern of the winning hint effect) performed in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, The execution ratio of the winning hint effect (predetermined pattern of the winning hint effect) performed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state may be smaller. By doing so, even if the player erroneously hits to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, the player can enjoy the merits of each game state and can improve the interest of the game. .

From the execution period of the hit hint performance (predetermined pattern of win hint performance) performed in the special game state special 1 variation display or the special game state special 2 variation display, the winning suggestion performance performed in the special game state special 1 variation display is performed. The execution period of (predetermined pattern of winning suggestion effect) may be shorter.

When it is possible to execute a joint effect in which multiple types of hit hint effects are performed at the same time, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is better than the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. , the execution ratio of joint production may be small. When there is a joint effect that is a combination of multiple types of hit hint effects that are performed at the same time, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is better than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. However, the proportion of execution of the predetermined win suggestion effect in the joint effect may be small. When there is a joint performance that is a combination of multiple types of winning hint performances performed at the same time, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the predetermined winning hint performance and the specific winning hint Although the performance can be executed, in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to regulate the execution of the predetermined win implied performance among the joint performances, while the specific win implied performance may be executable. .

As the confirmation effect (including the rich effect of the big win), at a predetermined timing, the movable members 73 and 74 are operated, the operation button 17 is vibrated, and a predetermined mode of display such as rainbow display or rainbow light emission is performed. There are a first effect and a second effect that is performed at a timing different from the first effect (for example, at the start of variation, during variation, at the time of stop of variation, etc.). The second effect is, for example, a fixed notification sound that is output at the start of the fluctuation, a hold change in the rainbow mode, or a probability change fixed effect that expects the execution of a probability change depending on the hit of the production such as winning the battle. It is viable and has multiple patterns.

The fixed effect is the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, and the execution ratio of the first effect and / or the first effect of the fixed effect is different. In this case, the execution ratio of the first effect of the fixed effect may be smaller in the special game state 1 fluctuation display than in the special game state 2 fluctuation display or the special game state 2 fluctuation display. Further, the execution ratio of the second effect of the fixed effect may be smaller in the special game state 1 variable display than in the special game state 2 variable display or the special game state 2 variable display. Furthermore, the execution ratio of one of the first and second fixed effects is smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. You may At this time, the execution ratio of the other of the first effect and the second effect of the fixed effect may be the same or different.

In the special 1 fluctuation display of the normal game state or the special 2 fluctuation display of the specific game state, the first production and the second production of the fixed production can be executed, but in the special 1 fluctuation production of the specific game state, at least the second production It is preferable to regulate the execution of a predetermined pattern among the above. For example, in the special 1 variation display of the normal game state or the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, the first effect and the operation of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation button 17 are executed as the fixed effect, while the movable member The pattern of the second effect involving the actuation of 73, 74 and operation button 17 is not executed.

By doing so, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45 even if the game ball is erroneously hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can make you realize. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning the second winning hole 47 in the specific game state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the player can enjoy the benefits of each game state by aiming at the appropriate prize winning openings 45 and 47 according to the game state, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

The hit hint effect in the variable display of the losing judgment has been explained, but even in the variable display of the hit judgment, the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal game state, the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, and the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific game state , may be the same as in the loss determination.

As described above, a player who has a sense of incompatibility with the execution degree and type of the performance expected in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state (hit hint performance) suspects an error in the gaming machine 1 itself. can be considered. In this case, it is assumed that the hall manager will check the control part that governs the game, such as the main control board. Therefore, in addition to the structure of the effect in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state described above, the structure of the board case described later makes it easy for the hall manager to confirm, and the stress of the player is reduced. can improve the interest of

◇ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as the game state. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, an expectation degree display (e.g., color effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected based on the determination can be executed, and the fluctuation based on the first start condition in the normal game state The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the expectation level display (for example, color effect) than the display.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and a special effect (for example, zone effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected over a predetermined period based on the determination is performed for one predetermined variable display period based on the determination, or for a plurality of the above. It can be executed at any timing of a predetermined variable display period based on determination, and is based on the first starting condition in the specific game state rather than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. The variable display is characterized in that the execution ratio of the special effect (for example, zone effect) is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and based on the determination, a notification sound effect (such as a notification sound when the hold icon changes) that makes the execution of the special game expected can be executed, and the first display in the normal game state The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the notification sound effect (for example, the notification sound when the hold icon changes) than the variable display based on the starting condition. characterized by

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute variable display, and continuous or related effects (for example, color effect, notification sound effect, light emission effect, pending icon change effect, movable member operation effect, etc.) are executed in the above-mentioned variable display a plurality of times. It is possible, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is more effective than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. Informative sound production, light emission production, holding icon change production, movable member operation production, etc.) are characterized by a small execution ratio.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) Suspension in which a variable display can be executed, and the display mode of the suspension icons (T1, T2, TH) displayed when the starting condition is established changes from a normal mode (eg, CD icon) to a specific mode (eg, color character icon). An icon change effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the change performance is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, a light emission effect (for example, light emission of the winning hole lamp NR) based on winning to the first winning means (first winning hole 45) can be executed, and the first winning means in the normal game state The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the light emitting effect (e.g., the lighting of the winning entrance lamp NR) than the variable display based on the starting condition. and

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) that is more advantageous than the game state, and the first display means (first image display device 70) and the second display means ( second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.), and based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or the second winning Variation display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) on the first display means (first image display device 70) based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball into the means (second prize winning port 47). can be executed, and a display mode including a first mode (eg, blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (eg, rainbow color effect, etc.) in the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) A display effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the display effect by the first mode (for example, the blue effect, etc.) in the means (the second image display device 71, the light guide plate, etc.) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to perform variable display, and movable parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 ), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the first actuation mode (for example, weak actuation) of actuation representation by the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, an expectation level display (e.g., color effect) for expecting execution of the special game can be executed based on the determination, and the fluctuation based on the second start condition in the specific game state The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the expectation degree display (for example, color effect) than the display.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and a special effect (for example, zone effect) that makes the execution of the special game expected over a predetermined period based on the determination is performed for one predetermined variable display period based on the determination, or for a plurality of the above. It can be executed at any timing of a predetermined variable display period based on determination, and is based on the first start condition in the specific game state rather than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state. The variable display is characterized in that the execution ratio of the special effect (for example, zone effect) is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, execute a notification sound effect (for example, notification sound at the time of change of the hold icon) that makes the execution of the special game expected based on the determination, and execute the second display in the specific game state. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the notification sound effect (for example, the notification sound when the hold icon changes) than the variable display based on the starting condition. characterized by

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute variable display, and continuous or related effects (for example, color effect, notification sound effect, light emission effect, pending icon change effect, movable member operation effect, etc.) are executed in the above-mentioned variable display a plurality of times. It is possible, and the variable display based on the first start condition in the specific game state is more effective than the variable display based on the second start condition in the specific game state. Informative sound production, light emission production, holding icon change production, movable member operation production, etc.) are characterized by a small execution ratio.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the start condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as the game state. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) Suspension in which variable display can be executed, and the display mode of the suspension icons (T1, T2, TH) displayed when the starting condition is established changes from a normal mode (eg, CD icon) to a specific mode (eg, color character icon). An icon change effect can be executed, and the change display based on the first start condition in the specific game state is more suitable for the holding icon than the change display based on the second start condition in the specific game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the change performance is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, it is possible to execute a light emission effect (for example, light emission of the winning hole lamp NR) based on the winning to the first winning means (first winning hole 45), and the second The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the light emitting effect (e.g., the lighting of the winning entrance lamp NR) than the variable display based on the starting condition. and

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) that is more advantageous than the game state, and the first display means (first image display device 70) and the second display means ( second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.), and based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45), or the second winning Variation display of the pattern (effect pattern 70a) on the first display means (first image display device 70) based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball into the means (second prize winning port 47). can be executed, and a display mode including a first mode (eg, blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (eg, rainbow color effect, etc.) in the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) A display effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the display effect by the first mode (for example, the blue effect, etc.) in the means (the second image display device 71, the light guide plate, etc.) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to perform variable display, and movable parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 ) can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the first actuation mode (for example, weak actuation) of actuation representation by the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and when the first start condition is satisfied in the specific game state, a specific variable display (for example, a pending icon is displayed or operated from the start to the end of the variable display, and the production pattern 70a or at least one of the special effect symbols TZ) can be executed, and when the first start condition is satisfied in the normal game state, the specific variable display is not executed. .
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on establishment of a starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination is performed. In a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when the variable display of (the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the game state is the normal game state, and the game state is the above-mentioned It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) When executing the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state, the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is unexecutable It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of the effect mode (for example, color effect, zone effect, hold icon change, notification sound, light emission, operation of movable members, etc.).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and when the first start condition is satisfied in the specific game state, a specific variable display (for example, a pending icon is displayed or operated from the start to the end of the variable display, and the production pattern 70a or at least one of the special effect symbols TZ) can be executed, and when the second starting condition is satisfied in the specific game state, the specific variable display is not executed. .
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on establishment of a starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination is performed. In a gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when the variable display of (the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the game state is the normal game state, and the game state is the above-mentioned It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, probability variable game state) more advantageous than the normal game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) When executing the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state, the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is unexecutable It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of the effect mode (for example, color effect, zone effect, hold icon change, notification sound, light emission, operation of movable members, etc.).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and in the normal game state, a holding display corresponding to an increase or decrease in the number of holdings based on the first start condition can be displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, an operation such as rotation), and the specified It is characterized in that, in the game state, the hold display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of holds based on the first starting condition can be displayed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, no operation or no display).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and in the specific gaming state, a holding display corresponding to an increase or decrease in the number of holdings based on the second start condition can be displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, an operation such as rotation), and the specific It is characterized in that, in the game state, the hold display corresponding to the increase or decrease in the number of holds based on the first starting condition can be displayed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, no operation or no display).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute variable display, and the average variable display time and the maximum hold at the maximum number of holds (for example, 4) when executing the variable display of the loss determination based on the first start condition in the normal game state From the difference from the average fluctuation display time with a predetermined number of reservations (for example, 1) less than the number, the maximum number of reservations in the case of executing the variable display of the loss determination according to the first start condition in the specific game state The difference between the average fluctuation display time at (for example, 4) and the average fluctuation display time at a predetermined number of reservations (for example, 1) smaller than the maximum number of reservations is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute the variable display, and when executing the variable display of the loss determination by the first start condition in the normal game state, the specific game is determined from the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations. It is characterized in that the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined holding number is smaller when the variable display of the failure determination based on the first starting condition is executed in the state.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and when executing the variable display of the loss determination according to the first starting condition in the normal game state, the loss determination according to the first starting condition in the specific game state The case where the variable display is executed is characterized in that the ratio of execution of the same fluctuation pattern between the first number of reservations (for example, 4) and the second number of reservations (for example, 1) is high.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute variable display, and the average variable display time and the maximum hold at the maximum number of holds (for example, 4) in the case of executing the variable display of the loss determination according to the second start condition in the specific gaming state From the difference from the average fluctuation display time with a predetermined number of reservations (for example, 1) less than the number, the maximum number of reservations in the case of executing the variable display of the loss determination according to the first start condition in the specific game state The difference between the average fluctuation display time at (for example, 4) and the average fluctuation display time at a predetermined number of reservations (for example, 1) smaller than the maximum number of reservations is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute the variable display, and when executing the variable display of the loss determination by the second start condition in the specific game state, the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations, the specific game It is characterized in that the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined holding number is smaller when the variable display of the failure determination based on the first starting condition is executed in the state.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and when executing the variable display of the loss determination according to the second starting condition in the specific game state, the loss determination according to the first starting condition in the specific game state The case where the variable display is executed is characterized in that the ratio of execution of the same fluctuation pattern between the first number of reservations (for example, 4) and the second number of reservations (for example, 1) is high.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and it is possible to execute an operation effect (for example, a preparation operation or a stop operation) of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) at the start and / or end of the variable display, and the second in the normal game state. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is the symbol (effect symbol 70a) performed at the start and/or the end of the variable display, rather than the variable display based on the first starting condition. is characterized in that the execution ratio of the action effects (for example, preparation action and stop action) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and it is possible to execute an operation effect (for example, a preparation operation or a stop operation) of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) at the start and / or end of the variable display, and the second in the normal game state. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is the symbol (effect symbol 70a) performed at the start and/or the end of the variable display, rather than the variable display based on the first starting condition. The number of types of action effects (for example, preparation actions and stop actions) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and the variable display is composed of the symbols of the first mode (for example, 1 to 9) and the second mode displayed at a predetermined timing of the variable display (for example, special symbols having no numerical information). symbols, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. , characterized in that the rate at which symbols of the second mode (for example, special symbols having no numerical information, etc.) are displayed is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and it is possible to execute an operation effect (for example, a preparation operation or a stop operation) of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) at the start and / or end of the variable display, and the second in the specific game state The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is the symbol (effect symbol 70a) performed at the start and/or the end of the variable display, rather than the variable display based on the starting condition of 2. is characterized in that the execution ratio of the action effects (for example, preparation action and stop action) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and it is possible to execute an operation effect (for example, a preparation operation or a stop operation) of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) at the start and / or end of the variable display, and the second in the specific game state The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is the symbol (effect symbol 70a) performed at the start and/or the end of the variable display, rather than the variable display based on the starting condition of 2. The number of types of action effects (for example, preparation actions and stop actions) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the start condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as the game state. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and in the variable display, the symbols can be displayed in a first pattern in a predetermined mode (for example, 1 to 9) and a second pattern in a specific mode (for example, a special pattern that does not have numerical information). and the ratio at which the first symbol is displayed in the variable effect based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than in the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific game state. is characterized by a large

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the start condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as the game state. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and in the stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is short) in which the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the first stop display mode and the period of the stop display are included. There is a different second stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is long), and the change display that becomes a loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum number of holds is in the normal game state, the above The variable display, which becomes a loss determination based on the first start condition when the number of holds is maximum in the specific game state, has a smaller execution ratio of the first stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is short). It is characterized by

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to perform variable display, and in the stop display mode in which the design (effect design 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, there is a first stop display mode ( For example, there is a simultaneous stop) and a second stop display mode (for example, stop in order) in which the symbols (effect symbols 70a) are stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and in the normal game state The variation that becomes a loss judgment based on the first starting condition when the maximum holding number is in the specific game state from the change display that becomes a loss judgment based on the first starting condition when the maximum holding number The display is characterized in that the execution ratio of the second stop display mode (for example, stop in order) is higher.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the pattern change effect for changing the display size of the pattern (the effect pattern 70a) is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the start condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as the game state. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. is characterized in that the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and in the stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is short) in which the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the first stop display mode and the period of the stop display are included. There is a different second stop display mode (for example, the time to stop is long), and when the number of holds is the maximum in the specific game state, the change display becomes a loss determination based on the second start condition. The variable display that becomes a loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum number of holds is in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the first stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is short). It is characterized by

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to perform variable display, and in the stop display mode in which the design (effect design 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, there is a first stop display mode ( For example, there is a simultaneous stop) and a second stop display mode (for example, stop in order) in which the symbols (production pattern 70a) are stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and in the specific game state The variation that becomes a loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum hold number is in the specific game state from the change display that becomes a loss determination based on the second start condition when the maximum hold number is present. The display is characterized in that the execution ratio of the second stop display mode (for example, stop in order) is higher.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the pattern change effect for changing the display size of the pattern (the effect pattern 70a) is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the start condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as the game state. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute a variable display, and the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state than the variable display that becomes a losing determination based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. is characterized in that the execution ratio of the ready-to-win effect is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the start condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as the game state. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A first specific notification (e.g., right-handed display) suggesting that the variable display is executable and the specific gaming state, and the first In addition to the first specific notification (right-handed display), a second specific notification (display and notification different from right-handed display) can be executed based on the winning of the game ball to the winning means. and

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) It is possible to execute variable display, and light emission effects and movable accessories (for example, first movable member 73, second movable member 74) can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, winning timing, fluctuation start timing, etc.), and at the predetermined position (for example, starter lamp NR) based on the first start condition in the specific game state It is characterized in that it is possible to regulate the execution of the light emitting effect and the action effect of the movable accessory (eg, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) at a predetermined timing (eg, winning timing, fluctuation start timing, etc.). do.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and as a notification performance to expect execution of the special game, a first notification performed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the variation starts) and a timing different from the first notification (when the start gate wins). A second notification can be executed, and as the first notification, a first mode (for example, starter lamp NR blue flashing) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, starter lamp NR red flashing). It is executable, and as the second notification, it is executable in a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode (for example, the starter lamp NR and the light emission of the board and / or frame lighting device), The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific game state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state, and the execution of the first to third modes in the notification effect It is characterized in that the ratio of execution of the notification effect of the fourth mode (for example, the starting port lamp NR does not emit light) different from the first to third modes is high.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A variable display can be executed, and as a notification performance to expect execution of the special game, a first notification performed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the variation starts) and a timing different from the first notification (when the start gate wins). A second notification can be executed, and the first notification includes a first mode (eg, starter lamp NR blue flashing), a second mode different from the first mode (eg, starter lamp NR red flashing), It can be executed in a third aspect different from the first aspect and the second aspect (for example, the starter lamp NR and the light emission of the board and / or frame lighting device), and as the second notification, the first It is executable in the same mode as the mode and the second mode, and is unexecutable in the same mode as the third mode, and the specific game state is changed from the variable display based on the first start condition in the normal game state. , the variable display based on the first starting condition has a smaller execution ratio of the first to third modes in the notification effect, and a fourth mode different from the first to third modes (for example, a starting port lamp NR does not emit light) is characterized in that the execution ratio of the notification effect is large.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the fulfillment of the starting condition (winning to the winning openings 45 and 47), and the pattern ( When the variable display of the performance symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player enters a normal game state and a normal game state as game states. It has a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) more advantageous than the game state, and is based on the first start condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning means (first winning port 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the design (effect design 70a) on the display means (first image display device 70) A first light emission mode using the first prize winning means (starting entrance lamp NR) and other lighting effects in conjunction with the first prize winning means are provided as a light emitting effect capable of executing a variable display and expecting execution of the special game. and a second light emitting mode using a light emitting means (for example, a board and/or frame lighting device), and in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state, the first light emitting In the second light emission mode, the execution ratio of the vibration effect by the vibration means (operation button) is higher than in the mode, and the variation display based on the first starting condition in the normal game state is executed in the specific game state. The variable display based on the first starting condition to be set is characterized in that the execution ratio of the vibration effect is smaller.
[Third embodiment]
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to an embodiment (third embodiment) shown in the drawings.
<Basic configuration of game machine>
194 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine according to this embodiment, FIG. 195 is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to this embodiment, and FIG. 196 is a gaming machine according to this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a game control device provided in the game machine.

In the game machine 1 shown in FIG. 194, an inner frame (openable/closable frame) 3 is attached to an outer frame 2 attached to an island structure of a game hall so that it can be opened and closed, and a glass frame 4 is attached to it so that it can be opened and closed.
A window 4a is formed in the glass frame 4, and a transparent plate (glass plate) 4b is attached to the window 4a. A game board 10z having a board surface on which game balls are launched is mounted on the inner frame 3, and a game area 10az in which game balls can roll and flow down is provided between the board surface of the game board 10z and a transparent plate in front thereof. formed. The transparent plate 4 b is, for example, a glass plate, and is detachably fixed to the glass frame 4 .

The glass frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 via the hinge mechanism 5z at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when facing the game machine), and the other end in the left-right direction with the hinge mechanism 5z as a fulcrum. (for example, the right side when facing the game machine) can be rotated in a direction to release it from the outer frame 2 . The glass frame 4 covers the game board 10z together with the transparent plate, and rotates around the hinge mechanism 5z like a door to open the inner part of the outer frame 2 including the game board 10z. A lock mechanism for fixing the other end of the glass frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is provided on the other end of the glass frame 4 . Fixation by the lock mechanism can be released with a dedicated key. Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with an open detection switch 105z for detecting whether the glass frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or not.

A plate unit 7z having a storage plate 6z (an upper plate 6az and a lower plate 6bz) for storing game balls is provided in the lower portion of the glass frame 4 (the lower portion of the window 4a). A production button 8z (FIG. 194) that can be pressed, a cross key 40z that allows the player to perform various selection operations, and a discharge button 9z that discharges the game balls stored in the lower tray 6bz to the outside of the gaming machine. is equipped with
The effect button 8z is activated only when, for example, a message for operating the effect button 8z is displayed on the image display device 31z, which will be described later. The production button 8z is provided with a production button detection switch 8az (see FIG. 196), and when the production button detection switch 8az detects a player's operation, a further production is executed in response to this operation.
The cross key 40z is provided with cross key detection switches (up key detection switch, down key detection switch, left key detection switch, right key detection switch).

An operation handle 11z is provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 4 . When the player touches the operating handle 11z, the touch sensor 11az (see FIG. 196) in the operating handle 11z detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11z and transmits a touch signal to the shooting control board 75z. . The firing control board 75z, upon receiving a touch signal from the touch sensor 11az, permits energization of the firing solenoid 12az. When the rotation angle of the operating handle 11z is changed, the knob of the volume 11bz rotates. A voltage corresponding to the detected angle of the shooting volume 11bz is applied to the shooting solenoid 12az provided in the game ball shooting mechanism. Then, when a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 12az, the firing solenoid 12az operates in accordance with the applied voltage, and the game ball is ejected into the game area of the game board 10z with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 11z. Launched to 10az.

An outer rail R1 and an inner rail R2 are provided around the game area 10az on the game board 10z. These outer rail R1 and inner rail R2 guide the game ball shot from the game ball shooting mechanism when the operation handle 11z is operated to the upper part of the game area 10az. The game ball guided to the upper part of the game area 10az falls within the game area 10az. At this time, the game ball is unpredictably dropped by a plurality of nails and windmills provided in the game area 10az.
A center member 12z is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 10z. The center member 12z is provided with an image display device 31z such as a liquid crystal display device, and a performance accessory device 32 imitating a "sword".

In addition, a first starting hole 13z into which a game ball can enter is provided in the game area 10az on the central lower side of the center member 12z. A second starting port 14z is provided below the first starting port 13z. The second starting port 14z has an opening/closing door 14bz, and is movably controlled between a first mode in which the opening/closing door 14bz is maintained in a closed state and a second mode in which the opening/closing door 14bz is in an open state. . Therefore, when the second starting port 14z is in the first mode, there is no winning chance for the game ball, and when in the second mode, the winning chance for the game ball increases.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the second starting port 14z is controlled in the first mode, the game ball is prevented from entering the second starting port 14z. However, if the chance of a game ball entering the game ball in the first mode is less than when it is controlled in the second mode, when the second mode is controlled in the first mode A game ball may enter the starting port 14z. In other words, the first aspect includes a state in which it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting port 14z.

The first start hole 13z and the second start hole 14z are provided with a first start hole detection switch 13az (see FIG. 196) and a second start hole detection switch 14az, respectively, for detecting the entry of a game ball. When these detection switches detect the entry of a game ball, a lottery for acquiring the right to execute a jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot lottery") is performed. Also, when the first start hole detection switch 13az and the second start hole detection switch 14az detect the entry of game balls, predetermined prize balls (for example, three game balls) are paid out.
In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 13z and the second start hole 14z, for example, three game balls are put out. It is not always necessary to perform the payout associated with the entry of the ball. Also, the number of dispensing may be different for each starting opening, for example, the number of dispensing of the first starting opening 13z may be three, and the number of dispensing of the second starting opening 14z may be one.

The game areas 10az on both sides of the center member 12z are provided with gates 15z through which game balls can pass. The gate 15z is provided with a gate detection switch 15az (see FIG. 196) for detecting the passage of a game ball, and when the gate detection switch 15az detects the passage of a game ball, a normal symbol lottery, which will be described later, is performed. .
Furthermore, the game area 10az on the right side of the center member 12z is provided with a first big winning hole 16 and a second big winning hole 17z into which game balls can enter. For this reason, the operation handle 11z is largely rotated and the game ball is not entered into the first big prize hole 16 and the second big prize hole 17z unless the game ball is hit with a strong force.

The first big winning hole 16 is normally kept closed by an opening/closing door 16bz, making it impossible for game balls to enter. On the other hand, when a jackpot game to be described later is started, the opening/closing door 16bz is opened, and this opening/closing door 16bz functions as a tray for guiding the game ball into the first big winning hole 16, and the game ball is placed in the first A ball can be entered into the 1st prize winning opening 16. - 特許庁A first big winning hole detection switch 16az is provided in the first big winning hole 16, and when the first big winning hole detection switch 16az detects the entry of a game ball, a preset prize ball (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second big winning opening 17z is normally kept in a closed state by the movable piece 17bz, making it impossible for game balls to enter. On the other hand, when a jackpot game to be described later is started, the movable piece 17bz is operated and opened, and this movable piece 17bz functions as a guide path that guides the game ball into the second big winning opening 17z, A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 17z. A second big winning hole detection switch 17az is provided in the second big winning hole 17z. game balls) are paid out.
Furthermore, the game area 10az is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 18z. When game balls enter these general winning holes 18z, predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out.

At the bottom of the game area 10az, a game ball that did not enter any of the general winning opening 18z, the first starting opening 13z, the second starting opening 14z, the first big winning opening 16 and the second big winning opening 17z An out port 19z for discharging is provided.
The image display device 31z displays an image during standby when no game is played, or displays an image according to the progress of the game. Above all, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 13z or the second starting hole 14z, the performance pattern 35z for informing the player of the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner.
The effect pattern 35 is, for example, three patterns (numbers) such as the first pattern (left pattern), the second pattern (right pattern), and the third pattern (center pattern), which are scrolled and displayed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the corresponding pattern is displayed. Scrolling is stopped and specific patterns (numbers) are displayed in an array.

Thus, during the scrolling of the patterns, the player is given an impression as if a lottery is currently being performed, and the player is notified of the lottery result by the patterns displayed when the scrolling is stopped. By displaying various images, characters, etc. during the variable display of the effect pattern 35z, the player is given a high expectation that he may win a big prize.
In addition, although not shown, the image display device 31z displays a fourth pattern in addition to the effect pattern 35z. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating the change state of the effect symbol 35z used for notification of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery process.
The fourth pattern does not necessarily have to be displayed on the image display device 31z, and may be displayed by separately providing a fourth pattern display lamp.

A pair of left and right lighting devices 33 for presentation are provided on the upper part of the glass frame 4. - 特許庁The production lighting device 33 is provided with a plurality of lights, and performs various productions by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of light from each light.
In addition, the production lighting device 33 is provided with a plurality of lights, and various productions are performed by changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each light.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 194, the gaming machine 1 is provided with an audio output device 34 (see FIG. 196) consisting of a speaker. SE (sound effects) and the like are output, and production by sound is also performed.

Below the left side of the game area 10az, there are a first special symbol display device 20z, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reservation display device 23, and a second special symbol reservation display device 24, which will be described later. , a normal symbol holding display 25z, a round number display 26z and the like are provided.
The first special symbol display device 20z notifies the lottery result of the jackpot triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 13z, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs. That is, a plurality of special symbols corresponding to the lottery result of the big win are provided, and by displaying the special symbols (lighting mode) corresponding to the lottery result of the big win on the first special symbol display device 20z, the result of the lottery can be displayed in the game. I am trying to notify people. The special symbols displayed in this manner are not displayed immediately, but are stopped after being variably displayed (blinking) for a predetermined period of time.
More specifically, when a game ball enters the first start hole 13z, a lottery for a big win is performed. The player is notified when the time has elapsed. Then, when a predetermined time has passed, the special symbols corresponding to the big win lottery result are stopped and displayed to notify the player of the lottery result.

The second special symbol display device 21 is for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot that is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 14z, and its display mode is the first special symbol. It is the same as the display mode of the special design in the display device 20z.
The normal symbol display device 22 is for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 15z. Although details will be described later, when a predetermined hit is won by the lottery of the normal symbols, the normal symbol display device 22 lights up, and then the second starting port 14z is controlled in the second mode for a predetermined time. It should be noted that the lottery result is not immediately reported as soon as the game ball passes through the gate 15z, but the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner, such as by blinking the normal symbol display device 22 until a predetermined time elapses. I am trying to
Furthermore, when the game ball enters the first starting port 13z or the second starting port 14z such as during the variable display of the special symbols or during the special game to be described later, the lottery for the jackpot cannot be performed immediately. The right to draw the jackpot is reserved. More specifically, the jackpot lottery right reserved when a game ball enters the first starting port 13z is reserved as a first reservation, and reserved when a game ball enters the second starting port 14z. The right to draw the jackpot is reserved as a second reservation.

Both of these reservations set the upper limit reserved number to 4 respectively, and the reserved numbers are displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24, respectively.
The upper limit reserved number of normal symbols is also set to 4, and the reserved number is displayed in the same manner as the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24. is displayed in device 25z.
The number-of-rounds indicator 26z is for notifying the number of rounds of a round game performed during a special game, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 196, on the back side of the game machine 1, there are a main control board 50z, an effect control board 55z, a payout control board 60z, a lamp control board 65z, an image control board 70z, a launch control board 75z, a power supply board 80z, and a game board. An information output terminal plate 27z and the like are provided. A power plug 81z for supplying power to the gaming machine and a power switch (not shown) are provided on the power board 80z.
The image control board 70z is provided with a volume selector switch 36z for switching the volume of the audio output from the audio output device 34. FIG.

A game control device for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 196, the main control board 50z controls the basic actions of the game. The main control board 50z has at least a one-chip microcomputer composed of a main CPU 50az, a main ROM 50bz, and a main RAM 50cz, and an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control.
The main CPU 50az reads the program stored in the main ROM 50bz based on the input signal from each detection switch and performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device and display, or according to the result of arithmetic processing Send commands to other boards. The main RAM 50cz functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 50az.

On the input side of the main control board 50z, there are a first starting opening detection switch 13az, a second starting opening detection switch 14az, a gate detection switch 15az, a first big winning opening detection switch 16az, a second big winning opening detection switch 17az, A general winning hole detection switch 18az is connected, and a game ball detection signal is input to the main control board 50z.
In addition, on the output side of the main control board 50z, there are a starting opening opening/closing solenoid 14cz that opens and closes the opening/closing door 14bz of the second starting opening 14z, and a first big winning opening that opens and closes the opening/closing door 16bz of the first big winning opening 16z. An opening/closing solenoid 16cz and a second large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17cz for opening and closing a movable piece 17bz of the second large winning opening 17z are connected.
Furthermore, on the output side of the main control board 50z, there are a first special symbol display device 20z, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reservation display device 23, and a second special symbol reservation display device. 24, a normal symbol holding display 25z, and a round number display 26z are connected to output various signals through output ports.
In addition, the main control board 50z outputs external information signals necessary for managing the gaming machines in a hall computer or the like of the gaming parlor to the game information output terminal board 27z.

The main ROM 50bz of the main control board 50z stores game control programs, data necessary for various games, and tables, which will be described later.
Also, the main RAM 50cz of the main control board 50z has a plurality of storage areas.
For example, the main RAM 50cz has a normal symbol reserved number (G) storage area, a normal symbol reserved storage area, a first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, a second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area, and a judgment storage area. , 1st special symbol storage area, 2nd special symbol storage area, high probability game number (X) storage area, time saving game number (J) storage area, round game number (R) storage area, open number (K) storage area , 1st big winning hole number of balls (C1) storage area, 2nd big winning hole number of balls (C2) storage area, game state storage area, game state buffer, stop pattern data storage area, performance transmission data storage area etc. are provided. The game state storage area includes a time saving game flag storage area, a high probability game flag storage area, a special figure special electric processing data storage area, and a normal figure normal electric processing data storage area. Note that the storage areas described above are merely examples, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 27z is a board for outputting an external information signal generated by the main control board 50z to a hall computer or the like of the game parlor. The game information output terminal board 27z is wire-connected to the main control board 50z, and is provided with a connector for connection to a hall computer or the like of the amusement arcade.
The main control board 80z converts the power supply voltage supplied from the power plug 81z into a predetermined voltage and supplies it to each control board. In addition, the main control board 80z has a backup power source composed of a capacitor, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine, and when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value, a power interruption detection signal is sent to the main control board 50z. Output. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal goes high, the main CPU 50az becomes operable, and when the power failure detection signal goes low, the main CPU 50az stops operating. The backup power supply is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery.

The effect control board 55z mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby. This effect control board 55z includes a sub CPU 55az, a sub ROM 55bz, and a sub RAM 55cz, and is connected to the main control board 50z so as to be communicable in one direction from the main control board 50z to the effect control board 55z. .
Sub CPU55az reads the program stored in the sub ROM55bz based on the command transmitted from the main control board 50z or the input signal from the effect button detection switch 8az input through the lamp control board 65z and performs calculation Processing is performed, and corresponding data is transmitted to the lamp control board 65z or the image control board 150 based on the processing. The sub-RAM 55cz functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub-CPU 55az.

The sub ROM 55bz of the effect control board 55z stores programs for effect control, data necessary for various games, and tables.
For example, a variable performance pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a performance pattern based on a variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 50z, and a performance pattern pattern determination for determining a combination of performance symbols 35z to be stopped and displayed. A table (not shown) and the like are stored in the sub ROM 55bz. It should be noted that the tables described above are merely examples of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) are provided during the progress of the game. ing.

The sub RAM 55cz of the effect control board 55z has a plurality of storage areas.
The sub RAM 55cz includes a command reception buffer, a game state storage area, an effect mode storage area, an effect pattern storage area, an effect pattern storage area, a judgment storage area (0th storage area), a first reserved storage area, a second reserved storage area. etc. are provided. Note that the above-described storage area is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.
Also, the effect control board 55z is equipped with an RTC (real time clock) 55d for outputting the current time. The sub CPU 55az receives a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time from the RTC 55d, and executes various processes based on the current date and time.
The RTC 55d normally operates by the power from the game machine when the power is supplied to the game machine, and by the power supplied from the backup power supply mounted on the main control board 80z when the power of the game machine is turned off. works by Therefore, the RTC 55d can clock the current date and time even when the gaming machine is powered off. In addition, RTC55d may provide a battery on the production|presentation control board 55z, and may operate|move by this battery.

The payout control board 60z performs game ball launch control and prize ball payout control. The payout control board 60z includes a payout CPU 60az, a payout ROM 60bz, and a payout RAM 60cz, and is connected to the main control board 50 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. The payout CPU 60az reads the program stored in the payout ROM 60bz based on input signals from the payout ball counting switch 106z for detecting whether or not the game ball has been paid out, and the open detection switch 105z, and performs arithmetic processing. Based on the processing, corresponding data is transmitted to the main control board 50z.

Also, the output side of the payout control board 60z is connected with a payout motor 107 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game ball storage section to the player. The payout CPU 60az reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 60bz based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 50z, performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout motor 107 of the prize ball payout device to deliver a predetermined prize. Pay out the ball to the player. At this time, the payout RAM 60cz functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 60az.
It also checks whether a game ball lending device (card unit) (not shown) is connected to the payout control board 60z. Sends launch control data that allows
Further, a tray full detection switch 51z and a clogged ball detection switch 52z are connected to the payout control board 60z.

The launch control board 75z permits launch upon receiving the launch control data from the payout control board 60z. Then, the touch signal from the touch sensor 11az and the input signal from the shooting volume 11bz are read, and the firing solenoid 12az and the ball feed solenoid 12bz are energized and controlled to shoot the game ball.
The firing solenoid 12az is composed of a rotary solenoid. A striking member (not shown) is directly connected to the firing solenoid 12az, and the rotation of the firing solenoid 12az rotates the firing member.
Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 12az is set to about 99.9 (times/minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 75z. As a result, the number of shot game balls in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces/minute) because one shot is shot each time the shooting solenoid makes one rotation. That is, game balls are shot approximately every 0.6 seconds.
The ball feed solenoid 12bz is composed of a rectilinear solenoid, and feeds the game balls on the upper tray 6az (see FIG. 194) one by one toward the hitting member directly connected to the firing solenoid 12az.

The lamp control board 65z is connected to the effect control board 55z so as to be capable of two-way communication, and its input side is connected to the effect button detection switch 8a provided in the effect button 8z. When the detection signal is input from 8az, it is output to the effect control board 55z.
In addition, the lamp control board 65z is connected to the production accessory device 32 and the production lighting device 33 provided on the game board 10z, and the lamp control board 65z responds to the data transmitted from the production control board 55z. Based on this, it controls the lighting of the performance lighting device 33, and controls the driving of the motor for changing the light irradiation direction. In addition, it controls the power supply of a driving source such as a solenoid or a motor that operates the performance accessory device 32 . In addition, in this embodiment, since it is comprised so that the production|presentation button 8z may protrude, the production accessory apparatus 32 contains the production|presentation button 8z.
The board lamp 100z and the frame lamp 101z are connected to the lamp control board 65z.
The image control board 150 is connected to the performance control board 55z so as to be capable of two-way communication, and the image display device 31z and the audio output device 34 are connected to its output side.

The main control board 50z will be further described.
A performance display monitor 600, a setting display monitor 650, a setting key switch 660, a setting switch 670, and an RWM clear switch 680 are further connected to the main control board 50z.
Details of these will be described later, but the performance display monitor 600 displays the performance of the gaming machine, that is, the base value.
The base value is a numerical value that indicates how much payout is in the normal state (low probability, short working hours, no time) excluding special states such as jackpots, variable probability gaming states, short working hours, etc. For example, low probability short working hours If there are 50 prize balls when the player hits 100 game balls at no time, the base is 50.
A performance display monitor 600 displays a value obtained by calculating a base value for low-probability, time-shortening and non-working time for each predetermined number of hits (usually 60,000) in all game states including a jackpot, probability-variable game state, and time-saving game state.
Also, in a game machine having a setting function, the probability of winning a big win can be changed by changing the setting.
The setting values may be displayed on a setting display monitor 650 provided separately from the performance display monitor 600, or the performance display monitor 600 may also serve as the setting display monitor 650 to display the setting values. In that case, there is no need to provide the setting display monitor 650 separately.
Instead of providing the setting switch 670 for changing the setting of the gaming machine, the RWM clear switch 680 may be substituted.

Although the details will be described later, the operation of changing and confirming the settings of the gaming machine using the performance display monitor 600 will be described.
When the door of the game machine 1 is opened (the glass frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2), the setting key switch 660 is turned on, and the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch 680 is pressed, the performance display monitor 600 displays the current The settings are displayed and can be changed.
The setting is, for example, in six stages from "1" to "6", and each time the RWM clear switch 680 is operated, the setting value is added and displayed on the performance display monitor 600. After "6", " 1”.
After selecting the setting, when the setting key switch 660 is turned off, the setting displayed on the performance display monitor 600 is confirmed, and the performance display monitor 600 displays the set value and dots.

The setting display switches to the performance display every time a certain period of time elapses, and a game becomes possible. Also, the RWM of the main control board is cleared.
During the switching of the setting, notification is given by an effect display and an effect sound.
When the door of the game machine 1 is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on, the performance display monitor 600 displays the current settings and dots, enabling confirmation of the settings. Become.
During confirmation of the setting, notification is given by a presentation display and a sound effect.

Next, the effect button 8z is incorporated in the central portion of the plate unit 7z.
The production button 8z is configured to be able to advance and retreat through a normal operating position (not shown), a depressed position retracted below the normal operating position, and a protruding operating position protruding upward from the normal operating position. . Also, the effect button 8z is configured to be able to be pressed from any position including the normal operation position and the projecting operation position to the pressing position.
In this specification, the detailed structure of the effect button 8z is disclosed, for example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-116168, so the description thereof is omitted.

<Configuration of the back of the game board>
Next, the configuration of the back side of the game board will be described.
FIG. 197 is a rear view showing a state where each unit is assembled to the base frame 130z, and FIG. 198 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG.
As shown in FIGS. 195, 197, 198, etc., a base frame (liquid crystal base frame) 130 having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is assembled to the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 10z. An image display unit (image display device 31z and image display cover 165) 160 is assembled to the rear side (rear side) of the frame 130z so as to close the opening. A lamp relay board 166 is assembled to the back surface (rear surface) of the image display cover (liquid crystal cover) 165, and a main control board is accommodated in the lower part of the back surface of the image display cover 165 below the lamp relay board 166. A case (board case) 200 is attached.
The base frame (liquid crystal base) 130z is a substantially rectangular annular body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and its annular front surface 131 is attached and fixed to the back surface of the game board 10z. A space for arranging various circuit boards and parts is provided on the back surface of the base frame 130z.
An effect control board 55z is arranged on the back side of the image display unit (liquid crystal unit) 160 fixed to the back of the base frame 130z. The image display unit 160 slides from the side (horizontal direction), vertical direction, or oblique direction of the base frame 130z into the gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the performance control board. It is designed so that it can be worn freely.
Various circuit boards arranged on the back surface of the base frame 130z are covered with a lid member 170 (FIGS. 197 and 198).

As shown in FIG. 197, at least the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 provided on the main control board 50z are exposed on the rear side of the board case 200z.
Also, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 provided on the main control board 50z can be visually recognized through the transparent board case 200z.
The staff of the amusement arcade or the like opens the door of the gaming machine, operates the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 while viewing the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 on the back of the gaming machine, and clears the RWM. You can perform operations such as changing settings and checking game performance.

The RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50z is not directly exposed, and an operation member 685 that can be operated by amusement arcade staff or the like is provided through an opening provided in the board case 200z at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 680. Protruding. When the staff or the like presses the operating member 685 , the RWM clear switch 680 is pressed by the pressed operating member 685 . This causes the RWM clear switch 680 to be operated.

The setting key switch 660 is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end face of a tubular member protruding from the main control board 50z.
An end face of the setting key switch 660 having a keyhole is exposed from an opening provided in the substrate case 200z.
Amusement arcade staff or the like can operate the setting key switch 660 by inserting a key into the keyhole.

<Main control board>
Next, various operations executed by the main control board 50z, which is the main control board of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, will be described.
Figure 199 is an explanatory diagram of various random numbers acquired in the main control board 50z of the pachinko machine 1, (a) is a random number for special symbol determination, (b) is a random number for jackpot symbol determination, and (c) is a reach determination. Random numbers for use and (d) are diagrams showing an example of random numbers for auxiliary symbol determination, respectively.
In the main control board 50z, a special symbol is determined by the special symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(a) and the big hit symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(b). Further, the auxiliary symbol is determined by the auxiliary symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(d).

As for the special symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(a), one random value is obtained from random numbers from "0" to "60000", for example, when the starter wins.
As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment can change the probability of winning a big win (determined as a big win) by making settings using the setting key switch 660, the setting switch 670, and the like.
It should be noted that the pachinko machine 1 may not be equipped with the setting key switch 660, the setting switch 670, etc. described above, and the change setting of the probability of winning the jackpot may not be possible.
Even if the gaming machine is provided with the setting key switch 660 and the setting switch 670, the prepared setting may be only "1" and it may be practically impossible to change the probability of winning the jackpot.

The random number for special symbol determination when the setting can be changed will be explained.
When the setting is "1", in the low-probability game state (normal game state), the ratio of the jackpot is set to 1/300, and when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "100" to "299", the jackpot. is determined.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the ratio of big hits is set to 1/60, and when the acquired random number for special symbol determination is "100" to "1099", it is determined to be a big hit. In addition, in the special symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(a), a lottery for a small hit, which is a kind of loss, is also performed. Here, the ratio of the small winning is set to 1/300, and when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "2000" to "2199", it is determined as a small winning. In cases other than these cases, it is determined to be a failure.

When the setting is ``2'', in a low-probability game state (normal game state), the jackpot ratio is set to 1/295, and when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is ``100'' to ``302'', the jackpot is won. is determined.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the ratio of the big win is set to 1/59, and when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "100" to "1114", it is judged as a big win. A small winning ratio is set to 1/300, and a small winning is determined when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "2000" to "2199". In cases other than these cases, it is determined to be a failure.

When the setting is "3", in the low-probability game state (normal game state), the ratio of the jackpot is set to 1/290, and when the acquired random number for special symbol determination is "100" to "306", the jackpot is won. is determined.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the ratio of big hits is set to 1/58, and when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "100" to "1134", it is determined to be a big hit. Also, the ratio of small winning is set to 1/300, and when the acquired random number for special symbol determination is "2000" to "2199", it is determined as small winning. In cases other than these cases, it is determined to be a failure.

When the setting is "4", in the low-probability game state (normal game state), the ratio of the jackpot is set to 1/285, and when the acquired random number for special symbol determination is "100" to "309", the jackpot is won. is determined.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the ratio of big hits is set to 1/57, and when the acquired random number for special symbol determination is "100" to "1149", it is determined to be a big hit. Also, the ratio of small winning is set to 1/300, and when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is "2000" to "2199", it is determined as small winning.
In cases other than these cases, it is determined to be a failure.
In addition, in the description of FIG. 199, four setting values from "1" to "4" are exemplified, but the setting values may be six from "1" to "6".

Next, as the jackpot symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(b), one random value is obtained from 250 random numbers from "0" to "249". Then, based on the obtained random number for judging the jackpot pattern, one jackpot is determined from a plurality of types of jackpots.
In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of jackpots, a normal hit with short working hours, a short hit with normal working hours, a long hit with high probability of short working hours, a short hit with high probability of short working hours, and a short hit without high probability of short working hours are prepared.
It should be noted that the time-saving gaming state refers to a gaming state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting port 14z than in the normal gaming state. That is, when a predetermined condition to be described later is satisfied, the second starting opening opening/closing door 14bz of the second starting opening 14z is changed from a closed state in which game balls are difficult to win to an open state in which game balls are easy to win. It refers to a game state accompanied by opening support of the second starting opening/closing door 14bz that increases the probability of a game ball entering the starting opening 14z.

In the normal long winning with short working hours, the opening time of the first big winning hole 16z or the second big winning hole 17z is relatively long at the time of the big winning game, and a relatively large amount of balls can be expected to be put out, and after the big winning game is over, It is a jackpot that provides a time-saving game during the period until the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).
In the normal short win with short working hours, the opening time of the first big winning hole 16z or the second big winning hole 17z during the big win game is short, and the payout of balls cannot be expected. 100 times) It is a jackpot that provides a time-saving game during the period until it changes.

In the high-probability time-saving long win, the opening time of the first big winning hole 16z or the second big winning hole 17z is long at the time of the big win game, and the largest amount of balls can be expected to be put out, and the winning probability of the big win after the big win game is over. It is a jackpot that gives both a high probability game and a short-time game with increased .
The high-probability time-saving short win increases the winning probability of the big win after the end of the big win game, although the opening time of the first big winning hole 16z or the second big winning hole 17z in the big win game is short and the balls are not expected to be put out. It is a jackpot that gives both a high-probability game and a short-time game.
In the high-probability time-saving short winning, the opening time of the first big winning hole 16z or the second big winning hole 17z during the big winning game is short, and the payout of balls cannot be expected, but the winning probability of the big winning is increased after the big winning game is over. It is a jackpot that gives a high probability game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start hole 13z and when a game ball enters the second start hole 14z, some types of jackpots are selected. are configured to have different ratios.
For example, the rate at which the normal time-saving and long win is selected is the same at 35/250 both when the game ball wins in the first start port 13z and when the game ball wins in the second start port 14z. . Similarly, the rate at which the normal time-saving and short hit is selected is the same at 15/250 both when the game ball wins in the first start port 13z and when the game ball wins in the second start port 14z. .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 199(b), the random number value for judging the jackpot design obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 13z or the second starting hole 14z is "0" to "34". If so, the normal time reduction per hit is selected, and if it is "35" to "49", the normal time reduction per per is selected.

On the other hand, the ratio of selecting the high probability time saving long hit and the high probability time saving short hit is different when the game ball wins the first start port 13z and when the game ball wins the second start port 14z. , For example, the ratio of selecting the high probability time saving long hit is 25/250 when the game ball wins in the first start port 13z, and 175/250 when the game ball wins in the second start port 14z. be.
In addition, the ratio of selecting the short hit with high probability time saving is 75/250 when the game ball wins in the first start port 13z, and 25/250 when the game ball wins in the second start port 14z. be.
In addition, the rate at which the high-probability reduction in working hours is not selected is set to 100/250 only when the game ball wins the first start opening 13z.
Specifically, if the random number value for judging the jackpot pattern obtained when the game ball wins the first starting port 13z is "50" to "74", a long hit with a high probability of time reduction is selected, and "75" is selected. ”~“149”, a short hit with a high probability of time saving is selected, and if “150” to “249”, a short time hit without a high probability of time saving is selected.
On the other hand, if the random number value for judging the jackpot design obtained when the game ball wins the second starting hole is ``50'' to ``224'', a long hit with a high probability of shortening working hours is selected and ``225''. ~ If it is "249", a short hit with high probability time saving is selected.

In addition, the random number for reach determination shown in FIG. 199 (c) is obtained by acquiring one random number from 250 random numbers from "0" to "249" at the time of starting winning, and obtaining the random number for reach determination is "0" to "21", it is determined to be "reachable", and when the obtained random number for reach determination is "22" to "249", it is determined to be "no reach".

Also, as for the random number for auxiliary symbol determination shown in FIG. 199(d), one random value is obtained from 10 random numbers from "0" to "9" when passing through the gate.
Then, in the low-probability game state in which both the time-saving flag and the high-precision flag are OFF, or the high-probability no time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is OFF and the high-precision flag is ON, the random number for determining the auxiliary symbol acquired is "7". ” is determined as a hit only.
On the other hand, in the low-probability time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving flag is ON and the high-precision flag is OFF, or in the high-probability time-saving gaming state in which both the time-saving flag and the high-precision flag are ON, the random number value for determining the auxiliary symbol obtained is A hit is determined when the value is "0" to "9".

Next, main processing executed by the main control board 50z of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. The processing described below can be realized by executing a program stored in the main ROM 50bz by the main CPU 50az of the main control board 50z. A description of the random number update process is omitted.

[Main processing of the main control board]
Main processing of the main control board 50z will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing main processing in the main control board. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 80z to the main CPU 50az.
First, the main CPU 50az performs initial setting processing in step S1. Specifically, preparation processing for starting game control, setting change processing for changing set values based on the setting change operation, and initialization of a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 50cz based on the RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming setting values based on setting confirmation operation, etc. are performed. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S2, the main CPU 50az updates the random number for special symbol determination and the random number for reach determination, and in step S3, the initial random number for big hit determination, the initial random number for special symbol determination, the initial random number for hit determination, Update the initial random number value for normal symbol determination.
In step S4, the main CPU 50az outputs a voltage drop detection signal indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, the power supplied at 24 volts drops below 18 volts) from the power interruption detection circuit of the power supply board 80z. is input. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input (No in step S4), the process proceeds to step S2, and if the voltage drop detection signal has been input (No in step S4), the process proceeds to step S5. Move.

In step S5, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input continues for a predetermined period of time (Yes in step S5), it is assumed that a complete power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S6. The process proceeds to step S4 assuming that there is a possibility of an instantaneous power failure in which the voltage of the power supply drops only for a moment.
In step S6, the main CPU 50az sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interrupt, and in step S7, issues a power-off designation command for notifying the payout control board 60z that power-off processing has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 60z that has received the power cut-off designation command transmits the remaining payout ball number designation command indicating the remaining payout ball number of the game balls stored in the payout RAM 60cz.

In step S8, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not a command for designating the number of remaining payout balls has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining balls to be paid out has not been received (No in step S8), the process proceeds to step S9, and if the command for specifying the number of remaining balls to be paid out has been received (Yes in step S8), the process proceeds to step S10. transfer processing.
In step S9, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the standby time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout ball designation command has elapsed. If the waiting time has not passed (No in step S9), the process proceeds to step S8, and if the waiting time has passed (Yes in step S9), normal communication with the payout control board 60z is established. Assuming that it is not possible, the process proceeds to step S10.

In step S10, the main CPU 50az saves the number of payout balls in a payout counter set in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz. Specifically, when the remaining payout ball number designation command is received, the remaining payout ball number specified by the remaining payout ball number designation command is saved, and when the remaining payout ball number designation command is not received , save "0" as the number of remaining payout balls. The number of remaining payout balls saved here is referred to in payout control processing of timer interruption, which will be described later, and after the power supply is restored, a command for specifying the number of payout balls corresponding to the remaining number of payout balls is transmitted to the payout control board 60z. will be
The main CPU 50az clears the output port in step S11. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) is stopped.

In step S12, the main CPU 50az calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 50cz and saves it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 50cz. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine data abnormality in the RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.
In step S13, the main CPU 50az saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 50cz has been backed up (power is restored) in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz, and in step S14 prohibits RWM access. Wait until the power supply is completely cut off.
In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed. When the supply of the operating power is restarted after the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if the setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, and RWM clear operation are performed for some reason at the time of the momentary power failure, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process are not executed. The game machine does not operate unintendedly, and the reliability of the game machine can be ensured.

(Initial setting processing of the main control board)
Initial setting processing of the main control board 50z will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing initial setting processing of the main control board.
First, the main CPU 50az prohibits all interrupts in step S21, performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S22, and waits for activation of other boards in step S23. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 60z and the performance control board 55z to start up so that there is no missing command from the main control board 50z.

The main CPU 50az permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz in step S24, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 60z in step S25. As a result, the payout control unit (payout CPU 60az, payout ROM 60bz, payout RAM 60cz) performs processing for permitting the shooting of game balls by the shooting device (shooting solenoid 12az).
In step S26, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not a backup flag indicating power recovery is saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz. If the backup flag has been saved (Yes in step S26), it is assumed that the power is restored, and the process proceeds to step S27. If the backup flag has not been saved (No in step S26), the initial power Assuming that the input is input, the process proceeds to step S28.

The main CPU 50az calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 50cz in step S27, and determines whether or not there is a setting change operation in step S28. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 660, the RWM clear switch 680 and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation (Yes in step S28), the process proceeds to step S29 assuming that the setting change mode is entered, and if there is no setting change operation (No in step S28), the process proceeds to step S30. transfer processing.

The main CPU 50az performs setting change processing in step S29. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 680, the set value (the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the degree of advantage of the game, is changed (updated) to change (update) the game control state (the set value of the RWM area). area), or to transmit a setting change designation command indicating that the setting is being changed to the effect control board 55z, and the process proceeds to step S25. As a result, the effect control board 55z performs processing for executing setting change notification indicating that the setting value is being changed.
"Setting change notification" means displaying a setting changing screen for making the image display device recognize that the setting value is being changed, or displaying the frame lamp 101z or the board lamp 100z during the setting change. It is to light up all in a luminescent color (for example, white). It should be noted that a setting change notification sound ("setting is being changed") may be output from the voice output device 34 to indicate that the setting is being changed.

The main CPU 50az determines whether the checksum is normal in step S30. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz matches the checksum calculated in step S27. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal) (Yes in step S30), the process proceeds to step S31, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal) (No in step S30), the process proceeds to step S32.
If the backup flag is not saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S31, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not there is a setting changing flag indicating that the setting is being changed in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz. If there is no setting changing flag (No in step S31), the process proceeds to step S33 assuming that the previous power failure did not occur during the setting change process. (Yes), the process proceeds to step S32 assuming that the previous power-off occurred during the setting change process. The setting changing flag is saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz at the start of the setting change process, and cleared from the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz at the end of the setting change process.

The main CPU 50az performs unrecoverable error processing in step S32. Specifically, after displaying error information indicating a non-recoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting a non-recoverable error designation command indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 55z, timer allocation After clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 27z, and the power supply is turned off. Perform processing to wait until the supply is completely cut off. As a result, in the effect control board 55z, processing for executing non-recoverable error notification indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred is performed. "Unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is not performed (game control is not performed), and is not canceled unless setting change processing is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 80z is turned off and then turned on without changing the setting, the setting will not be canceled and the setting will not be canceled. The power switch has to be turned on with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is to display an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. , the frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error sound (" This is an unrecoverable error." + buzzer) is output until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 50az determines whether or not there is an RWM clear operation in step S33. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 680 and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation (Yes in step S33), the process proceeds to step S24 assuming that the mode is to be shifted to the RWM clear mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation (No in step S33), the process proceeds to step S36. transfer processing.
The main CPU 50az performs RWM clear processing in step S34. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 680, the game control state is initialized (initialization of areas other than the set value area of the RWM area), or RWM clear designation indicating that RWM clear is being prepared A process for transmitting a command to the effect control board 55z is performed, and the process proceeds to step S25. As a result, the effect control board 55z performs processing for executing RWM clear preparation notification indicating that RWM clear preparation is in progress.

The "RWM clear preparation notification" is to display a clear confirmation screen for making the image display device recognize that RWM clear will be performed by operating the RWM clear switch 680, or to confirm the RWM clear by the frame lamp 101z or the board lamp 100z. It is to light up all of them with a predetermined emission color (for example, white). It is also possible to output a confirmation sound ("RWM is cleared by operating the RWM clear switch") indicating that the RWM clear is being confirmed from the audio output device 34. FIG.
In step S35, the main CPU 50az transmits a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability short-time game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the effect control board 55z, and the process moves to step S31. As a result, in the effect control board 55z, processing for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying an initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "123") at the time of power-on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or displaying a frame The lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z are fully lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or a power-on notification sound from the audio output device 34 indicating that the RWM area has been initialized. ("RWM cleared" + buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 50az determines in step S36 whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 660 and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation (Yes in step S36), the process proceeds to step S37 assuming that the setting confirmation mode is entered, and if there is no setting confirmation operation (No in step S36), game control The process moves to step S38 to restore the state to the state before the power was turned off.

The main CPU 50az performs setting confirmation processing in step S37. Specifically, the setting value saved in the setting value area of the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz is displayed on the information display 113, and a setting confirmation designation command indicating that the setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control board 55z. and perform processing for As a result, in the effect control board 55z, processing for executing setting confirmation notification indicating that the setting value is being confirmed is performed.

"Setting confirmation notification" means displaying a setting confirmation screen for making the image display device recognize that the setting value is being confirmed, or displaying a predetermined setting confirmation screen for the frame lamp 101z or the board lamp 100z during setting confirmation. It is to light up all of them with a luminescent color (for example, white). It should be noted that a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting confirmation is in progress”) may be output from the voice output device 34 to indicate that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S38, the main CPU 50az clears (0 clears) the backup flag and checksum saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz, and sets the RWM area when power is restored. As a result, the state of progress (control state) of the game returns (restores) to the state before the power was cut off, so the game can be restarted from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S39, the main CPU 50az transmits to the effect control board 55z a power restoration designation command indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power failure occurred. As a result, in the effect control board 55z, the processing for executing the power supply recovery notification indicating that the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, is terminated and the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power interruption is performed. .

"Notification of power restoration" means that a power restoration screen (image) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) in order to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off. , the frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z are all lit in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the power supply indicating that the power supply has been restored (from a power failure) from the audio output device 34 It is to output a restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In step S40, the main CPU 50az transmits other commands (a special symbol storage specification command, a normal symbol storage specification command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 55z. As a result, the effect control board 55z can grasp the number of reserved special figures, and the processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device is performed.

The main CPU 50az activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S41, permits all interrupts in step S32, and terminates this initial setting process. .

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation, setting change, RWM clear, and setting confirmation cannot be easily performed. , cheating can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, since the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the number of conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to be performed, and to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, so that the game machine may perform unexpected operations, causing inconvenience to the game store and players. It becomes possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine by eliminating the need to place a call.
Also, if there is a setting change flag, that is, if the previous power failure occurred while the settings were being changed, even if the checksum is normal, unrecoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state in which the setting value not intended by the game parlor side is set, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine.

The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation include the ON state of the open detection switch 105z. good.
Also, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (that is, the power is restored) and that there is no setting change operation, and if it is determined that the checksum is abnormal in the subsequent step S40, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz is initialized (cleared to 0), the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area, and step S25 You may make it move a process to .

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are transmitted including information indicating the current game state. You may make it transmit the game state designation|designated command which shows.
Also, by not determining whether or not there is a setting change flag, even if the previous power failure occurred during setting change, the unrecoverable error process may not be performed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 202 is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az performs random number update processing (S61), starting gate SW processing (S62), gate detection SW processing (S63), special symbol processing (S64), customer waiting setting processing (S65), and auxiliary symbol processing as timer interrupt processing. Processing (S66), big winning opening processing (S67), second starting opening opening processing (S68), etc. are executed.

Next, various processes executed as the timer interrupt process will be described.
[Starting port SW processing]
FIG. 203 is a flow chart showing an example of the starting port SW process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In this case, in step S101, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the first starting port detection SW 13a of the first starting port 13z is ON. , in step S102, it is determined whether or not the number U1 of reserved starting points U1 of the first starting point detection SW 13a is less than "4".
Here, when it is determined that the pending number U1 is less than "4", "1" is added to the pending number U1 in step S103. After that, in step S104, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for jackpot symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, the variation pattern random number, etc. are acquired and stored in the main RAM 50cz.
In this embodiment, it is assumed that 180 variation pattern random numbers (0 to 179) are prepared.

Next, in step S105, the main CPU 50az increases the number of reservations displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 23 and sets the first number-of-reservations increase command. When the first reservation number increase command is set, the main CPU 50az transmits the first reservation number increase command to the effect control board 55z. If a negative result is obtained in step S102, that is, if it is determined that the number of reservations U1 is "4", which is the maximum number of possible reservations, the processing of steps S103 to S105 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S106.

Next, in step S106, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the second starting port detection SW 14a of the second starting port 14z is ON. , in step S107, it is determined whether or not the number U2 of reserved starting ports of the second starting port detection SW 14a is less than "4".
Here, when it is determined that the pending number U2 is less than "4", "1" is added to the pending number U2 in step S108. After that, in step S109, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for jackpot symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, the variation pattern random number, etc. are acquired and stored in the main RAM 50cz.

Next, in step S110, the main CPU 50az increases the number of reservations on the second special symbol reservation display 24 and sets a second number-of-reservations increase command. When the second reservation number increase command is set, the main CPU 50az transmits the second reservation number increase command to the effect control board 55z, and ends the start opening SW process. If a negative result is obtained in step S107, that is, if it is determined that the number of reservations U2 is "4", which is the maximum possible number of reservations, the starting point SW process is terminated.

[Gate detection SW processing]
FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of gate detection SW processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S121, the main CPU 50a determines whether the gate detection SW 15a of the gate 15z is ON or not. A determination is made as to whether or not G is less than "4".

If it is determined in step S122 that the number of gate passages G is less than "4", then in step S123, "1" is added to the number of gate passages G, and in subsequent step S124, a random number for auxiliary symbol determination is obtained. is stored in the main RAM 50cz, and the gate detection SW process is terminated.
If it is determined in step S121 that the gate detection SW 15a is not ON, or if a negative result is obtained in step S122, that is, if it is determined that the number of gate passages G is "4", which is the maximum holdable number, Terminate the gate detection SW process.

[Special symbol processing]
FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S131, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the special game flag is ON, that is, whether or not the big winning game or the small winning game is being played, and determines that the big winning game or the small winning game is not being played. In that case, in the following step S132, it is determined whether or not the special symbol of the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is fluctuating.
If it is determined in step S132 that the special symbols are not fluctuating, then in step S133 it is determined whether or not the pending number U2 of the second start opening detection SW 14a to be preferentially digested is greater than "1". If it is determined in step S133 that the pending number U2 is greater than "1", then "1" is subtracted from the pending number U2 in step S134.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S133 that the pending quantity U2 is not ≧1, that is, if the pending quantity U2 is "0", then in step S135, the pending quantity U1 of the first starting port detection SW 13a is "1". , and if it is determined in step S135 that the number of reservations U1 is greater than "1", the number of reservations U1 is subtracted by "1" in subsequent step S136.

Next, in step S137, the main CPU 50az turns off the customer waiting flag if it is ON, and then in step S138 executes special game determination processing (FIG. 207), which will be described later. After executing the special game determination process in step S138, in step S139, a fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 208), which will be described later, is executed. After executing the variation pattern selection process in step S139, in step S140, the symbol variation of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is started, and in subsequent step S141, the effect control board 55z Sets the variable start command to be sent to the
The variation start command includes a variation pattern command that indicates the variation time of the special pattern, a big hit or small win command that indicates the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, a jackpot pattern command that indicates the lottery result of the jackpot pattern, and a reach that indicates the lottery result of the reach lottery. Commands, game state commands related to the current game state, etc. are included.

Next, in step S142, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the variation time of the first or second special symbol has passed a predetermined variation time.
In step S142, when it is determined that the predetermined variation time has elapsed, in subsequent step S143, the variation of the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped to display a predetermined special symbol.
After that, in step S144, a fluctuation stop command is set, and in subsequent step S145, the processing during stop (FIG. 210), which will be described later, is executed to end the special symbol processing.

If it is determined in step S131 that the special game flag is ON, or if it is determined in step S142 that the special symbol variation time has not reached the predetermined variation time, the special symbol processing is terminated.
Further, when it is determined in step S132 that the special symbol is in the process of being changed, the process proceeds to step S142, and it is determined whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has passed a predetermined variation time.
If it is determined in step S135 that the pending number U1 is not ≧1, that is, if it is determined that there is no pending pending number U1 or U2, then in step S146 the customer waiting setting process shown in FIG. 206 is executed. End the special symbol processing.

[Customer waiting setting process]
FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing an example of customer waiting setting processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S151, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, and when determining that the customer waiting flag is ON, ends the customer waiting setting process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S151 that the customer waiting flag is not ON, a customer waiting command is set in step S152, and the customer waiting flag is turned ON in step S153, and then the customer waiting setting process is terminated.
It should be noted that the customer waiting flag is turned ON from OFF when a state in which no special symbols are reserved continues for a predetermined period of time without the jackpot state.

[Special game determination process]
FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing an example of special game determination processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S161, the main CPU 50az determines the special symbol determination random number value stored in the main RAM 50cz, and in subsequent step S162, determines whether or not the jackpot has been won.
In step S162, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, in the following step S163, the random number value for jackpot symbol determination stored in the main RAM 50c is determined, and in step S164, based on the determination result, the first special The jackpot symbol to be displayed on the symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is set, and the special game determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S162 that the jackpot has not been won, then in step S165 it is determined whether or not the small win has been won based on the special symbol determination random number value.
In step S165, when it is determined that a small hit has been won, in subsequent step S166, a small hit symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is set, and special game determination processing is performed. exit.
Also, in step S165, when it is determined that the small hit is not won, in step S167, a special game determination process is performed by setting a losing symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21. exit.

[Variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing an example of variation pattern selection processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
First, in step S171, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving game state is ON. In step S171, when it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, in subsequent step S172, the time saving game state table is set as the variation pattern table, and the process proceeds to step S174.

On the other hand, in step S171, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON, in step S173, a non-time saving gaming state table is set as the variation pattern table, and the process proceeds to step S174.
Next, in step S174, the main CPU 50az determines the previously acquired variation pattern random number value, and in subsequent step S175, based on the set variation pattern table and the variation pattern random number value, sets the variation pattern. to end the variation pattern selection process.

FIG. 209 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table, (a) showing an example of a non-time-saving game state variation pattern table, and (b) showing an example of a time-saving gaming state variation pattern table.

First, the non-time-saving gaming state variation pattern table shown in FIG. 209(a) will be described.
In the variation pattern table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 209(a), the special symbol determination result is a big hit, and when the variation pattern random number value is "0 to 89", the variation pattern has a long variation time of 90 seconds. 1 is selected. When the variation pattern 1 is selected, a winning performance with a reach A is performed.

Further, when the special symbol determination result is a big hit and the variation pattern random number value is "90 to 179", variation pattern 2 with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 2 is selected, a winning performance with a reach B is performed.
Further, when the special symbol determination result is a small hit, regardless of the selected variation pattern random number "0 to 179", the variation pattern 3 with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 3 is selected, a chance performance is performed.

Next, the case where the special symbol determination result is a loss and the game state is a non-time-saving game state will be described.
When the random number for special symbol determination is a loss, a variation pattern is determined based on the number of held balls of the first special symbol, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation pattern, and the like.
Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 2" and the reach determination random value is "22 to 249" without reach, the selected variation pattern Variation pattern 4 with a variation time of 12 seconds is selected regardless of the random value "0 to 179". When the variation pattern 4 is selected, an effect of the normal variation A is performed.

On the other hand, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 2", the reach determination random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 29". In the case of , select the variation pattern 5 in which the variation time is 90 seconds. When the variation pattern 5 is selected, a losing performance accompanied by reach A is performed.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 2", the reach determination random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "30 to 179". In the case of , select the variation pattern 6 in which the variation time is 30 seconds. When the variation pattern 6 is selected, a losing performance accompanied by reach B is performed.

Next, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "3" and the reach determination random number is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, the selected variation pattern random number "0 to 179”, the variation pattern 7 with a variation time of 8 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 7 is selected, an effect of the normal variation B is performed.
Also, if the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "3", the reach determination random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 29" , select the variation pattern 5 in which the variation time is 90 seconds.
Also, if the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "3", the reach determination random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "30 to 179" , select the variation pattern 6 whose variation time is 30 seconds.

Also, if the total number of pending balls of the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8" and the reach determination random number is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, the selected variation pattern random number " 0 to 179”, the variation pattern 8 with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 8 is selected, an effect of shortened variation A is performed.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8", the reach judgment random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 29". In the case of , variation pattern 5 is selected in which the above-described variation time is 90 seconds.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8", the reach determination random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "30 to 179". In the case of , variation pattern 6 is selected in which the above-described variation time is 30 seconds.

Next, the variation pattern table for time saving game state shown in FIG. 209(b) will be described. It should be noted that the variation pattern table for the time saving game state shown in FIG. 209(b) is the same as the variation pattern table for the non-time saving game state shown in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted, and only the case where the special symbol determination random number value is lost and the game state is the time-saving game state will be described here.
When the random number for special symbol determination is a loss, a variation pattern is determined based on the number of held balls of the second special symbol, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation pattern, and the like.
Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 5" and the reach determination random value is "22 to 249" without reach, the selected variation pattern Variation pattern 4 with a variation time of 12 seconds is selected regardless of the random value "0 to 179". When the variation pattern 4 is selected, the production of the normal variation A is performed.

On the other hand, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 5", the reach judgment random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 29". In the case of , select the variation pattern 5 in which the variation time is 90 seconds. When the variation pattern 5 is selected, a losing effect accompanied by reach A is performed.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 5", the reach determination random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "30 to 179". In the case of , select the variation pattern 6 in which the variation time is 30 seconds. When the variation pattern 6 is selected, a losing performance accompanied by reach B is performed.

On the other hand, if the total number of pending balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8" and the reach determination random number is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, the selected variation pattern random number " 0 to 179”, the variation pattern 9 with a variation time of 2 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 9 is selected, an effect of shortening variation B is performed.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8", the reach determination random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 29". , the variation pattern 5 is selected.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8", the reach judgment random number is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number is "30 to 179". , the variation pattern 6 is selected.
In this embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the variation pattern is determined based on the special symbol determination random number value and the variation pattern random number value, but this is only an example, and the special symbol determination random value value is determined. , and the random number for judging the jackpot design, or the random number for judging the special design, the random number for judging the jackpot design, and the random number for judging the jackpot pattern may be used to decide the fluctuation pattern.

[Stopped process]
FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing an example of stop processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S181, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, in subsequent step S182, the remaining time saving game stored in the main RAM 50cz is displayed. "1" is subtracted from the number of games J.

Next, in step S183, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the number of remaining games J is "0". Since it means that it has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the time saving flag is turned off in subsequent step S184.
If it is determined in step S181 that the time saving flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S183 that the number of remaining games J is not "0", the process proceeds to step S185.

Next, in the subsequent step S185, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the high-precision flag is ON. When it is determined that the high-precision flag is ON, in the subsequent step S186, the main RAM 50cz stores "1" is subtracted from the number of remaining games X of the high-probability games that are on.
Next, in step S187, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the number of remaining games X is "0". has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10000 times), the high accuracy flag is turned off in the subsequent step S188.
If it is determined in step S185 that the high accuracy flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S187 that the number of remaining games X is not "0", the process proceeds to step S189.

Next, in step S189, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the special symbol set in the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is a big win. Next, in step S190, it is determined whether or not the set special symbol is a "small hit". Here, when it is determined to be a small hit, in step S191, the small hit game flag is turned ON. Thereafter, in step S192, the opening of the jackpot is started, and in step S193, a jackpot opening command is set, and the stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S190, when it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process during fluctuation stop is terminated without turning ON the small hit game flag.
Also, in step S189, if it is determined to be a jackpot, then in step S194, it is determined whether the jackpot is a long hit, and if it is determined to be a long hit, in step S195, a long The winning game flag (special game flag) is turned ON, otherwise in step S196, the short winning game flag (special game flag) is turned ON. After that, in step S197, the number of remaining games J of the time saving game and the remaining number of times X of the high probability game are set to "0" respectively, and after resetting the number of remaining games J/X, in step S198, the time saving flag is set. and the high accuracy flag are turned off, and the process proceeds to step S192.

[Auxiliary pattern processing]
FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing an example of auxiliary symbol processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in step S201, and when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is ON, ends the auxiliary symbol processing.
On the other hand, in step S201, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not ON, in step S202, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary symbol is fluctuating. When it is determined in step S202 that the auxiliary symbol is not changing, in step S203, it is determined whether or not the number of gate passages G storing the number of times the game ball passes through the gate detection SW 15a is greater than "1". If the number of gate passages G is greater than "1", the gate passage number G is decremented by "1" in subsequent step S204. In the case of , the auxiliary symbol processing is terminated.

Next, in step S205, the main CPU 50az determines the auxiliary symbol determination random number value, in subsequent step S206, sets the stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the auxiliary symbol display device 22, and in step S207, sets the variation time. do.
Here, it is conceivable to set the variation time of the auxiliary symbol to 4.0 seconds, for example, if the time saving flag is OFF, and to set it, for example, to 1.5 seconds if the time saving flag is ON.
Next, in step S209, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the variation time of the auxiliary symbol has passed for a predetermined time. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S209 that the auxiliary symbol variation time has not passed the predetermined time, the auxiliary symbol processing is terminated.

Next, in step S211, the main CPU 50a determines whether or not the auxiliary symbol is a winning symbol. If the auxiliary symbol is a winning symbol, in step S212, the auxiliary game flag is turned on, and the auxiliary symbol is turned on. End the process.
In step S211, when it is determined that the stop symbol is not a winning symbol, the auxiliary symbol process is terminated without turning on the auxiliary game flag.
Further, when it is determined in step S202 that the auxiliary pattern is changing, the process proceeds to step S209, and it is determined whether or not the variation time of the auxiliary pattern has passed a predetermined variation time.

[Grand Prize Opening Process]
FIG. 212 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az determines whether or not the small winning game flag or the special game flag is ON in step S221, and when it is determined that the small winning game flag or the special game flag is ON, in step S222, It is determined whether or not the opening is in progress. If it is determined in step S222 that the opening of the jackpot is in progress, then in step S223 it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S223 that the opening time has elapsed, in step S224, the value of the number of rounds R is set to "0" and the number of rounds (R number)/operation pattern is set.

FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a setting example of the number of rounds/operation pattern. For example, if the special game is a normal time-saving per game, the number of rounds (number of R) is 4R, and the operation pattern in 1R is 29. .Set to open for 5 seconds x 1 time. In addition, when the jackpot is a short win with normal working hours, the number of rounds (number of R) is set to 2R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 0.1 seconds open×1 time. Furthermore, if the jackpot is a long hit with a high probability of time saving, set the number of rounds (R number) to 16R, the operating pattern in 1R to 29.5 seconds open x 1 time, and the jackpot is a short hit with a high probability of time saving. And if it is a high probability time saving no short hit, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 2R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 0.1 second open × 1 time.
In the case of a small hit, for example, the number of rounds (number of R) is set to 1R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 0.1 seconds open×2 times.

Next, in step S225, the main CPU 50az sets the number counter C indicating the number of prizes won per round to the first big prize mouth 16 or the second big prize mouth 17z to "0", and in the following step S226, , add "1" to the value of the number of rounds R. Then, in the subsequent step S227, the operation of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is started. In other words, either the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is changed from the closed state to the open state.

Next, in step S228, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the operating time of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z has passed the predetermined time. If it is determined that there is not, in the subsequent step S229, it is determined whether or not the value of the number counter C has reached the specified number.
When it is determined in step S229 that the value of the number counter C is the specified number C, in step S230, the operation of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is ended. In other words, the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z in the open state is closed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the number counter C has not reached the specified number, the big winning opening process is terminated.
Further, in step S228, when the operating time of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z has passed the predetermined operating time, the process of step S229 is skipped, and the number of the number counter C is counted. Without checking, in step S230, the operation of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z ends.

Next, in step S231, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the number of rounds for the big win is the maximum number of rounds R. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot round is the final round.
When it is determined in step S231 that the jackpot round is the final round, the ending is started in step S232, and an ending command is set in step S233.

Next, the main CPU 50az sets the value of the number of rounds R to "0" in step S234. Thereafter, in step S235, it is determined whether or not the ending time has passed, and if it is determined that the ending time has passed, then in the subsequent step S236, a game state setting process, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step S237, the special game flag is turned OFF, and the big winning opening process ends.
If it is determined in step S222 that the jackpot opening is not in progress, it is determined in step S238 whether or not the ending is in progress. When it is determined that it is not, in step S239, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening is in operation.

When it is determined in step S239 that the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is in operation, the process moves to step S228, and the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is in operation. If it is determined that it is not, the process moves to step S225.
If it is determined in step S221 that the opening time has not passed, the big winning opening process is terminated. Similarly, in step S229, if it is determined that the value of the number counter C has not reached the specified number, or if it is determined that the jackpot round is not the final round in step S231, or if the ending time has passed in step S235 Also when it is determined that there is not, the big winning opening process is terminated.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 214 is a flow chart showing an example of game state setting processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
First, in step S241, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not it is a small win, and when it is determined that it is a small win, ends the game state setting process.
On the other hand, in step S241, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, then in step S242, it is determined whether or not it is a normal hit (long hit with normal time reduction or short hit with normal time reduction), and it is a normal hit If so, in step S243, the time saving flag is turned ON, and in step S244, the remaining number of games J of the time saving game is set to, for example, "100", and the game state setting process ends.

Further, when it is determined in step S242 that it is not a normal win, since it is a jackpot that gives a high probability game, in step S245, the high probability flag is turned ON, and in step S246, the number of remaining games of the high probability game. Set X to, for example, "10000".

Next, in step S247, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the hit is a time-saving hit, and if it is determined that it is a time-saving hit, in step S248, the time-saving flag is turned ON, and step S248 is performed. In S249, the number of remaining games J of the time-saving game is set to, for example, "10000", and the game state setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S247 that there is no time-saving hit, the time-saving flag is turned OFF in step S250, and the number of remaining games J of the time-saving game is reset in step S251, thereby ending the game state setting process. .

[Second start port opening process]
FIG. 215 is a flow chart showing an example of the second starting port opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in step S261, and if it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is ON, then in step S262, the second start opening/closing door 14bz is opened. A determination is made as to whether or not it is in operation. In step S262, if the second starting opening/closing door 14bz is not in operation (opening), in step S263, the operation pattern of the second starting opening/closing door 14bz is set according to the game state, and in step S264, the 2 Start the operation of the opening/closing door 14bz.
Here, the operation pattern (time) of the second starting opening opening/closing door 14bz to be set is, for example, if the time saving flag is OFF, 0.15 seconds open × 1 time, and if the time saving flag is ON, 1.80 seconds It is conceivable to set it to open x 3 times.

Next, in step S265, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the operating time of the second starting opening/closing door 14bz has passed a predetermined time. At S266, the auxiliary game flag is turned OFF, and the second starting opening opening process is terminated.
If it is determined in step S262 that the second opening/closing door 14bz is in operation, the process proceeds to step S265.
Also, in step S261, when it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not ON, or in step S265, when it is determined that the operation time of the second starting port 14z has not elapsed, the second starting port opening process is terminated. .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 are stopped, the first starting port 13z When the game ball enters the ball, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for jackpot symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, etc. are acquired by lottery, and the first special symbol display device 20z. To variably display a special pattern. Then, when it is determined that the obtained random number for special symbol determination wins the special game, the first special symbol of the first special symbol display device 20z is stopped at a specific symbol. After that, any one of the above-described long win, short win, or small win special game is executed.

During the long winning game, a game ball can be shot by shooting a game ball aiming at the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z which is in the open state.
On the other hand, during the short winning game, since the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short, even if the game ball is shot aiming at the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z, most of the balls can be obtained. It is not possible.

Similarly, for example, when the game ball enters the second starting port 14z while the fluctuation of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped, this entry Random numbers for special symbol determination, random numbers for jackpot symbol determination, random numbers for ready-to-win determination, etc. are acquired by lottery with the ball as a trigger, and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 is variably displayed.
Then, when it is determined that the obtained random number for special symbol determination wins the special game, the second special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped at a specific symbol. After that, the above-described special game of either the big win (long win or short win) or the small win is executed. During a long winning game, a ball can be obtained by shooting a game ball aiming at the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z which is in an open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, similarly to the above, during the short-hit game, the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short, so even if the game ball is shot aiming at the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z, most of the balls are won. I can't do it.

After the jackpot game is over, based on the lottery result of the random number value for jackpot pattern determination, as a bonus game, a normal time-saving game with opening support for the second start opening/closing door 14bz is performed for a predetermined period of time. A high probability time-saving game that performs a high probability game with a high probability of winning for a predetermined period (so-called probability variable game), or a high probability time-saving game that performs only a high probability game for a predetermined period (so-called latent probability variable game) It shifts to a game state.
The high-probability game is continued until the number of fluctuations of the special symbols reaches a preset number of times (for example, 10000 times) or until a big hit is won again.

On the other hand, the time-saving game continues until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a preset number (for example, 100 times for a normal time-saving game, 10000 times for a high-probability time-saving game), or until the jackpot is won again. is done.
During the time saving game, the variation time from the start of variation of the special symbols to the stop of variation is set shorter than during the normal game, and the winning probability of the auxiliary symbols is set higher than during the normal game.
Furthermore, the opening time of the second start opening/closing door 14bz at the time of winning the auxiliary symbol is set longer than during the normal game.
Therefore, during the time-saving game, the winning rate of the game ball to the second starting port 14z is higher than during the normal game, so the player shoots the game ball aiming at the second starting port 14z during the normal game. It is possible to greatly improve the game efficiency compared to this.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start hole 14z, the ratio of winning a jackpot more advantageous to the player than when a game ball enters the first start hole 13z. Since the value is higher, it is easier for the player to win a big win during the time-saving game than during the normal game.

Next, processing executed by the effect control board 55z will be described.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Figure 216 is the flowchart which shows one example of timer interrupt processing which CPU of production control baseplate executes. In addition, the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 216 can be realized by executing a program stored in the sub ROM 55bz by the sub CPU 55az of the effect control board 55z.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az of the effect control board 55z executes command reception processing (step S310), effect button processing (step S320), command transmission processing (step S330), etc. as timer interrupt processing.

Next, an example of main processing which sub CPU55az of production control board 55z performs as timer interruption processing is explained. In addition, the processing described below can also be realized by executing the program stored in the sub ROM 55bz by the sub CPU 55az of the effect control board 55z.

[Command reception processing]
Figure 217 is the flowchart which shows one example of command reception processing which CPU of production control baseplate executes.
The sub CPU 55az determines whether or not a pending number increase command is received in step S401, and when determining that a pending number increasing command is received, executes a pending number increase command reception process in step S402.
Next, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not a variation start command has been received in step S403, and when determining that the variation start command has been received, in subsequent step S404, performs effect selection processing.
The effect selection process of step S404 is a process of selecting the effect to be performed during the variation of the special symbols.
If it is determined in step S403 that the variation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S405 without executing the effect selection process.

Next, in step S405, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not a variation stop command has been received. If it is determined that a variation stop command has been received, in subsequent step S406, the sub CPU 55az executes processing during termination of the variation effect. .
As the processing during the end of the variable production, there are analysis of the variable stop command, various processing such as change of the mode flag based on the analysis result, and processing of setting the end command of the variable production.
In addition, in step S405, when it determines with not having received the fluctuation|variation stop command, it progresses to step S407, without performing a process during the completion of fluctuation production|presentation.

Next, in step S407, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not an opening command has been received. If it is determined that an opening command has been received, then in subsequent step S408 a special game effect selection process is executed.
The special game effect selection processing includes analysis of an opening command, special game effect pattern selection processing, processing for setting an opening effect start command, and the like.
If it is determined in step S407 that the opening command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S409 without executing the special game effect selection process.

Next, in step S409, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not an ending command for executing the ending effect selection process has been received. Execute the process.
The ending effect selection processing includes processing for analyzing an ending command, selecting an ending effect pattern, and setting an ending effect start command.
If it is determined in step S409 that the ending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S411 without executing the ending effect selection process.
Next, in step S411, the sub CPU 55az executes a customer waiting command reception process and terminates the command reception process.

[Production selection process]
Figure 218 is the flowchart which shows one example of the production selection processing which CPU of the production control baseplate executes.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az first analyzes the variation start command in step S421, and subtracts the number of pending balls stored in the sub RAM 55cz in subsequent step S422.
Next, in step S423, a variation performance pattern is selected based on the analysis result of the variation start command, and in subsequent step S424, the variation performance start command is set, and the performance selection process is terminated.

[Processing during end of fluctuation effect]
Figure 219 is the flowchart which shows one example of the processing during the end of fluctuation production which CPU of production control baseplate executes.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az analyzes the fluctuation stop command in step S431, performs various processes such as changing the mode flag based on the analysis result, and then sets the fluctuation effect end command in the next step S432. Then, the processing during the end of the variation performance is terminated.

[Opening effect selection process]
FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing an example of a winning effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az analyzes the opening command in step S441, and performs winning effect pattern selection processing in the following step S442. After that, in step S443, an opening effect start command is set, and the opening effect selection processing ends.

[Ending effect selection process]
FIG. 221 is a flow chart showing an example of the ending effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az analyzes the ending command in step S451, and selects an ending effect pattern in subsequent step S452. Thereafter, in step S453, an ending effect start command is set, and the ending effect selection process is terminated.

<Main board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the main substrate protection case 200z according to this embodiment will be described.
In addition, in this embodiment, the main board protection case 200z, the payout board protection case 400, and the performance board protection case 700 are common to the game board 10z side with respect to the board case in the forward direction, and the side opposite to the game board 10z. The direction is explained as the back side.
Therefore, the left-right direction in the drawing is the left-right direction when each board case is viewed from the side opposite to the game board 10z.

222A and 222B are diagrams illustrating a main board protection case according to an example of the present embodiment, in which (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view. FIG. 223 is an exploded perspective view of the main board protection case including the pedestal. FIG. 224 is a side view showing how the main board protection case is attached to the base.
225 is a view for explaining the state in which the main board protection case of FIG. 222 is removed from the base, (a) being a perspective view, (b) a side view, and (c) a front view. 226 is a rear perspective view of the main board protective case of FIG. 225; FIG.
A main circuit board protection case (hereinafter simply referred to as a main circuit board case) 200 of the present embodiment accommodates a main control circuit board 50 on which electronic components such as a ROM are mounted. 222 through 224).

The main board case 200z is composed of two transparent resin case pieces (a lower case piece 210 and an upper case piece 220) that are housed inside while sandwiching the main control board (printed circuit board) 50 on which the ROM is mounted. ), a cutting member (hereinafter referred to as a cutting member) 230 for cutting the unsealing prohibition seal sandwiched and held between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and an unsealing prohibition seal 250, which will be described later, are bonded together. and a cap 240 detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 of the substrate case 200z.
The main control board 50 of this embodiment employs a single-sided mounting method in which electronic components are arranged only on one side.
By mounting important electronic parts (particularly ROM) only on one side and facing the mounting side to the side visible from the outside (rear side), it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts such as replacement of electronic parts.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a substrate case main body (sealing body 300).
Although the two case pieces forming the main board case 200z are described as a lower case piece and an upper case piece, the positional relationship between the case pieces is different from the vertical direction shown in the drawing.
For the sake of convenience, the case piece on the far side from the inspector's viewpoint is referred to as the lower case piece, and the case piece on the front side is referred to as the upper case piece. The lower case piece is the front case piece.
A protective cover 229 is arranged below the upper case piece 220 to cover the connecting portion between the internal connector provided on the internal main control board 50 and the external connector.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 with the main control board 50 interposed therebetween by a crimping member.

A crimping fastening portion 290 using a crimping member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the main substrate case 200z, and a crimping member (locking member) is inserted into a fastening hole 291 (sealing portion) provided in the crimping fastening portion 290 ), the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are locked in the closed state. The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 can be opened and closed and can be attached and detached by removing (breaking) the caulking member driven (locked) into the fastening hole 291 .
The crimping fastening portion 290 of the main substrate case 200z of the present embodiment is provided with two crimping fastening holes (crimping fastening holes 291A and 291B).
Each caulking fastening hole is configured by connecting a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220 .

As will be described later, in a state in which the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are engaged with each other using the hooking groove and the hooking piece, a crimping member is driven into one of the crimping fastening holes 291, whereby the lower case is assembled. It becomes impossible to slide the piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 to release the engagement between them.
Therefore, it is impossible to access the main control board 50 housed inside the main board case.
Only one caulking fastening hole is used for fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 once. After removing (breaking) the crimping member and releasing the fastening (after opening the main board case 200z), when fastening is performed again, the fastening is performed by driving the crimping member into the other remaining crimping fastening hole. conduct. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to twice.
In the main board case 200z of this embodiment (for example, FIG. 225), for example, a crimping member is driven into the crimping fastening hole 291B on the lower side in the drawing.

The pedestal 280 is connecting means for attaching the main board case 200z to the game machine side holding portion (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 166) provided on the back side of the game machine main body.
The main board case 200z housing the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of the game board such as a pachinko game machine via the pedestal 280. Through the case piece 220, the electronic components mounted on the internal control board surface can be visually recognized.
Further, by rotating the main circuit board case 200z upward about the shaft portion 281 located on the upper part of the pedestal 280, the inside of the main circuit board case can be confirmed from the bottom surface of the transparent lower case piece 210. FIG.

The main board case assembly 200A in which the main board case 200z is attached to the pedestal 280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 222-224, the main board case assembly 200A includes a pedestal 280, a main board case 200z, and a protective cover 229. As shown in FIGS. The pedestal 280 is a component used to attach the main board case 200z to the rear side of the game board 10z (see FIG. 222).
As shown in FIG. 223, the pedestal 280 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the horizontal direction are longer than two sides along the vertical direction. , and a plate shape is provided in the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The axial direction of the shaft portion 281 coincides with the horizontal direction.
A pair of hook portions 249 that engage with the shaft portions 281 are provided on the main board case 200z. A pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of an upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U shape that protrudes toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 224, when attaching the main circuit board case 200z to the pedestal 280, the main circuit board case 200z is arranged so that the hook portion 249 protrudes toward the back side. As a result, the hooks 249 can be engaged with the shafts 281 , so the main board case 200 z is brought closer to the pedestal 280 to engage the hooks 249 with the shafts 281 .
Then, when the hook portion 249 is engaged with the shaft portion 281, the main substrate case 200z is rotated about the shaft portion 281 counterclockwise in a left side view (in the direction of the arrow of symbol C in FIG. 224), and the main substrate is rotated. The case 200z is overlaid on the pedestal 280. - 特許庁As shown in FIG. 222, at this time, the plate-like hook 282 provided on the upper side of the base 280 is hooked on the recess 3a provided on the upper side of the main board case 200z. Therefore, the main board case 200z is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook portion 249 and the shaft portion 281 and the engagement between the plate-like hook 282 and the main board case 200z.

As shown in Figures 222 and 223, the protective cover 229 is then attached to the main board case 200z. Protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of main board case 200z including hook portion 249 . Thus, the main board case assembly 200A is assembled and attached to the rear side of the game board 10z.
The main control board 50 and the main board case 200z will be described. As shown in FIG. 225, the main control board 50 for controlling games is accommodated in the main board case 200z. An integrated main ROM 502 is mounted on the main control board 50 . A plurality of electronic components 595 different from the integrated main ROM 502 are mounted on the main control board 50 . The plurality of electronic components 595 includes various electronic components such as ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, and coils. Also, as shown in FIG. 225(b), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, and 776 are mounted on the main control board 50. FIG. Note that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are shown in FIG. 225(b), and may be omitted in other figures.

The integrated main ROM 502 stores memory contents used for game control. The integrated main ROM 502 also stores memory contents that affect game results.
The integrated main ROM 502 is a one-chip microcomputer integrating the main CPU 50az, main ROM 50bz, and main RAM 50cz shown in FIG.
A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right on the lower portion of the main control board 50 . A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided in the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

A plurality of connectors 774 and 775 out of the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are called detection signal connectors 774 and 775 . The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided with a first start hole detection switch 13az, a second start hole detection switch 14az, a first big win hole detection switch 16az, and a second big win hole detection switch for detecting that a game ball has won a prize. Signals from at least some of 17az and general winning opening detection switch 18az (see FIG. 196) are input. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include the first starting hole detection switch 13az, the second starting hole detecting switch 14az, the first big winning hole detecting switch 16az, the second It is assumed that all the signals of the big winning opening detection switch 17az and the general winning opening detection switch 18az (see FIG. 196) are input. The detection signal connectors 774 , 775 are a different color than the other connectors 771 , 772 , 773 , 776 . In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774, 775 are fluorescent, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776 are different from fluorescent.

The integrated main ROM 502 has a plate-like main body 580 extending vertically and horizontally and a plurality of first signal pins 582 . A first signal pin 582 is a signal pin that transmits signals between the integrated main ROM 502 and the main control board 50 . The first signal pin 582 is arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Specifically, the first signal pin 582 extends above and below the body portion 580 of the integrated main ROM 502 and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Therefore, the first signal pin 582 is visible from the front through the main board case 200z.
A signal pin provided for each of the plurality of electronic components 595 is called a second signal pin 583 (see FIG. 223). The second signal pins 583 transmit signals between each of the electronic components 595 and the main control board 50 . A signal is not limited to a digital signal, and includes an analog signal. They are arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Specifically, the second signal pin 583 extends upward, downward, leftward, rightward, or forward from each electronic component and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Therefore, the second signal pin 583 is visible through the main board case 200z.
As shown in FIG. 223, the main board case 200z is a box-shaped case that accommodates the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner.

A detailed configuration of the main board case 200z and a table attached to the main board case and the included main control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 to 234. FIG.
196 and 197, the performance display monitor 600, the setting display monitor 650, the setting key switch 660, and the RWM clear switch 680 will be described with reference to FIG. 255 and subsequent figures, and will not be described here.
The main board case 200z encloses the main control board 50 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 (see FIG. 225(b)) mounted on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized. The main board case 200z is made of a light-transmitting member such as transparent plastic.
As described above, the lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form the enclosing part 581 for enclosing the main control board 50 . The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side, which is the integrated main ROM 502 side, in the main board case 200z. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side opposite to the integrated main ROM 502 side in the main substrate case 200z. Note that FIG. 225(b) shows only the integrated main ROM 502 among the electrical components provided on the main control board 50 contained in the transparent main board case 200z, and other electrical components are not shown. It is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 227(a), etc.).

As shown in FIG. 226, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 respectively include control board housing portions 211 and 221 for housing the main control board 50 (see FIG. 223) and a sealing base portion 310 (see FIG. 223) described later. 227). The control board housing portions 211 and 221 are provided with substantially rectangular plate portions 211a and 221a, respectively, and projecting from the peripheral edge portions of the plate portions 211a and 221a. It is formed in a shape having flange portions 211b and 221b surrounding the surface.
Further, as shown in FIG. 223, the left portion of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210 is provided with a cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the main control board 50 side. A hole portion 566 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 . A thread is formed inside the hole 566 . A hole portion 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565 in the main control board 50 .

The main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 . More specifically, behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210, the hole portion 567 of the main control board 50 is arranged. The shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 225) is inserted from the rear side of the main control board 50 into the hole portion 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 via the hole portion 567 . The thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread provided on the shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 225(b)). As a result, the main control board 50 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565 so that the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 . That is, the main control board 50 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

As shown in FIG. 226, of the flange portion 211b of the control board housing portion 211, the portion protruding from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a (hereinafter referred to as “male portion”) is are formed with three L-shaped hooking pieces 211c.
On the other hand, of the flange portion 221b of the control board housing portion 221, the portion projecting from the plate portion 221a along two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board housing portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. A hooking piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove portion 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 50 is screwed with screws 769 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the male portion of the flange portion 211b is inserted into the female portion of the flange portion 221b. Then, the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are slid to each other in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 226 along the horizontal direction. Then, the hooking piece 211c provided on the male portion is engaged with the hooking piece 221d, so that the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α. be
When combined in this manner, the control board housings 211 and 221 form a box-shaped inner envelope 581 that is internally shielded from the outside. The main control board 50 (see FIG. 223) is accommodated in the encapsulating portion 581 . Therefore, the possibility that the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the like are illegally replaced can be suppressed.

The main control board 50 is attached inside the control board housing portion 221 before the control board housing portions 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, an IC or the like mounted on the main control board 50 is attached so as to face the plate portion 221a of the control board housing portion 221. As shown in FIG. Since the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, even if the main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 200z, the electronic components mounted on the main control board 50, such as the integrated main ROM 502, will remain intact. This is so that it can be confirmed from the outside through the plate portion 221a whether or not it has been illegally replaced. As shown in FIG. 197, in this embodiment, when the main board case assembly 200A including the main board case 200z is attached to the game board 10z, the upper case piece 220 is passed from the back side of the game machine 1 into the main board case 200z. The electronic components mounted on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 226, sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right end portions of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, respectively. As shown in FIG. 227, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw-stopping piece 91 and a second screw-stopping piece 92 above the sealing portions 212 and 222, respectively.
When the control board storage sections 211 and 221 are slid and combined, the sealing base section 310 is formed by the sealing sections 212 and 222 at the longitudinal ends of the sealing body 300 that combines them.
As shown in FIG. 225 , when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base part 310 , the longitudinal ends of the sealing body 300 are provided with the first screw-stopping piece 91 and the second screw-fastening piece 91 . In addition to the piece 92, a third screwing piece 93 provided on the cap 240 overlaps to constitute a screwing portion 90z for screwing.

As shown in FIG. 226 , the sealing portions 212 and 222 protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board housing portions 211 and 221 . The sealing portions 212 and 222 are formed to have the same height in the horizontal direction and the same width in the vertical direction.
Long grooves 212a and 222a are formed in the respective sealing portions 212 and 222 along the horizontal direction. Two parallel grooves 222a are formed in the left-right direction in the sealing portion 222 at a predetermined interval, and one groove 212a is formed in the sealing portion 212 in the left-right direction.
As shown in FIG. 227, when the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined as described above, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are placed on the right side of the combined control board housing portions 211 and 221. A base portion 310 is formed.
In the sealing base portion 310, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are arranged parallel to each other at a constant interval, and an inserting/removing space 310a (see FIG. 227) is formed between the surfaces of the sealing portions 212 and 222 facing each other. be.

As shown in FIG. 226, the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is used as means for sealing the main board case 200z, and certifies that it is a genuine product issued by an organization or the like having authentication qualifications. .
The unsealable seal 250 is made of an easy-to-cut material, such as paper, with an adhesive surface on one side, and has a plurality of cuts. As will be described later, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark), and the like are printed on the unsealable seal 250 . The unsealing prohibition seal 250 is also printed with the words "unsealing prohibited".
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230a, a pair of knob portions 61z, and a cutting portion 64z. A base portion 230a serving as the base of the cutting member 230 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 64z is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 230a. The cutting portion 64z is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed into a blade shape. The gripping portions 61z are provided at both ends of the base portion 230a in the longitudinal direction, and are formed in a shape that is bent as a whole. A left end portion of the knob portion 61z is referred to as a free end portion 61az.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can be put on the sealing base portion 310 to cover the entire sealing base portion 310 and is detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 .
The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base portion 310 and a third screw-stopping piece 93 formed at one longitudinal end of the cap body 241 . A protrusion 82z is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end 61az of the knob 61z of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base 310. is provided. A groove portion 86z is formed on the inner side surface of the cap main body 241 .
The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a of the sealing base portion 310 (see FIG. 227). After that, the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is affixed. Furthermore, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 86z fits a portion of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a. Also, the projection 82z engages the free end 61az of the knob 61z of the cutting member 230. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 225, when the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base 310 as described above, the third screw-stopping piece 93 engages the first screw-stopping piece 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. It overlaps with the combination of the second screw-stopping piece 92 and constitutes a screw-stopping portion 90z for screwing. The lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240 are fixed to each other when the crimping member 94 is driven into the screwing portion 90z.
When unsealing the main substrate case 200z, the crimping member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310. As shown in FIG. The same applies when the main board case 200z is unsealed.
Cutting member 230 and cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base portion 310 at the same time. Then, the unsealable seal 250 is irreparably damaged by the cutting portion 64z or the like.

The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 223, identification marks 520 are attached to main control board 50, integrated main ROM 502, lower case piece 210, upper case piece 220, and cap 240. FIG.
The identification display 520 is a display containing information about the gaming machine 1 . In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 50 is referred to as identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is referred to as identification display 522. FIG. The identification mark 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is called identification mark 523 , and the identification mark 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is called identification mark 524 .
The identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is called an identification mark 525 .

As shown in FIG. 223, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper back surface of the main control board 50 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. Identification 522 is affixed to integrated main ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200z are information identification portions for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 227).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the cap 240 . A display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

Identifications 521 - 525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification 529 . In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". The same identification 529 among the identifications 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is, for example, a display corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, and the like. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name and "CD" represents the model name.
In the identification displays 521 to 525, the maker name itself is displayed such as "AA Company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. may Also, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed like "CR Aiu" in identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. Further, the identification indications 521 to 525 may display the model, such as the identification indications 1595 and 1596 in FIG. In this case, the same identification display among the identification displays 521 to 525 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA company".

In the following description, the surface of the upper case piece 220 that forms the inside of the main board case 200z is referred to as an inner surface 532. As shown in FIG. A surface of the upper case piece 220 that forms the outside of the main board case 200z is referred to as an outer surface 531 . As shown in FIGS. 222(c), 225(c), and 227, the outer surface 531 is provided with a position display portion 541. As shown in FIGS. The position display portion 541 is a portion that displays the position to which the identification display 523 is provided. The position display portion 541 is provided in a portion different from the portion overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 in the main substrate case 200z. More specifically, the position display portion 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided at the lower right portion of the upper case piece 220 . The integrated main ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display section 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display portion 541 is a concave portion recessed toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 225(b), a seal portion 542 made of a light-transmissive material is attached to the position display portion 541. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the seal portion 542 is assumed to be transparent as an example.
A printed portion 797 is printed on the seal body (base portion) of the seal portion 542 .
For all seals attached to all circuit board cases to be described later, printing (printing) is performed on the adhesive seal body (base part), or writable on the seal body (base part). They are common in that an underlayer is formed.
In this embodiment, as an example, the printing unit 797 is the identification display 523 .
Since the identification display 523 is printed on the seal portion 542 , the identification display 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 . The seal portion 542 is arranged across at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 in the main substrate case 200z. In other words, the seal portion 542 is arranged so as to overlap the plurality of electronic components 595 in the main substrate case 200z when viewed from the rear. Note that FIG. 225(b) shows a part of the plurality of electronic components 595, and actually other electronic components (see FIG. 223) also exist. The identification display 523 of the upper case piece 220 is displayed at such an angle that the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. In this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 . Incidentally, as in the case of the seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 234) in the modified example to be described later, when the main board case 200z is at a predetermined angle, the identification display 523 may overlap the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. . In this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 .

As described above, the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is formed. In this embodiment, a main board case 200z containing the main control board 50 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 222, 223, 225, and 227, the main circuit board case 200z is provided with a position display portion 541, which is a portion for displaying the position where the identification mark 523 is provided. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the main circuit board case 200 as compared with the case where the position display portion 541 is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, when the game machine 1 is manufactured, the manufacturer can easily grasp the position where the identification display 520 is provided, compared to the case where the position display section 541 is not provided. Therefore, for example, when the seal portion 542 is used and the identification mark 523 is given by the manufacturer, the possibility that the identification mark 523 is given at different positions among the plurality of game machines 1 can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the main circuit board case 200z as compared with the case where the position display portion 541 is not provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the position display portion 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the main board case 200z and is a concave portion for positioning the identification display 520 . Since the position display portion 541 which is a concave portion is provided, for example, compared to the case where the position display portion 541 is displayed by printing or the like on the plane of the main substrate case 200z, the inspector can easily determine the position of the position display portion 541. Easy to grasp.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 523 attached to the main board case 200z. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, the manufacturer can position the identification mark 520 along the concave position mark portion 541 . Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces the game machines 1, the identification display 520 can be attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1. FIG. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the position display portion 541 is provided at a portion different from the portion overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 in the main substrate case 200z. In this case, the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display unit 541 and the integrated main ROM 502 overlap can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can confirm both the identification display 523 and the integrated main ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it can be easily discovered that the integrated main ROM 502 has been replaced by fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the identification display 523 that is the information identification portion attached to the main board case 200z and the identification display 522 that is the information identification portion attached to the integrated main ROM 502 include at least the same identification display 529 . Further, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed at an angle such that the integrated main ROM 502 mounting location can be visually recognized. Further, in this embodiment, the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not hinder the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 . Since the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed at such an angle that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized, the inspector can easily identify the integrated main ROM 502 to which the same identification mark 529 is attached, By checking the main circuit board case 200z, it is possible to easily confirm that no fraudulent act has been carried out. Further, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM by fraud, it is possible to determine whether or not the integrated main ROM 502 and the identification mark 529 attached to the main substrate case 200z are the same. , the inspector can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

An identification display 523 that is an information identification portion attached to the main board case 200z, an identification display 522 that is an information identification portion attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and an information identification portion displayed on the main control board 50. The identification display 521 includes at least the same identification display 529 (character string "ABCD" in this embodiment). Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main board case 200 to which the same identification mark 529 is attached, and can easily confirm that no fraudulent act has been carried out. Moreover, even if at least one of the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 by fraud, the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main board case 200z By judging whether or not the identification marks 529 attached to the . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The main board case 200z encloses the main control board 50 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible. Since the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the connectors 771 to 776, for example. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent, they are easier for the inspector to visually recognize than when they are not fluorescent. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

A plurality of detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided. Therefore, it is easier for the inspector to check the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 than when there is only one detection signal connector. Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily determine whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
A first signal pin 582 included in the integrated main ROM 502 is arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the first signal pin 582 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Also, the second signal pins 583 included in the plurality of electronic components 595 are arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Since the second signal pin 583 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device other than the main control board 50 is connected to the second signal pin 583 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The main control board 50 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side with screws 769 (see FIG. 225(b)). For this reason, compared with the case where the main control board 50 is not fixed with screws, it is difficult to illegally replace the main control board 50 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
Further, the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 are slid and combined with each other. For this reason, even if a person who tries to cheat simply pulls apart the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 in order to separate the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 cannot be separated. Lower case piece 210 is difficult to separate. Therefore, it is difficult to illegally replace the main control board 50 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications are possible. In each modified example below, the same reference numerals are used to denote the configurations corresponding to the configurations of the above-described embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Although the position display portion 541 is a concave portion, it is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, the position display portion 541 may be a convex portion.

228 to 230 are diagrams showing modifications of the position display portion provided on the main board case.
FIG. 228 shows a cross section taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 225 in the upper case piece 220 of the board case according to the modification of the main board case 200z. As shown in FIG. 228, the position display portion 541 is a protrusion formed on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 and protrudes rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 .
Further, although the position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position display portion 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 .

FIG. 229 shows a cross section taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 225 in the upper case piece 220 of the board case according to the modification of the main board case 200z. As shown in FIG. 229, the position display portion 541 is a concave portion formed in the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 and concaved rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 through the transparent upper case piece 220 from the rear side of the main substrate case 200z.

FIG. 230 shows a cross section taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 225 in the upper case piece 220 of the board case according to the modification of the main board case 200z. As shown in FIG. 230, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 and protrudes forward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the board case through the transparent upper case piece 220 .
As described above, the position display portion 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the main circuit board case 200z and is a projection or recess for positioning the identification display 520 . Since the position display portion 541, which is a convex portion and a concave portion, is provided, for example, compared to the case where the position display portion 541 is displayed by printing or the like on the plane of the main substrate case 200z, the inspector can easily see the position of the identification display 520. is easy to grasp. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark 520 attached to the main board case 200z. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the manufacturer can position the identification mark 520 along the position mark portion 541, which is a projection or a recess. Therefore, when the manufacturer mass-produces the game machines 1, the identification display 520 can be attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1. FIG. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of game machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. - 特許庁Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, the plurality of members enclosing the main control board 50 may not include some of the upper case piece 220 , the lower case piece 210 and the cap 240 . Moreover, the plurality of members may further include members different from the upper case piece 220 , the lower case piece 210 and the cap 240 .

Further, although the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the plurality of members are provided with the identification marks 520, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members may have associated identification marks 520 attached thereto. For example, the identification mark 525 may not be attached to the cap 240 included in the plurality of members. Further, the lower case piece 210 included in the plurality of members may not have the identification mark 524 attached. Further, the identification mark 523 may not be attached to the upper case piece 220 included in the plurality of members. The inspector can check the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members, and can easily check whether or not fraud has been committed. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraudulent activity, whether the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members are related. By judging whether or not, the inspector can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has been carried out. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the identification mark 520 may be attached to at least two of the main control board 50 , the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 . In this case, the inspector checks the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210 to easily determine whether or not fraudulent activity has occurred. can be confirmed. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraud, the identification attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210 is By determining whether indication 520 is relevant, the inspector can easily confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Also, the identification mark 520 may be attached to at least the upper case piece 220 and the integrated main ROM 502 . In this case, the inspector can confirm at least the identification display 520 attached to the upper case piece 220 and the integrated main ROM 502, and can easily confirm whether or not fraud has been committed. For example, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM by fraudulent activity, it is possible to inspect by determining whether or not at least the upper case piece 220 and the identification mark 520 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 are related. A person can easily confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
Also, the identification marks 520 may be related to each other. For example, the identification indications 520 may all be the same identification indication (for example, all "ABCD01" etc.). Further, the identification indications 520 may be different indications, and the same identification indications 529 may not be included. The content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as it can be confirmed by the inspector. Also, the identification display 520 may not be a character string. For example, identifying indicia 520 may be various markings. Also, the manner in which the identification mark 520 is attached is not limited. For example, not only the identification mark 521 but all of the identification marks 521 to 525 may be printed and added to the seal portion. Also, the seal portion does not have to be transparent. Also, the identification marks 523 to 525 may all be stamped by a mold for manufacturing the main board case 200z.

In the present embodiment, the position display portion 541, which is a sticking position mark indicating the sticking position of the seal portion 542, can take the following forms.
That is, the position display portion 541 is a mark that surrounds the entire periphery of the seal portion 542 on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case to which the seal portion 542 is attached, and This is the mark on the L-shaped side.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 542 on the same plane as the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear protrusion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 542 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542 .

The position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542 on the back surface of the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 542 on the same plane as the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear concave portion provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 542 on the same surface as the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection and recess provided so as to surround a predetermined corner on the back surface of the seal portion 542 .
The position display portion 541 is a position mark provided to surround the seal portion 542 and is neither a protrusion nor a recess.

Further, the identification mark 520 may be formed inside the material of the main board case 200z.
231 and 232 are diagrams showing a modification in which an identification mark is formed on the main board case.
The modification will be described below with reference to FIGS. 231 and 232. FIG. In the main circuit board case shown in FIG. 231, the portion where the identification display 523 is displayed is called an identification display portion 1390. As shown in FIG. Also, a portion outside the identification display portion 1390 is referred to as an outer portion 1391 . As shown in FIG. 232, the identification display portion 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391 . Therefore, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is greater than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391 .
The identification display 523 is formed inside a member forming the identification display portion 1390 (the material of the upper case piece 220 in this embodiment). The identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of (four in this embodiment) layers 1381 , 1382 , 1383 , and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) in the identification display portion 1390 .
Character 1371 of “A” of identification display 523 is formed in hierarchy 1381 . The letter “B” 1372 is formed in hierarchy 1382 . The letter “C” 1373 is formed in hierarchy 1383 . The letter “D” 1374 is formed in hierarchy 1384 . A “0” character 1375 is formed in hierarchy 1382 . Character 1376 of “3” is formed in hierarchy 1383 .

The method of forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display portion 1390 is not limited. Identification 523 may be formed, for example, by 3D laser engraving. 3D laser engraving is a technique of condensing a laser beam and forming fine cracks of, for example, 100 microns at intervals of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm inside the material of the main substrate case 200z. By forming a plurality of cracks, an identification mark 523 is formed inside the main substrate case 200z.
In this embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside the member forming the identification display portion 1390 . Therefore, the identification mark 523 is less likely to be removed than, for example, when the identification mark 523 is entirely formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the main board case 200z. Therefore, the occurrence of fraud can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced. Also, if the identification mark 523 is removed by fraud, the main circuit board case shown in FIGS. 231 and 232 is damaged. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.

Further, the identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1390 and provided. Therefore, the identification display 523 is less likely to be removed than when the identification display 523 is formed on only one layer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
231 and 232, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is greater than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. As shown in FIG. In this case, when an unauthorized person attempts to remove the identification mark 520, it is necessary to grind the main board case 200z deeper than when L1 is equal to or less than L2. For this reason, the main board case shown in FIGS. 231 and 232 is likely to be damaged. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is enhanced.
It should be noted that the identification display 523 may not be divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display portion 1390 . For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed only on one layer. Further, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 may be less than or equal to the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391 . In addition, although the identification display 523 has been described, the identification displays 524, 525, etc., and the identification display 520 provided on the main substrate case in FIGS. 231 and 232 are similarly formed inside the main substrate case in FIGS. may be

Also, various seals other than the seal portion 542 and the like may be attached to the main board case 200z. In addition, the contents displayed on the printed portion (for example, the printed portion 797) provided on various stickers such as the sticker portion 542 are not limited.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing a modification of the main board case.
196 and 197, the performance display monitor 600, the setting display monitor 650, the setting key switch 660, and the RWM clear switch 680 will be described with reference to FIG. 255 and subsequent figures, and will not be described here.
For example, in addition to the seal portion 542, a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main substrate case according to the modification shown in FIG. In FIG. 233, members having the same configuration as in the above embodiment are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to the upper portion of the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the upper left portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmissive material, and are transparent as an example in this embodiment. Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). In FIG. 233, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located on the front side of seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.

A printed portion 1571 is printed on the seal portion 1560 . The printing section 1571 has a plurality of areas 1575 . The printing portion 1571 is colored, and has a white background as an example in this embodiment. Plurality of areas 1575 includes code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and entry area 1570 . Seal portion 1560 is provided so that print portion 1571 , code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and entry area 1570 do not overlap integrated main ROM 502 .
Cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of seal portion 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code part 1572 is a part where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a bar code, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. there is In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information portable terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the game machine 1 was delivered), and whether or not the game machine 1 has been disposed of. etc. is included. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area of the information display portion 1573 . The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular area of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

As an example, the entry areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six. The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper left is printed in black as "Opener". Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the entry area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200z, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date of opening the main board case 200z in the entry area 1570 on the right side. . It should be noted that the inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with.

The seal portion 1560 has a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic component 595 . Peeping portions 1574 are provided between a plurality of regions 1575 . The viewing portion 1574 has optical transparency. In this embodiment, viewing portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In this embodiment, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the horizontal direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction. Between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged in the left and right direction and the upper two entry areas 1570, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the left and right direction is provided. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 in two columns in the horizontal direction.

Also, the seal portion 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion on which these pieces of information are printed is also called a printing portion 1563 . Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as identification display 1595 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 . The seal portion 1562 is pasted on the left side of the identification display 523 “ABCD02” of the integrated main ROM 502 . Seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal portion 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU GH101” and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

Moreover, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596 . In the present embodiment, the species name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient that some of them are the same.
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal portion 1562 .
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main substrate case 200z and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the main control board 50 may include and display the same identification marks as the identification marks 1595 and 1596 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 are arranged across at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). By confirming the positional relationship with the component 595, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 50 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Also, since an area 1575 is provided, the inspector can enter the name of the inspector and the date of opening the main board case 200z in the area 1575 (more specifically, the entry area 1570). can be done. In addition, the inspector can enter in the area 1575 the date when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with. Also, since the peep portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area 1575 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Moreover, since the viewing portion 1574 is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the viewing portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the viewing portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Also, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position not overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Also, the code portion 1572 is associated with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 . This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 using the code portion 1572 . Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information on the delivery destination and easily judge whether or not the main control board 50 of a different delivery destination has been tampered with. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. FIG. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm that the integrated main ROM 502 is illegally replaced by checking the seal portion 1562 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.
In addition, since at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Note that the shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 225, the integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-like body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the body portion 580 may extend in the front, rear, left, and right directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Further, when the body portion 580 extends in the front, rear, left, and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the top surface or the bottom surface of the body portion 580 .
Various information displayed on the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed at an angle such that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized.
For example, FIG. 234 is a diagram of the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 viewed obliquely from above. In FIG. 234, illustration of members other than the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 is omitted. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 . That is, FIG. 234 is a view of the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 viewed from an angle that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 . However, as shown in FIG. 233, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 233 shows the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 viewed from an angle at which the integrated main ROM 502 mounting location can be visually recognized. In this way, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is displayed at such an angle that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Although the seal portion 1561 has been described as an example, the various information displayed on the other seal portions 542 and 1560 (for example, the information of the identification display 523) has an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. should be displayed in

<Board structure of main control board>
The configuration (layout) of the main control board accommodated in the main board case of the present embodiment is not limited to that described above.
FIG. 235 is a diagram for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to this embodiment, FIG. 235(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the main control board (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board.
FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the configuration of a printed circuit board used for the main control board, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a solder surface (rear surface) of a printed circuit board; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 236(a) and 236(b), the main control board 50 uses a printed wiring board 701 having wiring patterns formed on both sides of the printed board.
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701. FIG.
Furthermore, on the printed wiring board 701, various electronic components such as an insertion mounting type (through hole mounting type) resistor R, a capacitor C, a transistor Tr, an IC, and a connector CN are mounted in through holes (component insertion holes) formed in the board. The insertion mounting method is adopted.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 236, a printed wiring board 701 is provided with through holes (component insertion holes) 702 for inserting leads of various electronic components. In this case, connection electrodes (connection lands) 703 are provided around the through holes 702 on the solder surface 701b side of the printed wiring board 701 .

The connection electrodes 703 are electrodes for connecting, for example, by soldering the leads of electronic components inserted into the through holes 702 from the component surface 701a side of the printed wiring board 701. When the leads of the electronic components are connected by soldering, the electronic components are connected. The component and the wiring pattern on the board are electrically connected, and the electronic component is mechanically held.
That is, the main control board 50 is composed of a printed wiring board 701 having through holes 702 into which the leads of the insertion mount type electronic component can be inserted.

237 is a diagram showing the main board case of the present embodiment when the main control board shown in FIGS. 235 and 236 is accommodated, (a) showing a perspective view of the assembly, (b) the assembly shows a front view of the. Also, FIG. 238 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main substrate case shown in FIGS.
222 to 234, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240. FIG.
The identification display 520 is a display containing information about the gaming machine 1 . The identification display 520 provided on the control board 50 is called an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is called an identification display 522. FIG. The identification mark 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is called identification mark 523 , and the identification mark 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is called identification mark 524 . The identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is called an identification mark 525 .

The identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 50 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. Identification 522 is affixed to integrated main ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200z are information identification portions for displaying specific information.
The position display portion 541 is, for example, a recess formed in the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 and is recessed rearward. An identification mark 523 is attached to the position display portion 541 by a seal portion 542 . Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542 .
The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 227).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by imprinting with the mold for manufacturing the cap 240 .
In FIGS. 237 and 238, members having the same configuration as in the above-described embodiment (especially, FIGS. 222 to 234) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided on the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z.
Both of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmissive material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent. Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). In FIG. 237, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located on the front side of seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.
In this example, a watermark for anti-counterfeiting is provided on the seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 .
A "watermark" is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and can be applied to various types, such as using a hologram, or something that looks different depending on the physical shape. . In general, a seal with a watermark has a lower translucency of the base portion, which is the main body of the seal, compared to a seal without a watermark, resulting in lower visibility through the seal.

A printed portion 1571 is printed on the seal portion 1560 . The printing section 1571 has a plurality of areas 1575 . The printing portion 1571 is colored, and has a white background as an example in this embodiment. Plurality of areas 1575 includes code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and entry area 1570 . Seal portion 1560 is provided so that print portion 1571 , code portion 1572 , information display portion 1573 , and entry area 1570 do not overlap integrated main ROM 502 .

That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener display seal) is provided with an entry area 1570 for entering the person who opened the main circuit board case 200z and the date of opening.
Seal portion 1560 is made of a transparent material. For example, a total of six entry areas 1570 are formed in a black frame with a headline such as "main board control number" in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the seal portion 1560 is a seal for main board management.
A writing area 1570 is a white background formed on a transparent material and on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the number of the entry area are printed on the left side of each entry area.
The transparent material is exposed except for each printing and entry area 1570 (white background), and the electronic components on the main control board 50 can be confirmed through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1560 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 is visible from all angles through a transparent material.
The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the three columns of writing areas 1570 do not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles.
The entry areas 1570 provided in the seal portion 1560 are arranged in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six, and three sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be entered.

On the other hand, as described above, the main board case 200z has two crimped portions (crimped fastening holes 291, ie, closed portions) (crimped fastening holes 291A and 291B).
That is, the number of crimped portions (closed portions) provided on the main substrate case 200z is equal to or less than the number of fields for entering the opening person and date of opening provided on the seal portion 1560 attached to the main substrate case 200z. .
By providing more entry fields than the actual number of openings possible, it is possible to deal with typos and other errors. is.
In the main control board 50 shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, the ROM 502 has a plate-like main body 580 and a plurality of first signal pins 582, as described above.
However, the integrated main ROM 502 shown in FIGS.
A seal portion 1562, which will be described later, is attached to the main surface orthogonal to the substrate surface.

The contents displayed on the seal portion 1560 will be described in detail below.
Cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of seal portion 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code part 1572 is a part where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a bar code, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. there is In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information portable terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the game machine 1 was delivered) and whether or not the game machine 1 has been disposed of. etc. is included. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area of the information display portion 1573 . The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular area of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

As an example, the entry areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six. The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper left is printed in black as "Opener". Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the entry area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200z, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date of opening the main board case 200z in the entry area 1570 on the right side. . It should be noted that the inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with.

The seal portion 1560 has a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic components 595 on the main control board 50 . Peeping portions 1574 are provided between a plurality of regions 1575 . The viewing portion 1574 has optical transparency. In this embodiment, viewing portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In this embodiment, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the horizontal direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction. Between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged in the left and right direction and the upper two entry areas 1570, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the left and right direction is provided. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the writing areas 1570 in two columns in the horizontal direction.

Also, the seal portion 1561 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, as specific information, at least one of model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage and total capacity is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion on which these pieces of information are printed is also called a printing portion 1563 . Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as identification display 1595 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" including the model, the manufacturer name "AA company", the rated voltage and the total capacity (AC24V±5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the part where the model name is displayed, a background is formed with a conspicuous color such as red or yellow against a transparent material, and the model name is displayed in white letters on the background.

A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 . The seal portion 1562 is pasted on the left side of the identification display 523 “ABCD02” of the integrated main ROM 502 . Seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, as specific information, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal portion 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU GH101” and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal portion 1562 .
Moreover, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596 . In the present embodiment, the species name "CR AIU", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient if only some of them are the same.
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main substrate case 200z and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the identification indications 1595 and 1596 may be included and displayed on the main control board 50 .

As described above, in this embodiment, since the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged across at least part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223), for example, the seal portions 1560 and 1561 and the electronic component 595 By confirming the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 50 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
In addition, since a region 1575 is provided in the seal portion 1560, the inspector can enter the name of the inspector and the date when the main substrate case 200z was opened in the region 1575 (more specifically, the entry region 1570). can be filled in. In addition, the inspector can also enter in the area 1575 the date when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with. Also, since the peeping portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to check the characters or the like written in the area 1575 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

Moreover, since the seal portion 1560 is provided with the viewing portion 1574 , the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the viewing portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the peeping portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Also, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position not overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Also, the code portion 1572 is associated with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 . This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 using the code portion 1572 . Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 50 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. FIG. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm that the integrated main ROM 502 has been illegally replaced by checking the seal portion 1562 . Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
In addition, since at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and can easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Note that the shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 225, the integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-like body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the body portion 580 may extend in the front, rear, left, and right directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Further, when the body portion 580 extends in the front, rear, left, and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the top surface or the bottom surface of the body portion 580 .
Also, various information displayed on the seal portions 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200z, especially the upper case piece 220, does not have a ventilation hole.
The main board case 200z has date marks formed on the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 .
The date mark is a mark for lot management added during manufacturing (molding) of the case, which is a plastic molded product.
As a feature of the present embodiment, there should not be any component in the vicinity of the main ROM that is so tall that the ROM identification sticker (ROM sticker/seal portion 1562) cannot be visually recognized.

Figures 239(a) to (d) are schematic diagrams showing the procedure for assembling the cutting member, the unsealing prevention seal, and the cap to the sealing base, centering on the projecting piece of the upper case piece, and Figure 239(e) 240 is an exploded perspective view showing the state immediately before the cutting member, the unsealing seal, and the cap are assembled to the sealing base portion 310, and FIG. FIG. 242 is a perspective view showing a state in which the seal is adhered, FIG. 242 is a perspective view showing a state in which a cap is attached to the unsealable seal, and FIG. 243 shows a state in which the cap is detached and the unsealable seal is broken. It is a perspective view, and FIGS. 244(a) and 244(b) are a surface view and a partially enlarged view of an example of an unsealable seal.
The cutting member 230 shown in FIGS. 239-243 has a partially different construction than that shown in FIG. The same applies.

<Seal for prohibiting opening>
As a means for sealing the main board case 200z having the structure described above, an unsealing prohibition seal 250 shown in FIG. 244(a) is used. The unsealable seal 250 is made of a paper material that can be cut and broken relatively easily, and has security (anti-counterfeiting) printing on the surface and an adhesive layer on the back. there is
The band-shaped portions 251 arranged along the upper and lower sides of the surface are identification regions (fine pattern regions) 251 for authenticity identification (anti-counterfeiting) composed of fine constituent elements including random microcharacters. is. As means for security other than the identification area 251, a hologram 252, a QR code (registered trademark) 253, and the like are provided.
Random micro-characters are a technique for inserting extremely minute characters into lines or parts of designs. Since microcharacters cannot be duplicated by copiers with low resolution, they are one of the means of verifying the authenticity of reproductions.

FIG. 244(b) is a 10-fold enlarged view of a portion of the identification area (fine pattern area) provided on the unsealing prohibition seal 250, and "unsealing prohibited" is shown in the pattern consisting of fine circles or dots. Hidden characters such as "security" are described.
By adhering the unsealing prohibition seal 250 across the two case pieces forming the main substrate case, the identification area 251 is always broken when the case is illegally opened. Even if the fraudulent person replaces the ROM and then closes the case body and the cover body again and reconnects the broken parts of the unsealing prohibition seal 250 to restore the appearance to the original state, the identification area (other parts) will not be preserved. By determining with a magnifying glass, it becomes possible to reliably confirm the presence of the fractured portion and the repaired portion.

Fine characters such as random microcharacters cannot be distinguished (decoded, recognized, identified) with the naked eye, so they can be distinguished only by using a magnifying glass such as a loupe to magnify them 5 to 10 times. For example, when individual characters have a minute size of 1/10 to 1/5 mm, it is difficult to distinguish and read with the naked eye, but normal vision can be obtained by magnifying 10 times or 5 times. It is possible to enlarge to a size of about 1 mm that can be distinguished and read by a person who has done it.
The identification area 251 of the unsealing prohibition seal 250 of the present invention is not limited to random microcharacters, and at least a part thereof is difficult to distinguish (read, recognize, and identify) with the naked eye of an observer with normal vision. It is sufficient if it includes minute (fine) letters, figures, symbols, and/or patterns. By enlarging these minute characters, the observer can distinguish, read, and judge authenticity.
In addition, the phrase "difficult to distinguish with the naked eye" broadly includes the case where the distinction is not impossible with the naked eye but is difficult, and the case where the distinction with the naked eye is impossible.
Needless to say, the method of arranging the identification area 251 on the unsealable seal, its shape, etc. can be changed in various ways.

<Main structure of the main board case>
Next, the main structure of the main circuit board case will be described, centering on the portion where the unsealing prohibition seal is adhered.
That is, when the main circuit board case 200z is in the closed state as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the main circuit board case 200z is arranged so as to straddle the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 (sealing base portion 310=unsealable seal adhesion portion). By adhering the unsealing prohibition seal 250 to the opening prohibition seal 250, both case pieces cannot be opened without breaking the unsealing prohibition seal 250.例文帳に追加That is, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with sealing portions 212 and 222 at one end edge in the longitudinal direction, respectively. . That is, both the sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at substantially the same position on one longitudinal edge of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, so that when the both case pieces are closed, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are closed. Aligned to form a sealing base (untamperable seal bond).

In this embodiment, the unsealable seal adhesion portion (seal adhesion portion) A is composed of both sealing portions 212 and 222, and the cutting member 230 is supported in a state of being sandwiched between the two projecting pieces. The cutting member 230 may be supported (temporarily locked) on the outer surface of one of the projecting pieces. A cutting member may be supported.
In other words, the cutting member 230 may be held by at least one of the case pieces (protruding pieces) at the unsealing prevention seal adhered portion.
The substantially plate-shaped cutting member 230 is sandwiched between the sealing portions 212 and 222 (between the edges) of the two lower case pieces 210 and the upper case piece 220 in the closed state.
The front end surface of the unsealable seal adhesion part A (each front end surface of both the sealing parts 212 and 222) constitutes the first adhesion surface A1, and the outer surfaces of the sealing parts 212 and 222 orthogonal to the first adhesion surface A1 are A second adhesive surface A2 is constructed (FIGS. 239 and 240).
A housing space S for housing the cutting member 230 is provided inside the first adhesive surface A1 and the second adhesive surface A2 (FIG. 240).

A first opening O1 communicating with the housing space S is formed on the first bonding surface A1, and a second opening O2 (guide slit 224) communicating with the housing space S is formed on the second bonding surface A2. ing. In this embodiment, the upper case piece 220 is formed with two second openings O2, and the lower case piece 210 is formed with one second opening O2.
The unsealing prevention seal 250 includes a first seal adhesive portion 250A that covers all or part of the first opening O1 and is adhered to the first adhesive surface A1, and a second adhesive that covers a portion of the second opening O2. and a second seal bond 250B bonded to surface A2 (FIG. 244).

The cap 240 is detachably attached to the outer surface of the sealing base 310 so as to surround (cover) the tamper-proof seal 250 adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base 310 . The cap 240 is sandwiched between a cap body 241 that surrounds the outer surfaces of both protruding pieces (sealing base portion 310) including an unsealable seal 250, and the sealing portions 212 and 222 when attached to the sealing base portion 310. It has a locking portion 242 (FIG. 225) that elastically engages with the cutting member 230 (locked portion 236) in the closed state, so that the cutting member can be detached integrally when the cap is detached from the sealing base. By doing so, the unsealing prohibition seal is ruptured and detached.
A tubular crimping member 203A (third screw-stopping piece 93) is provided on one side surface of the cap 240, and as shown in FIGS. When the cap is attached, the center hole of the crimping member 203A communicates with the holes of the crimping member 203B ((first screw stop piece 91, second screw piece 92) provided at corresponding positions of the upper and lower case pieces. The cap is fixed to the upper and lower case pieces by inserting and crimping a crimping pin 94 (FIG. 225).
In the illustrated embodiment, the cap 240 surrounds the entire sealing portion 212, 222 including the unsealable seal, but the cap is sealed so as to surround at least a portion of the unsealable seal. It is sufficient that it is attached to at least a part of the base portion (unsealing prevention seal adhesion portion=cap attachment portion) 310 .

The cutting member 230 intersects with a blade portion (first broken piece) 231 provided at the tip edge in the direction (b) (FIG. 226) in which the cap 240 is separated from the sealing base portion 310 and the direction (b) in which the cap 240 is separated. and a broken piece (second broken piece) 233 projecting in the (orthogonal) direction. One broken piece 233 is provided on the surface of the lower case piece on the sealing portion 212 side, and two pieces are provided on the surface of the upper case piece on the projecting piece 222 side.
One second opening O2 (guide slit 224) for receiving one broken piece 233 is formed in the sealing portion 212 of the lower case piece, and two broken pieces 233 are formed in the projecting piece 222 on the upper case side. Two second openings O2 (guide slits 224) are formed for respectively receiving the .
By forming the cutting member 230 as a separate member from each case piece, the shape of the cutting means such as the blade portion 231 can be formed and processed independently and arbitrarily, and a structure that significantly breaks the unsealing prohibition seal can be achieved. It becomes possible.

<Procedure for assembling each member and procedure for breaking the unsealable seal>
Next, referring to FIG. 241, the procedure for assembling the cutting member 230, the unsealing prevention seal 250 and the cap 240 to the sealing base portion 310 will be described centering on the projecting piece 222 of the upper case piece.
In this embodiment, the cutting member 230 is configured to be temporarily locked against the inner surface of the projecting piece 222 of the upper case piece. A pair of locking portions (temporary locking portions) 223 protrude from the inner surface (cutting member supporting portion) of the projecting piece 222, and these locking portions 223 are mounted in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 241(a). The cutting member 230 is configured to engage with and hold down the inner edge portions of two recesses (temporary locking portions) 232 provided at the rear edge of the cutting member 230 . A broken piece 233 is projected from the surface side of the cutting member, and a guide slit 224 protrudes for allowing the passage of the broken piece 233 when the cutting member is attached to the inner surface of the projecting piece 222 in the direction of the arrow. It is formed in strip 222 . Therefore, when the cutting member 230 is moved in the direction of the arrow as shown in FIG. can be worn at once. At this time, since the broken piece 233 moves while being fitted in the guide slit 224, it does not become an obstacle during mounting.

By providing the broken pieces 233 on both sides of the cutting member 230 and providing the guide slits 224 in both sealing portions 212 and 222 as in the present embodiment, the cutting member and the cap are separated from the unsealable seal adhesion portion A. In this case, the unsealable seals adhered to the outer surfaces of both sealing portions 212 and 222 can be broken at the same time.
In this embodiment, a configuration example in which the cutting member supporting portion is provided on the projecting piece 222 on one side of the upper case is shown, but it is also possible to provide a cutting portion supporting portion on the inner surface of the sealing portion 212 on one side of the lower case. be.

Furthermore, the cutting member 230 is provided with elastically deformable claw-like locked portions 236 on both edges in the longitudinal direction (direction orthogonal to the mounting direction). When the cutting member 230 is sandwiched between the sealing portions 212 and 222 (see FIGS. 241(b) and 241(c)), the locked portion 236 is exposed to the outside through the gap between the projecting pieces. It is in. Therefore, the cap and the cutting member can be engaged when the cap is attached to the sealing base. Since the tip edge of the cutting member is also exposed from the gap between the projecting pieces, the cutting member can be smoothly separated from the sealing base portion together with the cap, and the unsealing prohibition seal can be broken.
After the cutting member 230 is attached to the protruding piece 222 in this way, the lower case piece 210 is attached to the upper case piece 220, and the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is adhered across both sealing portions 212 and 222. do.

Next, FIG. 241(b) shows the unsealing prevention seal adhered to the sealing base portion with the lower case piece 210 omitted, and FIGS. showing.
The cap 240 has a protruding locking portion 242 that can be engaged with the locked portion 236 of the cutting member 230 inside the cap body 241, and the cap is attached to the sealing base portion as shown in FIG. 241(c). When attached, each engaging portion 242 elastically engages with the distal end portion of each engaged portion 236 to be temporarily integrated.
In this state, as shown in FIGS. 241(d) and 243, when the cap 240 is detached from the sealing base portion, the cutting member 230 integrated with the cap is also detached integrally. It is pulled out from the gap between the stop portions 212 and 222 . At this time, the blade portion 231 and the broken piece 233 of the cutting member break the unsealable seal. That is, the blade portion 231 is configured to be detachable to the outside (outside) from the gap (first opening O1) between the sealing portions 212 and 222, while the broken piece 233 is provided on the projecting piece 222. Since it is configured to be detachable from the inside of the guide slit 224 to the outside (outside), each part of the unsealing prohibition seal located on the moving path of the blade portion 231 and the broken piece 233 can be broken.
Each broken piece (second broken piece) 233 protrudes from a portion of each second opening O2 that is not covered by the unsealable seal.

In the configuration example of the unsealing prohibition seal shown in FIG. 233 travel path. Therefore, the identification area 251 is broken (destroyed) by the breaking piece 233 when the cutting member is removed together with the cap.
When the identification region 251 is provided at a position corresponding to the blade portion 231 on the tip edge of the cutting member, the identification portion is broken by the blade portion 231 (Fig. 243).
In this embodiment, the unsealing prevention seal 250 is adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base portion 310 of the main substrate case so as to straddle the sealing portions 212 and 222 of both case pieces, and the cap is attached to the outer surface of the sealing base portion. At this time, the cutting member 230 held between the sealing portions 212 and 222 and the cap 240 are engaged and integrated. Therefore, before the main circuit board case is opened, that is, in the process of removing the cap 240 from the sealing base, the cutting member 230 breaks the unsealing prohibition seal 250 .

Since the cutting member 230 has a jagged blade portion 231 at its tip (the tip in the detachment direction), when the cutting member 230 protrudes outside from the butted position of the two sealing portions 212 and 222, the unsealing prohibition seal is formed. , the first seal bond portion 250A is broken. Therefore, it is possible to know that the main board case has been illegally opened.
Furthermore, the cutting member 230 has a broken piece 233 that protrudes in a direction (one side of the upper case) that intersects the direction in which the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310 , and is broken when the cutting member 230 is attached to the protruding piece 222 . The fragment 233 projects from the guide slit 224 provided in the projecting piece 222 of the upper case piece 220 to the surface of the projecting piece 222 . If the unsealing prohibition seal is adhered to the surface of the protruding piece 222 in this state, the broken piece 233 is always in contact with the unsealing prohibition seal 250 and interferes with it. Therefore, when the cutting member moves in the separating direction by separating the cap 240 from the sealing base portion, the broken piece moves along the guide slit 224, thereby breaking the unsealable seal linearly. can. Since the unsealable seal portion (second seal adhesive portion 250B) broken by the broken piece 233 corresponds to the surface of the protruding piece 222, it can be viewed directly from the back side of the gaming machine, preventing cheating. Evidence of what has been done can be easily discovered from this break.
When the main board case is opened by rotating it with respect to the pedestal as shown in FIG. 223, the opposite side of the cap 240 can be visually recognized.

In this embodiment, assuming that the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is adhered across both sealing portions 212 and 222, the cutting member 230 includes a blade portion 231 for cutting the identification region 251 unrestorably, Although each of the broken pieces 233 is provided to ensure that the trace of breakage is left on the outside, this is merely an example, and only the cutting edge 231 at the tip or only the broken piece 233 on the other surface may be provided. In particular, if the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is not adhered across both the sealing portions 212 and 222, but is adhered only to the outer surface of one projecting piece, for example, the projecting piece 222 on the upper case side, the cutting member 230 will break. It suffices to provide the segment 233 . In other words, according to the present invention, it is possible to deal with both the case where the unsealing prohibition seal is adhered across both projecting pieces and the case where it is adhered only to one of the projecting pieces.

In the example shown in FIG. 243, when the main board case 200z is opened, the unsealing prohibition seal (unsealing prohibition seal) 250 is broken so that the QR code (registered trademark) 253 cannot be read.
However, it is desirable to configure the blade portion 231 so that the unsealable seal 250 is broken in a state in which the QR code (registered trademark) 253 is readable.

<Payout control board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the payout control board protection case in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be described.
FIG. 245 is a diagram showing the component layout of the payout control board 60z in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 245, the payout control board 60z includes a one-chip microcomputer (IC chip) 601 that integrates (integrates) a payout CPU 60az, a payout ROM 60bz, and a payout RAM 60cz; and an error indicator 610 for displaying information.
The error indicator 610 may consist of one 7-segment liquid crystal or 7-segment LED. The 7-segment liquid crystal is a liquid crystal display device composed of 7 segments that can be individually turned on/off to represent a single number.
A 7-segment LED is an LED display device composed of 7 segments that can be individually turned on/off in order to represent a single numeral.
The error indicator 610 may further include segments for displaying dots in addition to seven segments for displaying numbers, like the performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 described below.
Not only the error indicator 610 but also the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 described below can use a 7-segment liquid crystal or a 7-segment LED having segments for displaying dots.
Although detailed description is omitted, in the printed wiring board 701 of the payout control board 60z, similar to the main control board 50, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface of the printed wiring board. A single-sided mounting method is used for mounting.

FIG. 246 is a view for explaining the configuration of the payout control board protection case, (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view.
247 and 248 are exploded perspective views of the payout control board case.
A payout control board protection case (hereinafter referred to as payout board case 400 ) is composed of an upper case piece 410 and a lower case piece 420 .
As in the case of the main board case 200z, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 are provided with control board housing portions 411 and 421, respectively, for housing the payout control board 60z.
Each of the control board housing portions 411 and 421 includes a plate portion formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and a flange portion projecting from the peripheral edge portion of the plate portion and surrounding one side surface of each plate portion. It is formed into a shape that has

Of the flange portion that constitutes the control board housing portion 411 of the upper case piece 410 , a hooking piece 412 formed in an L shape is provided on the portion protruding along two long sides of the upper case piece 410 . are formed five each.
On the other hand, of the flange portion that constitutes the control board housing portion 421 of the lower case piece 420, the portion protruding along the two long sides of the lower case piece is formed in a double-walled shape. An insertion groove portion 422 into which the hooking piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. A hooking piece 423 is formed in each insertion groove portion 422 .

When the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 are combined, the hooking piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 is inserted into the insertion groove 422 of the lower case piece 420 .
Then, the upper case piece 410 is slid in the direction of arrow α in FIG. Then, the hooking piece 412 is engaged with the hooking piece 423, so that the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α.
When combined in this manner, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 form a box-shaped inner package portion shielded from the outside by the control board storage portions 411 and 421. The inner package portion includes a payout control board 60z. is stored. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the payout control board 60z, the integrated payout ROM 601 and the like are illegally exchanged.
In addition, a protective cover is arranged below the upper case piece 410 to cover the connecting portion between the internal connector provided on the internal payout control board 60z and the external connector.

In this embodiment, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case 410 are fixed by a crimping member with the payout control board 60z sandwiched therebetween.
A crimping fastening portion 450 using a crimping member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the dispensing substrate case 400. By driving the crimping member into the crimping fastening portion 450, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 are connected. Locked in the closed state. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven into the fastening hole 451, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 become openable and detachable.
In the dispensing board case 400 of the present embodiment, two crimping fastening portions are provided (crimping fastening portions 450A and 450B).

An upper fastening piece 455 is provided along the edge of the upper case piece 410 , and a through fastening hole 456 is provided in the upper fastening piece 455 .
A lower fastening piece 455 protrudes from a portion corresponding to the upper fastening piece 455 on the inner surface of the lower case piece 420 . A fastening hole 457 is formed in the lower fastening piece 455 .
When the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 are engaged using the hook pieces 412 and 423 and the insertion groove portion 422, the through fastening hole 456 of the upper fastening piece 455 and the fastening hole 457 of the lower fastening piece are aligned. communicate. By driving a crimping member into the communicating fastening holes (crimping fastening holes), the engagement between the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 cannot be released.
Therefore, it is impossible to access the payout control board 60z housed inside the payout board case.
Only one caulking fastening portion is used for one fastening of the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 . After the crimping member is removed and the fastening is adjusted (after the delivery board case 400 is opened), the crimping member is driven into the remaining crimping fastening hole to fasten again when fastening is performed again. That is, the dispensing board case of this embodiment can be opened up to twice.
A position display portion similar to that of the main substrate case 200z is provided at the lower left and lower center of the front surface of the upper case piece 410. As shown in FIG.
A seal portion (error display seal) 1565 indicating the content of error display is attached to the lower left position display portion, and the person who opened the dispensed substrate case and the opening date and time are entered in the lower center position display portion. A seal portion (opener display seal) 1566 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 247, the position display portion and seal portions 1565 and 1566 are formed and attached on the outer surface side of the upper case piece 410 , but they are formed and attached on the inner surface side of the upper case piece 410 . good too.
This is the same as the seal portions 542, 1560, 1561 of the main board case 200z.
The position display portion may also be provided on the outer surface side or the inner surface side of the upper case piece 410 as described with reference to FIGS.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the position display portion 541, which is a sticking position mark indicating the sticking position of the seal portion, can take the following forms.
That is, the position display portion 541 is a mark surrounding the entire periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case surface to which the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are attached. It is the mark on the L-shaped side on the same side or the back side of .
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear protrusion provided on the rear surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the rear surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .

The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection provided so as to surround predetermined corners of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same plane as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided so as to surround predetermined corners of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion and concave portion provided so as to surround predetermined corners on the back surfaces of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .
The position display portion 541 is a position mark which is neither a projection nor a recess provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566 .

246 to 248, the position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear protrusion provided on the same surface as the seal (front side of the upper case piece), but is not limited to this. can take any form.
The seal portion 1565 is attached near the error indicator 610 of the payout control board 60z housed in the payout board case 400, and indicates the content of the error display displayed on the error indicator 610. FIG.
The error indicator 610 displays the number of the error shown on the seal portion 1565 .
When multiple errors occur, only the most serious error among the errors occurring is displayed on the error indicator 610 . Alternatively, all of the multiple errors that have occurred are sequentially displayed on the error indicator 610 .
Alternatively, a plurality of LEDs each associated with an error number may be arranged as the error indicator 610, and an error may be notified by causing the LED corresponding to the error that has occurred to emit light.
Here, for example, beside the plurality of error numbers displayed on the seal portion 1565, the corresponding LEDs are arranged vertically.
For example, when a "dispensed quantity abnormal error" corresponding to error number 0 occurs, the LED arranged next to error number "0" on the seal portion 1565 is turned on, and "main control not performed" corresponding to error number 1 is turned on. When "connection error" occurs, the LED arranged next to the error number "1" on the seal portion 1565 is turned on.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material. For example, an error display number and the content of the error indicated by the number are printed in white within a frame printed in white.
The transparent material is exposed except for the display of the frame, number, and error content, and the electronic parts on the payout control board 60z can be confirmed through the transparent material.
That is, the error indicator 610 can visually recognize the transparent material of the seal portion 1566 . Alternatively, the seal portion 1566 is attached to the dispensing board case 400 that does not overlap the error indicator 610 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the error indicator 610 is always visible.
The seal portion 1565 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 on the payout control board 60z can be visually recognized from all angles through a transparent material.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), the seal portion 1565 (error display description seal) describes, for example, the following contents corresponding to errors detected by the main control board and various sensors.
i.e.
0 Dispensing number error 1 Main control disconnection error 2 Dispensing switch abnormality detection error 1
3 Dispensing switch abnormality detection error 2
4 Dispensing case error 5 Main control case error 6 Full tank error 7 Ball out error 8 Game ball lending device unconnected seller 9 Game ball lending device communication error.

In addition, "plate full error", "counter case error", "counting switch error", "excess payout error", "game ball lending device unconnected error", "game ball lending device communication error", "door open"Error","Abnormal winning error 1", "Abnormal winning error 2", "Ejection error", "Magnet detection error", "Abnormal prize frequency error", "Abnormal door opening error" may be performed on the error indicator 610, and the contents of the corresponding error display may be displayed on the sticker portion 1565 (error display explanation sticker).
A "dish full error" is an error that occurs when the tray is full due to the payout of prize balls or when the tray is full due to ball lending.
A "counter case error" is an error that occurs due to ball clogging between the tank and dispensing mechanism.
A "counter switch error" is an error that occurs when the wiring that connects the payout control board and the dispensing device relay terminal board or the wiring that connects the dispensing device relay terminal board and the parts in the dispensing mechanism is not correctly connected. .

"Excess payout error", an error that occurs when more than the requested number of payouts is made.
"Payout command error" is an error that occurs when the signal sent from the main control board to the payout control board is not normal.
"Game ball lending device unconnected error" is an error that occurs because the game ball lending device is not connected to the gaming machine.
"Game ball lending device communication error" is an error that occurs when the payout control board detects that the signal from the game ball lending device is incorrect.
"Door open error" is an error that occurs because the upper decoration is opened.
A "switch unconnected error" is an error that occurs when disconnection or poor connection of switches on the game board such as gates and winning slots is detected.

"Abnormal Prize Winning Error 1" is the detection of five or more prizes to the right starting port between the end of the operation of the normal electric accessory and the start of the next operation, or the time from the start of the operation of the normal electric accessory after turning on the power. Since one or more prizes were detected during this period, a prize was detected in the upper right big prize opening when the upper right special electric role was not activated. This is an error that occurs due to detection.
"Abnormal Winning Error 2" is an error that occurs because the switch in each winning hole detects a game ball for a remarkably long time.
"Ejection error" is an error that occurs when the difference between the number of game balls that have passed through the switch in each winning hole and the number of game balls that have passed through the out switch exceeds 49.
"Magnet detection error" is an error that occurs when a magnetic force is detected near the left windmill, near the upper left winning opening, near the middle left winning opening, near the lower left winning opening, near the middle starting opening, or at the lower right part of the game board surface.
"Frequency Abnormal Error" is caused by detecting an abnormal number of winnings in either the middle starting opening, the lower left winning opening, the left middle winning opening, the upper left winning opening, or the right winning opening when reaching a certain number of shot balls. This is the error that occurs.
"Abnormal door open error" is an error that occurs when the inner frame is opened when the upper decoration is closed.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), a seal portion 1566 (opener indication seal/dispensed board management seal) has an entry area 1567 for entering the person who opened the dispensed board case 400 and the date of opening. Prepare.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material and is not subjected to processing such as watermarking. For example, three entry areas 1567 are formed in a black frame with a heading such as "payout control board".
A writing area 1567 is a white background formed on a transparent material and which can be written with a pen or the like.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1567, and circled numbers indicating the number of the entry area are printed on the left side of each entry area.
The transparent material is exposed except for each print and entry area 1567 (white background), and the electronic components on the payout control board 60z can be confirmed through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1566 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 on the payout control board 60z can be visually recognized from all angles through a transparent material.
The seal portion 1566 is provided so that the three entry areas 1567 are positioned so as not to overlap the integrated payout ROM 601 from all angles.

In addition, in the seal portion 1566 shown in FIG. 246(c), the entry area 1567 is integrated with the fields for entering "opener" and "opening date". On the other hand, in the same way as the seal portion 1560 of the main circuit board case 200z shown in FIGS. 233 and 237, the fields for entering the opening person and the date of opening are separated, and a viewing portion made of a transparent material is provided between them. can be By doing so, confirmation of the electronic components on the payout control board 60z through the seal portion 1566 becomes even easier.

As described above, similarly to the main board case 200z, the payout board case 400 of this embodiment has a crimped portion.
Two crimped portions are provided in the dispensing board case 400 . On the other hand, there are three writing areas 1567 provided on the seal portion 1566 .
In the dispensing board case 400, the number of crimped portions does not match the number of times the person who opened the seal portion 1566 can write (the number of writing areas 1567).
The number of crimped parts provided in the delivered board case 400 is equal to or less than the number of entry fields for the person who opened the delivered board management seal (seal part 1566) and the date of opening. By providing more entry fields than the actual number of openings possible, it is possible to deal with typos and other errors. is.

Especially the upper case piece 410 of the payout board case 400 does not have a ventilation hole.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the payout ROM 60bz (payout chip) 601 .
As described above, the seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the seal portion 1562 is printed with the model name “CR AIU GH101” and the manufacturer name “AA Company” as predetermined information. Specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as identification display 1596 . In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
The seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 may have the same color as the seal portion 1562 having the same contents attached to the main ROM of the main control board 50, or may have a different color.

The number of times that information such as the opening person can be written in the seal portions 1560 and 1566 differs between the dispensing board case 400 and the main board case 200z. Alternatively, the sizes of the writable areas in the seal portions 1560 and 1566 are different.
In the description of FIG. 246, the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are different seal portions, but the seal portions 1565 and 1566 may be integrated.
That is, one seal including the descriptions of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 may be attached.

<Production control board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the effect control board protection case in this embodiment will be described.
First, the substrate structure of the image control substrate will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 and 250. FIG.
249A and 249B are diagrams for explaining the structure of the image control board, FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder surface (rear surface) of the substrate;
250A and 250B are views showing the configuration of a printed circuit board used for the image control board, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a solder surface (rear surface) of a printed circuit board; FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, the image control board 70z is mounted with many electronic components including a VDP.
The image control board 70z uses a printed wiring board 801 having wiring patterns formed on both sides of the printed board.
In this embodiment, the printed wiring board 801 is used as the image control board 70z, but this is only an example. A multilayer printed wiring board on which a pattern is formed may be used.
As a mounting method for mounting electronic components on the printed wiring board 801, various surface-mounted electronic components and A surface mounting method is used to mount connectors and the like. In other words, the image control board 70z is configured using a printed wiring board 801 of a surface mounting type.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured by the printed wiring board 701 having through holes into which the leads of the insertion mounting type electronic components (hereinafter referred to as "insertion mounting components") can be inserted. Substrates other than the main control substrate 50 are printed wiring boards 801 having connection electrodes connectable to connection terminals of surface-mounted electronic components (hereinafter referred to as "surface-mounted components").

FIG. 251 is an enlarged view of a part of the printed wiring board used for the image control board.
As shown in FIG. 251, on a printed wiring board 801, land groups 811 and 812 are formed by lands 802 that are connected to connection terminals of one surface-mounted component.
For example, if the surface-mounted component is an IC 850 shown in FIG. be. In this specification, a plurality of lands 802 each connected to a plurality of lead terminals of one surface mount component are called a land group.
Similarly, if the surface-mounted component is a connector 851 shown in FIG. A group 812 is constructed.
A plurality of lands 802 constituting these land groups 811 and 812 are composed of first lands 802a and second lands 802b having a different shape from the first lands 802a.
Specifically, among the plurality of lands 802 forming each of the land groups 811 and 812, the four corner lands 802b are made larger than the other lands 802a (for example, about 1.5 times larger).

FIG. 252 is a front view explaining the configuration of the effect control board protection case.
253 and 254 are exploded perspective views of the effect control board case.
As shown in FIGS. 252 to 254, the image control board 70z in the effect control board case (effect board case) 700 is mounted with many electronic components including a host CPU, VDP and image ROM.
As described above, in the printed wiring board of the image control board 70z, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a double-sided mounting method in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted on both the component side and the solder side of the printed wiring board is adopted. be.

The effect board case 700 includes a lower case piece 710 and an upper case piece 720. - 特許庁
An effect control board and an image control board 70z are housed in an encapsulating part constituted by a control board housing part 711 provided in the lower case piece 710 and a control board housing part 721 provided in the upper case piece 720 .
The effect board case 700, particularly the upper case piece 720, is provided with a ventilation hole 725 unlike the main board case 200z and the payout board case 400 described above.
In addition, on the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700, the seal portions 1560 and 1566 for writing the opening person and the opening date pasted on the main board case 200z and the dispensing board case 400 are pasted. not
Therefore, the effect board case 700 is not provided with a crimped portion for sealing the effect board case 700, which is provided in the main board case 200z and the payout board case 400. - 特許庁

On the other hand, on the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700, an opaque seal portion 1580 describing an explanation relating to volume setting is attached near the volume changeover switch 36z.
Correspondingly, a position display portion 541 is provided on the rear surface of the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700 .
As described above, the image control board 70z is a double-sided mounting board, and the electronic components mounted on the front side (game board side) cannot be directly visually inspected for inspection.
In addition, since the image control board 70z simply has a function of outputting an effect image and effect sound, unlike the main control board 50 and the payout control board 60z, there is a risk that the ROM chip or the like may be illegally replaced. is low.
Therefore, since it is less necessary to visually recognize the board surface through the seal, the opaque seal portion 1580 can be attached to the presentation board case 700 .
Also, for the same reason, a crimping portion (sealing portion) for sealing the effect board case 700 is not provided.
As a result, the seal portion 1566 having the entry area 1567 for entering the person who opened the effect board case 700 and the date of opening is not attached.

The position display portion 541 may be provided on the front side of the upper case piece 720 .
In the present embodiment, the position display portion 541, which is a sticking position mark indicating the sticking position of the seal portion 1580, can take the following forms.
That is, the position display portion 541 is a mark that surrounds the entire periphery of the seal portion 1580 on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case to which the seal portion 1580 is attached, and This is the mark on the L-shaped side.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 1580 .
Position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided so as to surround seal portion 1580 on the same plane as seal portion 1580 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580 .
Position display portion 541 is a linear concave portion provided to surround seal portion 1580 on the back surface of seal portion 1580 .

The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 1580 on the same plane as the seal portion 1580 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear concave portion provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 1580 on the same surface as the seal portion 1580 .
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear projection and recess provided to surround a predetermined corner on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 .
The position display portion 541 is a position mark provided to surround the seal portion 1580 and is neither a protrusion nor a recess.

A seal portion 1561 provided on the surface of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z, a seal portion 1560 as a main board control number seal, and the QR code (registered trademark) of the unsealing prohibition seal 250 extend the main control board 50. different distances from the virtual plane. The distance of the QR code (registered trademark) of the unsealing prohibition sticker 250 from the virtual plane (main control board 50) is shorter (closer).
This is because, as shown in FIG. 241 and the like, the QR code (registered trademark) 253 of the unsealing prohibition seal 250 is positioned lower than the upper surface of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

The board cases of the game machine, including the main board case 200z, the payout board case 400, and the performance board case 700, are provided with case seals, ROM seals, lead resistor color codes, network resistor identification codes, IC There are model number code, capacitor model number code, display information of performance display monitor, setting display monitor, etc.
These pieces of information are different in distance from each control board housed in the board case (main board case 200z, payout board case 400, effect board case 700). Also, the distance from the top surface of the board case is different. As explained above, the top surface of the board case is the place where the seal portion is affixed, and is the highest point in the board case.
The seal part of the board case is pasted on the highest point of the board case, the ROM sticker is pasted on the ROM mounted on the board in the case, and the display information of the performance display monitor and setting display monitor is on the board. displayed on the performance display monitor and setting display monitor provided in the It is natural that the height of these pieces of information is different on the basis of the control board.

Further, in this embodiment, the ROM legs of the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z) housed in the board case are visible, and the ROM legs are not hidden by the seal. , Paste the seal on the top surface of the board case. Even a part of the ROM leg is not hidden by the sealing portion when the substrate case is viewed from above.
In this embodiment, the electronic parts including the ROM may be hidden when viewed from above, but can be seen from the viewing section when viewed from a different angle.
A transparent connector is installed as a connection part of the ROM to the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z) so that it can be seen at a glance that the ROM leg has not been tampered with.
The identification information provided on the case piece of the board case has indications of different distances to the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z). For example, the identification information displayed on the upper case piece, the lower case piece, and (in the case of the main board case) the cap is based on the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z). They are different, and the positional relationship is also different. Also, in the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z), the color of the area where the electronic components are installed is different from the color of the area where the manufacturer's name is displayed.

<Board structure of main control board>
The configuration (layout) of the main control board accommodated in the main board case of the present embodiment is not limited to those described above, such as FIG.
FIG. 255 is a diagram for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and in particular, is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board is the same as in FIGS. 235 and 236, but in the example shown in FIG. 255(a), the main control board has a performance display monitor (performance display section) 600 and a setting display monitor (setting display section) 650 . The main control board 50 also has a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680 .

The performance display monitor 600 displays the base value of the gaming machine.
The base value is a numerical value that indicates the performance of the game machine, how much there is payout in the normal state (low probability, short time, no time), excluding special states such as jackpots, probability variable game states, and time saving game states. be.
For example, if there are 50 prize balls when the player hits 100 game balls in low-probability, short-working-hours, the base value is "50".
The number of game balls launched by the player is called the number of outs, and in the gaming machine 1, a low number is given for each total number of outs (usually 60,000) in all game states including the jackpot, variable probability game state, and time-saving game state. A base value for short working hours and non-working hours is calculated and displayed on the performance display monitor 600. - 特許庁
The base value at the time of low probability of short working hours is represented by (the number of payouts at the time of low probability of short working hours / the number of outs of the time of low probability of short working hours).

The performance display monitor 600 will be explained. The performance display monitor 600 has a display and a circuit section on the main control board 50 . A display in which the display section and the circuit section are unitized may be mounted on the main control board 50 .
The display displays four digits side by side. A dot point is provided below the number. Of the 4-digit number, the left two digits are the identification seg and the right two digits are the ratio seg.

FIG. 255(b) is a diagram for explaining the display of the performance display monitor, and the performance display monitor 600 sequentially and repeatedly displays the following four types of information.
As shown in (b-1) to (b-4), in the identification segment, the values of "bL.", "b1.", "b2." The segment displays the base value corresponding to it.
The display switching time of "bL.", "b1.", "b2.", and "b3." is about 5.0 seconds.
For example, "bL.xx" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b1.yy" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b2.zz" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, and "b3.ww" is displayed for 5.0 seconds. second, and then "bL.xx" is displayed again for 5.0 seconds.
"bL." Shown in (b-1) indicates the base value for each 60,000 total out numbers, which is a real-time value during measurement.
"b1." Shown in (b-2) indicates the base value at the time of low probability short working hours in the total number of outs 60,000 one time before.
"b2." Shown in (b-3) indicates the base value at the time of low probability short working hours in the total number of outs 60,000 two times before.
"b3." Shown in (b-4) indicates the base value at the time of low probability short working hours in 60,000 total out number three times before.

Here, performance display processing by the main control board 50 will be described.
The main CPU 50az starts counting the number of outs (total number of outs) in all gaming states from the initial power-on (RWM all clear).
In (b-1), the main CPU 50az causes the identification segment to blink "bL." and the ratio segment to display "--" until the total number of outs reaches an arbitrary number less than 300.
In (b-2), "b1." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.

After that, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability short-time payouts (low-probability payout number), and the number of low-probability short-time outs (low-probability out number), and starts the first measurement. .
The main CPU 50az performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL."
When the low probability out number is 0 to 5,999, "bL." is flashed, and when the low probability out number is 6,000 or more, "bL."
In (b-2), "b1." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Then, the main CPU 50az stores the final ratio segment value of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement as AA.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts the second measurement.
The main CPU 50a performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL."
In addition, when the number of low-probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL."
In (b-2), "b1." is lit in the identification segment, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement as AA.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the second measurement as BB.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts counting for the third time.
The main CPU 50az performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL."
In addition, when the number of low-probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL."
In (b-2), "b1." is lit in the identification segment, and the stored BB is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is lit in the identification segment, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement as AA.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the second measurement as BB.
Save the ratio segment final value of the identification segment "bL." of the third measurement as CC.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts the fourth measurement.
The main CPU 50az performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the fourth time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL."
In addition, when the number of low-probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL."
In addition, in (b-2), "b1." is lit in the identification segment, and the saved CC is displayed in the ratio segment.
In addition, in (b-3), "b2." is lit in the identification segment, and the stored BB is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is blinked in the identification segment, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 next time, the main CPU 50az repeats the fifth and subsequent measurements in the same manner as described above.

The board case 200z of the present embodiment may be used to accommodate the main control board of the spinning machine (pachislot machine). In that case, the game information display provided on the main control board is Pachislot machine) information such as the role ratio is displayed.
The performance display monitor 600 described above is a kind of game information display device that indicates the game information of the game machine. Also includes information such as
A game information display that displays information such as the role ratio of a pachislot machine is called a role ratio monitor.
The role ratio monitor is
(1) Cumulative advantageous section ratio (2) Consecutive role ratio every 6,000 games (3) Role ratio every 6,000 games (4) Cumulative consecutive role ratio (5) Cumulative role ratio is displayed.
Here, the advantageous interval ratio is the ratio of the number of advantageous interval games to the total number of games. Also, the advantageous section is a section in which it is possible to give an instruction such as push order navigation.
The role ratio and the consecutive role ratio are ratios of the number of payouts of accessories (so-called bonuses) to the total number of payouts.
The role ratio is calculated with respect to all the roles, and the continuous role ratio is calculated with respect to the operation of the consecutively operating device.
The game information display device that shows the game information of the gaming machine may also include such a role ratio monitor. A detailed description of the ratio monitor is omitted.

Next, the setting display monitor 650 will be described. The setting display monitor 650 displays setting values of the gaming machine 1 .
As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can change the probability of winning the jackpot by changing the settings (Fig. 199(a)).
The setting display monitor 650 is mounted in the main control board case 200z, has a one-digit display as shown in FIG. can display one value.
These setting values may be displayed on the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 may not be provided.

The setting display monitor 650 will be described. The setting display monitor 650 is installed for the purpose of clearly indicating to the player that the setting changing device is installed, to clearly indicating the operation method to the staff of the game arcade, and to prevent illegality related to the setting.
Numeric or non-numeric symbols can be used to indicate settings. When a numerical value is used, any one of the numerical values "1", "2", "3", and "4" is used to display the setting according to the setting value. If the set value is from "1" to "6", select one of the numerical values "1", "2", "3", "4", "5" and "6" according to the set value. use.

For the setting operation, for example, the setting key switch 660 and the setting switch 670 described above are used.
The setting key switch 660 is a switch that triggers transition to the "setting change state" and the "setting confirmation state". It is operated using a key (key).
The setting key switch 660 can take two states of OFF/ON and maintain each state. Also, the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state.
The setting key switch 660 is mounted inside the main control board case 200z.
The setting switch 670 is a switch for switching settings in a setting change state, and is mounted at an arbitrary position that cannot be operated by the player.
The setting switch 670 can also be used as the RWM clear switch 680 and the like.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned ON and the RWM clear switch 680 turned ON, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a "setting change state" for changing settings.
When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned ON and the RWM clear switch 680 turned OFF, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a "setting confirmation state" for confirming the settings.

Setting change processing by the main control board 50 will be described.
(1) When the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the setting display monitor 650 is turned off. (2) The setting key switch 660 is turned on by the operation of a setting person such as an amusement store staff. The setting display monitor 650 is still turned off.
(3) When the RWM clear switch 680 is turned ON by the operation of the setting person and the game machine is powered on in this state, the main CPU 50az shifts the game machine 1 to the "setting change state". The main CPU 50az causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state. (4) In this state, when the setting switch 670 (or the RWM clear switch 680) is pressed, the main CPU 50az sequentially changes the setting values, and displays the changed setting values (under setting) on the setting display monitor 650. display.
(5) When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operation of the setting person, the main CPU 50az confirms the setting value and turns off the setting display monitor 650 .
When the performance display monitor 600 also serves as the setting display monitor 650, the main CPU 50az displays the setting value in the "setting change state" for any segment (digit) of the performance display monitor 600. conduct.
When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operator to confirm the setting value, the main CPU 50az starts the above-described performance display on the performance display monitor 600 .

A setting confirmation process by the main control board 50 will be described.
(1) When the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the setting display monitor 650 is off.
(2) The setting key switch 660 is turned on by the operator's operation. The setting display monitor 650 is still off.
(3) In this state, when the gaming machine is powered on without turning on the RWM clear switch 680, the main CPU 50az shifts the gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation state. The main CPU 50az causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state.
When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operation of the setting person, the main CPU 50az terminates the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display monitor 650 .
When the performance display monitor 600 also serves as the setting display monitor 650, the main CPU 50az displays the setting values in the "setting confirmation state" using any segment (digit) of the performance display monitor 600. conduct.
When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operator to end the setting confirmation state, the main CPU 50az starts the above-described performance display on the performance display monitor 600 .

By the way, as shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 50 has connectors 771 to 776 on its component surface.
A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the lower end of the main control board 50 .
Although not shown in FIG. 256 below, the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are similar to those shown in FIG. It is arranged inside the portion 779 .
Both the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 provided on the component side of the main control board 50 are provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50 .
That is, the connectors 771 to 776, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at opposite positions on the main control board 50. FIG.
With such an arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 do not obstruct the visual recognition of the inspector who checks the performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 .
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at the upper end sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, the cables and harnesses hanging down from the connectors do not interfere with the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650. It does not interfere with the field of view of the examiner who tries to visually recognize the .

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 in FIG. 255 is the same as in FIG. 235(b).
236(a) and 236(b), the main control board 50 of FIG. 255 uses a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed board.
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701. FIG. The printed wiring board 701 is the same as in FIGS. 236(a) and 236(b), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

256 is a view showing the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board described in FIG. 255 is accommodated, (a) showing a perspective view of the assembly, (b) front view of the assembly Figure shows. 257 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 255. FIG.
In the description of FIGS. 256 and 257, members having the same configurations as those of the above-described embodiment (in particular, FIGS. 199 to 234, 237, and 238) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main substrate case shown in FIGS.
199 to 234 and 237 to 238, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.

The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided on the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z.
Both of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a material having optical transparency, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). In FIG. 256, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) positioned in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.

The seal portion 1560 will be described.
The seal portion 1560 is a seal for main board management.
In this example, a seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark for anti-counterfeiting. That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener display seal) is a processed seal obtained by watermarking the seal portion main body 1560A.
A "watermark" is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and can be applied to various types, such as using a hologram, or something that looks different depending on the physical shape. .
However, the sealing member main body 1560A is transparent even though it is subjected to a predetermined processing (watermark processing), and at least has high translucency to ensure a certain level of visibility.

The seal portion 1560 has a white entry area (entry column) 1570, a code portion 1572, and an information display portion 1573 in a black frame with a headline such as "main board control number" on the seal portion main body 1560A. I have.
The entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the character display associated with these areas, which will be described later, are non-transparent with low translucency because the transparent material of the seal part main body 1560A is not exposed. Department.
The seal portion 1560 has a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions, and it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 50 inside the main board case 200z through these non-light-transmitting portions.
The code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the writing area 1570 as the non-light-transmitting portion are provided on the seal portion main body 1560A so as not to overlap the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650. FIG.

On the other hand, areas other than entry area 1570, code part 1572, information display part 1573, and character display accompanying these areas in seal part main body 1560A are translucent because the transparent material of seal part main body 1560A is exposed. is the translucent portion 1574 with a high .
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is the above-described viewing portion that allows the electronic component 595 on the main control board 50 in the main board case 200z to be seen and confirmed through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200z, the main control board 50 is visible through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 50 . Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not there is fraud. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the light-transmitting portion and non-light-transmitting portion, the seal portion 1560 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized from all angles. ing.
Regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and non-translucent portion, the entirety of the sealing portion 1560, including the entry area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle. position.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 can always be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Regardless of whether or not there is a translucent portion or non-translucent portion, the entirety of the sealing portion 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, can be viewed from any angle on the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor. It is provided so as not to overlap with 650 .
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.

In FIG. 256, it cannot be said that the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other, but the seal portion 1560 does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, and the performance display monitor 600 does not overlap. is sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776 and the seal portion 1561 does not overlap the performance display monitor 600, the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are positioned close to each other. There may be. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be at the position indicated by the dashed line above the seal portion 1560 in FIG. 256(b).
In this case, the inspector can simultaneously check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 at a glance.

The contents displayed on the seal portion 1560 will be described in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main board case 200z and the date of opening.
A writing area 1570 is a white background formed on a transparent material and on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
As an example, the entry areas 1570 are provided in three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction for a total of six entry areas 1570, in which three sets of "opener" and "date of opening" can be entered.
The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) background.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the number of the entry area are printed on the left side of each entry area.
That is, above the entry area 1570 on the upper left, "opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "date of opening" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570 . A circle 2 is printed to the left of the entry area 1570 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570 .
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200z, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date of opening the main board case 200z in the entry area 1570 on the right side. . It should be noted that the inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date and the like when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with.

Cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of seal portion 1560 . Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. The code part 1572 is a part where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a bar code, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. there is In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “other device”).
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code portion 1572, is read by a camera provided in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information portable terminal uses the URL to access the other device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information portable terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the game machine 1 was delivered), and whether or not the game machine 1 has been disposed of. etc. is included. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not there has been fraudulent installation of the main control board 50 of a different delivery destination. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The information display portion 1573 contains various information. The information display portion 1573 may include information similar to the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, in the information display section 1573, a character string “EF001” is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50 . With this management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model number, and the like. Also, the rectangular region of the information display portion 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code portion 1572 are connected in the horizontal direction.

A translucent portion (peeping portion) 1574 included in the sealing portion 1560 will be described.
Translucent portion 1574 includes entry area 1570, code portion 1572, information display portion 1573, notation of “main board control number”, frame, opening person, notation of opening date, circle 1 to circle It is an area other than the notation of 3.
The translucent part 1574 is, for example, an area extending in the left-right direction that exists between the writing areas 1570 of three lines in the vertical direction.
The translucent portion 1574 is also an area extending in the left-right direction between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged side by side and the upper two entry areas 1570 .
The translucent part 1574 is also an area extending vertically between the writing areas 1570 in two rows in the horizontal direction.
The inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 255(a)) through the translucent portion 1574 . Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, compared to the case where the translucent portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of cheating can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is enhanced.

The seal portion 1561 will be described.
The seal portion 1561 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 is visible from all angles.
The seal portion 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 can always be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.
The seal portion 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.
Descriptions of the sealing portion 1561 are the same as those in FIG.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 . Since the sealing portion 1562 is the same as in FIGS. 233 and 237, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The main control board 50 shown in FIGS. 256 and 257 is equipped with a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680 .
The RWM clear switch 680 will be explained.
As shown in FIGS. 256 and 257, the RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50 is not directly exposed. The upper case piece 220 of the board case 200z is provided with a recess 688 inside, and an opening 687 is provided in the recess 688 .
As can be seen from FIGS. 256(b) and 257, the operation member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 680, and when the staff or the like presses the operation member 685, the pressed operation member 685 RWM clear switch 680 is pressed. This causes the RWM clear switch 680 to be operated.
A cover member 686 is provided within the recess 688 . The cover member 686 is rotatably supported in the recess 688 between a first position where the operation member 685 is closed to disable operation and a second position where the operation member 685 is opened and allowed to be operated. It is
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 680 can be operated.
By doing so, it is only necessary to provide an opening 687 large enough to insert the operation member 685 in the substrate case 200z. Further, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access into the board case 200z can be prevented.
RWM clear switch 680 may have an end exposed through opening 687 so that it can be operated directly without being operated using operating member 685 .

The setting key switch 660 is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end face of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 50 .
An end face of the setting key switch 660 having a keyhole is exposed from an opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the substrate case 200z.
A staff or the like can insert a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 660 to operate.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 provided with the keyhole is slightly lower than the surface of the substrate case 200z.

FIG. 258 is a diagram for explaining still another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and in particular, a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board 50 is the same as in FIG. 255, but in the example shown in FIG. A setting display monitor 650 is not provided.
The function of the setting display monitor 650 is shared by the performance display monitor 600, and an independent setting display monitor 650 is not provided.
Alternatively, the main control board 50 shown in FIG. 258 is the main control board of a gaming machine that does not have the setting change function.
Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 50 has connectors 771 to 776 on its component surface.
A plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the lower end of the main control board 50 .

Although not shown in FIG. 256 below, the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are similar to those shown in FIG. It is arranged inside the portion 779 .
A performance display monitor 600 , which is provided on the component side of the main control board 50 and can also serve as the setting display monitor 650 , is provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50 .
That is, the connectors 771 to 776 and the performance display monitor 600 are provided on the main control board 50 at opposite positions.
With such an arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 do not obstruct the visual recognition of the inspector who checks the performance display monitor 600 .
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 is provided at the upper end portion sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, the cables and harnesses hanging from the connectors are not visible to the inspector who tries to view the performance display monitor 600. No interference.

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 in FIG. 258 is the same as in FIG. 235(b).
236(a) and 236(b), the main control board 50 of FIG. 258 uses a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed board.
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701. FIG. The printed wiring board 701 is the same as in FIGS. 236(a) and 236(b), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

259 is a view showing the main board case of the present embodiment when the main control board explained in FIG. 258 is housed, (a) showing a perspective view of the assembly, (b) a front view of the assembly Figure shows. 260 is an exploded perspective view including the base of the main board case shown in FIG. 259. FIG.
In the description of FIGS. 258 and 259, members having the same configurations as those of the above embodiments (especially, FIGS. 199 to 234, 237, and 238) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main substrate case shown in FIGS.
199 to 234 and 237 to 238, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided on the lower left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the position display portion 561 provided on the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main substrate case 200z.

Both of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmissive material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent. Each of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is arranged across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). In FIG. 256, illustration of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) positioned in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 is omitted.
In this example, a watermark for anti-counterfeiting is provided on the seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 .
The configuration of the seal portion 1560, which is a processed seal, is the same as in FIGS. 237 and 256, so detailed description thereof is omitted.

Except for the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the entry area 1570 (white background), the transparent material of the seal portion main body 1560A is exposed, and the electronic components on the main control board 50 can be confirmed through the transparent material. can be done.
In the main board case 200z, the main control board 50 is visible through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 50 . Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not there is fraud. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of the light-transmitting portion and non-light-transmitting portion, the seal portion 1560 is attached at a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized from all angles. ing.
Regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and non-translucent portion, the entirety of the sealing portion 1560, including the entry area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle. position.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 can always be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502 . Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud has been committed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
The seal portion 1560 is located at a position where the entire seal portion 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, does not overlap the performance display monitor 600 from any angle, regardless of whether or not there is a translucent portion or non-translucent portion. It is provided so that
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 can be viewed through the main board case 200z.

In FIG. 259, it cannot be said that the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other, but the seal portion 1560 does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600. is sufficiently spaced from the connectors 771 to 776, and the seal portion 1561 does not overlap with the performance display monitor 600, even if the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are positioned near each other. good. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be in the position indicated by the dashed line above the seal portion 1560 in FIG.
At this time, the inspector can simultaneously check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 at a glance.

Descriptions of the seal portion 1561 are the same as those in FIG. 237, and thus description thereof is omitted.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 .
The seal portion 1562 is the same as in FIGS. 233 and 237, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

As described above, the main control board 50 is mounted with the integrated main ROM 502 that controls the game, the performance display monitor 600 that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and other board components 595 different from these. there is A transparent sealing member 1560 is attached to the main control board 50 .
As a result, other board components 595 can be visually recognized through the transparent seal portion 1560 and the main board case 200z. Also, the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600 can be directly viewed through the main board case 200z.
Duplication of the seal portion 1560 can be prevented by watermarking the transparent portion of the predetermined seal portion 1560, which has a transparent portion and a plurality of non-transparent portions and which needs to be affixed to the main substrate case 200z.
In addition, by pasting the seal portion 1560 at a position that does not cover the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component, is not affected by watermarking or multiple non-transparent portions. It is possible to reliably ensure the visibility of the performance display monitor 600 that must be read accurately.
As for the board component 595, which is less important than the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, the state can be confirmed through watermark processing through the gaps between the plurality of non-transparent portions and the surrounding transparent portion (peek portion 1574). can. Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent portions, the visibility of the substrate component can be ensured by the transparent portions.
Further, the non-transparent portion can display predetermined information, for example, necessary information such as identifying the integrated main ROM 502 . Different information can be displayed or written in the plurality of non-transparent portions.

In addition, when the main control board 50 is separately provided with the setting display monitor 650, watermark processing and multiple The visibility of the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component, the performance display monitor 600 that must be read accurately, and the setting display monitor 650 can be ensured without being affected by a certain non-transparent portion.
The substrate component 595, which is less important than the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650, can be viewed through watermark processing through gaps between multiple non-transparent portions and surrounding transparent portions (peek portion 1574). can be confirmed. Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent portions, the visibility of the substrate component can be ensured by the transparent portions.

The performance display monitor 600 may be arranged on the lower end side of the main control board 50 instead of the upper end side. In that case, the connectors 771 to 776 are desirably arranged on the upper end side opposite to the performance display monitor 600 (opposite).
The performance display monitor 600 may be arranged on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 50 . In that case, the connectors 771 to 776 are desirably arranged at the opposite (opposite) ends to the performance display monitor 600 .
Also, as described above, the performance display monitor 600 may be arranged inside the main control board 50 instead of at the end. Even in that case, they must be arranged at positions that do not overlap the cables, harnesses, and sealing portion 1560 extending from the connectors 771 to 776 .
In the present embodiment, the RWM clear switch 680 is described as being arranged on the main control board 50, but is not limited to that and may be provided on the payout control board 60z.
Also, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 660 is described as being arranged on the main control board 50, but it is not limited to this.
The setting key switch 660 can be arranged at another position separated from the main control board 50 as long as it is electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
The RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 may be used together.

FIG. 261 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when the RWM is cleared.
In the following description, the configurations of the performance display section and the setting display section conform to the configurations shown in FIGS. 255(b) and 255(c).
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When performing RWM clear, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned off and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
When the RWM clearing process is finished, in (3), a message such as "RWM clearing finished" is displayed on the image display device 31z to notify that the RWM clearing is finished.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, at (4), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values as described in FIG. 255(b). In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 262 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display section when the settings are changed in the case where the gaming machine has the performance display section that also serves as the setting display section.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

At (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current set values. When only one level of setting is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed, for example, in the leftmost segment among the four-digit segments of the performance display monitor 600, but may be displayed in another segment. The setting value is displayed with a dot, regardless of which digit it appears in.
On the image display device 31z, a display such as "setting is being changed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being changed. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31z. The voice output device 34 also outputs a voice such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may emit light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) to notify that the setting is being changed.

When the setting person operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that doubles as the setting switch 670, in (4), the performance display monitor 600 displays the set value for each change operation. The change operation can be performed any number of times until the setting change is completed, and the setting value is changed by one step each time the operation is performed.
As described above, according to the operation of the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the number increases by one step from "1" to "2" and so on. return. No dots are displayed with the set value during the change operation.
During this time, the image display device 31z continues to display a message such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31z. The audio output device 34 also continues to output the audio notifying that the setting is being changed. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z also continue to emit light.
A setting change history may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to an operation using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, or the like during the setting change.

When the setting person turns off the setting key switch 660, in (5), the setting value currently displayed on the performance display monitor 600 is determined. The performance display monitor 600 displays any set value with a dot.
At this time, the display and sound to notify that the setting is being changed may be continued or terminated. In place of the display and sound indicating that the setting is being changed, the display and sound output such as "The setting change is finished" that indicates that the setting change is completed are output by the image display device 31z and the sound output device 34. you can go

After that, in (6), the image display device 31z displays a message such as "RWM clearing completed" to notify that the RWM clearing has been completed.
Along with such a display, the audio output device 34 may output a voice such as "RWM clearing has been completed" to notify that the RWM clearing has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values in (7). In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 263 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section when the settings are changed in the case where the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section.
It is a major premise that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is powered on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain off.

At (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting values. When only one level of setting is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed. The set value is displayed with a dot.
On the image display device 31z, a display such as "setting is being changed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being changed. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may emit light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) to notify that the setting is being changed.
The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

When the setting person operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, in (4), the setting display monitor 650 displays the set value for each change operation. The change operation can be performed any number of times until the setting change is completed, and the setting value is changed by one step each time the operation is performed.
As described above, according to the operation of the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the number increases by one step from "1" to "2" and so on. return. No dots are displayed with the set value during the change operation.
During this time, the image display device 31z continues to display a message such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
A setting change history may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to an operation using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, or the like during the setting change.

When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the setting person, the setting change ends, and in (5), the setting value currently displayed on the setting display monitor 650 is confirmed. After that, the setting display monitor 650 is turned off.
At this time, the display and sound to notify that the setting is being changed may be continued or terminated. In place of the display and sound indicating that the setting is being changed, the display and sound output such as "The setting change is finished" that indicates that the setting change is completed are output by the image display device 31z and the sound output device 34. you can go
After that, in (6), the image display device 31z displays a message such as "RWM clearing completed" to notify that the RWM clearing has been completed.
Along with such a display, the audio output device 34 may output a voice such as "RWM clearing has been completed" to notify that the RWM clearing has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values in (7). In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine is provided with the performance display unit that also serves as the setting display unit.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned off.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

At (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current set values. When only one level of setting is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed, for example, in the leftmost segment among the four-digit segments of the performance display monitor 600, but may be displayed in another segment. The setting value is displayed with a dot, regardless of which digit it appears in.
On the image display device 31z, a message such as "Confirming settings" is displayed to notify that the settings are being confirmed. Also, a voice such as "Confirming settings" is output to notify that the settings are being confirmed. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31z. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may emit light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) to notify that the setting is being checked.
During confirmation of the settings, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to operations using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, and the like.

When the configurator turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the setting confirmation notification using the voice and display ends.
At this time, the display and sound announcing that the setting confirmation is in progress may be continued or terminated. In place of the display and sound indicating that the settings are being checked, the image display device 31z and the sound output device 34 display and output a message such as "setting confirmation is completed" to notify that the setting confirmation has been completed. you can go
After that, in (4), the image display device 31z displays a message such as "Power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, the audio output device 34 may output a voice such as "Power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, in (5) the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values. In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine is separately provided with the performance display section and the setting display section.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned off.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z to indicate that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain off.

At (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting values. When only one level of setting is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed. The set value is displayed with a dot.
On the image display device 31z, a message such as "Confirming settings" is displayed to notify that the settings are being confirmed. In addition, the voice output device 34 outputs a voice such as "setting is being changed" to notify that the setting is being changed.
The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may emit light in a predetermined emission color (for example, white) to notify that the setting is being checked. The setting values are never displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
During confirmation of the settings, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to operations using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, and the like.

When the configurator turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the setting confirmation notification using the voice and display ends. The setting display monitor 650 is turned off.
At this time, the display and sound announcing that the setting confirmation is in progress may be continued or terminated. In place of the display and sound indicating that the settings are being checked, the image display device 31z and the sound output device 34 display and output a message such as "setting confirmation is completed" to notify that the setting confirmation has been completed. you can go
After that, in (4), the image display device 31z displays a message such as "Power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, the audio output device 34 may output a voice such as "Power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation of turning on all segments and then turning them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds ends, in (5) the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values. In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board A case and a processed seal subjected to watermarking, wherein the processed seal has a translucent portion with high translucency and a plurality of non-translucent portions with low translucency, and the processed seal is affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, and through the light transmitting portion between the plurality of non-light transmitting portions and the substrate case, the other , the main control section can be seen through the board case, and the information display section can be seen through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board A case and a processed seal subjected to watermarking, wherein the processed seal has a translucent portion with high translucency and a plurality of non-translucent portions with low translucency, and the processed seal is attached on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the information display portion, and the other substrate component can be visually recognized through the substrate case and the translucent portion between the plurality of non-translucent portions. , The game machine is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, and a processed seal with a watermark, wherein the processed seal has a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmitting properties and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions with low light-transmitting properties, and the processed seal includes the main control portion and the information display portion on the substrate case. , and the main control section can be visually recognized through the substrate case, and the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, and a processed seal with a watermark, wherein the processed seal has a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmitting properties and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions with low light-transmitting properties, and the processing seal is attached on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the information display portion. and the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling a game, an information display section for displaying game information, and other board components different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, and a board for housing the board. A case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal having a translucent portion with high translucency and a non-translucent portion with low translucency, the processed seal comprising: affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, the other substrate component being visible through the light transmitting unit and the substrate case; The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control unit can be visually recognized through the case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board A case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal having a translucent portion with high translucency and a non-translucent portion with low translucency, the processed seal comprising: Affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the information display portion, the other substrate component can be visually recognized through the light-transmitting portion and the substrate case, and the information display portion can be seen through the substrate case. It is characterized by a game machine that can visually recognize the.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, and a processed seal with a watermark, wherein the processed seal has a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmitting property and a non-light-transmitting portion with low light-transmitting property, and the processed seal includes the main control portion, the information display portion, and the like on the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the main control unit is visible through the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, and a processed seal with a watermark, wherein the processed seal has a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmitting property and a non-light-transmitting portion with low light-transmitting property, and the processing seal is attached on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the information display portion, The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board a case, a seal having a highly translucent part, and a plurality of entry fields in which an administrator can fill in, wherein the seal is mounted on the board case, the main control part, the and an information display part, which is attached at a position not overlapping with the information display part, the other board component is visible through the light-transmitting part between the plurality of entry fields and the board case, and the main control part is through the board case. The gaming machine is characterized in that a part can be visually recognized and the information display part can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board A seal having a case, a translucent portion with high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields in which an administrator can fill in is provided, and the seal does not overlap the information display portion on the board case. a position, the other board component can be visually recognized through the translucent part and the board case between the plurality of entry fields, and the information display part can be visually recognized through the board case. machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling games and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, a transparent section with high transparency, and an administrator can write. and a seal having a plurality of entry fields, wherein the seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and is inserted through the substrate case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control unit can be visually recognized through the board case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling games and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, a transparent section with high transparency, and an administrator can write. and a seal having a plurality of entry fields, wherein the seal is attached to a position on the board case that does not overlap the information display section, and the information display section is visible through the board case. is characterized by a game machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling a game, an information display section for displaying game information, and other board components different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, and a board for housing the board. A seal having a case, a translucent part with high translucency, and an entry column in which an administrator can fill in is provided, and the seal is arranged on the substrate case to include the main control unit and the information display. , the other board component is visible through the translucent part and the board case, the main control unit is visible through the board case, and the The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board A seal having a case, a translucent portion with high translucency, and an entry column in which an administrator can fill in is provided, and the seal is positioned on the substrate case so as not to overlap the information display portion. The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board component is visible through the translucent section and the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling games and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, a transparent section with high transparency, and an administrator can write. The seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and is attached to the substrate case through the substrate case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control section can be visually recognized and the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling games and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, a transparent section with high transparency, and an administrator can write. and a seal having an entry field, wherein the seal is attached to a position on the board case that does not overlap the information display section, and the information display section is visible through the board case. , a gaming machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board A seal having a case, a highly translucent light-transmitting portion, and an information writing portion in which predetermined information is written, wherein the seal is mounted on the substrate case, the main control portion, It is attached at a position that does not overlap with the information display section, the other board component is visible through the light transmitting section and the board case, and the main control section is visible through the board case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board a seal having a case, a light transmitting portion having high light transmittance, and an information writing portion in which predetermined information is written, wherein the seal overlaps the information display portion on the substrate case; The gaming machine is characterized in that it is attached at a position where it does not, and the other board component can be visually recognized through the light-transmitting part and the board case, and the information display part can be visually recognized through the board case. .

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, a light-transmitting part with high light-transmitting properties, and predetermined information are recorded. and a sticker having an information writing part, the sticker being attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control part and the information display part, and the substrate case The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control unit can be visually recognized through the board case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, a light-transmitting part with high light-transmitting properties, and predetermined information are recorded. and a sticker having an information writing portion, wherein the sticker is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion, and the information display portion is visible through the substrate case. It is possible, featuring gaming machines.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board A case and a processed seal subjected to watermarking, wherein the processed seal has a translucent portion with high translucency and a plurality of non-translucent portions with low translucency, and the processed seal is affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, and through the light transmitting portion between the plurality of non-light transmitting portions and the substrate case, the other , the main control section can be seen through the board case, and the information display section can be seen through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board A case and a processed seal subjected to watermarking, wherein the processed seal has a translucent portion with high translucency and a plurality of non-translucent portions with low translucency, and the processed seal is attached on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the information display portion, and the other substrate component can be visually recognized through the substrate case and the translucent portion between the plurality of non-translucent portions. , the game machine is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, and a processed seal with a watermark, wherein the processed seal has a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmitting properties and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions with low light-transmitting properties, and the processed seal includes the main control portion and the information display portion on the substrate case. , and the main control section can be visually recognized through the substrate case, and the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, and a processed seal with a watermark, wherein the processed seal has a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmitting properties and a plurality of non-light-transmitting portions with low light-transmitting properties, and the processing seal is attached on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the information display portion. and the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board A case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal having a translucent portion with high translucency and a non-translucent portion with low translucency, the processed seal comprising: affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, the other substrate component being visible through the light transmitting unit and the substrate case; The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control unit can be visually recognized through the case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board A case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal having a translucent portion with high translucency and a non-translucent portion with low translucency, the processed seal comprising: Affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the information display portion, the other substrate component can be visually recognized through the light-transmitting portion and the substrate case, and the information display portion can be seen through the substrate case. It is characterized by a game machine that can visually recognize the.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, and a processed seal with a watermark, wherein the processed seal has a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmitting property and a non-light-transmitting portion with low light-transmitting property, and the processed seal includes the main control portion, the information display portion, and the like on the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the main control unit is visible through the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, and a processed seal with a watermark, wherein the processed seal has a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmitting property and a non-light-transmitting portion with low light-transmitting property, and the processing seal is attached on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the information display portion, The game machine is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling a game, an information display section for displaying game information, and other board components different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, and a board for housing the board. a case, a seal having a light-transmitting portion with high light-transmitting properties, and a plurality of entry fields in which an administrator can fill in, the seal being mounted on the substrate case, the main control unit, the and an information display part, which is attached at a position not overlapping with the information display part, the other board component is visible through the light transmitting part between the plurality of entry fields and the board case, and the main control part is through the board case. The gaming machine is characterized in that a part can be visually recognized and the information display part can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling a game, an information display section for displaying game information, and other board components different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, and a board for housing the board. A seal having a case, a translucent portion with high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields in which an administrator can fill in is provided, and the seal does not overlap the information display portion on the board case. a position, the other board component can be visually recognized through the translucent part and the board case between the plurality of entry fields, and the information display part can be visually recognized through the board case. machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling games and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, a transparent section with high transparency, and an administrator can write. and a seal having a plurality of entry fields, wherein the seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and is inserted through the substrate case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control unit can be visually recognized through the board case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling games and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, a transparent section with high transparency, and an administrator can write. and a seal having a plurality of entry fields, wherein the seal is attached to a position on the board case that does not overlap the information display section, and the information display section is visible through the board case. is characterized by a game machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board A seal having a case, a translucent part with high translucency, and an entry column in which an administrator can fill in is provided, and the seal is arranged on the substrate case to include the main control unit and the information display. , the other board component is visible through the translucent part and the board case, the main control unit is visible through the board case, and the The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling a game, an information display section for displaying game information, and other board components different from the main control section and the information display section are mounted, and a board for housing the board. A seal having a case, a translucent portion with high translucency, and an entry column in which an administrator can fill in is provided, and the seal is positioned on the substrate case so as not to overlap the information display portion. The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board component is visible through the translucent section and the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling games and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, a transparent section with high transparency, and an administrator can write. The seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control unit and the information display unit, and is attached to the substrate case through the substrate case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control section can be visually recognized and the information display section can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control section for controlling games and an information display section for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, a transparent section with high transparency, and an administrator can write. and a seal having an entry field, wherein the seal is attached to a position on the board case that does not overlap the information display section, and the information display section is visible through the board case. , a gaming machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board A seal having a case, a highly translucent light-transmitting portion, and an information writing portion in which predetermined information is written, wherein the seal is mounted on the substrate case, the main control portion, It is attached at a position that does not overlap with the information display section, the other board component is visible through the light transmitting section and the board case, and the main control section is visible through the board case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board a seal having a case, a light transmitting portion having high light transmittance, and an information writing portion in which predetermined information is written, wherein the seal overlaps the information display portion on the substrate case; The gaming machine is characterized in that it is attached at a position where it does not, and the other board component can be visually recognized through the light-transmitting part and the board case, and the information display part can be visually recognized through the board case. .

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, a light-transmitting part with high light-transmitting properties, and predetermined information are recorded. and a sticker having an information writing portion, the sticker being attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the main control portion and the information display portion, and the substrate case The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control unit can be visually recognized through the circuit board case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for housing the board, a light-transmitting part with high light-transmitting properties, and predetermined information are recorded. and a seal having a transparent information writing portion, wherein the seal is attached to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap the information display portion, and the information display portion is displayed through the substrate case. It features a game machine that is visible.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines, and can also be used for reel-type gaming machines (so-called slot machines). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jankyu game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

1 game machine 45 first start port 47 second start port 70 first image display device (display means)
70a Production design (design)
110 main control board (main control means)
110m main control unit (main control means)
130 production control board (production control means)
130m production control section (production control means)

Claims (1)

A game in which a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a special game advantageous to the player can be executed when the variable display of symbols executed by the first display means based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. on the machine,
It has a normal game state as a game state and a specific game state more advantageous than the normal game state,
Based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means, or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means, the first display means It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect pattern in a second display means different from
When the first starting condition is satisfied in the specific game state, a specific variable display can be executed,
In the specific variation display, the display of the first reserved memory based on the undetermined starting condition can be restricted, while the second reserved memory different from the first reserved memory is displayed based on the undetermined starting condition. is possible and
when the first starting condition is satisfied in the normal game state, the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are displayed without executing the specific variation display ;
The variable production that becomes a loss judgment based on the first starting condition in the normal game state is more likely to be a loss judgment based on the first starting condition in the specific game state than the production pattern. There are many patterns of pattern change effects that change the display size
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images